JP2019107372A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To create new entertainment properties in a game machine comprising light emitting means.SOLUTION: A partition member comprises a grid part and a protruding part. The grid part is formed in a grid pattern. The protruding part is formed so as to protrude from the grid part toward a traveling direction side of light emitted from light emitting means, and extends in a specific direction. First light emitting means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the protruding part, and second light emitting means arranged opposite to the predetermined direction side of the protruding part are provided as the light emitting means. A light emitting mode of the first light emitting means can be made different from a light emitting mode of the second light emitting means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 251

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine that is provided with a light emitting decorative portion and capable of performing effects by light emission of a light source is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-013686, A

  Generally, in the gaming machine provided with the light emitting means as described above, it is required to improve the interest of the game by performing various effects. The inventor of the present invention can create new entertainment characteristics by devising the members disposed in the passage route of the light emitted from the light emitting means in the process of earnestly examining such a gaming machine. It came to the idea that

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light (e.g., an LED 5211);
Light emission control means (for example, sub control circuit 3070) for causing the light emission means to emit light
A partition member (for example, a partition member 5220) for partitioning an area through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass.
The partition member has a lattice portion (for example, a lattice portion 5240) formed in a lattice shape, and protrudes from the lattice portion toward the traveling direction side of light emitted from the light emitting means and a specific direction (for example, an oblique direction) A projection (eg, a second projection 5280 and a third projection 5290) extending to
The plurality of light emitting means are a plurality of first light emitting means (for example, an LED 5211a) disposed on a predetermined direction side (for example, the left side) of the protrusion, and a side opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the protrusion) A plurality of second light emitting means (for example, LED 5211 b) disposed on the right side),
The light emission control means can make the light emission mode of the first light emission means different from the light emission mode of the second light emission means.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the invention of (1), the partition member includes the lattice portion and the projecting portion. The lattice portion is formed in a lattice shape. The projecting portion is formed to project from the lattice portion toward the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means, and extends in the specific direction. As the light emitting means, a first light emitting means disposed on the predetermined direction side of the protrusion and a second light emitting means disposed on the opposite side of the predetermined direction side of the protrusion are provided, and the first light emitting means It is possible to make the light emission mode of the second light emission means different from the light emission mode of the second light emission means. The inventor of the present invention can make the shape of the projecting portion sharper by configuring the partitioning member in this way and making the light emission modes of the light emitting means disposed in each of the regions partitioned by the projecting portion different from each other. It has been found that the appearance of the partition member can be dynamically expressed. Thus, according to the invention of (1), a novel effect can be realized by the light emission mode of the projection and the light emitting means associated with the projection.

  According to the present invention, a new entertainment feature can be created in a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a back perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector apparatus and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a top view which shows the upper pedestal and lower pedestal for fixing a projector apparatus. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 13. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper side base. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude | position adjustment method of a lower side base. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which assembled the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 21 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as viewed obliquely from the front. It is the figure which looked at the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in Drawing 19 from diagonally back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a case housing the internal components of the projector mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower side base. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the upper wall part of the projector cover. FIG. 7 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall removed. FIG. 26 is an exploded view of a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 taken along arrow L-L and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. It is the figure which looked at the projector cover in the state which removed the upper wall part from diagonally upward. FIG. 6 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall removed. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28 taken along arrow M-M. It is a perspective view of a blind. It is a top view of the irradiation unit in the state where the upper wall part of the projector cover was removed. It is a figure which shows the state which removed the fan for opening vicinity and the duct cover in the cross section which follows arrow NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which arrange | positioned the case, while attaching the fan and duct cover for opening vicinity to the blind shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the right punching from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which attached the fan for opening vicinity, and a duct cover to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. It is a right view which shows the state which removed the fan for opening vicinity in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a duct cover and the fan for opening vicinity. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked the projector cover and the fan for opening vicinity from back and the downward direction. FIG. 6 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for near opening viewed from the front and the lower side. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which attached the blind and the duct cover from the left. It is the perspective view which looked at a projector cover, a blind, and a duct cover from back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a projector cover, a blind, and a duct cover shown in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a blind and a duct cover. It is a figure for demonstrating the method to attach an upper door mechanism to a cabinet. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning position of the inlet fan and the exhaust fan. It is a figure which shows the air flow path which may be formed inside the projector cover. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the decoration unit and frame member of a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of a display unit. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the projector and the mirror from the display unit shown in FIG. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the irradiation range of the light and the cabinet side screen which were projected from the projector. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a front view of a game machine. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the irradiation range of the light and the cabinet side screen which were projected from the projector. (B) is a figure which shows a mode that the light which did not inject into the cabinet side screen injects into the door side right screen. (C) is a figure which shows a mode that the light which did not inject into the cabinet side screen injects into the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on a cabinet side screen, a door side right screen, and a door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on a cabinet side screen, a door side right screen, and a door side left screen. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of an upper door mechanism and a cabinet. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at a light transmission board, a screen sheet, a lower pressing member, an upper pressing member, and a lower flame | frame from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member from the front, seeing the light transmission board and the screen sheet from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper pressing member and the upper frame from the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at a light transmission board, a screen sheet, and the lower flame | frame from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper frame, the 1st structure, the 2nd structure, the 3rd structure, the 4th structure, and the screen sheet from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at a light transmission board, a screen sheet, a lower flame | frame, a LED board, and the light guide member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at a light transmission board, a screen sheet, a lower frame, and the light guide member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the cross section of a light transmission board, a screen sheet, a lower frame, a LED board, and a light guide member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hook part, and the front side projection member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hook part, and the front side protrusion member from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the cabinet, the hook part, and the front side protrusion member from the side. It is a right side view of a section of an upper door mechanism, a cabinet, a hook part, and a front side projection member. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of the state which removed the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a mode that light is projected from the projector apparatus from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from back. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of an irradiation unit, a closure lid, and a back wall of a cabinet. It is a rear view of a game machine in the state where the lid for closing was removed from the back wall. FIG. 91 is a partial enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 90. It is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and the back wall of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and the back wall of a cabinet. FIG. 16 is a partial enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine in a state where the closing lid is attached to the back wall. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of a pachislot machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a main control circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a sub control circuit. (A) is a figure showing transition transition of a game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (B) is the table which summarized the transition conditions of the game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table. (B) is a figure showing a symbol code chart. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (one sheet hanging game). (B) is a figure showing an internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (three-piece gaming). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for states (1 sheet game) between 7BB flags. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for states (3 sheet game) between 7BB flags. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the states (1 sheet game) between birds BB flag. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for state (3 sheet hanging game) between birds BB flag. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the states (one piece game) between MB flags. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the states (3 sheet game) between MB flags. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for 7BB gaming states. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for birds BB gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB gaming state. It is a figure which shows a rotation stop initialization table. It is a figure which shows a drawing-in priority order table. It is a figure which shows a drawing-in priority table selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table for stops. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the table for stops. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the table for stops. It is a figure which shows the stop table for left 1st stops. It is a figure which shows the stop table for left 1st stops. It is a figure which shows the stop table for left 1st stops. It is a figure which shows the structure of a stop data table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a stop data table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a stop data table. It is a figure which shows the table change data table for 1st cylinder 1st stop. It is a figure which shows the table change data table for 1st cylinder 1st stop. It is a figure which shows the table change data table for 1st cylinder 1st stop. It is a figure which shows a search order table. (A) is a figure which shows a symbol corresponding | compatible prize operation flag data table. (B) is a figure which shows a line mask data table. (A) is a figure which shows an internal winning combination storing area. (B) is a figure which shows a symbol code storage area. (A) is a figure showing a carryover combination storage area. (B) is a figure showing a game state flag storage area. (C) is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area. (D) is a figure which shows a pressing order storage area. It is a figure which shows a drawing-in priority data storage area. It is a flowchart which shows main control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of the power activation performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the medal reception / start check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initial setting process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 121; FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a drawing-in priority storing process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 121 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 129; 127 is a flowchart showing a drawing priority order table selection process performed in the drawing priority order storage process shown in FIG. 126; 127 is a flowchart showing symbol code storage processing executed in the retraction priority storage processing shown in FIG. 126; It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a sliding symbol number determination process executed in the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 129; FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing second and third stop processing executed in the sliding symbol number determination processing shown in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the line change check process performed in the 2nd * 3rd stop process shown in FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing line mask data change processing performed in the second and third stop processing shown in FIG. 131; FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing priority attraction-in control processing executed in the sliding symbol number determination processing shown in FIG. 130; FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a control change process executed in the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 129. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check processing performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the input port check process performed in an interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the power activation process at the time of power activation. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in the power on process shown in FIG. 140. FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a sound control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 140. FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 140. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the main board | substrate communication task shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process performed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing lock time lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. (B) is a figure which shows the correspondence of the game stop number for effects, and lock time. It is a figure which shows a lock time lottery table. It is a figure which shows a lock time lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the game lock processing for effects performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop number overwrite processing for effects performed in a main control circuit. (A) is a flowchart which shows processing at the time of game lock command reception for effects performed in a sub control circuit. (B) is a figure which shows the correspondence of the game stop number for a production | presentation, and the content of a production | presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of a backlight production. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of a backlight production. It is a figure showing transition transition of a sub game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a table summarizing transition conditions of a sub gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure which shows the correspondence of the classification of BB, and the sound in BB. (B) is a figure which shows the priority set with respect to the sound in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the special conditions for changing the sound in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the special conditions for changing the sound in BB. (A) is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start command reception performed in a sub control circuit. (B) is a flowchart showing processing at the time of MB start command reception performed in the sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows BB continuous acquisition number of sheets display processing performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the display process in BB performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the display process in MB performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the display process in a challenge zone performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop number overwrite processing for effects performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB winning command reception performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of special condition satisfaction command reception performed in a sub control circuit. (A) is a figure showing transition transition of a game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (B) is the table which summarized the transition conditions of the game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table. (B) is a figure showing a symbol code chart. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (one sheet hanging game). (B) is a figure showing an internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (three-piece gaming). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the states (1 sheet game) between BB flags. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for state (3 sheet hanging game) between BB flags. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the states (one piece game) between MB flags. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the states (3 sheet game) between MB flags. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB gaming state. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB gaming state. (A) is a figure which shows transition transition of the sub gaming state which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a table showing transition conditions of the sub gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure which shows the sound in BB. (B) is a figure which shows the priority set with respect to the sound in BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB winning command reception performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge zone game number counter update process performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the BB prize time lock process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the temper sound lottery process performed in a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the stop display mode of the symbol in, when a bell wins in a general gaming state. It is a figure which shows the stop display aspect of the symbol in, when a special bell wins in MB gaming state. It is a figure showing transition transition of a game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a table summarizing transition conditions of the gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table. (B) is a figure showing a symbol code chart. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming states. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming states. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming states. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming states. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT5 gaming state (state between different color BB flags). It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT5 gaming state (state between MB flags). It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT6 gaming state (state between same color BB flag). It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for same color BB gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for same color BB gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for different color BB gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for different color BB gaming state. It is a figure showing an internal lottery table for MB gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus winning time process carried out in the main control circuit. (A) is a figure which shows a reel action lottery table. (B) is a figure which shows a lock cancellation random-selection table at the BB prize-winning time. It is a flowchart which shows the sound reproduction start process in BB performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows 1 stop lock processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the BB prize time lock process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the lock production determination processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a figure showing a lock production lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start process performed in a main control circuit. It is a perspective view of a decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the ship member and the upper lens from the decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a decoration unit. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the partition member from the light emission mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at the partition member from the front. FIG. 202 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the partition member shown in FIG. 207. FIG. 6 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of one light passage space. It is a rear view of a partition member. It is a sectional view of a partition member. It is a sectional view of a partition member. It is the perspective view which looked at the partition member from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the partition member from upper direction. It is a disassembled perspective view of a light emission mechanism and a background sheet. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper cover from the upper direction. It is sectional drawing which shows a partition member, a top cover, a logo cover, a logo sheet, and a background sheet. It is a front view which disassembles and shows a partition member, an upper cover, and a wavelike member. It is a front view which extracts and shows a partitioning member, a top cover, and a wavelike member in the state where a decoration unit was assembled. It is the elements on larger scale perspective view which looked at the opening for left-hand side speakers in the top cover from the front. It is the elements on larger scale perspective view which looked at the opening for left-hand side speakers in the upper cover from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left part of the left rope, the member for left ship, and the middle rope from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left part of the left rope, the member for left ship, and the middle rope from the back. It is the elements on larger scale perspective view which looked at the opening for right side speakers in a top cover from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right part of the middle rope, the member for right ships, and the right rope from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the right part of a middle rope, the member for right ships, and the right rope from back. (A) is a figure showing transition transition of a game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (B) is the table which summarized the transition conditions of the game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table. (B) is a figure showing a symbol code chart. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming states. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state (state between red BB flag). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state (state between blue BB flag). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state (state between red MB flags). (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state (state between blue MB flags). (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB gaming state. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB gaming state. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of an internal winning combination and a main transmission number. It is a figure which shows the stop display mode of the symbol in, when the special combination 1 wins. It is a figure which shows the stop display mode of the symbol in, when a mikan wins. It is a figure which shows the stop display mode of the symbol in, when special combination 2 wins. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of a duplicate winning combination and a LED output pattern. It is a disassembled perspective view of a decoration unit. It is a front view of a light emission mechanism. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the partition member from the light emission mechanism. It is a front view of a partition member. It is a rear view of a partition member. It is sectional drawing of a grating | lattice part. It is a partially expanded perspective view of a light emission mechanism. It is a partially expanded perspective view of a partition member. FIG. 250 is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting mechanism shown in FIG. 243 taken along arrow AA. It is a schematic diagram of a partition member. It is a figure showing transition transition of a game state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a table summarizing transition conditions of the gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table. (B) is a figure showing a symbol code chart. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state). It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state). It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for state between flags during RT0. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for state between flags during RT1. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB1 gaming state in RT0 and MB2 gaming state in RT0. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB1 gaming state in RT1, and MB2 gaming state in RT1. It is a flowchart which shows the lock process at the time of MB prize-winning performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start process performed in a main control circuit.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine 1 can be played using a gaming medium such as a coin, a medal, a gaming ball, a token, etc., or a game medium such as a card that stores information of the game value, which is or is given to the player. In the following, it is described as using medals.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 to the player is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the opposite side to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction) The right side and the left side as viewed from the player are respectively referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1. Moreover, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. A direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped case 2. The housing 2 is a game machine main body, a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the front upper side of the cabinet G, and a lower side arranged on the front lower side of the cabinet G And a door mechanism DD.

  Further, in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided to be able to close the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at its central portion. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

  In the lower door mechanism DD, a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided substantially at the center of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each. The reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (one horizontal row) so that they can be rotated at a constant speed in the longitudinal direction. As for the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of the respective reels RL, RC, and RR and the symbols drawn on the respective reels RL, RC, and RR become visible through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 formed of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface portion of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like can not touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestal portions DD2a, DD2b, DD2c of substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. In the first pedestal DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4, a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting a medal is provided. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening where a player inserts a medal. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 is credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAX BET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum bet button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals inserted.

  A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided in the third pedestal DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is disposed on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects a touch of a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal, or It may be of a system which detects contact of a hard material such as a pen point and outputs a detection signal, or of another system or structure (in-cell structure etc.).

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and for example, along with the progress of the game, game information such as the number of times played is displayed on the display screen, and selected by the player Alternatively, a message for requesting an input, an input key or the like is displayed.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, it is also possible to display content (rendering information) according to the game-related presentation on the display screen as the game progresses. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, a jog dial or a push button may be attached as an attachment having a function as a rendering combination or as a dedicated attachment. The liquid crystal display device DD20 can also be omitted by assigning its function to a display unit A or the like described later.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided which causes the reels RL, RC, and RR to be rotationally driven by the operation of the player, and to start variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached at a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the pressing operation (stop operation) of the player. , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is used to switch the credits / payouts of the medals obtained by the player in the game by pushing a button. In the state (non-credit state) in which payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13, medals are output from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancel shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid out medals are collected in the medal receiver DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (a waist light guide plate) is disposed below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a cosmetic panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name representing the model of the gaming machine 1, various patterns, and the like are drawn by printing.

  In addition, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sounds such as voice and music. In addition, the first sub-display device DD19L and the second sub-display device DD19R are respectively disposed on the left side and the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub display devices DD19L and DD19R, for example, display the number of medals paid out when winning is established and the number of remaining medals that are credited. Usually, since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed. In the state where the maximum number of 50 medals is credited, the inserted medal is paid out as it is from the medal payout port DD14. Further, the sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate which divides the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and the reel unit RU, the main control board MS which controls the overall operation of the gaming machine 1, and the sub control device SS (see FIG. 11) Etc. are accommodated. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling the main flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC and RR, and determination of presence or absence of winnings. Do. The sub control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub control circuit) that controls the execution of effects by displaying a video or the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is exchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping apparatus having an irradiation unit B for emitting irradiation light for image display and a screen device C for causing an image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance and angle By projecting an image according to the rendering information generated based on the shape and the like, etc., a highly sophisticated and powerful rendering is made possible.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed at the front. The housing A1 is configured of a projector cover B1 that forms an upper portion of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. The screen housing C10 has a box-like shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the top surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B is a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is disposed in front of the projector device B2 and that irradiation light from the projector device B2 is diagonally disposed in the lower rear A mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction C, and a projector cover B1 that accommodates the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being covered by a case B22, and disposed at the rear in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat upper and lower pedestals B220 and B221 horizontally arranged. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is opened. Thus, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 12) accommodated in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is disposed so as to emit irradiation light emitted from a plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) toward the front mirror mechanism B3 via a lens or the like. There is. The details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector device B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As also shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B <b> 31 has a front surface formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrical between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size not overlapping the angle adjustment hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed to partially overlap with the mirror holding portion B313. Thus, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both sides in the left-right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center on the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed on the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 are of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is held. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of a screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Further, since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring abuts against the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface abuts against the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, whereby the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is held by And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector attaching part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head abuts on the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector apparatus B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are accommodated in a projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has, at its front portion, an inclined surface B2a1 that inclines upward from the rear to the front. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 is disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall B12 horizontally disposed, the reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall B12, and the upper wall B12. Side walls B13 and B13. The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting more forward than the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the center of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held so as to be adjustable in angle in a space portion formed by the projection. There is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, a screw is screwed into the upper surface of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through a screw hole formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 5). As a result, the display unit A can handle the irradiation unit B and the screen device C as a unit and handle them integrally.

  Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is provided so as to be able to switch the irradiation object. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as the plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each configured by applying a screen paint to a base material, and have a projection surface capable of causing an image to appear.

  The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have shapes different from one another in order to diversify the image expression. Specifically, while the projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 are flat, the projection plane of the reel screen mechanism F1 has an arc shape in a side view. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, respectively, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 respectively. It is driven by (not shown).

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The sub-control device SS described above is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay substrate CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the rendering operation of the screen or the character, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the character via the optical mechanism B24 as visual rendition. Display the picture. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay substrate CK of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used to perform position adjustment and focus initial setting of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2. In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone on which the adjustment program (application software) is installed It may be a dedicated terminal device.

  The projector control board B 23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 is an LED light source that emits each color light of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) as components disposed around the lens unit B21, the DMD, and the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 A focusing mechanism or the like for adjusting the focus is provided (not shown).

  The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub controller SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focusing mechanism to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command from the sub-control device SS, thereby adjusting the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to setting and adjustment of the projector device B2.

  The DLP system of the projector device B2 mainly includes the DLP control circuit 232, the LED driver 233, and the LED light source and the DMD of the optical mechanism B24.

  Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, light reflected in a predetermined direction by the DMD proceeds to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. Leads to the projection target. Thereby, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the object to be projected, and an image according to the effect is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. In addition, the projector device B2 obtains the projection distance to the projection target by turning back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible, for example, by setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. Thus, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and can be easily mounted on a limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 12, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as components to be an exterior. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. Undercover B 223 is disposed on the lower surface of case B 22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to the lower surface appropriate portion of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end thereof so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22. Lower pedestal B221 is connected. The attachment adjustment procedure of such a projector apparatus B2 will be described later.

  In addition, the projector device B2 includes, as internal components, a lens unit B21, an LED substrate (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD substrate (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A and 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is accommodated while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered by the lens unit cover B222, and the LED substrate, the DMD substrate, the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, and the intake fan 244A, 244B, and the exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

  In such a projector device B2, image data relating to an image such as effects is transmitted from the sub control device SS, and is controlled by the sub control device SS so as to project the image on a screen or a feature. On the other hand, the sub-control device SS moves the screen mechanisms E1, F1 according to the contents of the effect by controlling the screen drive mechanisms E2, F2.

  Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanism E1, F1 due to the effect, and the image is displayed on the projection surface of the screen mechanism E1, F1 moved or the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D Adjust the focus to project clearly.

  The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B are in partial contact with the back surface of the LED substrate. The heat sink 243D is in partial contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate. In the present embodiment, as the external dimensions of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, the heat sinks 243R and the heat sinks 243G are relatively large while the heat sinks 243B and the heat sinks 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D dissipate the heat generated in the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air so that the temperature of the optical element or the substrate is not increased until the optical characteristics are largely changed. Heat well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, which are heat dissipating members, use a highly thermally conductive aluminum material to enhance the heat dissipating effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipating fins to increase the contact area with air.

  The intake fan 244A is disposed close to the rear surface of the right front of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is disposed close to the rear surface of the left side portion of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is disposed close to the back of the rear of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243G.

  An intake port B22A is provided on the right front of the case B22 where the intake fan 244A approaches, and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the right rear of the case B22 where the heat sink 243R approaches the intake port B22A. It is done. An intake port B22B is provided in part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B approaches, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 so as to align with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 Intake ports B22C are provided so that the air reaches three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space of the above. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 approaches.

  That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after the air is forcibly taken in from the air intake B22A by the air intake fan 244A, a flow of air exhausted from the heat sink 243R and exhausted from the air outlet B22E is formed. . Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly taken in by the suction fan 244B from the suction port B22B, heat is taken away from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G and forced by the exhaust fan 245 from the exhaust port B22D. A stream of air is formed which is exhausted. Furthermore, in the case B22, a flow of air forcedly exhausted by the exhaust fan 245 from the exhaust port B22D is formed after taking heat from the heat sink 243G or the heat sink 243B after being sucked in from the intake port B22C. .

  The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered by the undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and the DMD board disposed in the case B22, and further to the focusing mechanism.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: position and attitude adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the upper pedestal B 220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall B 12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B 1, and has left and right sides of the rectangular main body 2200 and the main body 2200. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b extending to the left and right with the main body 2200 and having a level difference with the main body 2200 and partially extending rearward from the rear side of the main body 2200 It has a rear end 2202 that comes out. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end 2201 a and the right end 2201 b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201 c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall B 12 by screw fastening. In the present embodiment, three rectangular holes 2201c are disposed at each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The longitudinal and lateral inner diameter of the rectangular hole 2201c is larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted and fastened to the rectangular hole 2201c.

  The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member substantially corresponding to the main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower pedestal B 221 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connection screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B 221 inserts the coil spring 2211 into each of the coupling screw portions 2210 while inserting the coil spring 2211 into the coupling hole 2200 A while sandwiching the coil spring 2211 between the main body 2200 and the rear end 2202. By connecting a nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B 220 to the tip of the connection screw portion 2210 via a washer 2212 while being in the flexed state, it is coupled in a suspended state to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B 220. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B 223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 15, the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 are connected so as to be adjustable in their mutual spacing at each of the three connecting portions R 1, R 2 and R 3. Each of the connection portions R1, R2 and R3 is formed by the connection hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, the connection screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212 and the nut 2213.

  By using such upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, the projector apparatus B2 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 so as to be capable of positioning adjustment and optical axis adjustment.

  FIG. 16 shows an attachment form of the upper pedestal B 220 to the upper wall B 12 of the projector cover B 1. The lower part of FIG. 16 (a) is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B 220, and the upper part of FIG. 16 (a) is a view shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing in alignment with the BB 'line | wire shown to the following figure of. FIG. 16 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same is true for the periphery of the other square hole 2201c in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the rectangular hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is disposed substantially at the center of the rectangular hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed with a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall B12 via a washer W arranged to follow the upper surface of the upper wall B12 and the lower surface of the left end 2201a. Thus, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end 2201 b of the upper pedestal B 220 is also attached to the upper wall B 12 of the projector cover B 1 by the same screwing.

  Here, a hatched portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 16A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201 c. In FIG. 16A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is disposed and fixed substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion of the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end 2201 b of the upper pedestal B 220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall B 12 of the projector cover B 1.

  FIG. 16B shows a state in which the left end 2201 a of the upper pedestal B 220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. The upper view of FIG. 16B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D ′ shown in the lower view of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 16B, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is relatively displaced to the left within the opening range of the rectangular hole 2201c, and within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion shown by a symbol C. It is possible to move with.

  Thus, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range which is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the attachment position with respect to the upper wall B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted so as to be perpendicular to the lateral direction and to coincide with the longitudinal direction as the reference direction.

  FIG. 17 shows a connection structure of the lower pedestal B 221 with respect to the upper pedestal B 220. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is coupled to the upper pedestal B220 by the coupling hole 2200A, the coupling screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212 and the nut 2213 in the coupling portion R2. FIG. 17 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same is true for the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

  The connection screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connection hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 through a washer 2212 disposed on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200 Ru. A coil spring 2211 is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is nipped between the lower surface of the main body 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. The coil spring 2211 urges a portion in the vicinity of the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 in a direction (up and down direction) away from each other. It is possible to prevent the loosening of the joint portion.

  In such a connecting portion R2, by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is changed while being biased by the coil spring 2211. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B 220 is fixed to the upper wall B 12 (not shown) in FIG. Therefore, the portion in the vicinity of the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in the direction approaching the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted further upward. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is enlarged. That is, by loosening the nut 2213 appropriately, the portion in the vicinity of the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in the direction away from the upper pedestal B220, and the height position is adjusted downward.

  Also in the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position in the vicinity of the connecting portions R1 and R3 of the lower pedestal B221 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, such connecting portions R1, R2 and R3 form triangles of mutually connecting lines in such a manner that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged as. That is, since the lower pedestal B 221 can finely adjust the height position by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in each of the three connection portions R 1, R 2, R 3, the posture of the lower pedestal B 221 can be The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in any of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

  Such attitude adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating light to a screen or the like from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B 221 is adjusted while confirming the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that an image is projected in an appropriate display mode on the surface such as a screen. That is, in the direction of the optical axis, the attitude of the lower pedestal B 221 can be adjusted in advance so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as a display mode of the image.

  Adjustment and the like in the optical axis direction are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 11) connected to the projector device B2. The projector apparatus B2 attached to the upper wall B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is subjected to a check of a display image on a screen or the like in addition to the adjustment of the optical axis direction at the time of inspection at a factory. , Various adjustments necessary to project and display an image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2 in the adjustment operation (see FIG. 11). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000 changes the projection position of the irradiation light in the projector device B2, the optical parameter related to focus adjustment, and the like. The projection position and the optical parameter appropriately adjusted in this manner are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as adjustment value data in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (see FIG. 11). The adjustment value data in the horizontal and vertical directions stored in the EEPROM 231 is not changed even if the power is not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory, and the gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade as it is. It can be used.

  As is apparent from the above, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly according to the mounting position with respect to the upper wall B12 of the upper pedestal B220, and in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture at

  In the present embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 to each other are provided at three locations, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. The connection part may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the connecting hole 2200A is provided in the upper pedestal B220, and the connecting screw portion 2210 is provided in the lower pedestal B221. However, these connecting holes and connecting screw portions may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to one integrally formed with the base as in the present embodiment, and may be one that can be fixed to one of the bases. For example, the connecting screw may be a bolt fixed through the lower pedestal.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention. The gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
And an open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable / closable.
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image;
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector apparatus B2);
Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector apparatus B2) based on light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) And
The projector (projector device B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are configured as a unit,
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can adjust the position from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) open.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the display unit A includes the projector device B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. The mirror mechanism B3 can adjust the position from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1) above,
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A),
The projector (projector apparatus B2) can emit light forward while being disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1).
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is disposed in front of the projector (projector apparatus B2) so as to be able to reflect light emitted from the projector (projector apparatus B2) obliquely downward and backwardly, and the main body It is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light by changing the degree of screwing of the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the reflection direction of light, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw while the upper door mechanism UD is open. It can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

(2-1) A projection apparatus (projector apparatus B2) for projecting an image by irradiation light
A plurality of projection planes capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) for displacing at least one of the plurality of projection planes as a movable projection plane;
And an upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device;
The plurality of projection planes are subjected to surface processing,
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device;
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall;
The upper pedestal is attached to be able to adjust the in-plane position with respect to the upper wall, and the lower pedestal can adjust an interval at three or more places with respect to the upper pedestal while supporting the projection device A game machine characterized in that it is attached to a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the projector device B2 properly adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall B12 to properly adjust the upper wall B12 via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical distance of the lower pedestal B221 at the three or more connecting portions R1, R2 and R3 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned at the upper wall portion B12 while being attached to the proper position. It is attached so that the attitude | position supported via this lower side pedestal B221 may become appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and the in-space attitude of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted using the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221, and high quality images with high visual effects can be displayed on a plurality of projection planes. It can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1) above,
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are mutually connected by a plurality of three or more connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) which are not on the same straight line,
Each of the plurality of connecting parts is
A connecting screw (connecting screw 2210) which protrudes from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and is screwed through the other of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal;
A coil spring (coil spring 2211) externally fitted to the connection screw portion and disposed between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal is provided.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 are not separated from one another by three or more connecting portions R 1, R 2, R 3 which are not on the same straight line. It is possible to adjust individually by simply adjusting the screw fastening amount, and the interval after adjustment is kept constant by the elastic biasing force of the coil spring 2211. Therefore, the longitudinal direction, the lateral direction, and the vertical direction orthogonal to each other in the space The respective attitudes of the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted with respect to the three axial directions, and the projector device B2 can be held in an appropriate attitude, for example, in any of the vertical direction, the lateral direction, and the longitudinal direction.

Second Embodiment
The first embodiment has been described above. The second embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Moreover, about the part to which the description in 1st Embodiment is applicable also in 2nd Embodiment, suppose that description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 according to the present embodiment have configurations different from those of the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 according to the first embodiment.

  FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 19 is a plan view showing a state in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 20 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 21 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a case for housing the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a state where the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the upper pedestal B 220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member having a rectangular shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 19, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by the side A, the side B, the side C, and the side D.

  Square holes 2201 c are provided in the right and left portions of the upper pedestal B 220, respectively. The rectangular holes 2201 c are holes for fixing the upper pedestal B 220 to the relay plate B 300 (see FIG. 26) by screw fastening.

  In the first embodiment, when attaching the projector apparatus B2 to the projector cover B1, the upper pedestal B220 is screwed to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1, thereby directly fixing the projector apparatus B2 to the projector cover B1. explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

  The longitudinal and lateral inner diameter of the rectangular hole 2201c is larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T inserted into and fastened to the rectangular hole 2201c. Further, FIG. 19 also shows a fixing plate B 321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B 220 to the relay plate B 300. In the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened using a fixing plate B321 and a cap bolt. In 1st Embodiment, although fixed plate B321 was not shown, in the case of fastening with relay board B300 and upper pedestal B220, a conventionally well-known member can be selected suitably and can be used.

  Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connection holes 2200A for coupling the lower pedestal B221. The three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be on the same straight line in a plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

  The lower pedestal B221 has a rectangular main body B221a in which a rectangular opening is formed at the center, a right side B221b and a left side B221c extending forward with a main body B221a, and a main body B221a. And a rear end B221d having a level difference and extending rearward.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the front right side of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side B221c is formed by bending the left end of the front end of the main body B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 21, the rear end B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body B221a downward and bending a part of the portion bent downward outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed to be positioned on the same plane.

  Connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to project upward correspondingly to the three connection holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220. The three connection screw portions 2210 are disposed so as not to be on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d.

  Similar to the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 are connected so as to adjust the distance therebetween in each of the three connection portions corresponding to the three connection holes 2200 A and the three connection screw portions 2210. Be done. The three connecting portions are respectively constituted by a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 12).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, one having a configuration similar to that of the first embodiment can be adopted, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, a case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. There is.

  As in the first embodiment, the case B22 accommodates a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), which is an internal component of the projector device B2, an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

  A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 12) is attached to a front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is accommodated in the case B22 in a state where the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) is covered by the lens unit cover B222.

  Although not shown, in the case B22, two intake fans 244A are provided at a position closer to the left than the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left portion B221c in a state attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 23) -The 244B is arranged in line in front and back. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

  Further, an air inlet B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 22), and an air outlet B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIG. 23). As a result, in the case B22, a flow of air exhausted from the heat exhaust port B22E is formed after the heat is forcibly drawn from the air suction port B22A by the air suction fans 244A and 244B.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and the upper end surface (upper wall B22F shown in FIG. 22) is the inner side surface of the main body B221a of the lower pedestal B221. In contact with Further, in a state in which the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is positioned above the upper pedestal B220. Accordingly, the upper wall B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

  In this respect, in the first embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is disposed above it. Therefore, the case B22 can not be disposed in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper end of the upper pedestal B220 is formed with an opening, and the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 is disposed so that the upper end thereof passes through the opening. The (upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, it is possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

  Note that, as described above, the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 by moving the relative position of the case B22 (projector device B2) upward with respect to the upper pedestal B220 as compared with the first embodiment. In front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 22), a part of the upper pedestal B 220 is disposed (see FIG. 23). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is disposed in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) installed to correspond to the front opening B22k. Thereby, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

  However, the illumination light is not blocked in this way. That is, in the present embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (a portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion in the vertical direction of the projection lens 210) is used when emitting the irradiation light. The emission position of light in such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (for example, see JP-A-2008-058875).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when emitting the irradiation light, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used, and the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210, as shown in FIG. The upper pedestal B 220 disposed in front of the projection lens 210 as described above exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is lower than the upper pedestal B220, and the upper pedestal B220 does not block the irradiation light.

  Further, the lower pedestal B221 is bent downward to form the right side B221b, the left side B221c, and the rear end B221d, so that the right side B221b, the left side B221c, and the rear end B221d are respectively located above The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be coupled so that the upper pedestal B220 is disposed. Thereby, while changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 from the first embodiment, the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment can be adopted for the configuration of the three connecting portions.

  Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can also be performed by the same method as that of the first embodiment. Such an adjustment of the optical axis direction requires a high-level computer program, but the development of the program involves a large cost. In this embodiment, since the adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like can be performed using the same program as that of the first embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F, but as in the first embodiment, the case B22 (see FIG. 12) whose upper side is opened is also used. Good. The method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B 223a (see FIG. 12) as in the first embodiment. You may do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward compared to the first embodiment. , A new space can be created in the lower area of case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B 220 from the first embodiment, and the projector cover B 1 can adopt the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

  However, in the present embodiment, in consideration of other effects, the projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the first embodiment is adopted. Hereinafter, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 25 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 26 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 along arrows L-L and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the projector cover with the upper wall removed. FIG. 28 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall removed. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28 taken along arrow M-M.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the projector cover B1 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical in the left-right direction, and has a relay plate attachment portion B301 in the inside thereof. The relay plate attachment portion B301 is formed to project inward from the inner side surface of each of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed to have a step, and has a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed forward and backward, a position adjustment surface B301d formed higher than the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and a front And it has the connection part B301e which connects the relay board attachment surface B301a and position adjustment surface B301d of back each.

  Mounting holes B301b are formed in the relay plate mounting surface B301a. Further, a position adjustment hole B301c is formed in the position adjustment surface B301d. The mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screw fastening. The position adjustment hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 18) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate attachment portion B301.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the relay board B300 has a step with the main portion B300A, the main portion B300A, and a front portion B300B extending forward, and a step with the main portion B300A and extends rearward. A rear side B300C is provided. The front side B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body B300A downward and forward. The rear side B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body B300A downward and backward. Thus, the shape of the relay board B300 is a shape corresponding to the level difference provided in the relay board attachment portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

  A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. Second through holes B300b are formed in the front side B300B and the rear side B300C, respectively. The first through holes B300a are holes through which cap bolts are inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate attachment portion B301 by screw fastening.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1, openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) whose upper sides are open are provided. The right opening B400a has a shape similar in shape to a hexagon formed by the sides E to J (see FIG. 25) in top view.

  As shown in FIG. 27, wall surfaces (wall surface B 401 e, wall surface B 401 f, wall surface B 401 g, wall surface B 401 h, wall surface B 401 i, and wall surface B 401 j) are formed with sides E to J at the top and continuing downward from each side. ing. The wall surface B 401 j (see FIG. 24) formed continuously from the side J has a shorter length in the vertical direction than the other wall surfaces B 401 e to B 401 i. The wall surface B 401 e continuously formed from the side E is continuous to the rear inside the projector cover B 1 and is a part of the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B 1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate attachment portion B301.

  FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along a horizontal surface passing through the connection portion B301e (a surface above the relay plate attachment surface B301a and below the position adjustment surface B301d).

  As shown in FIG. 29, an opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and a cavity 402 formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate attachment portion B301 , It communicates in the inside of projector cover B1.

<Formation of Space by Projector Cover B1 and Blind B500>
In the present embodiment, as a member provided below the projector cover B1, a blind B500 is employed instead of the porous plate B15 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 30 is a perspective view of a blind. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall of the projector cover removed. FIG. 32 is a view showing a state in which the fan for near the opening and the duct cover are removed in a cross section taken along the line N-N of the irradiation unit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the blind B500 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical in left and right, and is formed to have a slope continuously with the first horizontal portion B501 formed substantially horizontally and the first horizontal portion B501. A second horizontal portion B 502 b formed substantially horizontally and continuously with the first inclined portion B 502 a, and a second horizontal portion B 502 b formed so as to have an inclination continuously with the second horizontal portion B 502 b The third horizontal portion B 502 d formed to be substantially horizontal continuously with the inclined portion B 502 c and the second inclined portion B 502 c and the third horizontal portion B 502 d have the same width in the left-right direction. It has a rear wall B503 erected upward from the end, an outer wall B504 constituting the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall B505 facing the outer wall B504.

  The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. In the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, a certain range in the vicinity of the outer wall portion B504 is raised, and is higher than the inner portion of the range It has the following structure.

  Further, the blind B500 has a small room B507 having a rectangular shape in plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by the front side wall B507a, the outer side wall B507b, the rear side wall B507d, and the inner wall B505 formed in the vertical direction. The front side wall B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer wall B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall B503. The rear side wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

  As described above, the small room B507 is formed to extend over the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. Therefore, the small room B507 is formed in the second inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the first inclined portion B 502 a by the length of the width in the left-right direction of the front side wall portion B 507 a. In addition, the U-shaped notch 507c by which upper direction was open | released is formed in outer side wall part B507b. Further, the upper ends of the front side wall B507a, the outer side wall B507b, and the rear side wall B507d are lower than the upper end B505a of the inner wall B505.

  The first horizontal portion B501 has a first wall B501a slightly erected upward at the front end, and a second wall B501b continuous from the inner portion of the first wall B501a to the rear, A third wall B501c continuous obliquely backward from the second wall B501b, a fourth wall B501d continuous rearward from the third wall B501c, and a continuous inward from the fourth wall B501d And the fifth wall B501e. The fifth wall B501e is continuous with the inner wall B505.

  In a region surrounded by the third wall B501c, the fourth wall B501d, and the fifth wall B501e, a screw hole B506 for screwing the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1, and the second of the blind B500 The surface of the wall B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall B501d of the blind B500 is , And is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 32, the surface of the fifth wall B501e of the blind B500 is substantially flush with the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. It is located on the top. A constant gap exists between the upper end of the fifth wall B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As described later, the gap is filled by the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 36). Furthermore, the inner surface of the outer wall B 504 of the blind B 500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B 1.

  From the above, the space P (see FIG. 32) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The space P is covered by the projector cover B1 at the upper side and is covered by the blind B500 at the lower side. Further, the sides of the space P are the first wall B501a to the fifth wall B501e, the inner wall B505, the back wall B503, and the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the wall B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1, It is surrounded by the faces B402a and B402b which exist in the front and back of the cavity B402, the inner face 403 and the like.

  A part of the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (see FIG. 24) and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 through the cavity B402 (FIG. 29). It is connected with In a state where the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled, the cavity B402 is a part of the space P.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, punching B450 (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure is provided in the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b). This can prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to a certain extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case for the vicinity of the fan and the duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31 with the right punching removed. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 36 is a right side view showing the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35 with the opening vicinity fan removed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a duct cover B600 is disposed substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a flat member, and the outer shape in a top view is the back wall B503, the outer wall B504, the inner wall B505 of the blind B500, and the front side wall B507a and the outer wall B507b of the small room B507. (Refer to FIG. 30) The shape approximates a figure configured including the respective upper end edges. Thus, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

  A duct cover B650 is disposed substantially horizontally at the upper left portion of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a flat member, and although the outer shape in a top view is different from that of the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 40), the blind B500 is covered from above similarly to the duct cover B600.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 is a space above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. It is divided into P2. The duct cover B600 is hatched in FIG. 35 for the sake of clarity.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, an opening vicinity fan B700 is mounted on the upper front side of the duct cover B600. The near-opening fan B700 is a suction fan, and can move air present in front of the near-opening fan B700 past the air passage B 710 (see FIG. 37) and move it backward. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the state where the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the opening vicinity fan B700 is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. 34 and 35, the opening vicinity fan B700 is shown by hatching for the sake of clarity.

  Here, although not shown, in the present embodiment, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the part of the irradiation unit B that protrudes from the cabinet G , The upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 1). Then, two openings (not shown) formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD are respectively positioned right above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, an inlet B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is disposed to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23) of the case B22 is similarly disposed in proximity to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, air is provided from the outside of the gaming machine 1 to the inside of the upper door mechanism UD via the opening formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD (the opening on the right side of the two openings). Is introduced. The air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD, and is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

  The air entering the inside of the projector cover B1 is higher than the duct cover B600 in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. After moving the space P1 (see FIG. 35) backward, the projector cover B1 turns to the inside, passes through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402), and the air inlet B22A Through the inside of case B22.

  The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels leftward while taking heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

  After passing through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402), the air leaving the case B22 changes the course forwardly, and the space P (the space on the left side of the two spaces P) In P), the space P1 above the duct cover B 650 is moved forward. Then, the air exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

  The air that has exited to the outside of the projector cover B1 moves upward through the inside of the upper door mechanism UD, and then passes through the opening (the left side of the two openings) formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Is released to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  Of the air flows described above, the air flow path inside the projector cover B1 is indicated by thick arrows in FIG. Further, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. In the present embodiment, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1 by forming such an air flow path.

  Here, as described above, the opening formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD is present immediately above the opening B400 (the right opening B400a and the left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from the top, at least a part thereof overlaps each other.

  Therefore, when foreign matter such as liquid enters the gaming machine 1 from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign matter intrudes into the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from intruding into the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, the case where the liquid L is supplied from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described as an example.

  The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls to the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 30) of the blind B500.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 32, the upper end of the fifth wall B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (refer to FIG. 29) located in front of the cavity B402 (refer to FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1 There is a fixed gap between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially matches the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 abuts on both the upper end of the fifth wall B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a so as to fill the gap. Thus, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal portion B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap, and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

  Since the first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination that descends toward the rear, the liquid L is formed into a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, and a second inclined portion B502b. It flows backward through the inclined portion B 502 c and the third horizontal portion B 502 d. Thus, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The flow of such liquid L is indicated by an arrow L in FIG.

  The liquid L flowing backward collides with the rear wall B 503 and is stored in the area surrounded by the rear wall B 503, the outer wall B 504, and the outer wall B 507 b (and the inner wall B 505) (FIG. 36) reference). The area is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 35) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. In order to make it easy to understand, FIG. 36 shows the stored liquid L by hatching.

  Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 35 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1 are connected via the opening B510 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, the opening B510 has a shape similar to a rectangle formed by the sides K to N in a side view.

  The side K which constitutes the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper end edge B505a (see FIG. 30) of the inner wall B505 of the blind B500. The upper end B 505 a of the inner wall B 505 (the lower end of the opening 510) is, as shown in FIG. 30, a first horizontal portion B 501, a first inclined portion B 502 a, a second horizontal portion B 502 b, a second inclined portion B 502 c, It is located above the third horizontal portion B 502 d (the passage of the liquid L).

  Moreover, although not clearly shown in the figure, the right end of the duct cover B600 is mounted on the upper end edge of the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the left end is in contact with the outer surface of the inner wall B505 of the blind B500. It arrange | positions so that it may contact | connect, and, thereby, the main surface B610 (refer FIG. 37) forms substantially flush with upper end B505a of inner-wall part B505 of blind B500 (refer FIG. 33). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L is separated via the opening B510 into the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22 It is less likely to break into the

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan for opening vicinity>
FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the opening vicinity fan. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for near opening viewed from the rear and from below. FIG. 39 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the front and below.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the duct cover B600 has a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side B630, wiring openings B640 (B640a and B640b), and screw holes B650 (B650a and B650b), Is equipped.

  The main surface B610 has a shape in which a left rear corner portion in a rectangular shape in top view is cut away. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the opening vicinity fan B700, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side B630 is formed to extend rearward from the right rear of the major surface B610. The wiring opening B 640 is a hole for inserting a wire connecting various functional components (such as the sub control device SS) disposed outside the projector cover B 1 and the projector device B 2 or the like. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screw fastening.

  The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engagement portion B621 erected at the front end of the main surface B610, and a left rear engagement portion B622 erected from the main surface B610 at the rear of the front engagement portion B621 and the right rear A lower engagement portion B624 (a lower left engagement portion B 624 a, a lower middle engagement portion B 624 b, and a lower side) extending slightly from the main surface B 610 and extending in the front-rear direction And the right engagement portion B 624 c).

  The lower left engagement portion B 624 a and the lower middle engagement portion B 624 b connect the back surface of the front engagement portion B 621 and the front surface of the left rear engagement portion B 622. The lower right engagement portion B 624 c connects the back surface of the front engagement portion B 621 and the front surface of the right rear engagement portion B 623.

  An upper end B621a of the front engagement portion B621, an upper end B622a of the left rear engagement portion B622, and an upper end B623a of the right rear engagement portion B623 are formed in a curved shape. The opening vicinity fan B700 has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper end edge B621a, the upper end edge B622a, and the upper end edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710. In FIG. 37, the upper end B621a and the upper end B622a are hatched, and the air passing portion B710 is shaded.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the opening vicinity fan B700 is formed to project downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 includes a front engagement portion B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400, a rear engagement portion B422 formed rearward of the front engagement portion B421, and the front and rear direction. It has an upper engaging portion B 423 (upper left engaging portion B 423 a, upper middle engaging portion B 423 b, and upper right engaging portion B 423 c) extending.

  The upper engaging portion B 423 connects the rear surface of the front engaging portion B 421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B 422. The downward projection length from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1 is longer in the front engagement portion B421 and the rear engagement portion B422 than in the upper engagement portion B423.

  The lower end edge B421a of the front engagement portion B421 and the lower end edge B422a of the rear engagement portion B422 are each formed in a curved shape. The lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710 of the opening vicinity fan B700. In FIG. 38, the lower end edge B 421 a and the lower end edge B 422 a are hatched in FIG.

  The opening vicinity fan B700 is held by the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

  Specifically, the distance between the front engagement portion B621 and the left rear engagement portion B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front engagement portion B621 and the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement of the projector cover B1. The distance between the joint portion B421 and the rear engagement portion B422 is substantially equal to the length in the front-rear direction of the opening vicinity fan B700.

  Thus, the left front side of the opening vicinity fan B700 abuts on the rear surface of the front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is the left rear side engagement portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The opening proximity fan B700 is held in contact with the front engagement portion B621 and the left rear engagement portion B622 of the duct cover B600. Further, the right front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 abuts on the back surface of the front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is a front surface of the right rear engagement portion B623 of the duct cover B600. And the opening vicinity fan B700 is held by the front engagement portion B621 and the right rear engagement portion B623 of the duct cover B600.

  Further, the front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 abuts against the back surface of the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the back surface of the opening proximity fan B700 abuts against the front surface of the rear engagement portion B422 of the projector cover B1. The opening vicinity fan B700 is held by the front engagement portion B421 and the rear engagement portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

  In addition, the three lower engagement portions B 624 (the lower left engagement portion B 624 a, the lower middle engagement portion B 624 b, and the lower right engagement portion B 624 c) of the duct cover B 600 are directed upward from the main surface B 610 The projection lengths of are substantially equal to one another. Further, the three upper engagement portions B 423 (upper left engagement portion B 423 a, upper middle engagement portion B 423 b, and upper right engagement portion B 423 c) of the projector cover B1 are directed downward from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1. The projection lengths of are substantially equal to one another. The distance between the lower engagement portion B 624 of the duct cover B 600 and the upper engagement portion B 423 of the projector cover B 1 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the opening vicinity fan B 700.

  As a result, the lower surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is divided into three lower engagement portions B624 (lower left engagement portion B624a, lower middle engagement portion B624b, and lower right engagement portion B624c of the duct cover B600). The upper surface of the near-opening fan B700 is in contact with the upper surface of the projector cover B1 (upper left engagement portion B423a, upper middle engagement portion B423b, and upper right engagement portion B423c). The opening vicinity fan B700 is held by the lower engagement portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engagement portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

  As described above, the opening vicinity fan B700 is fixed by being held by the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

  In a state where the opening vicinity fan B700 is fixed, the front side peripheral edge of the air passing portion B710 is on the upper end edge B621a of the front engagement portion B621 in the duct cover B600 and the lower end edge B421a of the front engagement portion B421 in the projector cover B1. It is positioned along (see FIGS. 34 and 39). Further, although not shown, the rear side outer edge of the air passage portion B710 is the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engagement portion B622 and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engagement portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the projector cover B1. It is positioned along the lower edge B422a of the rear engagement portion B422.

  That is, in the front view, the air passing portion B710 is the front engagement portion B621, the left rear engagement portion B622, and the right rear engagement portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engagement portion of the projector cover B1. It does not overlap with B421 and rear side engaging part B422. In other words, the air passage portion B710 is formed by the front engagement portion B621, the left rear engagement portion B622, and the right rear engagement portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1 and It is not covered by the rear engagement portion B422. Thereby, the area of the passage part of air can be secured to the maximum.

  On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710, the upper end edge (upper end edge B621a, upper end edge B622a, and upper end edge B623a) of the engaging portion in the duct cover B600 and the lower end edge (lower end edge) of the engaging portion in the projector cover B1 By matching B421a and the lower end edge B422a), the area of the portion where the opening vicinity fan B700 and the duct cover B600 abut, and the area of the portion where the opening vicinity fan B700 and the projector cover B1 abut It is possible to stably fix the opening vicinity fan B700.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the front surface of the front engagement portion B421 in the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (FIG. 24) formed downward from the rear end edge (the side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a. See). Thus, the opening vicinity fan B700 is disposed rearward of the rear end edge (the side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engagement portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the opening vicinity fan B700 exists at a position deeper than the right opening B400a, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, the liquid is unlikely to be directly applied to the opening vicinity fan B700. It is supposed to be. On the other hand, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is disposed close to the right opening B400a, air can be easily taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 through the right opening B400a. Accordingly, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

  While the left rear engagement portion B 622 and the right rear engagement portion B 623 of the duct cover B 600 are separately configured, the front engagement portion B 621 is connected without the left and right portions being divided. It has a different shape. Thus, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, the liquid is less likely to intrude backward.

  Further, the length of the rear end (the side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the length in the left-right direction of the front engagement portion B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engagement in the duct cover B600 The length from the left end of the portion B 622 to the right end of the right rear engagement portion B 623, the length in the left-right direction of the front engagement portion B 421 in the projector cover B1, and the length in the left-right direction of the rear engagement portion B 422 in the projector cover B1. The lengths in the left-right direction of the opening vicinity fan B700 are all substantially equal. Thus, the space (the cross section when the space P1 is cut by the vertical plane in the left-right direction) from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 35) It has been buried. Also in this point, the area of the air passage portion is secured to the maximum, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be enhanced.

<Storage and discharge of liquid>
FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the blind and the duct cover attached from the left. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of a blind and a duct cover.

  In FIG. 43, the blind B 500 is viewed from the front and the upper side, and the duct cover B 600 is viewed from the rear and the lower side.

  As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B 500, the space P2 (see FIG. 35) below the duct cover B 600 has entered the inside of the projector cover B1. It is possible to store liquid (see FIG. 36).

  As described with reference to FIG. 30, in the blind B500, the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the small room B507. Is formed. This makes it possible to secure a space for arranging the screen device C (see FIG. 5) below the blind B500 while maintaining the strength of the blind B500 while increasing the volume of liquid that can be stored. There is.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the strength of the blind B 500 is enhanced by the presence of the small room B 507, and liquid can be stored in the small room B 507 as well. That is, as described above, the notch 507 c is formed in the small room B 507, and the liquid flows from the notch 507 c into the small room B 507 when the storage amount of the liquid exceeds a certain amount. Thus, the space in the blind B500 is effectively utilized by storing the liquid in the small room B507 provided as a rib.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the duct cover B650 has a shape obtained by cutting out the left front corner portion in a rectangular shape in top view. The duct cover B 650 is hatched in FIG. 40 for the sake of clarity. As described with reference to FIG. 33, the duct cover B600 is disposed along the front side wall B507a and the outer wall B507b (see FIG. 30) of the small room B507 in top view. On the other hand, duct cover B650 is shorter in length in the front-rear direction than duct cover B600, and the rear end of duct cover B650 is positioned forward of small room B507.

  Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is a surface B402b (see FIG. 29) present behind the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1, ie, from the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. Also placed behind. Thus, the duct cover B650 separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 from the storage space (the space P2) of the liquid L similarly to the duct cover B600, and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 to form the projector cover B1. Invading into the internal space Q (inside of the case B22) is less likely to occur.

  Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism including a tube communicating from the blind B500 to the outside of the gaming machine 1. The tube is inserted into the blind B 500 by inserting the liquid discharge hole S. Hereinafter, the liquid discharge hole S will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back side of the irradiation unit B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the liquid discharge hole S is provided behind the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the duct cover B600. Side B 630 (see FIG. 37).

  The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch whose lower side is opened in a back side wall B410 that constitutes the back of the projector cover B1.

  The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch whose upper side is opened in the first back side wall B510 that constitutes the back of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch whose upper side is opened at a second back side wall B511 formed in front of the first back side wall B510 of the blind B500. The second rear side wall portion B511 is formed to stand upright from the rear end of a horizontal surface B508 continuously formed rearward from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503. The first rear side wall portion B510 is formed to stand upright from the rear end of a horizontal surface B509 continuously formed rearward from the lower end of the second rear side wall portion B511.

  The rear side B630 of the duct cover B600 has a back surface B631, and a lower protrusion B632a and a lower protrusion B632b protruding downward from the left and right end edges of the surface B631. The lower projecting portion B 632 a and the lower projecting portion B 632 b face each other at a predetermined distance so as to be substantially parallel, and a space is formed between the lower projecting portion B 632 a and the lower projecting portion B 632 b .

  When the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 are assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a of the blind B500, the wiring opening B511a, and the lower protrusion of the duct cover B600 A space formed between the B 632 a and the lower protruding portion B 632 b overlaps in a rear view, whereby the liquid discharge holes S (for the liquid discharge on the left side among the liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. Holes S) are formed. Since the rear side B630 is not formed in the duct cover B650 (see FIG. 40), the liquid discharge hole S on the right side among the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 41 is the projector cover B1. The wiring opening B411, and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500 are formed.

  A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B 500 is inserted into the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional components (such as the sub control device SS) other than the irradiation unit B are connected to the projector device B 2 and the like. The wiring for wiring is also inserted. The wiring is connected to the projector apparatus B2 and the fan for near opening B700 by inserting the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 37).

  Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed on the outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600, and the formation locations of the wiring openings B640a and B640b are in the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 29). It is located at a distance from the opening B510 (see FIG. 36) opened toward the front. As a result, the liquid stored in the blind B500 hardly enters the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to achieve the same level of image expression as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged compared to a liquid crystal display device or the like. In addition, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is also possible to perform video expression which can not be performed by the liquid crystal display device.

  However, since the projection device easily generates heat and is easily heated to a high temperature as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that it does not function properly unless the generated heat is released.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently releasing heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting an image. I assume.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector apparatus B2) for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (an opening vicinity fan B700) disposed inside the cover member;
A partition member (duct cover B600) for partitioning the internal space of the cover member;
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B 400 a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member, and a first opening (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The partition member partitions a space communicating with the first opening in the cover member into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2).
The first space and the second space are in communication via the second opening,
The fan is disposed in the second space,
The projector is disposed in the first space,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) disposed to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened to the outside space, and a second opening opened to the inner space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) An opening (opening B510) is formed. The space communicating with the first opening (right opening B400a) in the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P1) by the partition member (duct cover B600). It is divided into space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) are in communication via the second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed in a first space (space Q), and a fan (opening proximity fan B700) is disposed in a second space (space P1). Thus, air can be moved between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the second space (space P1), and such air The heat generated by the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be efficiently released through the

  On the other hand, since the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is disposed in the second space (space P1), the cover member (projector cover B1 and the projector cover B1 and the right opening B400a) is temporarily Even when foreign matter is mixed in the interior of the blind B500), the foreign matter is placed in the projector (projector apparatus B2) due to the presence of the fan (fan near opening B700) (first space (space) Intrusion to the Q) side can be made less likely to occur. Furthermore, the third space (space P2) is a partition member (duct cover B600) from the second space (space P1) (a space communicating with the first space (space Q) where the projector (projector apparatus B2) exists). If foreign matter enters the third space (space P2), the foreign matter intrudes from the third space (space P2) into the second space (space P1). Can be prevented. Thus, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign matter such as liquid that has entered from the outside of the gaming machine, and the cause of the projector (projector device B2) failing can be eliminated. Security can be improved by suppressing unauthorized access via the opening (right opening B 400 a).

(4-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector apparatus B2) for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the screen visible.
And a fan (an opening vicinity fan B700) disposed inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B 400 a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member, and a first opening (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating with the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening,
The projector is disposed in the first space,
In the second space, a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided.
The fan is held by the inner portion of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) disposed to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened to the outside space, and a second opening opened to the inner space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (a space communicating with the first opening (right opening B 400 a) in the cover member (projector cover B1 and the blind B 500)) are the second Communicate with each other through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed in a first space (space Q), and a fan (opening proximity fan B700) is disposed in a second space (space P). Thus, air can be moved between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the second space (space P), and such air The heat generated by the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be efficiently released through the In particular, a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (opening proximity fan B700) is provided in the second space (space P), and the fan (opening proximity fan B700) is In the second space (space P), the inner portion of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600) sandwich the same. In this regard, when installing a fan (fan in the vicinity of the opening B 700) and additionally providing a structure such as a screw or a nail, a new space (in the left-right direction) is required for the structure. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to install the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) in a space-saving manner, and the passage of air in the second space (space P) It is possible to secure the space of the possible part as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the movement efficiency of air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and maximize the function of the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening). At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine according to (4-1) above,
The fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passable portion (air passage portion B710) of the fan is formed in the fan installation member.
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan (opening vicinity fan B700). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the passage of air from being blocked by the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B 620). As a result, the cooling effect of the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be further improved while making the most of the suction force of the fan (the opening vicinity fan B700).

(5-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector apparatus B2) for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible ,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B 400 a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member, and a first opening (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating with the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening,
The projector is disposed in the first space,
The second space can store liquid by closing the lower side,
Wiring openings (wiring openings B411 of the projector cover B1 and wiring of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring for connecting the device disposed outside the cover member and the projector to the cover member. Opening B510a and wiring opening B511a) are formed,
The second space and the external space of the cover member are in communication via the wiring opening,
The wiring opening may allow a mechanism (a tube provided in a discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) disposed to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened to the outside space, and a second opening opened to the inner space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (a space communicating with the first opening (right opening B 400 a) in the cover member (projector cover B1 and the blind B 500)) are the second Communicate with each other through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed in the first space (space Q). Thus, air can be moved between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the second space (space P), and such air The heat generated by the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be efficiently released through the

  Moreover, according to the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes devices and projectors (projector device) disposed outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) A wiring opening (wiring opening B411 for the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening B510a for the blind B500 and a wiring opening B511a) for inserting the wiring connecting with B2) is formed, and the second space (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are wiring openings (wiring openings B411 of projector cover B1, wiring openings B510a of blind B500, and wiring openings B511a). It communicates through. The second space (space P) can store the liquid by closing the lower part, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) has a wiring opening (projector cover). It is possible to discharge to the outside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500. Thereby, temporarily (for example, a drink poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the first opening (the right opening B400a). Even in this case, the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid can be prevented from invading devices outside the second space (space P). can do. Also, the stored liquid is appropriately discharged from the wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a of blind B500, and wiring opening B511a), so that the storage amount of the liquid does not exceed a certain limit. It is possible to keep As a result, the liquid intrudes into the arrangement space (first space) of the projector (projector apparatus B2) due to the liquid being excessively stored in the second space (space P). You can avoid the situation. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to suppress that the projector (projector device B2) or another device is broken by the liquid. In addition, since the internal temperature of the gaming machine 1 is relatively high (about 60 ° C.), the stored liquid evaporates naturally if it is left even if it is not discharged using the above mechanism. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the discharge mechanism, and the wiring openings (wiring openings B411 of the projector cover B1 and the wiring openings B510a of the blind B500 and the wirings are provided in the cover members (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500). The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector apparatus B2) for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the screen visible.
And a fan (an opening vicinity fan B700) disposed inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B 400 a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member, and a first opening (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) and an opening edge (projector cover) continuous from the part of the periphery of the first opening (the side j shown in FIG. 25) to the inside of the cover member A front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating with the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening,
The projector is disposed in the first space,
The fan is arranged to abut the opening edge in the second space,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) disposed to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened to the outside space, and a second opening opened to the inner space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (a space communicating with the first opening (right opening B 400 a) in the cover member (projector cover B1 and the blind B 500)) are the second Communicate with each other through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed in a first space (space Q), and a fan (opening proximity fan B700) is disposed in a second space (space P). Thus, air can be moved between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the second space (space P), and such air The heat generated by the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be efficiently released through the In particular, in the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), the inner side of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from a part (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the periphery of the first opening (right opening B400a) The opening edge (the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1) which is continuous toward the opening is formed, and the fan (the opening vicinity fan B700) is an opening edge (projector cover) in the second space (space P). It arrange | positions so that the front side engaging part B421 of B1 may be contact | abutted. Thereby, temporarily, when a foreign substance (for example, a drink or the like poured by a player) is mixed into the inside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) through the first opening (the right opening B400a) Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (the opening vicinity fan B700). On the other hand, the external space and the internal space of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) are made by bringing the installation position of the fan (the opening vicinity fan B700) as close to the first opening (right opening B400a) as possible. Air movement can be smoothly performed, and the cooling effect of the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the part of the irradiation unit B that protrudes from the cabinet G has an upper door mechanism UD (FIG. 1) described as being accommodated. Thus, when the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram for describing a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hook portion UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screw fastening. On the other hand, on the inner side surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner side surface of the side wall G2) projecting inward is provided.

  To attach the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (close the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G), first, the lower surface of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD is placed on the upper surface of the front side projecting member G120 and hooked The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked on the inner side projecting member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward by the lower door mechanism DD. Thereby, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

  In the second embodiment, the air flows between the internal space and the external space of the gaming machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD, but in the present invention, Alternatively, the air may be made to flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 1) formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G may be positioned right above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

  Also, in order to reduce the amount of foreign matter entering the interior of the gaming machine 1 from the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G) as much as possible. Should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening should be subjected to some measures (for example, installation of a mesh structure similar to that of the punching B450) for preventing the entry of foreign matter. desirable.

  In the second embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are disposed in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the opening proximity fan B700 in the outside of the projector device B2 (inside space of the projector cover B1). Is described as being disposed. In the present invention, the disposition position of the fan is not particularly limited, and the fan is disposed only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is disposed outside the projector device B2 (inside space of the projector cover B1). It is good not to arrange. Conversely, a fan may be provided only in the outside of projector device B2 (inside space of projector cover B1), and no fan may be provided in projector device B2 (inside of case B22).

  FIG. 45 is a diagram for describing the arrangement position of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modification, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are slightly different from those in the second embodiment. The basic configuration is the same, so detailed description will be omitted, but in the blind B500 in this modification, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. Instead of the small room B507. Further, the rear wall B503 of the blind B500 is positioned in front of the second embodiment, and the front surface of the rear wall B503 is continuous with the surface B402b existing behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. .

  The intake fan can be disposed at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 45, an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ) And an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ).

The region enclosed by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ) is located near the opening B 510 on the right (see FIG. 36), and when the intake fan is disposed in this region, the intake fan is It adjoins to air intake B22A (refer to Drawing 22) provided in the right side of B22. Thus, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently fed into the inside of the case B22 (the projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ) is the right side area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), and is a part where the wall surface B 401 i of the projector cover B 1 is extended backward. When the intake fan is disposed in a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air moved rearward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and is the lower area of the wall surface B 401 j (see FIG. 24) of the projector cover B1. is there. When the intake fan is disposed in a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), the air taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 can smoothly flow backward. .

A region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ) is a front region of a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), and is a region below the opening B 400. When the intake fan is disposed in a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ), the air can be smoothly taken into the interior of the projector cover B1.

  Further, the exhaust fan can be disposed at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 45, an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) are illustrated as the arrangement position of the exhaust fan.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) is located near the opening B 510 on the left side, and when the exhaust fan is disposed in this area, the exhaust fan is located on the left side of the case B22. It approaches to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). Thus, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector device B2.

An area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) is an area under the wall surface B 401 j of the projector cover B 1. When the exhaust fan is disposed in a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air coming out of the case B 22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

  As described above, in the intake fan and the exhaust fan described with reference to FIG. 45, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be disposed, or only the intake fan may be disposed. Alternatively, only the exhaust fan may be provided.

In addition, the intake fan includes an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), , And F (R ₄ ) may be disposed only in any one of the regions surrounded by a dotted line, or may be disposed in two or more of these regions. It is also good. The exhaust fan may be disposed in only one of the area enclosed by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area enclosed by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), It may be disposed in both areas.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that an air flow path as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 29 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air in the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow completely along the path.

  An air flow path which may be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a view showing an air flow path that can be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by the arrow X ₁ in FIG. 46, for example, air heated by the heat generated in the projector apparatus B2 is, there may be flow as out to the outside of the case B22 via the inlet B22a. Air flowing out of the air inlet B22A this way, as shown by the arrow X _2, it may move to the rear of the projector cover B1. Further, as shown by an arrow X _3, air exiting from the case B22 via the outlet B22E is, there may be a flow of air, such as toward the rear.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open, the air that has moved backward as indicated by the arrow X ₂ or an arrow X ₃ is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. In order to smoothly discharge air from the rear of the projector cover B1, an exhaust fan may be provided in the rear area of the projector cover B1.

  In the second embodiment, the partition members (the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650) are disposed to partition the air flow path and the liquid storage space. However, in the present invention, the partition members (the duct cover It is not essential to provide B600 and duct cover B650).

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, since the inclined portion B502 has an inclination that descends toward the rear, the rear portion of the inclined portion B502 is the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall B505 (opening The distance in the vertical direction from the lower end (510) is longer than that in the front portion, and the liquid L is stored in the rear portion (a region away from the lower end of the opening 510) of such an inclined portion B502. Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, the liquid R is prevented from entering the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the opening B510. can do.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(7-1) A projector (projector apparatus B2) capable of projecting an image;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of visually recognizing the screen;
In the cover member (projector cover B1), a first opening (an opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) opened upward and a left side of a second opening (two openings B400) Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the first opening, while the first space is in communication with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is opened in a direction (left direction) different from the upper direction by a third opening (an opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed in the inside of the cover member On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction (rightward direction) different from the upper side by the fourth opening (the opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member Yes,
While the first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate, the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening) It communicates with B510),
The projector is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) defining a lower end of the first space (right space P), and the lower end is the first opening. And an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination that descends away from the portion directly below the
At least a portion of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall B505).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) disposed to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right) opened upward. And a second opening (left opening B400). Further, a third opening (opening B510 on the right) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left) are formed in the cover member (projector cover B1) and opened in a direction (left and right) different from the upper side. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other to form a first space (right space P), while the second opening The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). Thus, the air flowing from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (opening B400 on the right) is the first space (space P on the right) and the third opening (opening on the right After passing through the projector (projector apparatus B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) via the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P) Is released to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the high temperature air has the property of being directed upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and is formed above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be efficiently released through such a flow of air, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (blind B500) includes the lower end (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) defining the lower end of the first space (the space P on the right side). In addition, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination that descends as it gets away from the portion directly below the first opening (right opening B400). Therefore, when a liquid (such as a drink poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the first opening (the opening B400 on the right) The liquid flows in the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as it is separated from the portion directly below the first opening (the right opening B400). Here, since at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall B505) of the third opening (the opening B510 on the right), the liquid is inclined When the part (inclined part B502) flows downward and flows below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall part B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right side) than the liquid Since the lower end (the upper end B 505 a of the inner wall B 505) of the opening B 510) is above, the liquid is unlikely to pass through the third opening (the opening B 510 on the right), and the liquid Intruding into the direction in which (the projector device B2) is arranged is unlikely to occur. As described above, according to the gaming machine 1 of the modification, the projector (the projector device B2) can be protected from foreign matter such as liquid that has entered from the outside of the gaming machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine according to (7-1) above,
The upper surface (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G) of the main body has a fifth opening (a right opening G41 of the two openings G41) above each of the first opening and the second opening. And the sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the first opening (the right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) are formed on the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above the openings (left opening B400). Thereby, air is taken in from inside the game machine to the inside from outside the game machine through the fifth opening (right side opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) After the air is made to flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right side opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transmitted to the second of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can discharge | release above the exterior of a game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the 6th opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main-body part (cabinet G). As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed by passing through the projector (the projector device B2) is the upper side outside the gaming machine, but temporarily, the air is If it discharges from the back of the above, it is feared that the island equipment installed in the game store will be heated and the control of the game machine will be adversely affected. Also, if air is discharged from the side of the gaming machine, the heated air will be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, and as a result of the vicious circulation of warm air between the adjacent gaming machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (the projector device B2) can not be enhanced. Furthermore, if air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, hot air may be blown to the face of the player. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create a flow of air for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the modification, the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening) formed in the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G) Since G41) exists above the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening (left opening B400) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), the fifth opening (G41) is formed. When foreign matter enters from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine through the right opening G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign matter is the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening. The inside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) can be easily intruded through the opening (the left opening B400). Therefore, there is a concern that foreign matter entering the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when the player infuses a drink from the fifth opening (right opening G41), the drink passes through the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B510). Then, when the projector (projector apparatus B2) is intruded, the projector (projector apparatus B2) may be broken. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) from the outside of the gaming machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) And even if the liquid enters the inside of the blind B500), such a situation occurs because the liquid flows along the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) as described above. Can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine according to (7-1) or (7-2),
A space closed at the lower side is formed by the inclined portion (inclined portion B 502) and a wall portion (back wall portion B 503, outer wall portion B 504, and inner wall portion B 505) continuous with the inclined portion
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the lower side is provided by the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (back wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (inclined portion B502). Since the closed space is formed, it is possible to store in the space the liquid that has flowed while descending the inclined portion (inclined portion B 502). Thus, the third opening (right opening B510) as long as the liquid level of the stored liquid exists below the lower end (upper end B505a of the inner wall B505) of the third opening (right opening B510). The liquid can be prevented from invading the arrangement space of the projector (projector apparatus B2).

(8-1) A projector (projector apparatus B2) capable of projecting an image;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of visually recognizing the screen;
In the cover member (projector cover B1), a first opening (an opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) opened upward and a left side of a second opening (two openings B400) Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the first opening, while the first space is in communication with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is opened in a direction (left direction) different from the upper direction by a third opening (an opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed in the inside of the cover member On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction (rightward direction) different from the upper side by the fourth opening (the opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member Yes,
While the first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate, the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening) It communicates with B510),
The projector is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) disposed to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right) opened upward. And a second opening (left opening B400). Further, a third opening (opening B510 on the right) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left) are formed in the cover member (projector cover B1) and opened in a direction (left and right) different from the upper side. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other to form a first space (right space P), while the second opening The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). Thus, the air flowing from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (opening B400 on the right) is the first space (space P on the right) and the third opening (opening on the right After passing through the projector (projector apparatus B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) via the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P) Is released to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the high temperature air has the property of being directed upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and is formed above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be efficiently released through such a flow of air, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be enhanced.

(8-2) The gaming machine according to (8-1) above,
The projector includes a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E), and a fan (intake air) disposed between the first vent and the second vent. (With fans 244A and 244B),
While the first vent (air intake B22A) and the third opening (right opening B510) face each other, the second vent (exhaust B22E) and the fourth opening (left opening) The projector is disposed to face B510),
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E). A fan (intake fans 244A and 244B) is provided between the second vent (inlet B22A) and the second vent (inlet B22E), and the first vent (inlet B22A) The projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed so that the second vent (air outlet B22E) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the third opening (right opening B510) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510). The forced flow of air by the fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) makes it possible to create the above air flow smoothly.

(8-3) The gaming machine according to (8-1) or (8-2) above,
The upper surface (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G) of the main body has a fifth opening (a right opening G41 of the two openings G41) above each of the first opening and the second opening. And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
The projector is accommodated in the main body so as to be disposed above the screen.
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the first opening (the right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) are formed on the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above the openings (left opening B400). Thereby, air is taken in from inside the game machine to the inside from outside the game machine through the fifth opening (right side opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) After the air is made to flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right side opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transmitted to the second of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can discharge | release above the exterior of a game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the 6th opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main-body part (cabinet G). As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed by passing through the projector (the projector device B2) is the upper side outside the gaming machine, but temporarily, the air is If it discharges from the back of the above, it is feared that the island equipment installed in the game store will be heated and the control of the game machine will be adversely affected. Also, if air is discharged from the side of the gaming machine, the heated air will be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, and as a result of the vicious circulation of warm air between the adjacent gaming machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (the projector device B2) can not be enhanced. Furthermore, if air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, hot air may be blown to the face of the player. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create a flow of air for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the projector (projector apparatus B2) is disposed on the screen (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1) so as to be disposed above the screen It is accommodated in the cabinet G), and the arrangement position of the projector (projector apparatus B2) is close to the upper surface (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G) of the main body. Therefore, the distance between the projector (projector apparatus B2) and the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) formed in the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of cabinet G) As a result, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) and the projector (projector apparatus B2) becomes relatively small. There is. Therefore, when designing a flow path for discharging the air taken in from the fifth opening (the opening G41 on the right side) through the sixth opening (the opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (the projector apparatus B2), It is relatively easy to design the air flow path without the need to make complicated detours to avoid the parts and devices present in the.

  As mentioned above, in the embodiment mentioned above, the case where the present invention was applied to a pachislot machine was explained. Hereafter, the modification which applied this invention to the pachinko gaming machine is demonstrated using FIGS. 47-51.

  FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit and the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the pachinko game machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a crate 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a plate unit 6115, a launch device 6122 for launching game balls, and various control boards. It is comprised from the board | substrate unit 6123 containing, the ball | bowl payout unit etc. which provide the game ball as game value.

  The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be able to open and close. Further, an opening 6116 is formed at the center of the glass door 6111, and a transparent protective glass 6124 is disposed in the opening 6116. Moreover, the base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 mentioned above.

  The above-described tray unit 6115 is disposed on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. An upper plate 6125 is provided above the plate unit 6115, and a lower plate 6126 is provided below the plate unit 6115. Payouts 6131A and 6131B are provided on the upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 for lending of gaming balls and payout of gaming balls (prize balls), and when predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game is played. The balls are discharged, and in particular, the upper tray 6125 stores gaming balls for causing the game area 6141 to fire.

  The above-described launcher 6122 is disposed on the base door 6113 so as to be located to the side of the pan unit 6115. The launch device 6122 is provided with a launch handle 6132 operable by the player, and the player can advance a pachinko game by operating the launch handle 6132. When the shooting handle 6132 is held by the player and turned clockwise, power is supplied to the shooting motor according to the turning angle, and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 6125 It is sequentially fired to the game board.

  The game board 6114 described above is disposed in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 on the front of which a game ball can be rolled. The game area 6141 is an area surrounded by a guide rail or the like and in which the game balls can roll. As described above, the game balls fired by the launch device 6122 are guided by the guide rails provided on the game board to move to the upper part of the game board 6114, and thereafter, a plurality of obstacle nails provided in the game area 6141 It will flow downward from the upper part of the game board while changing its direction of movement due to the collision with the player.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a decoration unit 6258 is provided in the upper region of the front surface of the glass door 6111. The decoration unit 6258 is arranged to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

  A cavity is formed inside the decoration unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above embodiment is disposed in the cavity. FIG. 47 shows a state in which the inside of the decoration unit 6258 is seen through from above the decoration unit 6258.

  As shown in FIG. 48, on the back side of the game board 6114, a screen device C (see FIG. 5) is disposed. Thus, as in the above-described embodiment, the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B is irradiated to the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) of the screen device C. It can be done.

  The decoration unit 6258 is attached to the top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 49). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back side of the glass door 6111.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the irradiation unit B is attached to the top of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decoration unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 in a state where the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation unit B is housed in the internal space of the decoration unit 6258.

  Further, on the upper portion of the frame member 6211, the speaker 6152 and the speaker holder 6152A are integrally mounted on both the left and right of the irradiation unit B. On the other hand, in the decoration unit 6258, speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are provided on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-like openings.

  In the state where the decoration unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B cover the front of the speaker 6152, respectively, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B. It can be released outside the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

  Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 49, an intake fan 6244 is disposed on the front right side of the irradiation unit B. Thus, air is taken into the interior of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the speaker hole 6151A.

  Similar to the second embodiment, this air is taken into the projector cover B1 via the opening B400R (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1 and is generated by the projector device B2 It travels through the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

  The air that has exited to the outside of the projector cover B1 passes through the through holes 6245 formed in the frame member 6211, moves rearward, and is released to the outside from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

  The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. In the second embodiment, the case where air is taken in from the upper outside of the gaming machine 1 and discharged to the upper outside of the gaming machine 1 has been described. On the other hand, in this modification, air is taken in from the front outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100, and the air is discharged to the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 outside. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which air for cooling the projector is taken in and the direction in which the air is discharged are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

  A pachinko gaming machine has a shorter depth in the front-back direction of the gaming machine compared to a pachislot gaming machine, so when another pachinko gaming machine is installed on the back side of one pachinko gaming machine on the same island facility There is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air warmed by the projector is discharged from the back of the pachinko gaming machine, it is considered that the island installation of the pachinko gaming machine does not heat as much as the island installation of the pachislot gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 50, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side surface of the decoration unit 6258. Thereby, air is taken into the interior of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the opening 6300R.

  This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1 and generated in the projector device B2 as in the above-described modification. It travels through the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

  Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300 L) is formed in the left side surface of the decoration unit 6258 as well as the right side surface. As a result, the air that has exited from the opening B400L to the outside of the projector cover B1 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the opening 6300L.

  Such an air flow is indicated by arrows in FIG. In this modification, it is considered that there is a possibility that the heated air may be taken into the adjacent gaming machine due to the air discharging direction being the side of the gaming machine. In order to prevent the occurrence of such a situation, when the air discharge direction is to the side of the gaming machine, for example, the width of the decoration unit 6258 in the left-right direction is further shortened, etc. It is desirable that an exhaust port (opening 6300L) in the gaming machine and an intake port (opening 6300R) in the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine be configured to be separated to some extent.

  Hereinafter, another modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the modification described above, it has been described that the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 51, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113. In addition, a speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Also in such a modified example, an air flow path similar to the above-described example can be formed.

  In FIG. 51, the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113, but the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed behind the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the gaming board, the irradiation unit B can be disposed by using the space while forming a space on the back side of the gaming board.

  For example, an opening is provided at the center of the game board, and the irradiation unit is disposed at the base door or the game board or other rear member of the pachinko machine so that the front of the irradiation unit penetrates the opening. It is also good. In that case, the game board of a general pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine having a configuration in which an opening is provided at the center of the game board and a liquid crystal display device or the like behind the game board can be viewed through the opening) It is also possible to divert as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, arranging a screen mechanism, and further arranging an irradiation unit on a rear member such as a game board, the irradiation unit and the screen mechanism are mounted while keeping the shape of the game board as it is. It is possible to create a new gaming machine. When adopting such a configuration, a part in front of the irradiation unit protrudes in front of the game board, so a larger space behind the pachinko gaming machine can be secured. By doing so, when a pachinko gaming machine with an irradiation unit is installed in the entire island facility in a game arcade with a narrow island facility, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island facility. Furthermore, a small-sized liquid crystal display device that arranges a decorative member such as a logo according to the model, or assists in decoration in front of the irradiation unit (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11) that can be viewed by the player By arranging the electric decoration board or the like, the irradiation unit can be blinded so as not to be seen by the player, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the screen apparatus C may be installed in the state attached to the irradiation unit B, and may be installed in the state isolate | separated from the irradiation unit B. FIG.

  In the modification described above, the discharge direction of air is set to the rear or the side of the gaming machine, but air may be discharged from the upper side of the gaming machine as in the second embodiment. When the air discharge direction is upward, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the upper surface of the decoration unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure a passage of air.

  In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form an opening in the member present on the air flow path, depending on the air intake direction and the air discharge direction, and the air flow path. A tubular duct may be provided according to the air flow path.

  In addition, in order to smooth the flow of air, it is possible to appropriately arrange an intake fan and / or an exhaust fan. For example, an intake fan (for example, intake fan 6244 in FIG. 49) may be disposed between the opening for taking in air (for example, opening 6300R in FIG. 50) and the opening B400R of projector cover B1. An exhaust fan can be disposed between the opening for exhaust (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 50) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if intake and exhaust are sufficiently performed by the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B, the fan may not be provided outside the irradiation unit B.

  In the modification described above, the projector cover B1 described in FIG. 45 is illustrated as being adopted, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and an opening for taking in air for cooling the projector, And the projector cover in which the opening for discharging the said air was formed is employable suitably. These openings can be formed at any place such as the front, rear, upper, lower, side of the projector cover, and the position where the openings are formed is appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector and the like. be able to. Furthermore, the projector may be disposed inside the gaming machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken from the outside of the gaming machine may be directly transmitted to the projector (through the projector cover). It is also possible to configure to apply without

Third Embodiment
The first and second embodiments have been described above. The third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of portions in which the descriptions in the first embodiment and the second embodiment also apply to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a state in which the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in the state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG.

  Similarly to the display unit A described in the first embodiment, the display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 52 is exchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) in the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the display unit 9000 includes a unit casing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet side screen 9040.

  The unit casing 9010 includes a bottom plate 9011 arranged horizontally, a right side plate 9012 erected at the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 erected at the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011 And a back plate 9014 erected on the part. The right side plate 9012, the left side plate 9013, and the back plate 9014 are connected to the bottom plate 9011 by screw fastening to form a box-shaped casing whose front side and top side are open.

  A projector installation member 9015 for installing the projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014. The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front portion of the projector installation member 9015.

  The projector 9020 has the same configuration (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210) as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 12) described in the first embodiment, and projects light including an image It is possible. The projector 9020 is placed so that the lens is on the lower side, whereby the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

  Below the projector installation member 9015, a mirror installation part 9016 for installing a mirror 9030 is formed. The mirror mounting portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016 a and 9016 b which are inclined from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011.

  The mirror 9030 has the same configuration as the optical mirror B 32 (see FIG. 7) described in the first embodiment, and can reflect light projected from the projector 9020. The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016 a and 9016 b of the mirror installation portion 9016. Thus, the mirror 9030 is in a posture having an inclination such that the front is lower than the rear.

  As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and traveled downward is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). In FIG. 55, the irradiation range of light is indicated by oblique lines. The relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 55 is the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 53 (the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 installed in the unit housing 9010). It is the same as the positional relationship. That is, FIG. 55 is an exploded view showing the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 in the state shown in FIG.

  A cabinet side screen 9040 is erected on the front portion of the bottom plate 9011 by being fitted thereto. Thus, light projected forward from the projector 9020 and reflected by the rear mirror 9030 forward is incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 from the rear (rear side).

  The cabinet side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape in a front view, and is formed to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet side screen 9040 is a transmissive type displayed by projecting a projection image from the rear side, and a uniformly flat rear side incident surface 9040 a to which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, And a display surface 9040 b on the front side on which a projection image is projected by transmitting light incident on the surface 9040 a. The cabinet side screen 9040 is formed using, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibits a milky white, semitransparent, or gray color when not projected.

  When light projected from the projector 9020 enters the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet screen 9040, an image (still image or moving image) relating to a game is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet screen 9040. Be done. The moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing a large number of still images over time. In the present specification, moving image and video are synonymous.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet side screen 9040>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet side screen.

  In FIG. 56, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is hatched. The irradiation range of light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than the cabinet side screen 9040. Specifically, light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entire surface of the cabinet side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040 a) (area shown by hatching in FIG. 56) and passes through the peripheral area of the cabinet side screen 9040. In FIG. 56, the peripheral region of the cabinet side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated by oblique lines.

  Of the light projected from the projector 9020, light which has not entered the cabinet side screen 9040 and has passed through the hatched area in FIG. 56 travels to the front of the cabinet side screen 9040. Part of the light that has traveled to the front of the cabinet side screen 9040 will be incident on the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD as described below (FIG. 61) (B) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is a front view of the gaming machine.

  As described in the first embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into the upper space and the lower space by the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5). Similar to the upper door mechanism UD according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 4), the upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 57 is disposed in front of the upper space in the cabinet G and closes the upper portion of the opening in the cabinet G. It is provided to be able to

  As shown in FIG. 58, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH which forms a framework of the upper door mechanism UD. A panel mechanism HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, HG is provided on the front side of the panel base HH. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 3) at the central portion (position overlapping with the cabinet side screen 9040 in front view), and the transparent panel UD11 is in the upper display window UD1. It is provided. Thereby, when an image is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the image can be visually recognized from the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

  The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a curved flat screen shape (for example, a half-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and the reel screen mechanism described in the first embodiment Similar to the shape in the side view of F1 (see FIG. 10), the shape in the top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed to have uniform thicknesses over the entire surface.

  The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, like the cabinet-side screen 9040, are transmissive types that are displayed by projecting a projection image from the rear. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed using, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibit a milky white, semitransparent, or gray color when not projected.

  The door-side right screen 9050 has a rear-side incident surface 9050a on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface 9050b on which the projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface 9050a. And. Door side left screen 9060 has a back side incident surface 9060a on which light projected from projector 9020 is incident, and a front side display surface 9060b onto which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on incident surface 9060a. And.

  The door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 are arranged such that the centers of curvature are on the back side. That is, the incident surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050 and the incident surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020 There is.

  FIG. 57 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 disposed in the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the figure, the cabinet side screen 9040 is indicated by a virtual line.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the side forming the left end of the door side right screen 9050 (the side 9050c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the right end of the cabinet side screen 9040 (the side 9040c shown in FIG. 52) are close The side 9050 c of the door-side right screen 9050 is positioned slightly to the right of the side 9040 c of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Further, the side (the side 9060c shown in FIG. 60) forming the right end of the door left screen 9060 and the side (the side 9040d shown in FIG. 52) forming the left end of the cabinet side screen 9040 are in proximity (or substantially contact) And the side 9060 c of the left door screen 9060 is located slightly to the left of the side 9040 d of the cabinet screen 9040.

  The side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and the side 9040c and the side 9040d of the cabinet side screen 9040 have substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively positioned on substantially the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved to be convex forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are generally located in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. It will be located.

  The side that constitutes the lower end of the door-side right screen 9050 (the side 9050d shown in FIG. 60), the side that constitutes the lower end of the door-side left screen 9060 (the side 9060d shown in FIG. 60), and the lower end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 The sides (the side 9040e shown in FIG. 52) constituting the are substantially the same in position (height) in the vertical direction (these three sides are located on substantially the same plane). Further, the vertical lengths (sides 9050c and 9060c) of the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 are longer than the vertical lengths (sides 9040c and side 9040d) of the cabinet side screen 9040. There is. Thus, the lower ends of the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are positioned at substantially the same height, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are lower than the cabinet side screen 9040. Has a tall configuration.

<Display of images on cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060>
FIG. 61A is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet side screen. FIG. 61 (b) is a view showing how light which has not entered the cabinet side screen enters the door side right screen. FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing how light which has not been incident on the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. 62 and 63 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen.

  In FIG. 61 (a), three areas (area I, area II, and so on) of the area shown by oblique lines in FIG. 56 (the peripheral area of the cabinet side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of light projected from the projector 9020) are shown. And, it is divided and shown to field III). The area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040. The area II is an area located on the left side of the cabinet screen 9040. The area III is an area located above the cabinet screen 9040. In FIG. 61 (a), as in FIG. 56, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is hatched.

  As described above, part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040 a of the cabinet side screen 9040. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9040 b of the cabinet screen 9040.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has not entered the cabinet side screen 9040 and has passed through the area I in FIG. 61 (a) is the door side right screen 9050. Is incident on the incident surface 9050a of As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9050 b of the door-side right screen 9050.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has not entered the cabinet side screen 9040 and has passed through the area II in FIG. 61 (a) is the door left screen It enters into the incident surface 9060 a of 9060. Thus, an image is displayed on the display surface 9060 b of the left door screen 9060.

  As described above, images (still images and moving images related to a game) are displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, respectively. In this embodiment, each image displayed on three screens (the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image The data can be used to display an image on each of the three screens.

  62 and 63 show such image data. An area (area A) indicated by hatching in FIG. 62 (a) includes information indicating an image displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040. An area (area B) indicated by hatching in FIG. 62 (a) includes information indicating an image displayed on the door side right screen 9050. An area (area C) indicated by hatching in FIG. 62 (a) includes information indicating an image displayed on the door-side left screen 9060. The remaining area (area D) in FIG. 62 (a) contains information with a pixel value of zero. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of the pixel formed in the liquid crystal panel included in the projector 9020. The pixel value of 0 indicates that the light transmittance is minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the region where the pixel value is 0 is black.

  FIG. 62 (b) shows an example of the image data. The image data shown in FIG. 62B includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information including the firework image 9101 in the area B, and information indicating the character image 9102 in the area C. An area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing includes information of which the pixel value is zero. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the fireworks image 9101 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the character image 9102 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rear end (side 9050 c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060 c) of the door-side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040 b of the cabinet side screen 9040 The positions in the front-rear direction are substantially the same. As a result, the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060 respectively have substantially equal distances from the projector 9020 in the front-rear direction, and the focal point is not largely deviated. It has become.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows an example of another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63A includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information including the decoration image 9110 in the area B, and information indicating the decoration image 9111 in the area C. . An area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing includes information of which the pixel value is zero. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the decoration image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decoration image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060. .

  FIG. 63 (b) shows an example of still another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63B includes information indicating the decoration image 9110 in the area B, and includes information indicating the decoration image 9111 in the area C. An area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing includes information of which the pixel value is zero. By using such image data, the decoration image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decoration image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector is known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-035066 and 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, the video for gaming is projected from the projector onto the projection surface such as the screen, whereby the video is displayed on the screen or the like instead of the liquid crystal display device.

  However, in a gaming machine in which an image is projected onto a screen from such a projector, there is a problem that the rendering expression is poor due to the flat screen.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a variety of stage effects.

  In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) Screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060),
A projector (projector 9020) for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen;
The screen is disposed such that light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the light incident from the back side can display an image on the front side.
As the screen, a first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), and a second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) disposed on the side or above or below the first screen in a front view Is provided,
In the projector, the first screen, and the second screen, a part of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen, while the light is projected from the light projected by the projector. At least a portion of the light not incident on one screen is arranged to be incident on the second screen,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the second screen (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060) is disposed on the side of the first screen (the cabinet side screen 9040) in a front view. There is. Then, a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made incident on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), while the first screen (cabinet) of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) At least a part of the light not incident on the side screen 9040 can be incident on the second screen (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060).

  Therefore, it is possible to display an image on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) respectively, and these images are viewed from the player. In this case, it will be displayed in a positional relationship such as side by side. Thus, the player can visually see the player through the images displayed on such two screens (the first screen (the cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain and perform various stage expressions.

(9-2) The gaming machine according to (9-1) above,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the first screen visible. Equipped with
The second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) is provided on the open / close door,
It is characterized by

  Generally, although the decoration (modeling) according to the model is given to the opening / closing door of a game machine, in order to give such a decoration, a large amount of cost occurs. And each time a new model is developed (for each project), if the door is to be shaped and the decoration is to be changed, the corresponding cost will be increased.

  In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the second screen (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060) is provided on the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD). By displaying an image (an image similar in appearance to the decoration in appearance) on (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060), the decoration unique to the model is not applied to the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) Also, the same visual effect as in the decoration can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to employ | adopt the simple opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which abbreviate | omitted decoration, and the expense concerning a decoration can be held down. And, even when developing a new model, there is no need to extensively change the decoration of the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD), and image data according to the model (image data similar to the model specific decoration ) Should be prepared. Thereby, if the images displayed on the second screen (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060) are made to correspond to the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the decoration change, Cost reduction can be achieved.

  In the third embodiment, of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light passing through the area I (the area located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61A is incident on the door side right screen 9050. Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light having passed through the area II (the area located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61 (a) is incident on the door side left screen 9060, It has been described that the right screen 9050 and the door left screen 9060 are disposed. That is, it has been described that the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are disposed to the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) in a front view.

  In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example, and the second screen is above or below the first screen (cabinet side screen) in a front view. It may be arranged. For example, while the door side upper screen is provided on the upper side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper side display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 is positioned on the upper side of the area III (cabinet side screen 9040 in FIG. The light passing through the region may be configured to be incident on the door side upper screen. Further, while the door side lower screen is provided under the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), an area of the light projected from the projector 9020 which is located under the cabinet side screen (for example, FIG. The light passing through the region III and the region facing the cabinet side screen 9040) may be configured to be incident on the door side lower screen. The second screen in the present invention may be provided with all four screens of the door side right screen, the door side left screen, the door side upper screen, and the door side lower screen, or any of the four screens. One, two or three screens may be provided. In addition, a screen (door side right screen or door side left screen) disposed on the side of such a cabinet side screen, and a screen disposed above or below the cabinet side screen (door side upper screen or door side lower) The screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door side right screen, the door side left screen, and the door side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

  In the present invention, the arrangement position of the second screen (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, and door side lower screen) in the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (the door side right screen, the door side left screen, the door side upper screen, and the door side lower screen) is provided in a region close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view It may be provided in the area | region which estranged from the 1st screen (cabinet side screen) to some extent or more. For example, the structure of the arrangement position of the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left side panel mechanism HD, the right side panel mechanism HE (see FIG. 60) etc. An upper screen, a door side left screen, a door side right screen or the like may be provided. As a result, if light projected from the projector is made to be incident on the back side of these screens and an image is displayed on the front side, the design or model specific to the area corresponding to the arrangement position of these panel mechanisms. Such design and information can be easily changed by appropriately using model data as well as model information.

  The top panel mechanism HA is disposed at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD is disposed at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right lateral panel mechanism HE is the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. When the second screen (the door side upper screen, the door side left screen, the door side right screen, etc.) is provided at these arranged positions (areas along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) It is necessary to widen the irradiation range (see FIG. 56) of the light projected from the projector. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the irradiation range is maximized and the entire upper door mechanism UD is irradiated (assuming that the cabinet side screen is not provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and tilt of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be appropriately changed, and the light traveling forward without being incident on the cabinet side screen is the top panel mechanism HA, the left lateral. In order to reach the arrangement position of the panel mechanism HD, the right side panel mechanism HE, etc. (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) (so that light is irradiated over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD) It is possible to design. As described above, in the present invention, only a portion of the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) which is in proximity to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view is irradiated with the light projected from the projector It may be irradiated with a wider range over the outer peripheral portion of the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD).

  In the third embodiment, as an example of image data, an area A, an area B, and an area C shown in FIG. 62 (a) are respectively separate images (in the example of FIG. 62 (b), effect image 9100, fireworks image The image data has been described which includes information indicating 9101 and the character image 9102). The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example, and includes, for example, information indicating one image (for example, effect image 9100) across area A, area B, and area C. Image data may be used. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, effect image 9100) is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, respectively. One image (for example, effect image 9100) will be comprised by integrating the one part image displayed on the. As described above, in the present invention, different images are displayed on the cabinet side screen and the screen disposed in the peripheral area (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, door side lower screen, etc.) May be displayed individually, or one image may be represented as a whole by combining the images displayed on the respective screens.

  In the third embodiment, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided exposed to the front side of the gaming machine 1 (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left No other member is provided on the front side of the screen 9060). Thereby, when an image is displayed on the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060, the image becomes visible to the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (the door side right screen and the door side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, it is considered that the image displayed on the second screen is not obstructed from the player's view, and there is no hindrance to the player visually recognizing the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with a transparent panel, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the gaming machine and prevent the second screen from being broken. When providing a transparent panel, although the shape in particular of a transparent panel is not limited, for example, a transparent panel which has unevenness can be adopted. Thereby, it becomes possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the 2nd screen (door side right screen and door side left screen), and the appearance similar to the case where three-dimensional decoration is given to the open / close door itself Can be created.

  Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that the shapes of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are shapes obtained by curving a flat screen (the shape in top view is an arc shape). However, the shape of the second screen (the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a screen having any shape can be adopted as appropriate. For example, the second screen may be a flat screen such as a cabinet side screen 9040, a screen having asperities, or a rounded screen. It may be an angular screen.

Fourth Embodiment
The first to third embodiments have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. The description of the parts in the first to third embodiments that apply to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Irradiation range of light and arrangement position of screen>
FIG. 64 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper door mechanism and the cabinet.

  In FIG. 64, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown using a dashed-dotted line. As in the third embodiment, light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55).

  In the third embodiment, a part of the light traveling forward in this manner is described as entering from the rear (rear side) to the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the cabinet side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

  As described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from the rear (rear side) respectively, and an image is formed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. It will be displayed. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 66 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decoration unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. Each unit will be described below.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member as viewed from the front while the light transmitting plate and the screen sheet are viewed from the rear. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the upper pressing member and the upper frame as viewed from below. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear.

  Note that FIG. 67 shows the components of the upper door mechanism UD as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 68 shows the components of the upper door mechanism UD as viewed obliquely from the rear. In FIG. 69, the light transmission plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown in a state where they are assembled, and the lower frame UD100 is shown to be independently present. There is. In FIG. 70, the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown in a state where they are assembled, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are each shown to be independently present. FIG. 71 shows how the upper pressing member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 are independently present. FIG. 72 shows the light transmission plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD 100 in a state where they are assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the screen unit 1040 includes a light transmitting plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046.

  The light transmitting plate 1045 is mainly made of a resin such as a light transmitting acrylic plate or a glass plate as a main material, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The light transmitting plate 1045 has a flat surface portion 1045a located at the center, a curved portion 1045b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1045a, and a back surface from the rear end of the curved portion 1045b And a continuously formed side surface portion 1045c. The flat portion 1045a and the side portion 1045c are formed in a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other. The curved portion 1045 b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved as in the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 58) in the third embodiment.

  The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and the screens in the third embodiment (the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060) And the display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1046 is formed of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and is milky white, semitransparent, or gray when not projecting It takes on a color.

  The screen sheet 1046 includes a flat surface portion 1046a positioned at the center, and a curved portion 1046b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1046a. The flat portion 1046a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape obtained by curving a flat plate. The flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light transmitting plate 1045.

  The screen sheet 1046 is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting plate 1045. Specifically, the back surface of the flat portion 1045a of the light transmission plate 1045 is in close contact with the front surface of the flat portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046, and the back surface of the curved portion 1045b of the light transmission plate 1045 And the surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 in close contact with the front surface.

  When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (back side surface) of the screen sheet 1046, an image (a still image or a game-related image) on the display surface (front surface side) of the screen sheet 1046 Moving image is displayed. Since the light transmission plate 1045 is formed transparent and there is no structure in front of the light transmission plate 1045 to block the player's view, when the image is displayed on the screen sheet 1046, the image is the player It becomes visible from

  The screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b have different positions in the depth direction, the image is displayed on both the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046. In addition, in the case where the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are formed by forming (in the open space) the curved portion 1045b and the curved portion 1046b, respectively, when the curved portion is formed by, for example, vacuum processing or the like. As compared with the above, the deformation of the image can be suppressed.

  The light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are pressed by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 in a state where the lower portion is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. It is supported.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and is slightly protruded upward at the front end of bottom plate UD100a and bottom plate UD100a arranged horizontally. The wall portion UD100b, the right side portion UD100c extending in the vertical direction at the right end portion of the bottom plate UD100a, and the left portion UD100d extending in the vertical direction at the left end portion of the bottom plate UD100a. The light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD 100 a in a state where the light transmitting plate 1045 is in contact with the bottom plate UD 100 a, the right side portion UD 100 c, and the left side portion UD 100 d. In this state, the lower front surface of the light transmitting plate 1045 abuts on the wall portion UD 100 b. The wall portion UD100b has a shape corresponding to the flat portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 so that the entire front lower portion of the light transmitting plate 1045 can abut.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the lower pressing member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and the front side surface (the pressing surface UD101a) of the lower pressing member UD101 has a curved shape with a portion formed in a planar shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. And a formed portion. The lower pressing member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 in a state where the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are mounted on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower portion of the screen sheet 1046 is of the lower frame UD100. It is held between the wall portion UD100b and the light transmitting plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD101a. The lower pressing member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw passing through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 69) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having an outline of a substantially square shape in a front view, and is slightly downward from the front portion of the bottom surface UD110a and the bottom surface UD110a extending in the left-right direction. And a protruding wall portion UD110b. With the upper frame UD110 fixed to the lower frame UD100, the upper end edge of the light transmitting plate 1045 abuts the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 in the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, and the front surface of the light transmitting plate 1045 The upper portion is positioned to abut the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD 110 b has a shape corresponding to the light transmission plate 1045 so that the front upper portion of the light transmission plate 1045 can abut over a predetermined range.

  The front side surface (the pressing surface UD102a, see FIG. 70) of the upper pressing member UD102 has a portion formed in a planar shape and a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. The upper pressing member UD102 is a screw hole formed in the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 through a screw passing through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 71) in a state where the upper surface is in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to upper frame UD110 by screwing in UD110c. Thus, the upper portion of the screen sheet 1046 is sandwiched between the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110 and the light transmitting plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

  As described above, the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper part is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a curved portion corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. Thus, the screen sheet 1046 can be brought into close contact with the light transmission plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the light transmission plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 or the generation of wrinkles on the screen sheet 1046. Thus, it is possible to prevent the image visually recognized by the player from being disturbed.

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the light transmission plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light transmission plate 1045 are flat portions of the screen sheet 1046. The side surface 1045 c of the light transmitting plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 but is exposed while being covered by the surface 1046 a and the curved portion 1046 b.

  Although not shown, a cabinet G is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, a gap corresponding to the length in the front-rear direction of at least the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 is present between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2). In order to make it easy to understand, in FIG. 72, such a gap is indicated by oblique lines.

  An image is displayed on a portion (flat surface portion 1045 a and curved portion 1045 b) of light transmitting plate 1045 covered by screen sheet 1046, and a portion of light transmitting plate 1045 exposed without being covered by screen sheet 1046. An image is not displayed on (the side surface portion 1045c, that is, the hatched portion in FIG. 72). As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image is floating at a position separated in the forward direction from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), and realize various image expressions. be able to.

<Decorative unit 1050>
FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet as viewed from the rear.

  In FIG. 73, the first structural body 1051, the second structural body 1052, the third structural body 1053, and the fourth structural body 1054 are shown in a state in which they are assembled, and the upper frame UD110 and the screen sheet 1056. The screen sheet 1057 shows that they exist independently.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the decoration unit 1050 is adjacent to the first structure 1051 disposed at the center, the second structure 1052 disposed around the first structure 1051, and the second structure 1052. A third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 disposed on the back side of these structures.

  The first structural body 1051, the second structural body 1052, the third structural body 1053 and the fourth structural body 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. The screen sheet 1056 is disposed on the back side of the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is disposed on the back side of the third structure 1053 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are disposed adjacent to each other and have a shape that can be fitted at the adjacent portion. The fourth structural body 1054 is disposed on the back side of the speaker accommodation portion UD 110 d of the upper frame UD 110, and a speaker not shown is disposed together with the fourth structural body 1054 on the back side of the speaker accommodation portion UD 110 d.

  The first structure body 1051 is formed of a translucent material (for example, an acrylic resin or the like), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a character shape). The second structure body 1052 is formed of a translucent material (for example, an acrylic resin or the like), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a flame). The third structure body 1053 is formed of a translucent material (for example, an acrylic resin or the like), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure body 1054 is formed of a translucent material (for example, an acrylic resin or the like), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain).

  The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmission-type screens that are displayed by projecting a projection image from the rear, and like the screen sheet 1046, the light incident on the back side to which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident It has a surface and the display surface by the side of the front by which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light which injected into the entrance plane. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are formed of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and are milky white when not projected It is transparent or gray.

  The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (back side surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, whereby the screen sheet 1056 and display surface (front surface side) of the screen sheet 1057 are formed. , An image (a still image or a moving image) regarding the game is displayed.

  Here, the third structural body 1053 has a configuration in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on the front side. The half mirror can be formed by sticking a semitransparent film sheet on the surface of a substrate or depositing a metal film by a conventionally known method, and a part of incident light may be While reflecting, it has the property of transmitting a part.

  By arranging such a half mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when light is not projected from the projector 9020, an object present around the third structure 1053 is captured, for example, black plating It will have the appearance of a given part. As an object present around the third structure body 1053, for example, a structure having a shape imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 65 can be provided. Note that a structure having a shape resembling a chain may be provided in the vicinity of the third structure 1053 or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 is reflected on the half mirror. For example, an image is displayed on the screen sheet 1057 in which an object existing around the third structure 1053 or an object having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (a shape simulating a chain) is flowing and moving. This makes it possible to produce an effect that the object that has been stationary is moving when light is not projected from the projector 9020. Thus, according to the above configuration, it is possible to create an attractive effect by both the shaped object and the image related to the shaped object.

  Further, the screen sheet 1056 has a diffusion layer for diffusing light, and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a shape that is convex on the incident surface side are arranged. Thereby, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and in combination with the three-dimensional object disposed on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, attractive rendering can be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the character shape of “GOD”, “GOD” is displayed by displaying an image corresponding to the characters “GOD” on the screen sheet 1056. It can create the appearance that the character is sparkling. Further, the center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiated light emitted from the vicinity of the optical axis of the projection lens) enters the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is disposed at a position away from the view angle center However, by providing the prism layer having a high light collecting effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the luminance of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056. In the same manner as the screen sheet 1057, a half mirror may be disposed on the front side of the screen sheet 1056.

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member as viewed from the front. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of a cross section of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the front.

  FIG. 74 shows the light guide plate 106, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 with the light guide member 1062 removed from the assembled state. . In FIG. 75, the light guide plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD 100, and the light guide member 1062 are slightly displaced from the assembled state of the lower frame UD 100 in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062. Is shown enlarged. In FIG. 76, the light guide plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are enlarged in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 in a state where they are cut along a horizontal plane. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the indirect lighting unit 1060 is disposed along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED substrate 1061 and a light guide member 1062.

  The LED substrate 1061 is disposed substantially parallel to the side surface portion 1045c at each of the slightly left side of the right side portion UD100c of the lower frame UD100 and the slightly left side of the left side portion UD100d . On the LED substrate 1061, a plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 disposed in the vicinity of the right side UD 100c is installed to emit light in the right direction, and the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 disposed in the vicinity of the left side UD 100d is It is installed to emit light. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged such that a portion thereof overlaps with the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 in a side view, but the installation position of the LED 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c The light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side surface portion 1045c. The LED substrate 1061 is disposed slightly apart from the side surface portion 1045c.

  The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and a plurality of inward opening openings 1062a are formed in the vertical direction. Screw holes 1062 b are formed in the upper and lower portions of the light guide member 1062, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED substrate 1061 by screws inserted through the screw holes 1061 b formed in the LED substrate 1061. Be done. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 1061 a passes through the opening 1062 a and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062.

  Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by screws inserted through the screw holes 1062c formed in the upper part and the screw holes UD100f formed in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. Be done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the light guide member 1062 is formed with a plurality of openings 1062d opened in the front direction in the vertical direction. The opening 1062 a shown in FIG. 74 and the opening 1062 d shown in FIG. 75 communicate with each other in the inside of the light guide member 1062. Further, in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100, a plurality of openings UD100g penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the vertical direction. Accordingly, in the state where the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061 a passes through the opening 1062 a of the light guiding member 1062 and enters the inside of the light guiding member 1062, then changes its traveling direction from sideways to forward and passes through the opening 1062 d of the light guiding member 1062. , And discharged from the opening UD100g of the right side portion UD100c (the left side portion UD100d) in the forward direction. Arrows in FIG. 76 indicate the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045. The rear end of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) and the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c have substantially the same position in the front-rear direction, and the length in the front-rear direction of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) is the side surface It is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction in the portion 1045c. Although not shown, a cabinet G is disposed on the back side of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) approaches (substantially contacts) the rear end of the right side UD 100c (left side UD 100 d), and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side UD 100 c (left side UD 100 d) It is positioned on substantially the same plane.

  The indirect lighting unit 1060 is disposed along the side surface portion 1045 c of the light transmitting plate 1045 so as to have the above-described positional relationship with the peripheral members. And the light radiate | emitted from LED1061a will be discharge | released along the side part 1045c of the light transmission board 1045 ahead. As described with reference to FIG. 72, the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046, and an image is not displayed on the portion (hatched portion in FIG. 72). Such an impression can be given to the player. In the present embodiment, the portion where the image is displayed and the image are displayed due to the light of the LED 1061a being emitted (along the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045) from the portion where such an image is not displayed. It is possible to emphasize the boundary with the unintended portion and to give the player a more noticeable impression that the image is floating.

<Installation of upper door mechanism UD to cabinet G>
FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side projecting member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a side perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side projecting member. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the cabinet, the hook portion, and the front side projecting member as viewed from the side. FIG. 80 is a right side view of a cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from below. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

  FIG. 77 shows the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120 removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 78 shows the hook portion UD120 attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front side protruding member G120 removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 79 shows that the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hook portion UD120, and the front side protruding member G120 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. In order to make it easy to understand, in FIG. 80, the hook portion UD120 and the front side projecting member G120 are indicated by oblique lines. FIG. 81 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 82 shows that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are not assembled, as viewed from different directions, and the lower door mechanism DD is observed from an angle closer to the side. doing. FIG. 83 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G.

  The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by the hook portion UD120 and the front side projecting member G120.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the hook portion UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b whose lower side is opened is formed on the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed in the surface orthogonal to the main surface UD120a of the hook portion UD120, and the hook portion UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. By fixing hook portion UD120 to upper frame UD110, main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

  The front side projecting member G120 is formed by bending the horizontally disposed main surface G120a, the front end central portion G120b formed by bending the vicinity of the front end center of the main surface G120a upward, and the right front end of the main surface G120a upwards. The front end right side G120c formed, the front end left side G120d formed by bending the front left side of the main surface G120a upward, the front end of the main surface G120a upward between the front end central portion G120b and the front right side G120c And a left mounting portion G120f formed by bending the front end of the main surface G120a upward and backward between the right mounting portion G120e formed by bending backward and the front end central portion G120b and the front end left side portion G120d And a rear side formed by bending the rear of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a downward Includes a 120g, the.

  The front end right side G120c and the front end left side G120d are formed rearward of the front end center G120b, and the heights of the front end center G120b, the front right end G120c, and the front left end G120d are substantially the same. The right placement portion G120e and the left placement portion G120f are formed rearward of the front right portion G120c and the front left portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right placement portion G120e and the left placement portion G120f are The heights are substantially the same, and are higher than the heights of the front end center portion G120b, the front end right side portion G120c, and the front end left side portion G120d. Further, the right placement portion G120e and the left placement portion G120f have surfaces horizontally arranged.

  The rear side G120g is formed with a screw hole G120h, and the front side projecting member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside by a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, by fixing the front side protruding member G120 to the cabinet G, the front portion of the main surface UD120a (front end center portion G120b, front end right portion G120c, front end left portion G120d, right The mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f project forward from the cabinet G).

  On the other hand, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side surface wall G2) projecting inward is provided on the inner surface of the side surface wall G2 of the cabinet G, and the hook portion UD120 The notch UD 120b is hooked on the inner side projecting member G2a. Thus, the hook portion UD120 is locked to the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the lower frame UD100 includes a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing the lower side of the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 69). On the lower side surface UD100h, a plurality of downward protruding portions UD100i protruding downward are formed. The lower protruding portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and extends forward from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 69) is formed at the rear end of the lower protruding portion UD100i.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the lower door mechanism DD includes an upper plate DD100 horizontally disposed in the left and right direction at the upper portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 83, when the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is of the lower protrusion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is close to the front end.

  When the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, in order to attach the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (close the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G), first, the upper frame While placing the lower surface of the upper wall of the UD 110 on the upper surfaces of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f of the front side projecting member G120, the notch UD120b of the hook portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface projecting member G2a. In this state, by closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD abuts on the lower protrusion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward. Be Thereby, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed to the cabinet G.

  In the present embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for connecting to the cabinet G. In the case where the hinge is provided, the range in which the image can be displayed on the side portion of the gaming machine is limited. However, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the upper portion is limited by the absence of the hinge. A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear ends of the left and right curved portions 1045b of the light transmission plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range in the left-right direction of the light projected from the projector 9020 Becomes possible. This makes it possible to perform a powerful presentation on a large screen.

  Further, although three screens of the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 are provided, as in the third embodiment, information representing an image displayed on each screen is made into one image data. If it contains (refer FIG. 62 and FIG. 63), an image can be displayed on each of three screens by using the said one image data.

  In the state where upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between upper door mechanism UD and cabinet G (see FIG. 80), but foreign matter enters from the gap. Even in the case where the front side projecting member G120 is present, the foreign matter can be prevented from entering the inside of the cabinet G more.

Fifth Embodiment
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to fourth embodiments is applicable also in the fifth embodiment.

<Irradiation range of light and arrangement position of screen>
FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the gaming machine from the front with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed. FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the projector apparatus from which light is projected, viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIG. 84, inside the cabinet G, the irradiation unit B is disposed. Similar to the first embodiment (refer to FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 for emitting irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 for reflecting irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2 and a mirror And a projector cover B1 accommodating the mechanism B3.

  The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed not in front of the projector device B2 but above the projector device B2 (see FIG. 88). . As in the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7).

  In the present embodiment, the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) has an inclination such that the rear side is lower than the front side, corresponding to the shape and the formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. It is arranged above. In addition, since the structure of mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having a tilt (a steeper tilt than the optical mirror B32) such that the rear side is lower than the front side.

  Accordingly, light projected from the projector device B2 and traveled upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). In FIG. 85, the irradiation range of light is indicated by oblique lines. As in the fourth embodiment, all light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment, and light projected from the projector device B2 is a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). The light is incident from the rear (rear side) with respect to each of the above, and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjustment of traveling direction of irradiated light>
FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the side. FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the rear.

  As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being covered by the case B22 (see FIG. 12).

  Specifically, square holes 2201 c are provided in the right and left portions of the upper pedestal B 220 (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by an attachment screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c. FIG. 16 shows that the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c, but in the present embodiment, the mounting screw T is from above the square hole 2201c (the screw head is on the upper back side) Like) inserted. The upper pedestal B220 may be attached to another member fixed inside the cabinet G instead of the projector cover B1.

  The lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening from below. Be The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, a case B22 (see FIG. 22) having a rectangular box shape is employed. The case B22 accommodates the lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), which is an internal component of the projector device B2, an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, a suction fan, and the like. (See FIG. 12) is fixed.

  Here, the vertical and horizontal internal diameter of the rectangular hole 2201 c formed in the upper pedestal B <b> 220 is larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. Thus, the attachment position of the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and in the front-rear direction. The details of the method of adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 16, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). . Thereby, the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 can adjust the distance between each other in the connecting portions R 1, R 2, R 3. The connecting portions R1, R2 and R3 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper side in each of the connecting portions R1, R2 and R3 By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the inclination in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. The details of the method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 in each connecting portion R 1, R 2, R 3 are the same as described with reference to FIG.

  By using such upper pedestal B 220 and lower pedestal B 221, the in-plane position of upper pedestal B 220 relative to projector cover B 1 can be appropriately adjusted, and projector device B 2 can be disposed at an appropriate position. . In addition, it is possible to appropriately adjust the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220, and the posture of the case B22 (a lens unit B21 or the like which is an internal component of the projector device B2) supported by the lower pedestal B221. It can be made appropriate. As described above, the projector device B2 is configured to be able to adjust the emission position, the traveling direction, and the irradiation range of the irradiation light by changing the position and the attitude in the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are disposed rearward of the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is open. Thus, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed rearward. Although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted in the square hole 2201 c of the upper pedestal B 220 is also exposed rearward.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is disposed above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are open.

  An angle adjustment hole B111 (see FIG. 9) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11. A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 from the upper side (rear side). As described in the first embodiment, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw. Thereby, the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 is changed, and the reflection angle (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted It is possible.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 88 is a longitudinal sectional view of a cabinet. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 90 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the back wall. 91 is a partial enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 94 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine in a state where the closing lid is attached to the back wall.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the state where the irradiation unit B is disposed inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 are disposed behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221 The connecting portions R1, R2 and R3 are positioned to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned to face the closing lid G100. Behind the upper pedestal B220, a space in which no other member exists is formed.

  Further, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is disposed at the upper rear of the cabinet G. Above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, a space in which no other member exists is formed, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220. In FIG. 88, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is indicated by oblique lines.

  The irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3 by screw fastening. As shown in FIG. 87, screw holes B100a-d for inserting screws are formed at the rear of the projector cover B1. In a state where the irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3, the surface B110a in which the screw hole B100a is formed, the surface B110b in which the screw hole B100b is formed, and the surface B110c in which the screw holes B100c and d are formed , Respectively in contact with the inner surface (surface on the front side) of the back wall G3. These surfaces B110a-c are formed separately from each other, whereby the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the space behind the upper pedestal B220 and the space above and behind the reflector holding portion B11 are open. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 89, an operation window G10 is formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening that allows the inside of the cabinet G to be viewed from the outside. The operation window G10 can be closed by the closing lid G100.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in a state in which the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3, when viewed from the rear, connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 via the operation window G10. , R3 (in particular, the nut 2213, see FIG. 17), and the head (not shown) of the mounting screw T inserted in the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 are visible through the operation window G10. Thus, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the projector device B2 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213. In addition, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the rectangular hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2 Can be adjusted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91, in the state where the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3, looking up near the operation window G10 from below the back side, the angle of the reflector holding portion B11 through the operation window G10. The head (not shown) of the screw inserted into the adjustment hole B111 can also be visually recognized. Thus, the screw can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the screw.

  Hereinafter, the structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described. FIG. 92 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 93 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 viewed obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the operation window G10 has an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer surface of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G at the periphery of the opening G10a (rear side Of the peripheral portion G10b, four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral portion G10b, and the outer edge and rear wall of the peripheral portion G10b. And a connecting portion G10d connecting the outer surface of G3. As shown in FIG. 93, although the peripheral portion G10b can not be seen from the front, since the screw hole G10c penetrates the back wall G3, it can also be confirmed from the front, and in FIG. It is shown that a screw hole G10c is formed on the side.

  The operation window G10 configured as described above forms, in other words, a concave portion recessed with respect to the outer side surface of the back wall G3, and a shape in which an opening is formed by penetrating most of the concave portion. Have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and a portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral portion G10b. The peripheral portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (surface in the vertical direction) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connection portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

  The closure lid G100 is configured as a plate-like member, and has a back surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A portion G100c and a peripheral portion G100d formed to be forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

  The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral portion G10b), and the opening G10a of the operation window G10 Is also getting bigger. Thus, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 so as to fill the recess). It has become.

  More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is disposed so that the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 is along the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operation window G10 and the closing The four bosses G100c of the lid G100 overlap with each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss G100c. In this state, the closure lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing the screw having the screw hole G10c inserted from the front side (the inside of the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss G100c. Be Thereby, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. And since the screw for fastening the closure lid G100 to the back wall G3 is screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), security for the inside of the cabinet G is achieved. Can be secured.

  In addition, when adjusting the position and posture of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screw that fastens the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 with the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD open is used. The screw fastening may be released by operating from the front side and turning appropriately. Thus, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be made to appear. In this state, the attachment is inserted from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a into the connecting portion R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 or the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220. By operating the screw T and the screw inserted in the angle adjustment hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11), the position and posture of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

  Here, in the closure lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral portion G100d (protrusion length of the peripheral portion G100d with respect to the front surface G100b) and the front end of the front surface G100b to the tip of the boss portion G100c The length to the end (the height of the boss G100c) is equal to that. Therefore, when the closure lid G100 is disposed such that the front end of the peripheral edge G100d of the closure lid G100 abuts on the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss G100c of the closure lid G100 is also for operation It abuts on the peripheral portion G10b of the window G10.

  FIG. 94 shows that the closing lid G100 is disposed in such a state. In FIG. 94, the hatched portion indicates the closing lid G100 (front surface G100b), and the hatched portion indicates the back wall G3 (peripheral of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the shaded portion (the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100) and the hatched portion (the periphery of the opening G10a), and the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the space S It corresponds to “protrusion length of the peripheral portion G100d to the front” and “height of the boss portion G100c”.

  By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the back wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (the front end of the peripheral portion G100 d) and the back wall G3 (operation window G10) It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the peripheral portion G10b) and to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed through the gap.

  Further, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 is formed to have a level difference with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 by the length of the connection portion G10d in the front-rear direction, the peripheral edge of the closure lid G100 The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (protrusion length of the peripheral portion G100d with respect to the back surface G100a) substantially matches the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (operation window The length of the connecting portion G10d of G10 is slightly shorter than the length in the front-rear direction). The length in the front-rear direction of the peripheral portion G100d of the closure lid G100 and the length in the front-rear direction of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 are each a fixed length over the entire circumference. Thus, in a state where the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the back surface G100a of the closing lid G100 constitutes substantially the same plane as the outside surface of the back wall G3 (slightly smaller than the outside surface of the back wall G3 Of the closure lid G100 is difficult to recognize in appearance.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector is known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-035066 and 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, the video for gaming is projected from the projector onto the projection surface such as the screen, whereby the video is displayed on the screen or the like instead of the liquid crystal display device.

  However, conventionally, in a gaming machine on which such a projector is mounted, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it is difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing adjustment with respect to the projector with the projector mounted inside.

  In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) screen (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
A projector for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 etc.));
Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of light projected by the projector (a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221, a mounting portion of the upper pedestal B 220 to the projector cover B1, a mirror mechanism Mounting portion of B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, and the like)
And a housing (cabinet G) for housing the projector,
An opening (an opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached to the housing portion Yes,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the housing unit (cabinet G) for housing the projector (the internal components of the projector device B2 (the lens unit B21 etc.)) includes the internal components of the projector (the projector device B2) Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of light projected by (lens unit B21 etc.) (joints R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, projector cover B1 of upper pedestal B220) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc. can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) A closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the housing portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) appears. The connection portion R1, R2, R3 of the adjustment portion (upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). The mounting portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, and the like can be operated. Thus, even after the projector (the internal component (lens unit B21 etc. of the projector apparatus B2)) is fixed inside the housing (cabinet G), the projector (the internal component (lens unit B21 of the projector apparatus B2) Etc.) from the outside of the accommodation unit (cabinet G) with the attachment unit (cabinet G) attached to the inside of the accommodation unit (cabinet G), the connection unit R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 By operating the attachment portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc., the projection is performed by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 etc.)) Control the direction of travel of the

(10-2) screen (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
A projector for projecting light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 etc.));
Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of light projected by the projector (a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221, a mounting portion of the upper pedestal B 220 to the projector cover B1, a mirror mechanism Mounting portion of B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, and the like)
A main body (cabinet G) for housing the projector and having an opening on the front surface;
And an open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body portion so as to be openable / closable and provided with a display area for making an image displayed on the screen visible.
An opening (an opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside separately from the front surface, and the closing member (closing lid capable of closing the opening) G100) is attached,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the main body (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (the internal component (lens unit B21 etc. of the projector device B2) is an internal component of the projector (the projector device B2) Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of light projected by (lens unit B21 etc.) (joints R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, projector cover B1 of upper pedestal B220) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc. can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) A closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) appears. From the outside of the main body (cabinet G) through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10), the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the adjustment portion (the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). The mounting portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, and the like can be operated. Thereby, even after the projector (the internal component (lens unit B21 etc. of the projector device B2)) is fixed to the inside of the main body (cabinet G), the projector (the internal component (lens unit B21 of the projector device B2) Etc.) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) while the main body (cabinet G) is attached to the adjustment part (the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, connecting portions R1, R2, R3, upper side) By operating the attachment portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc., the projection is performed by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 etc.)) Control the direction of travel of the

(10-3) The gaming machine according to (10-2) above,
The closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing the inner side of the main body.
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to release the screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the closing member (closing lid G100) from being removed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), and while securing the security to the inside of the main body (cabinet G), It is possible to prevent unauthorized conduct from the outside of the main body (cabinet G).

  In the present invention, the method for attaching the closing member (closing lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is formed from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). The screw may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) or may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for sliding (sliding) the closing member (closing lid G100) along the wall surface (inner side surface or outer side surface of the back wall G3) of the main body (cabinet G) The back wall G3 may be formed in a rail shape inside or outside, and the closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. A closed state and an opening (operation window) in which the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) sliding on the guide member in the left and right direction (or front and back direction) If it is configured to be switched to the open state in which the opening G10a) of G10 is opened, it is possible to operate the adjustment part from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, as in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such effects, in the present invention, the configuration of the closing member (closing lid G100) is not essential, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is not attached to the main body (cabinet G). The opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the (cabinet G) may be always open.

  In the fifth embodiment, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in any wall surface (for example, the back wall G3, the side wall G2, the upper surface wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G). It is possible to constitute so that a member (closure lid G100) may be attached. For example, instead of providing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be provided in the side wall G2 or the top wall G4, and a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. In such a configuration, the adjustment portion (for example, the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3 The attachment portion to the holding portion B11 or the like may be disposed in the vicinity of the side wall G2 or the upper surface wall G4. When the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in the upper surface wall G4 and the closing member (the closing lid G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 1) Alternatively, the configuration corresponding to the opening G10a of the operation window G10 and the closure lid G10 is adopted while not forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. You may do it.

  Also, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is formed in a plurality of wall surfaces (for example, two or three of the back wall G3, the side wall G2 and the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). And the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. For example, an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, the connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 And the like, while providing the opening G10a of the operation window G10 on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching the closing lid G10, while adjusting the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3. The opening G10a of the operation window G10 is provided on the top wall G4 of the cabinet G and the closing lid G10 is attached so that the portion (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside You may do it.

  Moreover, while providing several opening (opening G10a of window G10 for operation) in one wall surface (for example, back surface wall G3, side wall G2, or upper surface wall G4) of a main-body part (cabinet G), each opening is It is also possible to attach a closable closing member (closing lid G100). For example, an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, the connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 Of the mirror mechanism B3 while providing the first opening near the center of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching the first closing lid which can close the first opening, so that A second opening is provided above the first opening so that an adjustment portion (for example, a mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) for adjusting the position (posture) can be operated from the outside A second closing lid may be provided which can be provided and close the second opening. In the case of providing a plurality of openings, the number of closing members that can individually close each opening may be attached, or only one closing member that can simultaneously close a plurality of openings may be attached.

  When performing such adjustment from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) is made to facilitate the operation for adjustment. When viewed, members to be adjusted (for example, nuts 2213 at the connecting portions R1, R2 and R3 between the upper pedestal B 220 and the lower pedestal B 221, and mounting screws T inserted into the square holes 2201 c of the upper pedestal B 220) It is desirable that the member is disposed such that a screw or the like inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 can be visually recognized through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) (FIG. 90) reference). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, all the plurality of members can be visually recognized when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) (For example, it is desirable to arrange so that it may become visible in the upper pedestal B220 entirely). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) has a diameter larger than the distance between these members (the distance between the members being the farthest) You should do it. This makes it easy to make adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted is visible through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) It is not essential to For example, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjustment hole B111 of a member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11) When the member can be visually recognized when looking into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) while changing the angle even if the screw inserted in the) can not be seen (see FIG. 91), If a space where no other member is present is formed between the member and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10), the member can be operated from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (such as an adjusting screw or nut) and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

  In the embodiment described above, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into the upper space and the lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the display unit A (irradiation to the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD) is irradiated. It has been described that the control board (the main control board MS, the sub control device SS, etc.) is accommodated in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) while the unit B) is accommodated (see FIG. 5) ). However, in the present invention, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) does not have to be divided into the upper space and the lower space, and the space in which the projector (irradiation unit B) is accommodated and the control board (main control board MS or sub It is not necessary to distinguish the space in which the control device SS etc. is accommodated. For example, the control board (the main control board MS or the sub control device SS) may be disposed in the rear space (see FIG. 88) of the reflector holding portion B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1. Thus, the space in the main body (cabinet G) can be effectively used, and the phenomenon that heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub controller SS) is trapped in the lower space can be alleviated. . Note that the open / close door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) or may be composed of one door.

Sixth Embodiment
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to fifth embodiments is applicable also in the sixth embodiment.

[Pachislot functional flow]
First, referring to FIG. 95, a functional flow of the gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a pachislo) in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a pachi-slot function flow.

  In the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing a game. In addition to the medals, coins, gaming balls, point data or tokens for gaming may be applied as gaming media.

  When medals are inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitting display along the later-described winning determination line is determined. It should be noted that as a type of combination of symbols, there are provided one related to the "winning" in which the player is given a privilege such as payout of medals, the operation of replay, etc. and the other related to so-called "loss". There is.

  Subsequently, after the reels (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) are rotated, when the player presses the stop button, the reel stop control means determines that the internal winning combination and the stop button Control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed based on the pressed timing.

  Here, in the pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is called "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is determined to be four symbols.

  When an internal winning combination permitting display of a combination of symbols relating to winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the prescribed time to display the combination of the symbols as much as possible along the prize determination line Stop the rotation of the reels. On the other hand, for the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the rotation of the reel is stopped so as not to be displayed along the winning determination line using the above-mentioned prescribed time.

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the prize determination means determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the prize determination line relates to a prize. When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. A series of flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine.

  In the present specification, the first stop operation of the reel (operation of the stop button), which is performed first when all the reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) are rotating, is referred to as the first stop operation. The stop operation performed subsequent to the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Moreover, in the pachislot, various effects are performed using the display of an image performed by a display unit, the output of light performed by various LEDs, the output of sound performed by a speaker, or a combination of these in the above-described series of flows. It will be.

  When the player operates the start lever, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines by lottery the one to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the effect content is determined, the effect execution means is interlocked with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when the determination of the presence or absence of winning is performed. Proceed with the execution of the production. In this way, in the pachislot, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the presentation contents corresponding to the internal winning combination. Thus, the interest of the player can be improved.

[Control system equipped with pachislot]
Next, a control system included in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97.

  As described in the first embodiment, the gaming machine 1 includes the main control board MS and the sub control device SS. The main control board MS constitutes a main control circuit 3060. The main control circuit 3060 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The sub controller SS configures a sub control circuit 3070. The sub control circuit 3070 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying a video or the like.

  Hereinafter, specific configurations of the main control circuit 3060 and the sub control circuit 3070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97.

<Main control circuit>
First, the main control circuit 3060 configured by the main control board MS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a main control circuit.

  The main control circuit 3060 mainly includes a microcomputer 3030 installed on the main control substrate MS. The microcomputer 3030 includes a main CPU 3031, a main ROM 3032 and a main RAM 3033.

  The main ROM 3032 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 3031, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub control circuit 3070, and the like. The main RAM 3033 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 3034, a frequency divider 3035, a random number generator 3036 and a sampling circuit 3037 are connected to the main CPU 3031. The clock pulse generation circuit 3034 and the frequency divider 3035 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 3031 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 3036 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 3037 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  A switch or the like is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 3030. The main CPU 3031 receives an input such as a switch and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R. The stop switch 3007S (stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) detects that each of the three stop buttons DD7 (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 3006S detects that the player has operated the start lever DD6 (start operation).

  The medal sensor 3005S detects that the medal accepted by the medal insertion slot DD5 has passed through the inside of the selector. In addition, the C / P switch 3013S detects that the C / P button DD13 has been pressed by the player.

  The BET switch 3008S detects that the player has pressed the BET button. As the BET button, in addition to the maximum BET button DD8 described in the first embodiment, a 1-BET button is provided. As described above, when the maximum bet button DD8 is pressed once, "3" is selected as the number of medals inserted. On the other hand, when the 1-BET button is pressed once, "1" is selected as the number of inserted medals, and when the 1-BET button is pressed twice, "2" is selected as the number of inserted medals. When the BET button is pressed three times, "3" is selected as the number of medals inserted. When the bet button (maximum bet button DD8 or 1-bet button) is pressed to insert a number of medals necessary to play one game, a winning determination line described later is activated.

  As peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 3030, there are stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, 3049R and a hopper mechanism HP. Also, a circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 3030.

  The drive control board RU114 controls driving of stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R provided corresponding to the respective reels (reels RL, RC, and RR). The reel position detection circuit 3050 detects a reference position (a first reference position and a second reference position) every time the reels RL, RC, and RR make a half turn by an optical sensor (sensor unit RU112) having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. Do.

  The stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R have a configuration in which the amount of movement is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. The driving forces of the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R are transmitted to the reels RL, RC, and RR via gears having predetermined reduction ratios. The reels RL, RC, and RR rotate at a constant angle each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R.

  The main CPU3031 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R after detecting the reference position, whereby the rotation angles of the reels RL, RC, and RR (mainly, the number of symbols on the reels) Whether or not it has been rotated) is managed, and the positions of the respective symbols arranged on the surfaces of the reels RL, RC, RR are managed.

  The hopper drive circuit 3041 controls the operation of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 3051 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 3040S provided in the hopper mechanism HP, and checks whether the medals discharged from the hopper mechanism HP to the outside have reached the number of payouts. Do.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 3070 configured by the sub control device SS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a sub control circuit.

  The sub control circuit 3070 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 3060, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control circuit 3060. The sub control circuit 3070 basically includes sub CPU 3071, sub ROM 3072, sub RAM 3073, rendering processor 3074, rendering RAM 3075, driver 3076, DSP (digital signal processor) 3077, audio RAM 3078, A / D converter 3079 and amplifier 3080. Is composed including.

  The sub CPU 3071 controls the output of video, sound and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 3072 according to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 3060. The sub RAM 3073 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 3060. The sub ROM 3072 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The program storage area stores a control program to be executed by the sub CPU 3071. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 3060, and an effect registration task for extracting effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers and effect registration tasks A projection mapping control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit A based on the determined effect contents, an LED control task for controlling light output by the LED, a voice control task for controlling sound output by the speakers DD25L, DD25R, etc. Is included.

  The data storage area is a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects A storage area, a storage area for storing LED data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  The sub control circuit 3070 includes, as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled, a projector B2, a drive motor E25 forming the front screen drive mechanism E2, a drive motor F24 forming the reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a liquid crystal display device The DD 20, the speakers DD 25L and DD 25R, and the LED board are connected.

  The projector device B2 controls a light source, three liquid crystal panels corresponding to red, green and blue, which are three primary colors of light, a lens for enlarging and emitting light transmitted through the liquid crystal panel, a light source and the liquid crystal panel And a control unit for controlling the transmission type liquid crystal projector. The control unit controls lighting and extinguishing of the light source based on an instruction from the sub CPU 3071 and performs control to apply a driving voltage according to image data to each pixel of the liquid crystal panel.

  The sub CPU 3071 controls the projector device B2 to emit light including an image from the lens, thereby any one of the plurality of screens (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1). Display the image on the screen of.

  As described in the first embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively.

  The sub CPU 3071 rotates the front screen mechanism E1 in a predetermined range by controlling the drive motor E25, and rotates the reel screen mechanism F1 in a predetermined range by controlling the drive motor F24.

  The sensor mechanism CS (sensors CS1 to CS3) is connected to the sub control circuit 3070, and the sub CPU 3071 determines the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 based on the signals output from the sensors CS1 to CS3. Is properly managed. This prevents the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

  The sub CPU 3071, the rendering processor 3074, the drawing RAM 3075 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 3076 create an image according to the animation data specified by the rendering content, and display the created image by the liquid crystal display device DD 20.

  The sub CPU 3071, the DSP 3077, the audio RAM 3078, the A / D converter 3079, and the amplifier 3080 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers DD 25 L and DD 25 R according to sound data specified by the contents of the effect.

  Further, the sub CPU 3071 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED via the LED substrate in accordance with the LED data specified by the contents of the effect.

<Transition flow of gaming state>
FIG. 98 (a) is a diagram showing transition transition of the gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 98 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment, a gaming state (main) and a gaming state (sub) are provided. The gaming state (main) is a gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 3060. The game state (sub) is a game state controlled by the sub control circuit 3070. FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are diagrams for explaining the gaming state (main) of these gaming states. In the present specification, the gaming state (main) is simply described as a gaming state, and the gaming state (sub) is also described as a sub gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 98 (a) is managed by the main control circuit 3060. The gaming state (main) is classified into any of a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state. The bonus non-winning condition is a condition in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated (winning). The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated. The bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  In the present embodiment, BB gaming state and MB gaming state are provided as bonus states, and 7 BB gaming state and bird BB gaming state are provided as BB gaming states. "F_7BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 7BB gaming state, and "F_bird BB" is provided as the bonus combination corresponding to the bird BB gaming state, and a bonus corresponding to the MB gaming state As a role, "F_MB" is provided (see FIGS. 101A to 101C).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT0 gaming state is provided as the bonus non-winning state, and the 7BB inter-flag state, the bird BB inter-flag state, and the MB inter-flag state are provided as inter-flag states. In the following, the bonus non-winning state and the state between flags may be collectively referred to as a general gaming state.

  Specifically, referring to FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), when “F — 7BB” is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state (when the internal winning combination is made), the main control circuit 3060 The gaming state is shifted from the RT0 gaming state to the state between the 7BB flags (see transition condition (1)). Also, in the RT0 gaming state, when “F_Bird BB” is determined as an internal winning combination (when internal winning is won), the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the state between the bird BB flags ( Transition conditions (see (2)). In addition, when “F_MB” is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state (when internal winning is won), the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the state between the MB flags (transition condition ( See 3).

  “F — 7BB” (7BB), “F — bird BB” (bird BB), and “F_MB” (MB) are so-called carryover roles (see FIG. 119 (a)). When 7BB is won internally, 7BB is internally won until the combination of symbols corresponding to 7BB (“C_red 7” shown in FIG. 100A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until 7BB is won). Be carried over. The 7BB inter-flag state is a state in which the state in which 7BB is internally won is carried over. Similarly, when the bird BB wins inside, the bird combination ("C_bird 7" shown in FIG. 100A) corresponding to the bird BB is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until the bird BB wins), the bird The internal winning status of BB is carried over. The inter-bird-BB-flag state is a state in which a state in which the bird BB is internally won is carried over. In addition, when MB is won internally, until the combination of symbols corresponding to MB ("C_BAR" or "C_ Bird BAR" shown in FIG. 100A) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until MB wins), MB The internal winning state is carried over. The state between the MB flags is a state in which the internal winning state of the MB is carried over.

  When the symbol combination "C_Red7" (see FIG. 100A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the 7BB flag state (when 7BB is won), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the 7BB flag state. Transition the gaming state to the 7BB gaming state (see transition condition (4)). In addition, when the combination of symbols related to “C_bird 7” (see FIG. 100A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when bird BB wins) in the state between birds and BB flags, the main control circuit 3060 controls the bird The gaming state is shifted from the state between BB flags to the bird BB gaming state (see transition condition (5)). In addition, when the combination of symbols relating to "C_BAR" or "C_ Bird BAR" (see FIG. 100A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when MB wins) in the state between MB flags, the main control circuit 3060 , MB flag state to transition the gaming state from MB gaming state (see transition condition (6)).

  In this specification, the 7BB gaming state and the bird BB gaming state may not be distinguished, and these may be collectively referred to simply as the BB gaming state. When medals exceeding the prescribed number (344) are paid out in the BB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the BB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (7)). Further, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (119) are paid out in the MB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (8)).

[Data table stored in main ROM]
99 to 117 show various data tables stored in the main ROM 3032.

<Symbol arrangement table>
FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 99 (a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC and the right reel RR. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to each of the symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotational direction in each of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  As a kind of pattern, "red 7", "bird", "BAR", "feather", "plum", "grape 1", "grape 2", "cherry 1", "cherry 2" and "blank" Contains.

  Here, “Grape 1” and “Grape 2” only need to be distinguishable that the main CPU 3031 internally has a different pattern, and in the present embodiment, the player can recognize like the same pattern. Design. Similarly, “Cherry 1” and “Cherry 2” may be identified as being different internally by the main CPU 3031, respectively, and in the present embodiment, the same symbol and the player can be recognized respectively. Design.

<Symbol code table>
FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), each symbol arranged on each reel RL, RC, RR is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, it is distinguished by data of 1 byte (8 bits) Ru. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 99 (b) represents a symbol code as data for specifying a symbol disposed on the surface of the three reels RL, RC, RR.

  For example, although the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 99 (a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel RL, middle reel RC and right reel RR, the main ROM 3032 is actually The symbol arrangement table stored in the table represents an arrangement of symbol codes specifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC and the right reel RR.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the gaming machine 1 are “red 7”, “bird”, “BAR”, “feathers”, “plum”, “grapes 1”, “grapes 2”, “red 7” as described above. There are ten types of "cherry 1", "cherry 2" and "blank".

  In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as a symbol code for the "red 7" symbol. Also, "2" is assigned as a symbol code for the "bird" symbol. Also, "3" is assigned as a symbol code for the "BAR" symbol.

  Similarly, "4" to "10" are assigned as symbol codes for each symbol of "feather", "plum", "grape 1", "grape 2", "cherry 1", "cherry 2" and "blank" It is done.

<Symbol combination table>
100A and 100B are diagrams showing a symbol combination table.

  The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the number of medals paid out (payout number) when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. ing. As for the symbol combination, a symbol on the left reel RL, a symbol on the middle reel RC, and a symbol on the right reel RR are shown in order from the left. The names given to each combination are also shown. With regard to the payout number of medals, the number of payouts when one-on-one game is played (payout when one-on-one), the number of payouts when two-on-one game is played (payout on two-on-one), These figures respectively show the number of payouts (payout when taking a 3-piece game) when a 3-card game is performed.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state and the state between flags) is set as one or three, and the number of medals that can be inserted in the BB gaming state is set as one. The number of medals that can be inserted in the MB gaming state is set as two. In this specification, a unit game played by inserting one medal is referred to as a single game, and a unit game performed by inserting two medals is referred to as a two game, 3 A unit game played by inserting a medal may be referred to as a three-card game.

  The valid line is an activated winning determination line (a line to be subjected to the determination of whether or not it is a winning). In the present embodiment, the winning determination line is defined as follows as a line formed on the main display window DD4. When rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR provided behind the main display window DD4 is stopped, the main display window DD4 is an upper stage within the frame of a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each of the reels RL, RC, and RR. One symbol (3 in total) is displayed in each of the middle and lower areas.

  As a prize determination line, a middle line area of left reel RL, a middle line area of middle reel RC, and a pseudo line connecting middle line area of right reel RR (middle line-middle line-middle line: center line), upper line of left reel RL Area, upper line area of middle reel RC, and pseudo line connecting upper line area of right reel RR (upper line-upper line-upper line: top line), lower area of left reel RL, lower area of middle reel RC, The pseudo line connecting the lower area of the right reel RR (lower-lower-lower: bottom line), the upper area of the left reel RL, the middle area of the middle reel RC, and the pseudo area connecting the lower area of the right reel RR Line (upper-middle-lower: cross-down line), lower region of left reel RL, middle region of middle reel RC, and pseudo line connecting upper region of right reel RR (lower-middle -Upper stage: cross-up line), lower stage area of left reel RL, middle stage area of middle reel RC, and pseudo line connecting lower stage area of right reel RR (lower stage-middle stage-lower stage), and left reel RL A lower line area, a middle line area of the middle reel RC, and a pseudo line (lower line-middle line-middle line) connecting the middle line area of the right reel RR are set.

  As described above, the winning determination line is activated by the insertion of a medal. Specifically, when three medals are inserted in the general gaming state, five winning judgment lines ("middle-middle-middle: center line", "upper-upper-upper: top line", "lower-lower lower") -Bottom: Bottom line, "Upper-Middle-Bottom: Crossdown line", and "Lower-Middle-Top: Cross-up line" are activated. When two medals are inserted in the MB gaming state, five winning judgment lines ("middle-middle-middle: center line", "upper-middle-lower: cross down line", "lower-middle-upper: "Cross-up line", "lower-middle-lower", and "lower-middle-middle" are activated. When one medal is inserted in the general gaming state or the BB gaming state, one winning judgment is made. A line ("middle-middle-middle: center line") is activated. In the present specification, a winning judgment line activated in this manner is called an activated line.

  The symbol combination table shown in FIG. 100A and FIG. 100B is a combination of symbols identified by storage area identification data represented by 18 bytes (hereinafter referred to as "combination"), 1 sheet, 2 sheets and 3 sheets When the combination is displayed on the effective line, the payout numbers of medals are associated with each other. In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 100A and 100B, each combination is briefly described in order to make the invention easy to understand.

  For example, a combination of "red 7-red 7-red 7" called "C_red 7" does not pay out medals when displayed along the effective line, but has won a BB actuating role. Represents That is, when "C_Red 7" is displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the 7BB gaming state. When the combination of "bird-bird-red 7" called "C_bird 7" is displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bird BB gaming state.

  The combination of "BAR-BAR-BAR" called "C-- BAR" indicates that, when displayed along the activated line, there is no payout of medals, but the player who has won the MB's accompaniment role. That is, when "C_BAR" is displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the MB gaming state. Also when the combination of "bird-bird-BAR" called "C_bird BAR" is displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the MB gaming state.

  The combination "Plum-Plum-Plum", called "C_rip A", is not paid out medals when displayed along the active line, but has won the role of replay player who is the player of replay Represents If a combination of "BAR-Plum-Plum" called "C_Rip B_01" is displayed along the active line, a combination of "Blank-Plum-Plum" called "C_Rip B_02" is displayed along the active line If the combination of “red 7-plum-plum” called “C_lip C_01” is displayed along the effective line, and the “feather-plum-plum” combination called “C_lip C_02”. Similarly, replaying is activated when is displayed along the activated line.

<Combination Table by Flag>
FIGS. 101A to 101C are diagrams showing combinations by flags.

  The flag-based combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the type of display combination capable of winning) is uniquely determined.

  Specifically, the flag-specific combination tables shown in FIG. 101A to FIG. 101C indicate combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the valid line corresponding to the internal winning combinations. As internal winning combinations in the present embodiment, "F_7BB", "F_Bird BB", "F_MB", "F_Replay", "F_Common Lip", "F_ Feather A", "F_ Feather B", "F_ Feather" Grape A "," F_ Grape B "," F_ Feather Bird "," F_ Cherry A "," F_ Cherry B "," F_ Special A "," F_ Special B "," F_ Special C "," F_ Special D " "F_ common feather", "F_ common cherry A", "F_ common cherry B", "F_ JAC role A", "F_ JAC role B", "F_ JAC role C", "F_ JAC role D", "F_ JAC role E" , "BB during BB", and, "F_ CB role".

  For example, when the internal winning combination is "F_7BB", it is permitted to display "C_red 7" on the activated line. Further, when the internal winning combination is "F_bird BB", "C_bird 7" is permitted to be displayed on the effective line. That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_7BB" or "F_bird BB", it indicates that BB is internally won.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "F_MB", it is permitted to display "C_BAR" and "C_bird BAR" on the activated line. That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_MB", it indicates that the internal winning combination is made to MB.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay", it is permitted to display "C_rep A", "C_rip B_01", and "C_rip B_02" on the activated line.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_common rep", "C_rip A", "C_rip B_01", "C_rip B_02", "C_rip C_01", and "C_rip C_02" are valid. Display on the line is permitted.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_ grape A", "C_ grape _ 01" to "C _ grape _ 08", "C_ Cheri A 01" to "C_ Cheri A_ 07", "C_ Cheri D_ 01" to "C_ Cheri "D_07", "C_Cheri E_01" to "C_Cheri E_18", "C_Cheri F", "C_Cheri G", "C_Cheri H", "C_Cheri I", and "C_Cheri J" on the effective line Are allowed to be displayed on

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_ grape B", "C_ grape _ 01" to "C _ grape _ 08", "C_ Cheri A 01" to "C_ Cheri A_ 07", "C_ Cheri D_ 01" to "C_ Cheri "D_07", "C_Cheri E_01" to "C_Cheri E_18", "C_Cheri F", "C_Cheri G", "C_Cheri H", and "C_Cheri I" are permitted to be displayed on the valid line Be done.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is the "F_CB combination", it is permitted to display on the effective line all combinations for which medals are paid out at the time of winning in the two-piece game.

<Internal lottery table>
As an internal lottery table according to the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 102 (a)) referred to in a unit game performed by inserting one medal during the RT0 gaming state, and the RT0 gaming state The internal lottery table (see FIG. 102 (b)) referred to in the unit game performed by the insertion of three medals in the middle, and the line by the insertion of one medal during the 7BB flag state. An internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 103 (a)) referred to in a unit game to be united and an internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 103) referred to in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the 7BB flag state. (B) and the internal lottery table to be referred to in the unit game performed by inserting one medal during the inter-bird BB flag state (Refer to FIG. 104 (a)), an internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 104 (b)) referred to in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the inter-bird BB flag state, and an MB flag An internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 105 (a)) referred to in a unit game performed by inserting one medal in the inter state, and three medals are inserted in the state between the MB flags The internal lottery table (see FIG. 105 (b)) referenced in the unit game played by the player, the internal lottery table (see FIG. 106 (a)) referenced in the 7BB gaming state, and the bird BB gaming state An internal lottery table (see FIG. 106 (b)) and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 106 (c)) to be referred to in the MB gaming state are provided.

  FIG. 102 (a) is a view showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (one-sheet hanging game). FIG. 102 (b) shows an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-piece gaming). FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 7BB flag (one-on-one game) state. FIG. 103 (b) is a view showing an internal lottery table for the 7BB flag state (three-card hanging game). FIG. 104 (a) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state (one-on-one game) between birds and BB flags. FIG. 104 (b) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state (three-piece hanging game) between birds and BB flags. FIG. 105 (a) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state between MB flags (one-on-one game). FIG. 105 (b) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state between MB flags (3 game). FIG. 106 (a) shows an internal lottery table for 7BB gaming state. FIG. 106 (b) shows an internal lottery table for a bird BB gaming state. FIG. 106 (c) shows an internal lottery table for MB gaming state.

  The plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 102 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 3032 corresponding to each gaming state and each number of inserted sheets, and each flag having a denominator of 65,536 for each setting 1, 2, 5, 6 It shows the probability.

  For example, in FIG. 102 (a), in the case of setting 1, the probability of “off” is “52264/65536”, and the probability that “F_common ripple” is internally won is “8978/65536”. In FIG. 102 (b), in the case of setting 6, the probability that "F_7BB" alone is internally won is "14/65536", and the probability that "F_7BB" and "F_ Feather B" are duplicated and internally winning is " It is "3/65536".

<Roller stop initialization table>
FIG. 107 is a view showing a rotation stop initial setting table.

  The rotation stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 107 is information for stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR, and is predetermined according to the number of medals inserted and the winning combination (internal winning combination). The main CPU 3031 refers to the spinning stop initial setting table to obtain the number of spinning stops corresponding to the number of inserted sheets and the internal winning combination, and obtains various data for stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR. It has become.

  Specifically, in the rotation stop initial setting table, a table number selection value (table number selection data) and the first winding first in addition to the judgment data classified by pressing order in association with the rotation stop number. Table change data for stop (changed data table number after first stop for 1st cylinder), first stop data table selection data for first turn (first mover stop data table number), and for first stop for first stop A table change initial data selection value (initial data after first stop and first stop) and a search order data table (search order table number) are defined in accordance with the game state. These various data indicate various table numbers to be selected in the stop control of the reels RL, RC, and RR in accordance with the progress of the unit game.

  “Pressing order-based determination data” includes a drawing priority order table number and a drawing priority order selection table number. The “drop-in priority order table number” is a number for selecting the pull-up priority order table shown in FIG. The “draw-in priority order selection table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority order table selection table (draw-up priority order selection table) shown in FIG.

  The “table number selection value” is a value to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel RL, and is changed to the stop table data (stop table number) Including status.

  "Stop table data" refers to the stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel RL from the stop table shown as an example in FIGS. 111A and 111B. It is a number to select.

  The “change status” of the table number selection value is data for changing the line status of each game representing the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and the present embodiment The initial state of the line status in is the A line. Here, when the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed, and when “2”, the line status is changed to the B line if the line status is the A line.

  First change cylinder first stop table change data, first change cylinder stop data table selection data, and first change cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value That is, the data is referred to in the case of the left reel RL.

  The “first cylinder stop data table selection data” is a first left cylinder stop data table, an example of which is shown in FIGS. 112A to 112C, which is referred to when the first cylinder is stopped. It is a number for selecting from the first cylinder stop data table).

  The “first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value” is data referred to when stopping the second and third cylinders, and includes a table number and a change status (line status). . “Table No.” refers to the first after-the-first after-stop data table referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels and the left after-the first after-stop data table shown as an example in FIGS. 114A and 114B. It is a number for selecting from (First stop after first stop data table).

  The "change status" of the first drum first stop table change initial data selection value represents a line referred to in the first drum after first stop stop data table selected based on the table number. Data for changing the line status of

  Here, if the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed, and if “2”, if the line status is A line, it is changed to B line, “3” If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

  “The first cylinder first stop table change data” is an example of the first cylinder after first stop change data table for changing the initial data after the first cylinder first stop in FIGS. 115A to 115C. It is data for selecting from the first change table for first cylinder first stop (change data table for first cylinder after first stop).

  The “search order data table” is a number for selecting a search order table for determining the number of sliding symbols from the search order table shown in FIG.

<Import priority table>
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a pull-in priority order table.

  The drawing priority order table shown in FIG. 108 indicates which combination is to be drawn in preferentially among the plurality of combinations that can be displayed within the drawing range corresponding to the internal winning combination. In FIG. 108, data of the winning operation flag representing the combination of combinations is omitted.

  In the attraction priority order table, the priority of attraction of the combination represented by the winning operation flag is shown. The “drop-in priority data” is information provided for the main CPU 3031 to identify the pull-in priority.

  For example, if it is determined that there is a possibility that "C_ feathers" and "C_ red 7" will win in the drawing priority order table number "00", "C_ feathers" than "C_ red 7" Since the priority is high, the stop control of the rotating reels RL, RC, RR is performed so as to pull in the "C_ feathers" in priority.

<Import priority table selection table>
FIG. 109 shows a drawing priority order table selection table.

  In the drawing priority order table selection table shown in FIG. 109, the drawing priority order table numbers for the stop operation types indicating the order of the stop operation of the reel are associated with each set of drawing priority order table selection data (drawing priority order selection table). There is.

  For example, in the drawing priority order table selection data "03", when the first stop operation is "left", the drawing priority order table number "02" is associated and the first stop operation is "medium" In this case, the drawing priority order table number "03" is associated.

  In the pull-in priority order table selection data "03", when the first stop operation is "left" and the second stop operation is "middle" at the time of the second stop operation ("left → middle" in the figure), If the pull-in priority order table number "03" is associated and the first stop operation is "middle" and the second stop operation is "left" at the second stop operation ("middle → left" in the figure), The drawing priority order table number "00" is associated.

<Stop table>
FIG. 110 shows the structure of the stop table. FIG. 111A and FIG. 111B are diagrams showing a specific example of the stop table.

  As shown in FIG. 110 and the specific example shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B, the stop table defines stop data represented by 7 bits for symbol position data representing each symbol position. .

  The stop table is referred to determine sliding piece number determination data in the search order table shown in FIG. 116 when the first stop reel is other than the left reel RL.

  "Bit 0" represents right reel RR, ie, B line data of the third drum, "bit 1" represents A line data of the third drum, and "bit 2" represents a line change bit of the third drum. Represent.

  Specifically, when the line change bit of the third trunk is "0", the line status change is not performed, and when it is "1", if the line status is the A line, the B line is selected. Be changed.

  At the third stop of the cylinder, if the line status is the A line, the A line data composed of “bit 1” is referenced, and if the line status is the B line, B line data composed of “bit 0” is Referenced.

  Also, "bit 3" represents the B-line data of the middle reel RC, that is, the second rotating cylinder, "bit 4" represents the A-line data of the second rotating cylinder, and "bit 5" represents the line change of the second rotating cylinder. Represents a bit.

  Specifically, the line status change is not performed when the line change bit of the second drum is “0”, and when the line change bit is “1”, if the line status is the A line, the B line is selected. Be changed.

  If the line status is the A line at the time of the second stop, the A line data composed of “bit 4” is referred to, and if the line status is B line, the B line data composed of “bit 3” is Referenced.

  Also, "bit 6" represents the left reel RL, that is, the B-line data of the first rotating cylinder, and "bit 7" represents the A-line data of the first rotating cylinder. Specifically, when the line status is the A line at the time of the first stop, the A line data composed of "bit 7" is referred to, and when the line status is the B line, it is composed of "bit 6" B line data is referred to.

  In the stop table, when depression of any one of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R is detected by the main CPU 3031, the symbol position of the reels RL, RC, RR displayed in the middle of the corresponding main display window DD4 Starting from the symbol position data, the number of times of search until the line data to be referred to becomes “1” is determined as the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data in the rotational direction of the reel.

  For example, in the stop table “00” shown in FIG. 111A, when the symbol of the reel RL corresponding to the line status “A” and the symbol position data corresponding to “8” is displayed in the middle of the main display window DD4. When pressing of the stop button DD7L is detected by the main CPU 3031, the A line data composed of "bit 7" is referred to, and the line data is searched to "10" where the symbol position data is "1". The sliding piece number determination data is “2” obtained by subtracting “8” from “10”.

<Stop table for first left stop>
FIGS. 112A to 112C are diagrams showing the left first stop table.

  The left first stop table (first turn stop data table) shown in FIGS. 112A to 112C is referred to when the left reel RL is stopped when the first stop reel is the left reel RL. The first left stop table defines sliding piece number determination data and change status with respect to symbol position data representing the position of each symbol. In the present embodiment, twelve first cylinder stop data tables "00" to "11" are used.

  “Sliding piece number determination data” is referred to specify sliding piece number determination data in the search order table shown in FIG. 116, and “change status” is the first stop of the first cylinder shown in FIGS. 115A to 115C. Table change data table (first change data table after first cylinder first stop) is referred to in order to specify the change status.

<Stop data table>
FIG. 113 shows the structure of the stop data table. FIGS. 114A and 114B show specific examples of the stop data table.

  As shown in FIG. 113, and as shown in FIGS. 114A and 114B as a specific example, the left first stop and then stop data table (first turn first stop and then stop data table) is a symbol representing the position of each symbol. For position data, stop data represented by 7 bits is defined.

  When the first stop reel is other than the left reel RL, the left first stop and then stop data table is referred to in order to determine the sliding symbol number determination data in the search order table shown in FIG. In the following description, the stop data table for the first cylinder after the first stop, the first cylinder stop data table, and the table for the stop are collectively referred to as a "stop table".

  "Bit 0" represents right reel RR, ie, B line data of the third drum, "bit 1" represents A line data of the third drum, and "bit 2" represents a line change bit of the third drum. Represent.

  Specifically, when the line change bit of the third trunk is "0", the line status change is not performed, and when it is "1", if the line status is the A line, the B line is selected. Be changed.

  At the third stop of the cylinder, if the line status is the A line, the A line data composed of “bit 1” is referenced, and if the line status is the B line, B line data composed of “bit 0” is Referenced.

  Also, "bit 3" represents the B-line data of the middle reel RC, that is, the second rotating cylinder, "bit 4" represents the A-line data of the second rotating cylinder, and "bit 5" represents the line change of the second rotating cylinder. Represents a bit.

  Specifically, the line status change is not performed when the line change bit of the second drum is “0”, and when the line change bit is “1”, if the line status is the A line, the B line is selected. Be changed.

  If the line status is the A line at the time of the second stop, the A line data composed of “bit 4” is referred to, and if the line status is B line, the B line data composed of “bit 3” is Referenced.

  Also, "bit 6" represents C line data of the second turn cylinder, and "bit 7" represents C line data of the third turn cylinder. Specifically, if the line status is C line at the second stop, C line data configured by "bit 6" is referenced, and if the line status is C line at the third stop. , C bit data configured by “bit 7” is referred to.

  In the left first stop and stop data table, when the main CPU 3031 detects that either the stop button DD7C or DD7R is pressed, the symbol position of the reel RC or RR displayed in the middle of the corresponding main display window DD4 Starting from the corresponding symbol position data, the number of times of search until the line data to be referred to becomes "1" is determined as the number of sliding symbols determination data in the rotational direction of the reel.

  For example, in the left first stop and stop data table "00" shown in FIG. 114A, the symbol of the reel RR for which the line status is the C line and the symbol position data corresponds to "13" is in the middle of the main display window DD4. When displayed, if pressing of the stop button DD7L is detected by the main CPU 3031, the C line data configured by "bit 7" is referred to, and the symbol position data "16" in which the line data becomes "1" Since the search is performed up to the point, the sliding piece number determination data is “3” obtained by subtracting “13” from “16”.

<First change of the first cylinder for the first stop>
FIG. 115A to FIG. 115C are views showing a table change data table for the first cylinder first stop.

  115A to 115C first table change data for first stop (first change data after first stop data table) defines a change status for symbol position data representing a specific position of a symbol There is.

  The change status is the table number determined by the first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value (initial data after the first cylinder first stop) and the line in the rotating cylinder stop initialization table shown in FIG. It is data for changing the status.

  In the table rotation data for the first rotation first stop, the symbol position data corresponding to the position of the symbol on the reel RR displayed in the middle of the main display window DD4 is shown in the first rotation first stop table change data In the case where there is, the table number and the line status are changed based on the change status specified in the left first stop stop table (first cylinder stop data table) shown in FIGS. 112A to 112C.

  For example, in the first cylinder first stop table change data table "00" shown in FIG. 115A, the symbol of the reel RR whose symbol position data corresponds to "05" is displayed in the middle of the main display window DD4, and the change status Is 0, the table number is changed to "11" and the line status is maintained.

  Similarly, in the first cylinder first stop table change data table "00" shown in FIG. 115A, the symbol of the reel RR whose symbol position data corresponds to "16" is displayed in the middle of the main display window DD4, If the status is "0", the table number is changed to "41" and the line status is changed to B line.

<Search order table>
FIG. 116 is a diagram of a search order table.

  The search order table shown in FIG. 116 is referred to in order to determine the number of sliding pieces of each reel RL, RC, RR. In the present embodiment, three search order tables "00" to "02" are used. In the search order table, the number of sliding symbols is associated with the number determination data of sliding symbols according to the priority order.

  For example, in the search order table “00” shown in FIG. 116 (a), when the number of sliding symbols determination data is “3”, the number of sliding symbols “3” has the highest priority, and then the number of sliding symbols The priority is lowered in the order of "1", "0", "4" and "2".

  In this case, when it is possible to display the combination corresponding to the internal winning combination on the effective line when the corresponding reel is slid by 3 pieces, the number of sliding symbols “3” is selected and corresponds to the internal winning combination. If the combination can not be displayed on the effective line, the priority order is lowered until the combination can be displayed on the effective line.

  If the combination corresponding to the internal winning combination can not be displayed on the effective line even if the priority is lowered to the number of sliding symbols “2”, or in the case of “losing” where there is no internal winning combination, the highest priority The number of sliding pieces “3” having a high order is selected.

<Symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table>
FIG. 117 (a) is a figure which shows a symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table.

  A symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table shown in FIG. 117 (a) defines a correspondence between reel types and data of internal winning combinations that can be displayed according to the symbols of the respective reels displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 100A and 100B.

  For example, when the symbol "red 7" is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel RL, in the storage areas 1 to 12 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (red 7) in the reel type "left", A "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination that can be displayed. The data of the symbol code storage area is updated by the logical product of the data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table and the data stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 118 (b).

<Line mask data table>
FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing a line mask data table.

  The line mask data table defines line mask data corresponding to the type of stop button. When the stop button operated by the player is the left stop button DD7L, the line mask data "10000000" is selected. Further, when the stop button operated by the player is the middle stop button DD7C, the line mask data "00010000" is selected. When the stop button operated by the player is the right stop button DD7R, the line mask data "00000010" is selected.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
118 to 120 show various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 3033.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
FIG. 118 (a) is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storing area.

  The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 118 (a) is constituted by 18 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 18. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 18, data (bit) corresponding to the combination corresponding to the internal winning combination is set to 1 in the flag combinations shown in FIGS. 101A to 101C, and the other data is 0 Reset to

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area represents a combination which can be displayed along the effective line after the reels of the reels RL, RC, RR stop. That is, the display combination storing area represents a winning internal winning combination after all of the reels RL, RC and RR have stopped. The display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 3031 to identify the combination displayed along the effective line after all of the reels RL, RC, RR have stopped. The display combination storage area is not shown because it has the same structure as the internal winning combination storage area.

<Symbol code storage area>
FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code storage area.

  The symbol code storage areas shown in FIG. 118 (b) are assigned the number of valid lines, and in each symbol code storage area, data that can be displayed along each valid line is set to 1, and the reels RL and RC , RR according to the stop position, data corresponding to the combination that can not be displayed along the valid line is reset to 0. Further, in the upper 4 bits of the symbol code storage area 1, a symbol code which has been stopped recently in the corresponding effective line is stored.

<Holding part storage area>
FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing a carryover combination storage area.

  In the carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 119 (a), data relating to the carryover combination is stored. For example, on the condition that the gaming state has become the carryover state of 7BB, bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is set to "1" and the condition that the bird BB is in the carryover state is On condition that bit 1 is set to "1" and MB carryover state is established, bit 2 of the carryover combination storage area is set to "1", and the 7BB, bird BB and MB bonuses are activated. The corresponding bit is reset to "0" under the condition of

<Playing state flag storage area>
FIG. 119 (b) shows a game state flag storage area.

  The gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 119 (b) stores data relating to the bonus state (7 BB gaming state, bird BB gaming state, MB gaming state, and RB gaming state) and RT gaming state (RT 0 gaming state). Be done. For example, on condition that the gaming state has become the operating state of 7BB, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1" and the gaming state becomes the operating state of bird BB, the game is On condition that bit 1 of the state flag storage area is set to "1" and the gaming state becomes the operating state of MB, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1", 7BB, bird BB And the corresponding bit is reset to "0" on condition that each bonus of MB and MB has ended. In addition, bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1" on condition that the gaming state has become the operating state of RB.

  In addition, on condition that the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, bit 7 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1", and the gaming state is the carryover state of the bonus combination (7BB, bird BB or MB) Bit 7 of the gaming state flag storage area is reset to "0" on condition that the game state flag has been reached.

<Actual stop button storage area>
FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing an operation stop button storage area.

  The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 119 (c) stores the states of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button DD7L, and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the stop button DD7L is operated. Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button DD7C, and "1" is stored in bit 1 when the stop button DD7C is operated. Bit 2 corresponds to the stop button DD7R, and "1" is stored in bit 2 when the stop button DD7R is operated.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button DD7L, and "1" is stored in bit 4 when the stop button DD7L is valid. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button DD 7 C, and “1” is stored in bit 5 when the stop button DD 7 C is valid. Also, bit 6 corresponds to the stop button DD7R, and when the stop button DD7R is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, effective stop buttons correspond to stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R that can detect a stop operation by the main CPU 3031 corresponding to the rotating reels RL, RC, RR.

<Pressing order storage area>
FIG. 119 (d) shows a pressing order storage area.

  The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 119 (d) is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order "left → middle → right", and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the pressing order is "left → middle → right", and the other bits are "0". It is reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order "left → right → middle", bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order "middle → left → right", and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order "middle → right → left" The bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order "right → left → middle", and the bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order "right → middle → left".

<Import priority data storage area>
FIG. 120 shows a drawing priority data storage area.

  The drawing priority data storage area shown in FIG. 120 includes a left reel drawing priority data storage area, a middle reel drawing priority data storage area, and a right reel drawing priority data storage area. The contents of the middle reel pull-in priority data storage area and the right reel pull-in priority data storage area are the same as those of the left reel pull-in priority data storage area. The data storage area will be described.

  The left reel pull-in priority data storage area stores pull-in priority data for each of the symbol position data. For example, among the attraction priority data of the attraction priority table shown in FIG. 108, any attraction priority data based on the internal winning combination and the status of the other reels RC and RR is stored for each symbol position.

[Main control processing]
The main CPU 3031 of the main control circuit 3060 executes various processes in accordance with the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Main control process>
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing main control processing. The main control process described below starts when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 3031 executes a power-on process shown in FIG. 122 (step S10). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or whether the setting has been properly changed, and the initialization process is performed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) (step S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area of the main RAM 3033 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a medal reception / start check process shown in FIG. 123 (step S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by a player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 extracts three random number values (random number values 1 to 3), and stores them in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033 (step S13). Here, the random number value 1 is a value used for internal lottery processing, and in the present embodiment, it is extracted from 0 to 65535.

  The random numbers 2 and 3 are values used for the other lottery processing, and in the present embodiment, they are extracted from 0 to 65535 and 0 to 255, respectively. The main CPU 3031 does not have to constantly extract the random numbers 2 and 3 in step S13, and may extract them only when the random numbers 2 and 3 are used.

  Next, main CPU 3031 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 124 (step S14). The main CPU 3031, which executes this internal lottery process, constitutes an internal winning combination determination means.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes the reel stop initial setting process shown in FIG. 125 (step S15). In the reel stop initial setting process, each information (for example, stop table number etc.) regarding the stop control of the reel is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 3033 based on the result (internal winning combination) of the internal lottery process.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes lock time lottery processing (step S16). The lock time lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033 (step S17).

  The start command data indicates, for example, the type of the game state flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the value of the effect timer, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes wait processing (step S18). In this weight processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous game start (the start of the last unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed Wait until the waiting time is digested. The predetermined time in this weight processing, that is, the weight time, is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the last unit game.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a reel rotation start process of rotating all the reels RL, RC, RR according to the number of inserted medals (step S19). Along with the reel rotation start processing, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 119 (c)). Further, the reel rotation start process is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. This interrupt process is a process that is executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 ms).

  By this interruption process, the driving of the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is started. Thereafter, the driving of the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, and 3049R is controlled by this interrupt processing, and the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is accelerated until the rotation of the reels reaches the constant speed.

  Furthermore, when the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR reaches a constant speed, this interrupt processing controls the driving of the stepping motors 3049L, 3049C, 3049R so that the reels RL, RC, RR rotate at a constant speed. Maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033 ( Step S20).

  By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize the reel rotation start, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a drawing priority storage process (step S21). In the drawing priority order storage process, the drawing priority order table selection process shown in FIG. 127 is executed, and the drawing priority order of all the symbols of the rotating reels RL, RC, RR is determined. That is, in the leading priority storage process, stop information is stored in the leading priority data storage area shown in FIG. 120 for each symbol position of each rotating reel based on the internal winning combination.

  For example, for each symbol of each reel RL, RC, RR, when the corresponding symbol is the stop permission, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area based on the priority table, and no stop is made. In the case of permission (for example, when a combination that is not internally won wins), data representing stop prohibition is stored in the leading priority data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a reel stop control process shown in FIG. 129 (step S22). By this processing, stop control of the reels RL, RC, RR is performed. Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a winning search process (step S23).

  In this winning search process, after all the reels RL, RC, RR have stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the activated winning judgment line among the winning judgment lines is compared with the symbol combination table, and the winning judgment line is determined. The symbol combination displayed in any of the above is determined.

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 118B) and the data of the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 100A and 100B) are compared, and the comparison result is the display combination storage area Stored in

  More specifically, data of the symbol code storage area is copied as it is to the display combination storage area. At that time, the symbol combination table is referred to, and the number of payouts is determined. By this winning a prize search processing, the combination of the symbols displayed on the main display window DD4 is specified by the stop of all the reels RL, RC, RR.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes an effect game lock process (step S24). The effect game lock process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes payout of the number of medals according to the displayed symbol combination based on the result of the winning search processing (step S25). Along with the medal payout processing, control of the hopper drive circuit 3041 and update of the credit number are performed based on the payout number counter.

  Next, main CPU 3031 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from main control circuit 3060 to secondary control circuit 3070, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to main RAM 3033 (step S26). ). The winning operation command data represents, for example, the type of display combination, the number of medals paid out, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a bonus end check process shown in FIG. 136 (step S27). By the bonus end check process, a process of ending the operation of BB or MB when the end condition of BB or MB is satisfied is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 137 (step S28). By this bonus operation check process, a process of performing BB or MB operation based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the reels RL, RC, RR is executed. After executing the processing of step S28, the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S11.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 122 is a flowchart of power-on process executed in the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the backup is normal (step S30). In this judgment processing, it is judged whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using a checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 3031 stores the checksum value calculated from the setting value of the gaming machine 1 and the setting value of the gaming machine 1 when the power is off in the main RAM 3033 as backup data, and determines the process of turning on the power (step S30) , And reads the set value etc. and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 3033.

  Then, the main CPU 3031 compares the checksum calculated from the read setting value and the like with the checksum that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison result matches.

  If the main CPU 3031 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 3031 sets the backed up setting value and the like (step S31). Thereby, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power-off is set.

  After executing the process of step S31, or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S30 (NO), the main CPU 3031 has the setting change switch provided in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1 on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S32). Here, when the main CPU 3031 determines that the setting change switch is on (YES), the main CPU 3031 executes initialization processing at the time of setting change (step S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of the setting change, for example, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area of the main RAM 3033 are cleared and the setting value is cleared.

  Next, main CPU 3031 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from main control circuit 3060 to sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to main RAM 3033 (step S34). ). The initialization command data represents, for example, the presence or absence of a setting value change and the setting value.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes setting value change processing (step S35). In this setting value changing process, the setting value is selected from among 1, 2, 5 and 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and is selected when the start lever DD6 to be operated subsequently is operated. The set value is fixed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the setting change switch is in the on state (step S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until the determination result in which the setting change switch is not in the on state is obtained.

  Here, when it is determined that the setting change switch is not in the on state (NO), the main control circuit 3060 generates initialization command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 3070, and the generated initialization command data Are stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033 (step S37), and the power-on process ends.

  In step S32, when the main CPU 3031 determines that the setting change switch is not on (NO), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the backup is normal (step S38). Here, if it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes power-on error processing (step S39).

  In the power-on error process, the main CPU 3031 displays that the backup is not normal by an error display or the like. In the error state (backup error) where backup is not normal, the main CPU 3031 does not release the error status depending on the operation of the stop release switch or the reset switch, and the setting change is newly made. Only when the error condition is to be cleared.

  If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 3031 restores the state of the gaming machine 1 to the state before the power failure based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 3033. (Step S40), the power-on process ends.

<Medal acceptance and start check processing>
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing medal acceptance / start check processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (step S50). In the case of winning the replay role in the previous unit game, medals are automatically inserted in the current unit game. That is, in the determination process of step S50, it may be determined whether or not a replay combination is won in the previous unit game.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 3031 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 3031 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (step S51). . Specifically, the main CPU 3031 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033. The transmission process is executed (step S52). Here, the medal insertion command data represents, for example, the presence or absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

  If the main CPU 3031 determines in step S50 that there is no request for automatic insertion (NO), the main CPU 3031 permits reception of medals (step S53). For example, the main CPU 3031 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to form a route so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot DD5 passes through the inside of the selector.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 3031 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the reception of medals is prohibited from the previous unit game, so processing regarding reception of medals is performed. Does not run.

  After the processing of step S52 or step S53 is executed, the main CPU 3031 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets in accordance with the gaming state (step S54). In the present embodiment, three cards are set in the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state and the state between flags), two in the MB gaming state, and one in the BB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (step S55). Here, if it is determined that acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 3031 executes medal insertion check processing for checking the number of inserted medals (step S56). In this medal insertion check process, the value of the insertion number counter is updated according to the number of medals checked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033. The transmission process is executed (step S57).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether medals can be inserted or credited (step S58). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 3031 has 3 inserted sheets in the normal gaming state, 2 sheets in the MB gaming state, 1 in the BB gaming state, and 50 credits, or the step On the condition that the automatic insertion process of S51 is executed, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is not possible when the condition is satisfied, and it is determined that medal insertion or credit is possible when the condition is not satisfied. Do.

  If it is determined in step S58 that the insertion of medals or the credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 3031 prohibits the reception of medals (step S59). For example, the main CPU 3031 does not drive the solenoid of the selector, and forms a path along which the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot DD5 is discharged from the medal payout opening DD14.

  If it is determined in step S55 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), if it is determined in step S58 that medal insertion or credit is possible (YES), or after the process of step S59 is executed. The main CPU 3031 determines whether the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game (step S60).

  That is, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number that can start unit game, according to the game state. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the inserted medal is one or three in the normal gaming state, whether the inserted medal is two in the MB gaming state, the BB gaming state Then, it is determined whether or not one medal is inserted.

  Here, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the game (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S55. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the start switch 3006S is on (step S61).

  Here, if it is determined that the start switch 3006S is not on (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S55. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 3006S is on (YES), the main CPU 3031 prohibits the reception of medals (step S62), and ends the medal reception / start check process.

<Internal lottery process>
FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (step S70). Specifically, the main CPU 3031 sets an internal lottery table shown in any of FIGS. 102 to 106 according to the gaming state and the number of inserted medals (one, two, three, three).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (step S71). Next, the main CPU 3031 determines an internal winning combination based on the acquired random number value and the set internal lottery table, and stores it in the internal winning combination storage area (step S72).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) is “0” (step S73). In this determination process, it is determined whether any one of bits 0 to 2 corresponding to "7BB", "bird BB" and "MB" of the carryover combination storage area is set to "1".

  When it is determined in step S73 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (NO), the main CPU 3031 ends the internal lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the carryover combination storage area is “0” (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines the internal winning combination defined as the carryover combination in the internal winning combination stored in the internal winning combination storage area. The combination (for example, 7BB, bird BB and MB) is stored in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) (step S74). In the process of step S74, for example, when "bird BB" is acquired as the internal winning combination, bit 1 corresponding to "bird BB" in the carryover combination storage area is set to "1".

  Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) is “0” (step S75). In this determination process, it is determined whether any one of bits 0 to 2 corresponding to "7BB", "bird BB" and "MB" of the carryover combination storage area is set to "1".

  If it is determined in step S75 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is “0” (YES), the main CPU 3031 ends the internal lottery process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not “0” (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes a game state flag shift process (step S76). In this process, the main CPU 3031 sets the bit 7 corresponding to “RT0 gaming state” in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) to “0”. After executing the process of step S76, the main CPU 3031 ends the internal lottery process.

<Reel stop initialization process>
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the reel stop initial setting process executed in the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 refers to the rotation stop initial setting table, and acquires the rotation stop number based on the internal winning combination etc. (step S100). The spinning stop initial setting table is a table in which various pieces of information used for the stop control are defined in association with the number of inserted sheets and the number of the spinning stop corresponding to the internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 refers to the rotation stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotation stop number (step S101). In this process, for example, the main CPU 3031 determines the number of the stop table used at the time of the first to third stops and the information necessary for performing the control change in the control change process (that is, the specific order of the reels RL, RC, and RR) When stopping at a specific position, the information used to reselect the stop table is acquired.

  Information on the number of sliding pieces for the pressed position is directly or indirectly stored in the stop table, and using this information, the player is not disadvantaged and a false prize is not generated. , Is configured to stop at the developer's intended stop position.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 118 (b)) (step S102). That is, the main CPU 3031 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (except the unused area) to "1".

  Next, the main CPU 3031 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (step S103), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R for which the player has not performed a stop operation, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 3033.

<Import priority storage process>
FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing a leading priority storing process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 121 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 3033 (step S110). Next, the main CPU 3031 executes search target reel determination processing for determining a search target reel (step S111). In this process, for example, one reel on the left side among the rotating reels is determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a drawing priority order table selection process shown in FIG. 127 (step S112). In the drawing priority order table selection processing, one drawing priority order table number is selected from the drawing priority order table (see FIG. 108).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets 21 (the number of symbols on each reel) to the number of symbol checks stored in the main RAM 3033 and sets 0 at the search symbol position (step S113).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes symbol code storage processing shown in FIG. 128 (step S114). In this symbol code storage process, the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 updates the display combination storing area based on the acquired symbol code and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 118 (b)) (step S115). Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a drawing priority data acquisition process (step S116).

  In this pull-in priority order data acquisition process, the pull-in priority selected in step S112 is a combination in which the corresponding bit is 1 in the display combination storage area and the corresponding bit is 1 in the internal winning combination storage area. Refer to the order table to obtain the priority data of attraction.

  In the drawing priority data acquisition process, “stop prohibition” (000H) is set for the symbol position that causes an erroneous prize when stopped, and internal winning is not performed, but erroneous prize does not occur even if stopped. For the symbol position, "stoppable" (001H) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area according to the search target reel (step S117). Next, the main CPU 3031 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks, and adds 1 to the search symbol position (step S118).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the number of symbol checks is 0 or not (step S119). Here, if it is determined that the symbol check frequency is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol check frequency is 0 (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the search for the search frequency has been executed (step S120). Here, if it is determined that the search for the number of times of search has been executed (YES), the main CPU 3031 ends the drawing priority priority storage process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the search for the number of searches has not been executed (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S111.

<Import priority table selection process>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart of a drawing priority order table selection process performed in the drawing priority order storage process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether pull-in priority order table selection data is set (step S130). Here, if it is determined that the pull-in priority order table selection data is set (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines that the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 119 (d)) and the operation stop button storage area (FIG. c) Refer to), and set a drawing priority table number corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data from the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 109) (step S131), according to the drawing priority table number The drawing priority order table is set (step S132), and the drawing priority order table selection process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the drawing priority order table selection data is not set (NO), the main CPU 3031 sets the drawing priority order table according to the drawing priority order table number (step S132). End the table selection process.

<Symbol code storage process>
FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing symbol code storage processing executed in the retraction priority storage processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 sets valid line data (step S140). Next, the main CPU 3031 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the valid line data (step S141).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (step S142), and ends the symbol code storage processing.

<Reel stop control processing>
FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the reel stop control process executed in the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (step S150). This process is a process of determining whether a signal is output from the stop switch 3007S. When the main CPU 3031 determines that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO), the main CPU 3031 repeatedly executes the process of step S150.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 3031 determines that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 119 (d)) is stored according to the pressed stop button, and the operation stop button is stored. The area (see FIG. 119 (c)) is updated (step S151).

  Here, the main CPU 3031 stores the type of operation stop button corresponding to each of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation in the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 119 (d)), and presses the button. The pressing order of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R can be determined by referring to the order delivery area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (step S152), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (step S153), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 3033 based on the symbol counter. (Step S154). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 3007S.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes the process for determining the number of sliding symbols shown in FIG. 130 (step S155). The number of sliding symbols determination processing determines the number of sliding symbols specified at the stop start position based on the stop table selection data group selected based on the internal winning combination from the rotation stop initial setting table (see FIG. 107). Processing.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033. The transmission process is executed (step S156). The reel stop command data indicates the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 3033 (step S157). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding symbols to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets a planned stop position as a search symbol position (step S158). Next, the main CPU 3031 executes symbol code storage processing (see FIG. 128) (step S159).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired by the symbol code storage processing (step S160). Next, the main CPU 3031 performs control change processing shown in FIG. 135 (step S161). In this control change process, the reel stop information group is updated when it is at a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the pressed stop button has been released (step S162). This process is a process of judging whether or not the signal is not output from the stop switch 3007S.

  When the main CPU 3031 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (NO), the main CPU 3031 repeatedly executes the process of step S162. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 3031 executes a reel stop command transmission process (step S163).

  The reel stop command generated by the reel stop command transmission process includes information of ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch 3007S. The information of the ON edge / OFF edge may be monitored by interrupt processing and transmitted to the sub control apparatus SS.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the stop button non-operation counter is 0 or not (step S164). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes a drawing priority storing process (see FIG. 126) (step S165) and executes the process of step S150. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 3031 ends the reel stop control processing.

<Sliding piece number determination processing>
FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the sliding symbol number determination processing executed in the reel stop control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 performs a process of selecting line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table shown in FIG. 117 (b) (step S170). Here, the line mask data table defines line mask data corresponding to the type of the stop button. For example, when the stop button operated by the player is the left stop button DD7L, the line mask data "10000000" is selected.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether it is in the first stop state (the value of the stop button non-operation counter is 2) (step S171).

  If it is not the first stop time (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes the second and third stop processes shown in FIG. 131 (step S172). On the other hand, if it is the first stop time (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the operated stop button is the left stop button (step S173).

  If the operated stop button is the left stop button (YES), the main CPU 3031 acquires a first-time-body stop data table and a symbol counter (step S174). Next, the main CPU 3031 refers to the corresponding first cylinder stop data table, and based on the symbol counter, acquires sliding piece number determination data and change status (step S175).

  On the other hand, when determining in step S173 that the operated stop button is not the left stop button, the main CPU 3031 acquires table number selection data, and sets the corresponding stop table number (step S176).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a line change check process shown in FIG. 132 (step S177). Thereafter, the main CPU 3031 executes line mask data change processing shown in FIG. 133 (step S178).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 refers to the set stop table number, and acquires sliding symbol number determination data based on the line mask data (step S179).

  Next, after performing the process of step S179 or after performing the process of step S172 or step S175, the main CPU 3031 executes the priority attraction control process shown in FIG. 134 (step S180), and determines the number of sliding symbols. End the process.

<Second and third stop processing>
FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the second and third stop processings executed in the number-of-sliding-pieces determination processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 executes a line change check process shown in FIG. 132 (step S192). The line change check process is a process of changing the line status according to the change status and the change bit. Next, the main CPU 3031 executes line mask data change processing shown in FIG. 133 (step S193).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 3031 executes a sliding symbol number search process (step S194), and ends the second and third stop processes. Specifically, the main CPU 3031 determines the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data with reference to the selected first cylinder stop after first stop data table or the stop table.

<Line change check process>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing line change check processing executed in the second and third stop processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the change status is "3" (step S200). Here, if it is determined that the change status is “3” (YES), the main CPU 3031 changes the line status to C line (step S201), and ends the line change check processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the change status is not “3” (NO), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the change status is “2” (step S202). Here, if it is determined that the change status is “2” (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the line status is the A line (step S203).

  Here, if it is determined that the line status is the A line (YES), the main CPU 3031 changes the line status to the B line (step S204), and ends the line change check process.

  If it is determined in step S202 that the change status is not "2" (NO), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the line change bit for the corresponding reel is "1" (step S205).

  Here, if it is determined that the line change bit is “1” (YES), the main CPU 3031 shifts the line change check process to S203. On the other hand, if it is determined that the line change bit is not “1” (NO), the main CPU 3031 ends the line change check process.

<Line mask data change processing>
FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the line mask data changing process executed in the second and third stop processes shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the line status is the C line (step S210). If it is determined that the line status is the C line (YES), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button DD7C, that is, the left stop button at the first stop operation It is determined whether DD7L is selected and the middle stop button DD7C is selected at the time of the second stop operation (step S211).

  If it is determined that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button DD 7 C (YES), the main CPU 3031 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (step S 213) to change the line mask data. Finish.

  For example, rotating the line mask data "00000010" to the right twice changes it to "10000000". By using this changed line mask data “10000000”, it is possible to refer to the column of bit 7 of the stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S211 that the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button DD7C (NO), the main CPU 3031 rotates the line mask data to the left twice (step S213), End line mask data change processing.

  If it is determined in step S210 that the line status is not the C line (NO), the main CPU 3031 determines whether the line status is the B line (step S214).

  If it is determined that the line status is the B line, the main CPU 3031 rotates the line mask data to the right (step S215), and ends the line mask data change processing. On the other hand, when determining that the line status is not the B line (NO), the main CPU 3031 ends the line mask data change processing.

<Priority pull-in control process>
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the priority attraction control process executed in the sliding symbol number determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 sets a search order table according to the sliding symbol number determination data (step S220). Next, the main CPU 3031 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (step S221). Specifically, the main CPU 3031 sets “1” in the search order counter, and sets the data length of the search order table as the value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 adds the address of the retrieval order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (step S222), and acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the retrieval order counter (step S223). After that, the main CPU 3031 adds the acquired number of sliding symbols to the predicted start address at the time of stopping start, and acquires pull-in priority data (step S224).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the acquisition priority data acquired earlier is exceeded (step S225). If it exceeds the previously acquired pull-in priority data (YES), the main CPU 3031 saves the number of sliding symbols (step S226).

  On the other hand, if it does not exceed the retraction priority data acquired earlier (NO), or after performing the processing of step S226, the main CPU 3031 subtracts “1” the number of checks and adds 1 to the retrieval order counter ( Step S227).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the number of checks is “0” (step S228). If the number of checks is “0” (YES), the main CPU 3031 restores the number of sliding symbols evacuated (step S229), and ends the priority attraction control process. On the other hand, when the number of checks is not “0” (NO), the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S223.

<Control change processing>
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing control change processing executed in the reel stop control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not forward pressing is performed (step S240). If it is determined that it is a forward press (YES), the main CPU 3031 acquires initial data after the first stop according to the first stop data table, and sets the number of searches (step S241). ). On the other hand, when determining that it is not forward pressing (NO), the main CPU 3031 ends the control change processing.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 acquires the planned stop position (step S242), and updates the change target position (step S243). Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the updated change target position and the planned stop position match (step S244).

  If it is determined that the updated change target position and the planned stop position coincide with each other (YES), the main CPU 3031 performs the first time after the change according to the symbol position of the first stop after the first stop The first stop and after stop data table number is set (step S245), and the control change process is ended.

  On the other hand, when determining that the updated change target position and the planned stop position do not match (NO), the main CPU 3031 sets the change status of the initial data after the first stop of the first cylinder and the table number ( Step S246), ends the control change process.

<Bonus end check processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the current gaming state is the BB gaming state (7BB gaming state or bird BB gaming state) (step S270). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 updates the value of the BB end number counter (step S271). In this process, the main CPU 3031 updates the value of the BB termination sheet counter by subtracting the number of medals paid out in the BB gaming state from the payout number set in advance.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the value of the BB termination number counter is smaller than 0 (step S272).

  If the main CPU 3031 determines that the value of the BB termination number counter is smaller than 0, the main CPU 3031 performs BB termination processing (step S273). In this process, the main CPU 3031 clears the BB end number counter and updates bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) to "0".

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates BB end command data, and stores the generated BB end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S274). The BB end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the BB gaming state has ended. After executing the processing of step S274, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S272 that the value of the BB end number counter is 0 or more, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the small winning combination has been won (step S275). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the combination (see FIGS. 100A and 100B) from which medals are paid out at the time of winning is displayed stopped along the effective line.

  If it is determined that the small winning combination has won, the main CPU 3031 subtracts 1 from the value of the number-of-winnings counter (step S276).

  If it is determined in step S275 that the small winning combination has not been won, or after the process of step S276 is executed, the main CPU 3031 subtracts 1 from the value of the possible game number counter (step S277).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible number-of-games counter is 0 (step S278). When it is determined that neither the value of the winning number counter nor the value of the possible game number counter is 0, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible-to-play counter is 0, the main CPU 3031 executes an RB ending process (step S279). In this process, the main CPU 3031 clears the number-of-winnings counter and the possible number-of-games counter, and updates the bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119B) to “0”. After executing the processing of step S279, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S270 that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S280). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033. If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 performs CB termination processing (step S281). In the MB gaming state, the CB gaming state ends every time one unit game is played. Then, by repeating the CB termination process and the CB actuation process (see step S 298 in FIG. 137), in the MB gaming state, termination and actuation of the CB gaming state are repeated until the MB gaming state is terminated.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 updates the value of the MB end sheet number counter (step S282). In this process, the main CPU 3031 updates the value of the MB end sheet number counter by subtracting the number of medals paid out in the MB gaming state from the payout number set in advance.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the value of the MB end sheet number counter is smaller than 0 (step S283). If it is determined that the value of the MB end sheet number counter is not smaller than 0, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the MB end sheet counter is smaller than 0, the main CPU 3031 performs an MB end process (step S284). In this process, the main CPU 3031 updates bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) to "0".

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates MB end command data, and stores the generated MB end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S285). The MB end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the MB gaming state has ended.

  After executing the processing of step S285, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

<Bonus operation check process>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the current gaming state is the BB gaming state (7BB gaming state or bird BB gaming state) (step S290). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the 7BB gaming state or the bird BB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the RB is in operation (step S291). In this processing, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RB gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the main CPU 3031 executes an RB operation process (step S292). In this process, the main CPU 3031 updates bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) to "1", sets "8" in the number-of-winnings counter, and Set 8 ". If it is determined in step S291 that the RB is in operation, or after the process of step S292 is executed, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S290 that the current gaming state is neither 7BB gaming state nor bird BB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 determines whether BB has won (step S293). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the effective line is the symbol combination corresponding to BB (combination relating to “C_red 7” or “C_bird 7” shown in FIG. 100A). To judge.

  If it is determined that the BB has won, the main CPU 3031 performs BB operation processing (step S294). In this process, the main CPU 3031 updates bit 0 or 1 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) to "1". Also, the main CPU 3031 sets “344” to the BB end number counter. Each time a medal is paid out in the BB gaming state, the value of the BB ending number counter is subtracted, and the BB gaming state is ended when the value of the BB ending number counter becomes smaller than 0 (FIG. 136). See step S271 to step S273). Further, the main CPU 3031 executes an RB operation process (see step S292).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119A) (step S295).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates BB start command data, and stores the generated BB start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S296). The BB start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). Thereby, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the BB gaming state has started. After executing the processing of step S296, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S293 that BB has not won a prize, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S297). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 performs CB operation processing (step S298). By repeating the CB operation processing and the CB termination processing (see step S 281 in FIG. 136), in the MB gaming state, the operation and termination of the CB gaming state are repeated until the MB gaming state is terminated. After executing the processing of step S298, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S297 that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the MB has won (step S299). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the effective line is a symbol combination corresponding to MB (a combination relating to “C_BAR” or “C_bird BAR” shown in FIG. 100A). to decide.

  When determining that the MB has won, the main CPU 3031 performs an MB operation process (step S300). In this process, the main CPU 3031 updates bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) to "1". The main CPU 3031 also sets “119” to the MB end sheet number counter. Every time a medal is paid out in the MB gaming state, the value of the MB ending number counter is subtracted, and the MB gaming state ends when the value of the MB ending number counter becomes smaller than 0 (FIG. 136). See step S282 to step S284).

  Then, the main CPU 3031 performs CB operation processing (step S301). Next, the main CPU 3031 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119A) (step S302).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates MB start command data, and stores the generated MB start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S303). The MB start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). Thereby, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the MB gaming state has started.

  If it is determined in step S299 that the MB has not won, the main CPU 3031 determines whether replay is displayed (step S304). Specifically, the main CPU 3031 is called a combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” called “C_lip A”, a combination of “BAR-Plum-Plum” called “C_rip B_01”, and called “C_lip B_02” Any of the combination of "blank-plum-plum", the combination of "red 7-plum-plum" called "C_lip C_01", and the combination of "feather-plum-plum" called "C_lip C_02" It is determined whether or not (see FIG. 100A) has been displayed along the valid line.

  If it is determined that the replay is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 3031 ends the bonus operation check process. On the other hand, if it is determined that replay is displayed (YES), the main CPU 3031 makes an automatic insertion request to copy the value of the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter (step S305), and ends the bonus operation check process. .

<Interrupt process by control of main CPU>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process. This process is performed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 3031 saves a register (step S320). Next, the main CPU 3031 executes an input port check process shown in FIG. 139 (step S321). In this process, the main CPU 3031 confirms the presence or absence of a signal to be transmitted to the sub control device SS.

  For example, the main CPU 3031 stores, in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033, input state command data representing on-edge and off-edge information of various switches including on-edge and off-edge such as start switch 3006S and stop switch 3007S.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a timer update process (step S322). Subsequently, the main CPU 3031 executes an effect timer update process (step S323). Next, the main CPU 3031 performs command data transmission processing (step S324). In this process, the main CPU 3031 transmits command data stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 to the sub control circuit 3070. Next, the main CPU 3031 executes reel control processing for controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR (step S325).

  More specifically, the main CPU 3031 starts the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to a request to start the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, the reels at a constant speed. Control is performed so that RL, RC, and RR rotate. Further, the main CPU 3031 performs control such that rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR corresponding to the stop operation is stopped in response to the stop operation.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes lamp / 7SEG driving processing (step S326). For example, the main CPU 3031 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 3031 restores the register (step S327), and ends the regularly occurring interrupt processing.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an input port check process performed in the interrupt process.

  First, the main CPU 3031 checks the state of each input port (step S330). Next, the main CPU 3031 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 3033 (step S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 3033 (step S332).

  Thus, by allowing the state of the input port before one interrupt to be compared with the state of the current input port, the main CPU 3031 can check the states of both input ports. Thus, it is checked whether the state of the input port has changed, for example, whether the maximum bet button DD8 or the 1-bet button has been pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 3033 (step S333). In the present embodiment, the on-edge refers to the state in which the button is pressed, and the off-edge refers to the state in which the button is released.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates input state command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070, and stores the generated input state command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 3033. The transmission process is executed (step S334), and the input port check process is ended.

[Sub control process]
The sub CPU 3071 of the sub control circuit 3070 executes various processes in accordance with the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Power on processing>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing power on processing at the time of power on.

  First, the sub CPU 3071 executes an initialization process (step S350). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 performs error check on the sub RAM 3073 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 starts the lamp control task shown in FIG. 141 (step S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 3071 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 3071 every two milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 starts the sound control task shown in FIG. 142 (step S352). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 3071 controls the sound output state from the speakers DD 25 L, DD 25 R. Next, the sub CPU 3071 starts the mother task (step S353), and ends the power on processing.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing a lamp control task activated in the power on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 3071 executes timer interrupt initialization processing (step S360). Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes lamp-related data initialization processing (step S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes timer interrupt waiting (step S362). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 executes a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 3071 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Also, a task group (not shown) of power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) of door monitoring unit communication synchronization, etc. may be mentioned.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes a sound control task shown in FIG. 142 (step S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization is basically in the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, of the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 142, the processes of steps S372 and S373 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes a lamp data analysis process (step S364), executes a lamp effect execution process (step S365), and executes the process of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in the power on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 3071 executes initialization processing of sound related data related to the sound output state from the speakers DD 25 L, DD 25 R (step S 370). Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes the task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (step S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes analysis processing of sound data (step S372), performs sound effect execution processing (step S373), and executes processing of step S371.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started in the power on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 3071 executes initialization of the communication message queue (step S380), and executes a check on the received command (step S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether a command different from the previous one has been received (step S382). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 executes the processing of step S 381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, and creates game information from the received command and creates it The game information is stored in the sub RAM 3073 (step S383). Next, the sub CPU 3071 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 144 (step S384), and executes the process of step S381.

<Command analysis process>
FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 3071 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 145 (step S390), executes the lamp data determination process (step S391), and executes the sound data determination process (step S392). The data is registered (step S393), and the command analysis process is ended.

<Determination content determination processing>
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing performed in the command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether an initialization command has been received (step S400). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes processing upon initialization command reception (step S401), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (step S402). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes a medal insertion command reception process (step S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the start command has been received (step S404). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes start command reception processing (step S405), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the start command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the start command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (step S406). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (step S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the reel stop command has been received (step S408). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes a reel stop command reception process (step S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the effect game lock command has been received (step S410). Here, if it is determined that the effect game lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes the effect game lock command reception process (step S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the effect game lock command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the effect game lock command. The process for receiving the effect game lock command will be described later with reference to FIG. 150 (a).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect game lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (step S412). Here, if it is determined that a winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes a winning operation command reception process (step S413), and ends the effect content determination process. In the prize activation command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on information transmitted as a prize actuation command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether a bonus start command (BB start command or MB start command) has been received (step S414). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes bonus start command reception processing (step S415), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the bonus start command reception process, for example, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the bonus end command (BB end command or MB end command) has been received (step S416). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes bonus end command reception processing (step S417), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the bonus end command reception process, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the input state command has been received (step S418). Here, if it is determined that the input state command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 3071 executes an input state command reception process (step S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the input state command reception process, for example, the main CPU 3031 transmits, as an input state command, whether each operation unit is in the on-edge state or in the off-edge state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S418 that the input state command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 3071 ends the effect content determination process.

<Effective game lock (backlight effect)>
FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing lock time lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 146 (b) is a view showing the correspondence between the effect game stop number and the lock time. FIGS. 147A and 147B show a lock time lottery table. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an effect game lock process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an effect game stop number overwrite process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 150 (a) is a flow chart showing processing upon reception of an effect game lock command performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 150 (b) is a view showing the correspondence between the effect game stop number and the effect content. 151A and 151B are diagrams for describing a specific aspect of backlight effect.

  In the present embodiment, the game lock (game lock for effect) may be performed after the rotation of all the reels RL, RC, RR is stopped. The game lock is a reel effect for invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined time. Specifically, when the effect game lock is performed, all reels RL, RC, RR are locked (full turn to body lock), and an operation by the player (for example, BET button or start lever) until a predetermined time elapses DD6 operation is invalidated.

  When such an effect game lock is generated, backlight effect (effect using a reel backlight) is simultaneously performed. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are disposed as reel backlights on each of the reels RL, RC, and RR. These LEDs are arranged inside the reel body in each reel RL, RC, RR so that the nine symbols stopped and displayed in the frame of the main display window DD4 can be individually illuminated one by one. ing. Note that a large number of LEDs for irradiating each pattern are provided, and backlight effects having complicated lighting patterns can be realized in each of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

  Specifically, as the backlight effect, 10 types of effects ("Shippu", "Double Wink", "Habuki"), "V", "Invasion", "Reverse Niagara", "Hurricane", "Side 3 "Book + V", "Fountain" and "SP Flash" are provided. In each backlight effect, the lighting patterns of the reel backlights are different from each other.

  Figure 151A and “Failure”, “Double Wink”, “Habuki”, “V”, “Invasion”, “Reverse Niagara”, “Hurricane”, “Horizontal Three + V”, and “Funnel”. It is shown in FIG. 151B. Specifically, in FIG. 151A (a), “Shippu” is shown, in FIG. 151A (b), “double wink” is shown, in FIG. 151A (c), “feathering snow” is shown, and in FIG. 151A (d) 151A (e) shows “invasion”, FIG. 151A (f) shows “reverse Niagara”, FIG. 151B (a) shows “hurricane” and FIG. 151B (b) shows “horizontal”. FIG. 151B (c) shows the “water fountain” in FIG. 151B (c).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 151A (a), in “Shippu”, the LEDs light up sequentially from “the LED corresponding to the upper region of the left reel RL” to “the LED corresponding to the lower region of the right reel RR”. The LEDs turn on in sequence from “the LED corresponding to the upper region of the right reel RR” to “the LED corresponding to the lower region of the left reel RL”. Also, as shown in FIG. 151A (f), in "reverse Niagara", the LEDs light up sequentially from "the LED corresponding to the lower region of the left reel RL" to "the LED corresponding to the upper region of the left reel RL" LED lights sequentially from "LED corresponding to lower region of middle reel RC" to "LED corresponding to upper region of middle reel RC", "LED corresponding to lower region of right reel RR" from "right reel The LEDs sequentially light up to “LEDs corresponding to the upper region of RR”, and the lighting of the LEDs in each of the reels RL, RC, and RR occurs substantially simultaneously. In any of the backlight effects, the time for lighting the LED is very short, and the appearance that the lighting LED is moving is exhibited.

  "Shippu", "Double wink", "Habuki", "V", "Invasion", "Reverse Niagara", "Hurricane", "3 horizontal + V", and "Funnel" are only reel back lights In contrast to the effect used, the "SP flash" is an effect that is performed using LEDs other than the reel backlight among the LEDs (lamps) provided in the gaming machine 1 in addition to the reel backlight. Although not shown, in the “SP flash”, for example, using the indirect lighting unit 1060 shown in FIG. 74, each LED is lighted so as to go around the entire housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (b), such 10 types of backlight effects are respectively associated with any of the effect game stop numbers "1" to "10". Specifically, “Shippu” is associated with the game stop number for effect “1”, “double wink” is associated with the game stop number for effect “2”, and “Habuki” is a game for effect Stop number "3" is associated, "V" is associated with effect game stop number "4", "attack" is associated with effect game stop number "5", "reverse Niagara" "Is associated with effect game stop number" 6 "," hurricane "is associated with effect game stop number" 7 "," three horizontal + V "is effect game stop number" 8 " The "water fountain" is associated with the effect game stop number "9", and the "SP flash" is associated with the effect game stop number "10". In the case where the backlight effect is not performed, the effect game stop number "0" is assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the effect game stop numbers "1" to "10" are respectively associated with the "lock time". The “lock time” is a time during which the operation by the player is invalidated in the effect game lock. Specifically, the effect game stop number "1" is associated with "768 ms", the effect game stop number "2" is associated with "623 ms", and the effect game stop number "3" is The effect game stop number "4" is associated with "831 ms", the effect game stop number "5" is associated with "1039 ms", and the effect game stop number "4" is associated with "1039 ms". 6 "is associated with" 416 ms ", the effect game stop number" 7 "is associated with" 1247 ms ", the effect game stop number" 8 "is associated with" 1766 "ms, The effect game stop number “9” is associated with “1247 ms”, and the effect game stop number “10” is associated with “6600 ms”.

  The lock time corresponding to the effect game stop numbers “7” to “10” is relatively long, and in particular, the lock time corresponding to the effect game stop number “10” is another game stop for effect It is quite long compared to the lock time corresponding to the number.

  The lock time corresponding to each effect game stop number substantially coincides with the time (rendering time) in which the backlight effect corresponding to the effect game stop number is performed (or the lock time is slightly longer than the effect time) Is set). For example, the time for the first LED to light and the last LED to turn off is about 768 ms, and for the "SP Flash", the last LED is turned off after the first LED is on. The time to reach is approximately 6600 ms. Thereby, the backlight effect is always performed during the period when the effect game lock is being performed, and is controlled so that the backlight effect is not performed when the effect game lock is not being performed. There is.

  Hereinafter, the effect game lock and the backlight effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150.

<Lock time lottery process>
The lock time lottery process performed in the main control circuit 3060 will be described using FIG. 146 (a). The lock time lottery process is a process performed in step S16 of FIG. 121 (main control process).

  In the lock time lottery process, first, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (any of 7BB gaming state, bird BB gaming state, and MB gaming state) (step S1001). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is a bonus state, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (RT0 gaming state, 7BB flag state, bird BB flag state, or MB flag state), the main CPU 3031 selects the lock time lottery table ( 147A and 147B), a lottery based on a random number is performed to determine a game stop number for effect (step S1002).

  As lock time lottery table, lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state (refer to FIG. 147A (a)), lock time lottery table for 7BB winning game (refer to FIG. 147A (b)), lock time lottery table for bird BB winning game (See FIG. 147A (c)), MB winning game lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (a)), BB inter-flag state lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (b)), and MB flag state A lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (c)) is provided.

  In the process of step S1002, when the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 refers to the RT0 gaming state lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147A (a)). Further, when the gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the state between the 7BB flags by determining “F_7BB” as the internal winning combination in the unit game currently being played, the main CPU 3031 locks the 7BB winning game Referring to the time lottery table (see FIG. 147A (b)). Further, when the gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the state between the bird BB flags by the “F_bird BB” being determined as the internal winning combination in the unit game currently being played, the main CPU 3031 operates the bird BB. The lock time lottery table for the winning game (see FIG. 147A (c)) is referred to.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the inter-MB flag state by determining “F_MB” as an internal winning combination in the unit game currently being played, the main CPU 3031 locks the MB winning game Refer to the time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (a)). Further, when the current gaming state is a state between BB flags, the main CPU 3031 refers to a lock time lottery table for state between BB flags (see FIG. 147B (b)). Further, when the current gaming state is the state between MB flags, the main CPU 3031 refers to the lock time random determination table for the state between MB flags (see FIG. 147B (c)).

  In the lock time lottery table shown in FIG. 147A and FIG. 147B, the internal winning combinations (“displacement”, “rip”, “feather A”, “grapes”, “hatori”, “cherry A”, “cherry B”, “ The special game stop numbers “0” to “10” and the lottery value for each of the special A ”,“ special B ”,“ special C ”,“ special D ”,“ one piece out ”and“ feather B ”) And are defined in association with each other. In the figure, “rip” indicates “F_Replay” (see FIGS. 102 to 106), “feather A” indicates “F_feather A” (see FIGS. 102 to 106), and “grapes” indicate “F_grapes A” and “F_grapes B” (see FIGS. 102 to 106) are shown, “Hatori” indicates “F_ Feathers” (see FIGS. 102 to 106), and “Cherry A” is “F_ “Cherry A” (see FIGS. 102 to 106) is shown, “Cherry B” indicates “F_cherry B” (see FIGS. 102 to 106), and “special A” is “F_special A” (FIG. 102). 106), “special B” indicates “F_special B” (see FIGS. 102 to 106), and “special C” indicates “F_special C” (see FIGS. 102 to 106). “Special D” indicates “F_special D” (see FIGS. 102 to 106), and “one should be "Is a role other than the bonus role among the roles that can be internally won in the single-seat game, that is," F_ common lip "," F_ common feather "," F_ common cherry A ", and" F_ common cherry B " (See FIG. 102 to FIG. 106), “feather B” indicates “F_feather B” (see FIG. 102 to FIG. 106).

  In the process of step S1002 in FIG. 146 (a), the main CPU 3031 refers to one lock time lottery table (see FIGS. 147A and 147B) and stores the internal winning combination determined in step S14 of FIG. 121 and step S13. Based on the random number value, one effect game stop number is determined from among the effect game stop numbers of “0” to “10”. The lock time lottery table (see FIGS. 147A and 147B) is stored in the main ROM 3032.

  After executing the process of step S1002, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the effect game stop number determined in step S1002 is "0" (step S1003).

  If the main CPU 3031 determines that the effect game stop number determined in step S1002 is not “0”, the main CPU 3031 displays data indicating the effect game stop number (any one of “1” to “10”) as the main RAM 3033 The game is stored in the effect game stop number storage area (not shown) provided in (step S1004).

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the effect game stop number is “0”, or after the process of step S1004 is executed, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

<Effective game lock process>
The effect game lock process performed in the main control circuit 3060 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG. The effect game lock process is a process performed in step S24 of FIG. 121 (main control process).

  In the effect game lock process, first, the main CPU 3031 is for effect in any one of “1” to “10” in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033 (see step S1004 in FIG. 146 (a)). It is determined whether data indicating a game stop number is stored (step S1021).

  If it is determined that the data indicating any of the effect game stop numbers “1” to “10” is not stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that data indicating an effect game stop number for any of “1” to “10” is stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033, the main CPU 3031 is for effect A game stop number overwrite process is executed (step S1022).

  Here, the game stop number overwriting process for effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the effect game stop number overwriting process, the main CPU 3031 first determines that the current gaming state is the flag state (any of the 7BB flag states, the bird BB flag states, and the MB flag states). It is determined whether or not (step S1041). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is between flags, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is not the flag state (RT0 gaming state), the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is grape (step S1042). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the internal winning combination determined in step S14 of FIG. 121 is one of “F_grapes A” and “F_grapes B”.

  If it is determined that the internal winning combination is neither “F_grapes A” nor “F_grapes B”, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the internal winning combination is either "F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B", the main CPU 3031 is composed only of grapes ("grapes 1" and "grapes 2") It is determined whether or not the combination) has won a prize (step S1043). In this process, the main CPU 3031 selects one of the combinations relating to “C_grapes_01” to “C_grapes_08” shown in FIG. 100A, in which the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the effective line corresponds to grapes. It is determined whether or not

  If it is determined that the grape has won, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the grape has not won, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not cherry (combination in the left reel RL with the symbol “cherry 1” or “cherry 2”) has won ( Step S1044). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines that symbol combinations stopped and displayed along the active line correspond to cherries ("C_Cherry A_01" to "C_Cherry A_07", "C_Cherry D_01" to "C_Cherry A_07" shown in FIG. 100A). C_Cheri D_07, C_Cheri E_01 to C_Cheri E_18, C_Cheri F, C_Cheri G, C_Cheri H, C_Cheri I, and C_Cheri J It is determined whether or not any one of the combinations).

  Here, the processing of step S1044 is executed on condition that "F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B" is determined as an internal winning combination (see step S1042), the internal winning combination is "F_grapes A". Or "F_grapes B", "C_Celli B_01" to "C_Celli B_04", "C_Celli C", "C_Celli K_01" to "C_Ceri K_06", "C_Celli L_01" to "C_Celli" L_24 "," C_ Cheri M "," C_ Cheri N "," C_ Cheri O_01 "to" C_ Cheri O_05 "," C_ Cheri P_01 "to" C_ Cheri P_02 "," C_ Cheri Q_01 "to" C_ Cheri Q_02 " , “C_Cheri R_01” to “C_Cheri R_04” and “C_Cheri S” are effective combinations. Because not appear above (see FIG 101A~ Figure 101C), for these combinations, are excluded from the determination target in the processing of step S 1044.

  If it is determined in the process of step S1044 that the cherry has not won, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the cherry has won, the main CPU 3031 indicates data indicating the effect game stop number stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033 and the effect game stop number “2”. The data is overwritten (step S1045). The processing of step S1045 is executed on condition that "F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B" is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state (see step S1041 and step S1042), in the RT0 gaming state When the internal winning combination is "F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B", any one of "7", "8", and "9" may be determined as a game stop number for effect (See FIG. 147A (a)). In the process of step S1045, data indicating the game stop number for effect stored in the game stop number storing area for effect is changed from data indicating any of “7” to “9” to data indicating “2”. It is a process to change.

  After executing the processing of step S1045, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the effect game stop number overwrite process performed in step S1022 in FIG. 148 has been described using FIG. Description is returned to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S1022 of FIG. 148, the main CPU 3031 sets the effect game lock flag to on (step S1023). The effect game lock flag is a flag indicating that the effect game lock is being executed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets a value corresponding to the effect game stop number in the effect game lock timer (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines the lock time corresponding to the effect game stop number based on the data indicating the effect game stop number stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033 (FIG. 146 b) Set a value corresponding to (c) in the effect game lock timer. A table showing the correspondence between the effect game stop number and the lock time is stored in the main ROM 3032 and the main CPU 3031 specifies the lock time corresponding to the effect game stop number by referring to the table. Can.

  The effect game lock timer is updated by the effect timer update process (step S323) shown in FIG. In the process of step S323 of FIG. 138, when the effect game lock timer after update is 0, the main CPU 3031 sets the effect game lock flag to off. As a result, the effect game lock is ended (see step S1027).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates effect game lock command data, and stores the effect game lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S1025). The effect game lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). Thereby, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the effect game lock has been generated.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 clears data indicating an effect game stop number stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S1026).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the effect game lock flag is set to on (step S1027).

  If it is determined that the effect game lock flag is set to ON, the main CPU 3031 returns the process to step S1027. On the other hand, when determining that the effect game lock flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine. Thereby, the effect game lock is performed only for the time corresponding to the effect game stop number.

<Process when receiving a game lock command for effect>
The effect game lock command reception process performed in the sub control circuit 3070 will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). The effect game lock command reception process is a process performed in step S411 of FIG. 145 (effect content determination process) triggered by reception of effect game lock command data (see step S1025 of FIG. 148).

  In the effect game lock command reception process, the sub CPU 3071 sets effect data corresponding to the effect game stop number (step S1100). Because the effect game lock command data received in step S410 of FIG. 145 includes data indicating an effect game stop number stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033, effect game lock command data By receiving, the sub CPU 3071 can recognize the effect game stop number.

  In the process of step S1100, the sub CPU 3071 determines the backlight effect corresponding to the effect game stop number based on the data indicating the effect game stop number included in the effect game lock command data (see FIG. 150 (b)). The effect data according to is determined as the data used for the current effect. A table indicating the correspondence between the effect game stop number and the content of the backlight effect is stored in the sub ROM 3072. The sub CPU 3071 refers to the table to obtain the backlight effect corresponding to the effect game stop number. Can be identified. The effect data corresponding to the backlight effect is also stored in the sub ROM 3072.

  After executing the processing of step S1100, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine. By the execution of the process for receiving a game lock command for effect shown in FIG. 150 (a), a backlight effect corresponding to the game stop number for effect is performed.

<Suggestment of bonus win by backlight production>
As described above, the effect game lock and the backlight effect have been described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150.

  In the present embodiment, the bonus combination ("F_7BB", "F_bird BB", or "F_MB") is determined as the internal winning combination for the player through the backlight effect performed as described above. An opportunity to know things is provided.

  In the lock time lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), the internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as the lottery value for the game stop number for effect “1” is “rip” and It is "Cherry B". This is determined that "F_Replay" or "F_Cherry B" is determined as an internal winning combination when a backlit effect ("Shippu") corresponding to the game stop number "1" for presentation is performed in the RT0 gaming state. It means that

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), the internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as the lottery value for the game stop number for effect “2” is “ "Hatori", "Cherry A", and "Cherry B". This is because, when the back light effect ("double wink") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "2" is performed in the RT0 gaming state, "F_ feather bird", "F_cherry A", or "F_cherry" It means that "B" was decided as an internal winning combination.

  Similarly, in the RT0 gaming state lock time lottery table shown in FIG. 147A (a), an internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect “3” is “ Feather A "," cherry A "," cherry B ", and" feather B ". This is because, when the back light effect ("Habuki") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "3" is performed in the RT0 gaming state, "F_ feather A", "F _ cherry A", "F _ cherry B ", Or" F_ feather B "means that it was decided as an internal winning combination.

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), an internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect “4” is “ It is "feather A", "hatori", and "feather B". This is because, when a backlight effect ("V character") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "4" is performed in the RT0 gaming state, "F_ feather A", "F_ feather" or "F_ feather" It means that "B" was decided as an internal winning combination.

  Similarly, in the RT0 gaming state lock time lottery table shown in FIG. 147A (a), an internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect “5” is “ "Hatori" and "Cherry B". In this case, when a backlight effect ("attack") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "5" is performed in the RT0 gaming state, "F_ Hatori" or "F_Cherry B" is determined as an internal winning combination. It means that

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), an internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect "6" It is a lip. This means that "F_Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination when a backlight effect ("Reverse Niagara") corresponding to the game stop number "6" for the effect is performed in the RT0 gaming state. .

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), an internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect “7” is “ Grapes and feather birds. This is because, when a backlight effect ("hurricane") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "7" is performed in the RT0 gaming state, "F_grapes A", "F_grapes B", or "F_ feathers" It means that "" was decided as an internal winning combination.

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), an internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect “8” is “ It is a grape. This means that when a backlight effect ("three horizontal lines + V") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "8" is performed in the RT0 gaming state, "F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B" are internally won. It means that it was decided as a role.

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), the internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as the lottery value for the game stop number for effect "9" is " It is a grape. This is determined as "F_Vines A" or "F_Vines B" as the internal winning combination when a backlight effect ("Funnel") corresponding to the effect gaming stop number "9" is performed in the RT0 gaming state It means being done.

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), there is no internal winning combination in which a value larger than 0 is set as a lottery value for the game stop number for effect "10". . This means that the backlight effect ("SP flash") corresponding to the effect game stop number "10" is not performed in the RT0 gaming state.

  As described above, in the lock time lottery table for RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 147A (a)), the type of the backlight effect that can occur in the RT0 gaming state and the win when the backlight effect occurs. Correspondence with possible internal winning combinations is shown.

  Similarly, in the lock time lottery table for the 7BB winning game (see FIG. 147A (b)), the type of backlight effect that can occur in the 7BB winning game and the possibility of winning when the backlight effect occurs The correspondence with the internal winning combination with sex is shown. In addition, in the bird BB winning game lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147A (c)), the type of backlight effect that may occur in the bird BB winning game and the case where the backlight effect occurs are won. The correspondence with possible internal winning combinations is shown. Also, in the MB winning game lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (a)), types of backlight effects that may occur in the MB winning game and the possibility of winning when the backlight effect occurs. The corresponding relationship with the internal winning combination is shown.

  In addition, in the BB flag inter-state lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (b)), types of backlight effects that can occur in inter-BB flag states (except for the BB winning game) and the back light effects occur. It shows the correspondence with the internal winning combination that may have been won. Also, in the MB flag state lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (c)), types of backlight effects that can occur in the MB flag state (except for MB winning games), and the backlight effects are generated. It shows the correspondence with the internal winning combination that may have been won.

  The correspondences as described above are the RT0 gaming state, the 7BB winning game, the bird BB winning game, the MB winning game and the BB flag status (except for the BB winning game) and the MB flag status (except for the MB winning game). , Are different from each other. As a result, when a correspondence different from the above-mentioned correspondence in the RT0 gaming state occurs, the player who notices the deviation of the correspondence has the gaming state transitioning to the inter-flag state (that is, the bonus role ( "F_7BB", "F_bird BB", or "F_MB") can be detected as an internal winning combination).

  For example, in the BB flag state lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (b)) and the MB flag state lock time lottery table (see FIG. 147B (c)), the lottery for the game stop number for effect "6" The internal winning combinations in which a value larger than 0 is set as the value are “rip”, “feather A”, and “feather B”. If the backlight effect ("reverse Niagara") corresponding to the game stop number for performance "6" is performed in the flag state (except for the winning game of BB or MB), this means "F_Replay", "F-Replay" It means that "F_ feather A" or "F_ feather B" is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In other words, in the inter-flag state, not only when "F_Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination but also when "F_ Feather A" or "F_ Feather B" is determined as an internal winning combination, A backlight effect ("reverse Niagara") corresponding to the game stop number "6" may be performed. On the other hand, the backlight effect ("reverse Niagara") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "6" in the RT0 gaming state is performed only when "F_Replay" is determined as the internal winning combination. (See FIG. 147A (a)).

  Here, when “F_ feather A” or “F_ feather B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination (see FIG. 100A) related to “C_ feather” may be stopped and displayed along the effective line, When “F_Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination relating to “C_ Feather” can not be stopped and displayed along the effective line (see FIG. 101A).

  Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, when the combination relating to "C_ feathers" is stopped and displayed along the activated line, the backlight effect ("reverse Niagara") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "6" is performed That can not happen. On the other hand, in the inter-flag state, when the combination relating to “C_ feathers” is stopped and displayed along the effective line, the backlight effect (“reverse Niagara”) corresponding to the effect game stop number “6” It can happen that you

  From the above, the situation where the combination relating to “C_ feathers” is stopped and displayed along the effective line, and the backlight effect (“reverse Niagara”) corresponding to the game stop number for effect “6” is performed is RT 0 It can not occur in the gaming state, and indicates that the gaming state is transitioning to the flag state. Through such a situation, the player can recognize that the bonus combination ("F_7BB", "F_bird BB", or "F_MB") has been determined as the internal winning combination.

  Thus, in order for the player to know that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, the relationship between the type of combination stopped and displayed along the effective line and the type of backlight effect generated at that time is It will be a clue.

  Here, when the cherry ("F_Cherry A" or "F_Cherry B") is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state, the game stop numbers for effects "1", "2", "3", Alternatively, there is a possibility that a backlight effect ("Shippu", "Double wink", "Halfuki", or "Attack") corresponding to "5" may be performed (see FIG. 147A (a)). Also, in the case where cherry ("F_Cherry A" or "F_Cherry B") is determined to be an internal winning combination, a combination of cherry (the symbol on the left reel RL is "Cherry 1" or "Cherry 2") ) Can be won (see FIGS. 100A and 100B and FIGS. 101A to 101C). From this, with regard to the relationship between the type of combination and the type of backlight effect, "Cherry" as a combination, "Shokaze" as a backlight effect, "Double wink", "Habuki", and "Striking" It is assumed that it is inscribed in the mind of the player as "corresponding".

  On the other hand, when the grape ("F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B") is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state, the effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9" Backlighting (“hurricane”, “three horizontal + V”, or “water fountain”) may be performed. In addition, when a grape ("F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B") is determined to be an internal winning combination, the grapes (combination consisting of only "grapes 1" and "grapes 2") are won There is also a possibility that the cherry blossoms (combination in which the symbol on the left reel RL is “Cherry 1” symbol or “Cherry 2” symbol) may be won (FIG. 100A and FIG. 100B, and FIG. 101A to FIG. See 101C). That is, both grapes and cherries may win, and cherries may also win if the grapes do not win (if the grapes are dropped).

  Here, a backlight effect ("hurricane", "three horizontal lines + V", and so on) that can be performed when grapes ("F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B") are determined as internal winning combinations in the RT0 gaming state Among the "fountain", a backlight effect ("Golden", "double") that can be performed when cherry ("F_cherry A" or "F_cherry B") is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state “Wink”, “Haifuki” and “Invasion” are not included. Therefore, if the grapes ("F_grapes A" or "F_grapes B") are determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state and the cherries win (especially when the grapes are dropped), the game for rendering is stopped If a backlight effect corresponding to the number “7”, “8” or “9” (“hurricane”, “three horizontal + V” or “fountain”) is performed, the player's mind will A situation different from the above-mentioned “relationship between the type of combination and the type of backlight effect” that would be engraved will occur. Then, the player feels a sense of discomfort in the situation and considers that "the correspondence between the type of internal winning combination and the type of backlight effect is different from normal", and "the bonus combination is an internal winning combination. It is feared that it may lead to misunderstanding that it has been decided.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the grape ("F_grape A" or "F_grape B") is determined as the internal winning combination, and cherry is won, the game stop number for effect is "2". Is to be overwritten (see FIG. 149). Thereby, a backlight effect ("double wink") corresponding to the game stop number for effect "2" is performed, and the backlight effect is a cherry ("F_cherry A" or "F_cherry B"). Since it can be performed when it is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to eliminate the concern as described above without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Although the effect game stop number overwriting process shown in FIG. 149 is described as overwriting a specific effect game stop number (“2”), a plurality of effect game stop numbers (“1”, “ It is also possible to select one effect game stop number from 2), "3" and "5") by lottery and overwrite the selected effect game stop number. Alternatively, the effect game stop number may simply be cleared (erased). That is, when a grape ("F_grape A" or "F_grape B") is determined as the internal winning combination and the cherries are won, the effect game lock and the backlight effect may not be performed.

  Further, in the effect game stop number overwriting process for effects shown in FIG. 149, it has been described that, when both grapes and cherries win a prize, the overwriting regarding the effect game stop number is not performed, but in this case as well The overwriting may be performed. In addition, when both of the grape and the cherries win, the game stop number for effect may be added. That is, a grape ("F_grape A" or "F_grape B") is determined as an internal winning combination, and any of the game stop numbers "7" to "9" for effect is generated in the lock time lottery process (see FIG. 146). When selected, the selected one game stop number for effect (for example, “7”) and cherry (“F_cherry A” or “F_cherry B”) are determined as internal winning combinations Both of the effect game stop numbers (eg “2”) of one of the plurality of effect game stop numbers (“1”, “2”, “3” or “5”) that may be selected May be determined as an effect game stop number. For example, when “7” and “2” are determined as the effect game stop number, after the backlight effect (“hurricane”) corresponding to the effect game stop number “7” is performed, the effect A backlight effect ("double wink") corresponding to the game stop number "2" may be performed. In this case, the effect game lock may be configured to be performed for the total time of the lock time corresponding to the effect game stop number "7" and the lock time corresponding to the effect game stop number "2". It is possible.

  Further, in the effect game stop number overwriting process for effect shown in FIG. 149, it has been described that when the grape and cherries both do not win, the overwrite related to the effect game stop number is not performed, but in this case Alternatively, the overwriting may be performed. Further, although the effect game stop number overwriting process shown in FIG. 149 is described as performing the overwriting only in the RT0 gaming state, the overwriting may be performed in the gaming states other than the RT0 gaming state.

  Further, in the lock time lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 147A (a), when the grapes (“F_grapes A” or “F_grapes B”) are determined as internal winning combinations in the RT0 gaming state, and the RT0 gaming Although there is no provision of a game stop number for presentation that can be selected both in the state where cherry ("F_cherry A" or "F_cherry B") is determined as an internal winning combination, such a game for presentation A stop number may be provided. In this case, when the effect game stop number which can be selected by both sides is determined in the lock time lottery process (see FIG. 146), the overwriting may not be performed.

  For example, the lock time lottery table for the RT0 gaming state is the effect game stop number “2” when the grape (“F_grapes A” or “F_grapes B”) is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state, One of “7”, “8”, and “9” may be selected. In this case, when one of the effect game stop numbers "7" to "9" is determined in the lock time lottery process (see FIG. 146), the overwrite related to the effect game stop number is performed while the lock time is performed. If the effect game stop number "2" is determined in the lottery process (see FIG. 146), the overwriting may not be performed.

  Further, although the process related to the overwriting (see step S1045 in FIG. 149) is described as being performed after the rotation of all the reels RL, RC, and RR is stopped, the process is performed for all the reels RL, RC, It may be performed (when at least one reel is rotating) before stopping the rotation of RR is completed. For example, when the rotation of the left reel RL is stopped, the conditions for performing the overwriting (grapes (“F_grapes A” or “F_grapes B”) are determined as internal winning combinations, and cherries are to be won If it is determined that) is established (if the "Cherry 1" symbol or the "Cherry 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel RL), then the rotation of the middle reel RC and the right reel RR is It is good also as performing processing concerning the above-mentioned overwrite before stopping.

<Transition flow of sub gaming state>
FIG. 152A shows transition transition of the sub gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 152B is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the sub gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the sub gaming state as shown in FIG. 152A is managed by the sub control circuit 3070. As the sub game state, a normal zone, a two BB challenge zone, a three BB challenge zone, and a BB challenge zone after four stations are provided.

  Specifically, referring to FIG. 152A (a) and FIG. 152B, when the first BB ends, the sub control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state to the dual BB challenge zone (see transition condition (1)). ). After the BB ("F_7BB" or "F_Bird BB") is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal zone, the combination of symbols corresponding to the BB ("C_red 7" or It is a BB gaming state that occurs when C_bird 7 ") is stopped and displayed along the activated line (BB is awarded).

  Also, when dual BB is completed, the sub control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state to the triple BB challenge zone (see transition condition (2)). After 2 BBs ("F_7BB" or "F_Bird BB") are determined as an internal winning combination in a 2nd BB challenge zone, a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB ("C_ red shown in FIG. 100A 7) or “C_bird 7”) is a BB gaming state generated by the stop display (BB winning) along the activated line.

  Also, when triple BB or quadruple or later BB is finished, the secondary control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state to the BB challenge zone after quadruple (see transition condition (3)). In triple BB, after BB ("F_7BB" or "F_Bird BB") is determined as an internal winning combination in triple BB challenge zone, a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB ("C_ red shown in FIG. 100A 7) or “C_bird 7”) is a BB gaming state generated by the stop display (BB winning) along the activated line. After 4 consecutive BBs, after BB ("F_7BB" or "F_Bird BB") is determined as an internal winning combination in the BB challenge zone after 4 consecutive stations, a combination of symbols corresponding to the relevant BB ("shown in FIG. 100A This is a BB gaming state that occurs when C_red 7 "or" C_bird 7 "is stopped and displayed along the activated line (BB is won).

  When a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the 2-station BB challenge zone, the secondary control circuit 3070 causes the secondary gaming state to shift from the 2-station BB challenge zone to the normal zone (see transition condition (4)). When a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the triple BB challenge zone, the secondary control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state from the triple BB challenge zone to the normal zone (see transition condition (5)). If a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (100 times) in the BB challenge zone after 4 stations, the secondary control circuit 3070 shifts the sub game state from the BB challenge zone to the normal zone after 4 stations (see transition condition (6) ).

  Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 152A (b) and 152B, after MB (“F_MB”) is determined as an internal winning combination in the double BB challenge zone, a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB ((F) MB gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as MB in the 2nd BB challenge zone) generated when “C_BAR” or “C_Bird BAR” shown in FIG. 100A is stopped and displayed along the activated line (MB wins) When is finished, the sub control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state to the dual BB challenge zone (see transition condition (7)).

  In addition, after MB ("F_MB") is determined as an internal winning combination in the triple BB challenge zone, the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB ("C_BAR" or "C_bird BAR" shown in FIG. 100A) is effective. When the MB gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as MB in the triple BB challenge zone) generated by the stop display along the line (the MB is winning) is ended, the sub control circuit 3070 switches to the triple BB challenge zone. And shift the sub game state (see transition condition (8)).

  In addition, after MB ("F_MB") is determined as an internal winning combination in BB challenge zone after 4 stations, a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB ("C_BAR" or "C_ Bird BAR" shown in FIG. 100A) When the MB gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “MB in 4 BB and subsequent BB challenge zones”) generated by being stopped and displayed along the activated line (hereinafter referred to as “MB in 4 BB and later in BB challenge zone”) is completed, Shift the sub game state to the challenge zone (see transition condition (9)).

  Also, after MB ("F_MB") is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal zone, a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB ("C_BAR" or "C_bird BAR" shown in FIG. 100A) is along the effective line. When the MB gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as MB in the normal zone) generated by the stop display (MB winning) is finished, the sub control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state to the normal zone (transition Condition (10)).

  When a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the 2-station BB challenge zone, the secondary control circuit 3070 causes the secondary gaming state to shift from the 2-station BB challenge zone to the normal zone (see transition condition (11)). When a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the triple BB challenge zone, the secondary control circuit 3070 shifts the secondary gaming state from the triple BB challenge zone to the normal zone (see transition condition (12)). When a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (100 times) in the BB challenge zone after 4 stations, the secondary control circuit 3070 shifts the sub game state from the BB challenge zone to the normal zone after 4 stations (see transition condition (13) ).

  In the specification, the 2-station BB, 3-station BB, and 4-station BB and later may be collectively referred to as "station BB". In addition, an MB in the challenge zone (an MB in a 2-station BB challenge zone, an MB in a 3-station BB challenge zone, and an MB in a 4-station BB challenge zone or later) may be referred to as a "BB in a BB consecutive zone". The “BB continuous inn” starts from the point when the first BB is activated, and the challenge zone (2 consecutive BB challenge zones, 3 consecutive BB challenge zones, or a bonus zone (BB and MB) is not determined as an internal winning combination. , The point where the point of transition from the 4th BB and subsequent BB challenge zones) to the normal zone is the end point. The MBs in the group BB and the group BB are also managed by the sub control circuit 3070 as a sub game state.

<Sound during BB>
FIG. 153 (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the type of BB and the sound during BB. FIG. 153 (b) is a diagram showing the priorities set for the sound during BB. FIGS. 154 and 155 are diagrams for describing special conditions for changing the sound during BB.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (a), in the first BB (7 BB) (the 7 BB gaming state generated by the 7 BB winning after the 7 BB is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal zone), the 7 BB wins. Then, the music A is output for the 7th game in the 7BB gaming state, the music C is output for the eighth game to the 12th game in the 7BB gaming state, and the 13th game to the 19th game in the 7BB gaming state The music A is output, and the music C is output after the 20th game in the 7BB gaming state.

  In the first time BB (bird BB) (a bird BB gaming state generated by the bird BB winning after the bird BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal zone), the bird BB wins after the bird BB wins. The music B is outputted until the seventh game in the gaming state, the music C is outputted from the eighth game to the twelfth game in the bird BB gaming state, and the music B is from the thirteenth game to the nineteenth game in the bird BB gaming state Is output, and the music C is output after the 20th game in the bird BB gaming state.

  In 2 ream BB (7 BB gaming state or bird BB gaming state generated by 7 BB or bird BB after winning a 7 BB or bird BB as an internal winning combination in 2 relic BB challenge zone), BB The music D is output from the seventh game in the BB gaming state to the seventh game in the BB gaming state, and the music E is output from the eighth game to the 12th game in the BB gaming state, and the thirteenth game to the 19th game in the BB gaming state The music D is output up to the point, and the music E is output after the 20th game in the BB gaming state.

  In a triple BB (a 7BB gaming state or a bird BB gaming state generated by 7BB or a bird BB winning after 7BB or a bird BB is determined as an internal winning combination in a triple BB challenge zone), BB After F is won, the music F is output from the seventh game in the BB gaming state, and the music G is output from the eighth game to the twelfth game in the BB gaming state, and the thirteenth game to the nineteenth game in the BB gaming state The music F is output up to the point, and the music G is output after the 20th game in the BB gaming state.

  In 4 BB and later BB (7 BB) (7 BB gaming state that is generated by 7 BB winning after 7 BB is decided as an internal winning combination in 4 BB and later BB challenge zones), 7 BB wins after 7 BB wins The music H is output until the seventh game in the gaming state, the music I is output from the eighth game to the 12th game in the 7BB gaming state, and the music H is output from the 13th game to the 19th game in the 7BB gaming state The music I is output after the 20th game in the 7BB gaming state.

  In BB (bird BB) after 4 reams (a bird BB gaming state generated by the bird BB winning after being determined as an internal winning combination in BB reshuffle after 4 reams), bird BB is After winning, the music J is output from the seventh game in the bird BB gaming state to the music K from the eighth game to the twelfth game in the bird BB gaming state, and from the thirteenth game in the bird BB gaming state to 19 The music J is output until the game, and the music K is output after the 20th game in the bird BB gaming state.

  1BB ream BB (7BB) (BB gaming state or MB gaming state is over After the 7BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first unit game (the first game) after the 7BB is determined to be a 7BB game In the state), the music L is output from the 7BB to the 7th game in the 7BB gaming state, and the music M is output from the 8th game to the 12th game in the 7BB gaming state, and 13 in the 7BB gaming state The music L is output from the game eyes to the 19th game, and the music M is output after the 20th game in the 7BB gaming state.

  1G ream BB (bird BB) (after BB gaming state or MB gaming state is over) After the bird BB is determined as the internal winning combination in the first unit game (first game), it occurs when the bird BB wins In the bird BB gaming state), music N is output from the bird BB to the seventh game in the bird BB gaming state, and music O is output from the eighth game to the 12th game in the bird BB gaming state The music N is outputted from the 13th game to the 19th game in the bird BB gaming state, and the music O is outputted after the 20th game in the bird BB gaming state.

  In special condition (I) BB (BB gaming state which occurs when BB carried over in the inter-BB flag state is realized after special condition (I) is established in the inter-BB flag state), BB wins Then, the music P is output from the seventh game in the BB gaming state to the seventh game, the music Q is output from the eighth game to the twelfth game in the BB gaming state, and the thirteenth game to the nineteenth game in the BB gaming state The music P is output, and the music Q is output after the 20th game in the BB gaming state. The special condition (I) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In special condition (II) BB (BB gaming state which occurs when BB carried over in the inter-BB flag state is achieved after special condition (II) is established in the inter-BB flag state), BB is awarded After that, the music R is output to the seventh game in the BB gaming state, the music S is output from the eighth game to the twelfth game in the BB gaming state, and the thirteenth game to the nineteenth game in the BB gaming state The music R is output, and the music S is output after the 20th game in the BB gaming state. The special condition (II) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram for describing the special condition (I). Special condition (I) is that “red 7” − “plum” − “plum” is stopped and displayed along the effective line (the combination relating to “C_rip C_01” shown in FIG. 100A wins), is there. FIG. 154 shows the stop display mode of the symbol when the combination relating to “C_rip C_01” wins. The combination relating to “C_rip C_01” can be won when “F_common rep” is determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 101A).

  Specifically, when "F_common lip" is determined as an internal winning combination, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), the stop operation for the right reel RR is the symbol ("red 7") at symbol position "3". When it is performed at the timing displayed in the middle stage area, as shown in FIG. 154 (b), the right reel RR slips by 2 symbols and stops, and "Plum" is stopped and displayed in the middle stage area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), when the stop operation for the middle reel RC is performed at the timing when the symbol (“red 7”) at the symbol position “3” is displayed in the middle region, FIG. 154 As shown in (d), the middle reel RC slips by 4 symbols and stops, and "Plum" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (e), the stop operation for the left reel RL was performed at the timing when the symbol (“red 7”) at the symbol position “3” is displayed in the middle region (symbol position “ When “red 7” of “3” is pressed), as shown in FIG. 154 (f), the left reel RL stops without further rotation (does not slip), and “red 7” is displayed in the middle region. "Is displayed stopped. As a result, "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" are aligned along the center line, and "C_lip C_01" (see FIG. 100A) wins.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram for describing the special condition (II). Special condition (II) is that "feather"-"plum"-"plum" is stopped and displayed along the effective line (the combination relating to "C_ lip C 02" shown in FIG. 100A wins), . FIG. 155 shows the stop display mode of the symbol when the combination related to “C_rip C_02” wins. The combination relating to “C_rip C_02” can be won when “F_common lip” is determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 101A).

  Specifically, when “F_common lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the stop operation for the middle reel RC has the symbol (“bird”) at the symbol position “20”. If it is performed at the timing displayed in the middle stage area, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), the middle reel RC slips by 3 symbols and stops, and "Plum" is stopped and displayed in the middle stage area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), when the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed at the timing when the symbol (“bird”) at the symbol position “14” is displayed in the middle region, as shown in FIG. As shown in d), the right reel RR slips by 4 symbols and stops, and "Plum" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (e), the stop operation for the left reel RL was performed at the timing when the symbol ("feather") at the symbol position "9" is displayed in the middle region (symbol position "9 When the "feather" of "is pressed", as shown in FIG. 155 (f), the left reel RL stops without rotating any more (does not slip), and the "feather" stops in the middle stage area Is displayed. As a result, "feathers"-"plums"-"plums" are aligned along the center line, and "C_rip C_02" (see FIG. 100A) wins.

  As described above, “Red 7”-“Plum”-“Plum” (“C_Rip C_01”) is the stop operation for the right reel RR when “F_Common Rip” is determined as the internal winning combination. 1 Stop operation is performed, the stop operation on the middle reel RC is performed as the second stop operation, the stop operation on the left reel RL is performed as the third stop operation, and the symbol position “3” is performed as the stop operation on the left reel RL "Red 7" of "" is pressed, I win a prize. Although not shown, the stop operation on the middle reel RC is performed as a first stop operation, the stop operation on the right reel RR is performed as a second stop operation, and the stop operation on the left reel RL is performed as a third stop operation. Also, similarly, “Red 7” of the symbol position “3” is pressed as a stop operation for the left reel RL, “Red 7” − “Plum” − “Plum” (“C_ Lip C_01”) Get a prize.

  In addition, “Fabric”-“Plum”-“Plum” (“C_Rip C_02”) is a stop operation for the middle reel RC as the first stop operation when “F_Common Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination. Is performed, the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed as a second stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed as a third stop operation, and the “feather of symbol position“ 9 ”is performed as a stop operation for the left reel RL The player wins a prize by being pushed. Although not shown, the stop operation on the right reel RR is performed as a first stop operation, the stop operation on the middle reel RC is performed as a second stop operation, and the stop operation on the left reel RL is performed as a third stop operation. In the same manner, "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_02") wins by pressing the "feather" of the symbol position "9" as a stop operation for the left reel RL. Do.

  "Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_Rip C_01") and "Fly"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_Rip C_02") are pressed forward (stop operation for the left reel RL) In the case of performing the stop operation in the order of pressing as the first stop operation), it is not possible to win a prize. When “F_common rep” is determined as an internal winning combination, the player performs anomalous push (stop operation in the pushing order in which the stop operation on the middle reel RC or the right reel RR is the first stop operation), and "Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" by successfully pressing the "Red 7" of the symbol position "3" or the "feather" aiming of the symbol position "9" as a stop operation for the left reel RL. ("C_ Lip C_01") or "feather"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_ Lip C_02") may be awarded. That is, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the middle reel RC and the right reel RR, "Plum" always exists within the range of 4 symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces), but in the left reel RL, There is a place where "Plum" does not exist within the range of 4 symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation, “plum” may not be drawn in at the left reel RL. As a player, in the stop operation on the left reel RL, aiming is performed at such timing.

  Then, when "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") wins in the state between BB flags (when the special condition (I) is satisfied), the music P in the BB gaming state And the music Q is output (refer FIG. 153 (a)). The music P and the music Q are sounds (BGM) in the BB gaming state which are output only when the special condition (I) is satisfied in the state between BB flags. Similarly, when "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_02") wins in the inter-BB flag state (when the special condition (II) is satisfied), the music R in the BB gaming state And the music S is output (see FIG. 153 (a)). The music R and the music S are sounds (BGM) in the BB gaming state which are output only when the special condition (II) is satisfied in the state between BB flags.

  The player can enjoy such special sound (BGM) by succeeding in the above-described bit pressing in the state between BB flags. In addition, the player listens to the BBGM during the BB gaming state depending on whether the player aims to "Red 7" at the symbol position "3" or "feather" at the symbol position "9" as a stop operation for the left reel RL. Type ("Song P and Song Q" or "Song R and Song S") can be selected.

  Here, in order for "Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_Rip C_01") or "Fly"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_Rip C_02") to win, "F_" The “common rep” needs to be determined as the internal winning combination (see FIG. 101A). "F_common lip" is a combination that can not be determined as an internal winning combination in a three-piece game, and can be won only in a one-piece game (see FIGS. 102 to 105). In the inter-flag state, when the player notices that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, it is considered that the game is switched from the three-card game to the one-card game to reduce the number of medals consumed. As described above, the player can recognize that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination through the backlight effect. In addition, the player clearly recognizes that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination by displaying the WIN lamp (not shown) or the WIN screen (an image including characters such as "Bonus confirmed"). can do.

  After noticing that the bonus combination has been decided as an internal winning combination, the player usually wants the bonus combination to be won as quickly as possible, and has a great interest other than the bonus combination being won. It is thought that it is not In particular, when the replay player's winning combination occurs repeatedly in the inter-flag state, a boring time will continue for the player. In this respect, in the present embodiment, "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") and "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_lip C_02") A combination serving as an opportunity to operate the re-play), when these combinations are displayed, the re-play is activated, and the winning of the bonus combination is postponed by that amount. However, when a combination of these is displayed, the player can enjoy special sounds (BGM) in the BB gaming state, thus giving the player the feeling of "wasting time". It can be hard to hold. Such an effect is obtained when the inter-flag state is the high RT gaming state (when the probability of winning the replay player in the state of the flag is higher than the probability of winning the replay player in the bonus non-winning state) or in the one-card gaming This is particularly significant when the winning probability of the replay player is higher than the winning probability of the replay player in the 3-card game.

  In addition, "Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_rip C_01") and "feather"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_rip C_02") are respectively "Plum"-"Plum" -"Plum" ("C_rip A" shown in FIG. 100A: symbol on the left reel RL, symbol on the middle reel RC, and a combination of all symbols on the right reel RR are all "Plum") Only the symbols on the reel RL are different. Such a combination is a combination similar to the symbol combination displayed when the so-called "replay removal" which has become popular in the past is successful. As a result, if "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") or "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_lip C_02") is displayed, " It is possible to recall "replay removal" and make the player feel nostalgic. Also, as shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, although the player is aiming for a symbol (“red 7” or “bird”) related to a bonus in the stop operation for the right reel RR and the stop operation for the middle reel RC If the player slips and displays "Plum", the player can predict that the replay role ("F_common lip") has been determined as the internal winning combination. In such a case, it is possible to motivate the player to "try challenging to replay".

  As described above, as the sound during BB, the sound corresponding to the first BB (7 BB) (sound for the first 7 BB: "Song A and Music C"), the sound corresponding to the first BB (bird BB) (the first bird Sounds for BB: "Song B and Music C", sounds corresponding to 2 BB (Sounds for 2 BB: "Song D and E"), Sounds corresponding to 3 BB (Sound for 3 BB: "Song F and Music G"), Sounds corresponding to BB (7 BB) after 4 stations (Sounds for 4 BB and later: "Song H and Song I"), Sounds corresponding to BB (bird BB) after 4 stations Sounds for 4 and subsequent birds BB: "Song J and music K"), sounds corresponding to 1G continuous BB (7BB) (Sounds for 1G continuous 7BB: "song L and music M"), 1G continuous BB (bird BB) Sound corresponding to (Sound for 1 G continuous bird BB: "Song N and Music O"), Sound corresponding to special condition (I) BB (Special condition (I) Sound for BB: "Song P and Music Q"), and special conditions (II) A sound corresponding to BB (special condition (II) Sound for BB: "Song R and Music S") is provided. Sound data corresponding to the sound during BB is stored in the sub ROM 3072.

  A condition (reproduction condition) for being output is set to the sound during each BB, and when the reproduction condition is satisfied, the corresponding sound during BB can be output. Here, there are cases in which both the reproduction condition corresponding to the one BB's sound and the reproduction condition corresponding to the other BB's sounds are satisfied. FIG. 153 (b) shows which BB's sound is prioritized when the reproduction conditions corresponding to the plurality of BB's sound compete in this way.

  Specifically, according to FIG. 153 (b), the special condition BB sound (special condition (I) BB sound and special condition (II) BB sound) is a first time BB sound (first time 7BB sound and first time sound). Sound for bird BB), sound for 2 BB, sound for 3 BB, and sound for 4 or more BB (sound for 4 BB or more and 7 BB and sound for 4 or more bird BB) are given priority. For example, it is generated when BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the challenge zone (one of the 2nd BB challenge zone, the 3rd BB challenge zone, and the 4th and subsequent BB challenge zones shown in FIG. 152) If a special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (II)) is satisfied in the inter-BB flag state and the BB gaming state is generated by the BB winning thereafter, the sound for two consecutive BBs (two Playback conditions for BB sounds, triple BB sounds, or quadruple or later BB sounds, and special condition BB sounds (special condition (I) BB sounds or special condition (II) BB sounds) Both of the reproduction conditions are satisfied. In this case, the sound for special condition BB (special condition (I) for BB or the special sound than the sound for consecutive BB (the sound for dual BB, the sound for triple BB, or the sound for four or more BBs) The condition (II) sound for BB is given priority, and "music P and music Q" or "music R and music S" is output.

  Also, according to FIG. 153 (b), the sound for 1G continuous BB (the sound for 1G continuous 7BB and the sound for 1G continuous bird BB) is the sound for special condition BB (special condition (I) sound for BB and special condition (special condition (I) It has priority over (II) BB sound). For example, a special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (I) or an inter-BB flag state that occurs when BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first unit game (first game) after the BB gaming state or MB gaming state has ended. When special condition (II) is satisfied and BB gaming state occurs by BB's winning after that, the reproduction condition of sound for 1G continuous BB and sound for special condition BB (special condition (I) Both the BB sound or the special condition (II) sound for BB) are satisfied. In this case, the 1G continuous BB sound is prioritized over the special condition BB sound (special condition (I) BB sound or special condition (II) BB sound), and "music L and music M" or "music N and music O "are output. However, these priorities are not particularly limited, and the special condition BB sound may be prioritized over the 1G continuous BB sound.

  In the present embodiment, when the special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (II)) is satisfied a plurality of times in the state between BB flags ("red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_ lip "C_01") or "feather"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_Rip C_02") wins, and before BB wins, "Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" (" C_Rip C_01 ") or" feather "-" Plum "-" Plum "(" C_Rip C_02 "), the special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (II)) finally established A corresponding sound (BGM) is output during the BB gaming state. As a result, the player can appropriately switch to the sound (BGM) that he / she wants to listen to, according to the mood at that time. In addition, when both special conditions (special condition (I) and special condition (II)) are satisfied in the state between BB flags, another music different from music P to music S (higher rarity BGM) May be output. In addition, when a special condition is satisfied more than once in the state between BB flags, music may be output according to the number of times the special condition is satisfied (the BGM with a high rare value is increased as the number of times the special condition is satisfied). You may output it). In this case, on the condition that the number of times the special condition is satisfied is a predetermined number or more, the sound for the special condition BB may be prioritized over the sound for the 1G-series BB.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (II)) is satisfied in the MB flag state, the sound (BGM) in the BB gaming state is not changed, but in this case, The sound (BGM) in the BB gaming state may be changed. For example, a special condition is established in a state between MB flags generated by MB being determined as an internal winning combination in a challenge zone (2-run BB challenge zone, 3-run BB challenge zone, or 4-run BB challenge zone or later). I suppose. After that, the MB gaming state (MB in the 2nd BB challenge zone, MB in the 3rd BB challenge zone, or MB in 4th CH or later BB challenge zone) occurs by the MB being won, and the MB gaming state ends. It shifts to a challenge zone by doing (refer FIG. 152 (b)). Then, when BB is determined to be an internal winning combination in the challenge zone, then, when BB is awarded, a twin BB (two BB, three BB, or four or more BBs) is generated. The music P to the music S may be output as a sound (BGM) flowing in the series BB.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the special condition (I) BB sound (BGM) and the special condition (II) sound (BGM) are different, but these sounds (BGM) are the same. May be Also, as the special condition, a condition different from the special condition (I) and the special condition (II) may be provided. For example, the time from the time when the first stop operation is performed to the time when the third stop operation is performed in the one-card hanging game is within a predetermined time (for example, one second), and in the unit game A condition of winning may be provided as the special condition (III). In this case, the sound (BGM) output during the BB gaming state generated by the establishment of the special condition (III) is the sound for the special condition (I) BB (BGM) and the sound for the special condition (II) BB ( It may be the same as or different from BGM).

<Display of the number of BB consecutive villas acquired>
FIG. 156 (a) is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a BB start command performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 156 (b) is a flow chart showing processing at the time of MB start command reception performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of a process of displaying the number of obtained BBs in a row in the secondary control circuit. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of a during-BB display process performed by the sub control circuit. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing a during-MB display process carried out in the sub control circuit. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a display processing during challenge zone performed in the sub control circuit.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device DD20 displays a value (the number obtained during BB continuous play) calculated based on the number of medals obtained by the player during the BB continuous play. As described above, “BB continuous inn” starts from the point when the first BB is activated, and the challenge zone (2 continuous BB challenge zone, 3 consecutive) without the bonus combination (BB and MB) being determined as the internal winning combination. It refers to a period of time ending with the transition from the BB challenge zone or the quadruple or later BB challenge zone) to the normal zone.

<Process when receiving BB start command>
First, the process at the time of receiving the BB start command performed in the sub control circuit 3070 will be described using FIG. 156 (a). The process at the time of receiving the BB start command is a process performed in step S415 of FIG. 145 (effect content determination process) triggered by the reception of the BB start command data (see step S296 in FIG. 137).

  In the BB start command reception process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the BB gaming state to be started this time is the first BB (step S1300). As described above, the first BB is a BB gaming state that occurs when the BB is determined to be an internal winning combination after the BB is determined in the normal zone. When BB is determined as an internal winning combination, the sub gaming state (a normal zone, a double BB challenge zone, a triple BB challenge zone, or a quadruple or later BB challenge zone) when the BB is determined as an internal winning combination Is stored in the sub RAM 3073. The sub CPU 3071 can specify the type of BB gaming state to be started this time based on the information stored in the sub RAM 3073.

  If it is determined that the BB gaming state to be started this time is the first BB, the sub CPU 3071 sets a BB consecutive acquisition number counter in BB (step S1301). The value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is a value calculated based on the number of medals (the number obtained by subtracting the insertion number from the payout number) which the player has acquired during the BB continuous detection. It is memorized. By executing the processing of step S1301, the counting of the number of medals acquired by the player is started, and "0" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20 as the number of BB consecutive acquisitions.

  Although not shown in FIG. 156 (a), when BB is won, a game lock (lock at BB win) is generated, and the BB gaming state is started while the lock at BB win is performed. An effect is shown to indicate. The number of BB consecutive villas acquired is displayed after the BB winning lock and the corresponding effect are finished. After executing the processing of step S1301, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1300 that the BB gaming state to be started this time is not the first BB, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than 0 (step S1302).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB consecutive acquisitions number counter is smaller than 0, the sub CPU 3071 sets “0” to the BB continuous acquisitions number counter (step S1303). Thereby, when the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is negative at the time of BB prize, the value is corrected to zero.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is 0 or more, or after the process of step S1303 is executed, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

<Process when MB start command is received>
Next, the process at the time of MB start command reception performed in the sub control circuit 3070 will be described using FIG. 156 (b). The MB start command reception process is a process performed in step S415 of FIG. 145 (effect content determination process) triggered by reception of MB start command data (see step S303 of FIG. 137).

  In the MB start command reception process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the MB gaming state to be started this time is an MB in the BB chain (step S1320). As described above, MBs in BB consecutive villas are MBs in the challenge zone (two consecutive BB challenge zones, three consecutive BB challenge zones, or four or more consecutive BB challenge zones) after being determined as an internal winning combination. , It is an MB gaming state generated by winning the MB. When an MB is determined as an internal winning combination, a sub gaming state (a normal zone, a double BB challenge zone, a triple BB challenge zone, or a quadruple or later BB challenge zone) when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination Is stored in the sub RAM 3073. The sub CPU 3071 can specify the type of MB gaming state to be started this time based on the information stored in the sub RAM 3073.

  If it is determined that the MB gaming state to be started this time is the MB in the BB series, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the value of the BB sheet acquisition number counter is smaller than 0 (step S1321).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than 0, the sub CPU 3071 sets “0” to the BB continuous acquisition number counter (step S1322). Thus, when the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is negative at the time of MB prize, the value is corrected to zero.

  If it is determined in step S1320 that the MB gaming state to be started this time is not the MB in BB consecutive rooms, or if it is determined in step S1321 that the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is 0 or more, or in step S1322 After executing the processing, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

<Display processing number acquired during BB consecutive residence>
Next, referring to FIG. 157, the processing for displaying the number of obtained BBs in a row in the secondary control circuit 3070 will be described. The processing for displaying the number of obtained BBs in a row is processing performed in step S413 of FIG. 145 (effect content determination processing), triggered by reception of winning operation command data (see step S26 of FIG. 121).

  In the processing for displaying the number acquired during BB continuous play, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state (step S1340). Since the prize actuation command data received in step S412 in FIG. 145 includes information indicating the gaming state flag stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033, the prize actuation command data , The sub CPU 3071 can recognize the current gaming state.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 3071 executes a display processing during BB (step S1341).

  Here, the display processing during BB will be described using FIG.

  In the during BB display process, first, the sub CPU 3071 subtracts the number of medals inserted (1) in the BB gaming state from the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter (step S1360). As described above, the number of medals that can be inserted in the BB gaming state is fixed to one. In the process of step S1360, the sub CPU 3071 stores the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 in the sub RAM 3073 as a new BB continuous acquisition number counter value. Let

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than −1 (step S1361).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB consecutive acquisitions number counter is smaller than −1, the sub CPU 3071 sets “−1” to the BB continuous acquisitions number counter (step S1362). As a result, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is corrected so that the lower limit value becomes -1. Here, “−1” is a negative value (a value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted coins from 0) according to the number of inserted medals (1) in the BB gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S1361 that the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is -1 or more, or after the process of step S1362 is executed, the sub CPU 3071 sets the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter to the current value. The number of medals paid out in the unit game is added (step S1363). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 adds a value obtained by adding the number of medals paid out in step S 25 of FIG. 121 to the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 as a new BB continuous reception. The value is stored in the sub RAM 3073 as the value of the middle acquisition sheet number counter. Since the information indicating the number of medals paid out in step S25 in FIG. 121 is included in the prize activation command data received in step S412 in FIG. 145, the sub CPU 3071 receives the prize activation command data, thereby the sub CPU 3071 It is possible to recognize the number of payouts.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than 0 (step S1364).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB consecutive acquisitions number counter is 0 or more, the sub CPU 3071 causes the liquid crystal display device DD20 to display the value of the BB continuous acquisitions number counter as the BB continuous acquisitions number (step S1365). ). When the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is 1000 or more, “999” is displayed flickering as the BB continuous acquisition number in the liquid crystal display device DD20.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the BB continuous acquisition during acquisition counter is smaller than 0, the sub CPU 3071 displays not the value of the BB continuous acquisition during counter, but "0" as the acquisition during the BB continuous acquisition. It is displayed on the device DD20 (step S1366).

  After executing the processing of step S1365 or step S1366, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  Here, the BB gaming state ends when the medals exceeding the prescribed number (344) are paid out, but when a unit game is performed 23 times in the BB gaming state, 15 medals in all unit games If has been paid out, the payout number of medals in the BB gaming state is 15.times.23 = 345 (more than 344), at which point the BB gaming state ends. On the other hand, if a unit game is performed 23 times in the BB gaming state, the unit game in which 15 medals are paid out is 22 times, and the unit game in which 14 medals are paid out is 1 time. For example, the payout number of medals in the BB gaming state is 15 × 22 + 14 = 344 (not exceeding 344), at which point the BB gaming state does not end. In this case, when one unit game is performed and 15 medals are paid out in the unit game, the number of medals paid out during the BB gaming state is 344 + 15 = 359.

  As described above, 14 medals are paid out only once during the BB gaming state, whereby the number of medals paid out during the BB gaming state becomes the maximum number (359). The player is able to align the combination having 14 medals paid out along the effective line by successfully performing the predetermined visual check. Therefore, the player can adjust the payout number of medals by performing the push only once during the BB gaming state, and can receive the largest medal payout. In the BB gaming state, since the player consumes one medal in each unit game, the maximum number of medals actually obtained by the player is 359-24 = 335.

  On the other hand, when the display process during BB shown in FIG. 158 is executed, for example, when 15 medals are paid out in the first unit game in the first BB, The value is “14”, and “14” is displayed as the number of BB consecutive villas acquired (see steps S1360, S1363, and S1365). When 15 medals are paid out in the next unit game, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is set to “28”, and “28” is displayed as the BB continuous acquisition number. When 14 medals are paid out in the next unit game, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter becomes “41”, and “41” is displayed as the BB continuous acquisition number. After that, when the unit game in which 15 medals are paid out is performed 21 times in a row, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter becomes “335” and “335” is displayed as the BB continuous acquisition number Ru. That is, the number of BB continuous acquisitions displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20 matches the above-mentioned “maximum number of medals obtained by the player”.

  Also, according to FIG. 158, when the medal is not paid out in the first unit game in the first BB, the value of the BB consecutive acquisition number counter becomes “−1” (see step S1360), and the BB continuation is performed. “0” is displayed as the number of sheets acquired during the stay (see step S1366). In the next unit game, although the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter becomes “-2” once (see step S1360), it is then corrected to “−1” (see step S1362), and in the unit game, 15 When the medals have been paid out, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter becomes “14” (see step S1363), and “14” is displayed as the BB continuous acquisition number (see step S1365). .

  In addition, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is negative at the start of the continuous block BB (two continuous BB, triple BB, or four consecutive BBs), and the value of the BB continuous acquisition counter is “0 (See step S1303 in FIG. 156 (a)), and if 15 medals are paid out thereafter in the first unit game in the consecutive block BB, the BB consecutive acquisition counter in the number counter The value becomes "14" (see step S1360 and step S1363), and "14" is displayed as the number of BB continuous acquisitions (see step S1365). Hereinafter, as in the first BB, the display contents of the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter and the display content of the BB continuous acquisition number are changed.

  In the present embodiment, when medals are inserted in each unit game, subtraction is not performed for the value of the inserted number according to the value of the BB consecutive acquired number of sheets counter (at that time, the display content of the acquired number of BB consecutive units is displayed) Is not changed), wait for medals to be paid out, and the display contents of the number of BB consecutive villas acquired are updated. For example, it is assumed that “14” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20 as the number of BB consecutive rooms acquired. In this situation, even if a new unit game is played and one medal is inserted, the number of BB continuous acquisitions displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20 at this time is “13” (14-1) It is not changed to and "14" is displayed. After that, when 15 medals are paid out in the unit game, the number of BB consecutive prizes displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20 is "28" directly from "14" (without passing "13"). Is changed to In other words, in the present embodiment, the display content of the BB continuous acquisition number is updated only after medals have been paid out in each unit game (once for each unit game).

  In the above, the during BB display processing performed in step S1341 of FIG. 157 has been described using FIG. The explanation is returned to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S1341 of FIG. 157, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1340 that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the current sub gaming state is the MB in the BB chain (step S1342). Information indicating a sub gaming state is stored in a sub gaming state flag storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 3073, and the sub CPU 3071 refers to the sub gaming state flag storage area to obtain the current sub gaming state. Can be recognized.

  If it is determined that the current sub-playing state is an MB in a BB consecutive room, the sub CPU 3071 executes an MB display process (step S1343).

  Here, the MB-in-MB display process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the in-MB display processing, first, the sub CPU 3071 subtracts the inserted number (2) of medals in the MB gaming state from the value of the BB continuous acquisition number-of-sheets counter (step S1380). As described above, the number of medals that can be inserted in the MB gaming state is fixed at two. In the process of step S1380, the sub CPU 3071 stores the value obtained by subtracting 2 from the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 in the sub RAM 3073 as a new BB continuous acquisition number counter value. Let

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than -2 (step S1381).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB consecutive acquisitions number counter is smaller than -2, the sub CPU 3071 sets "-2" in the BB continuous acquisitions number counter (step S1382). As a result, the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is corrected such that the lower limit value becomes -2. Here, “−2” is a negative value (a value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted coins from 0) according to the number of inserted medals (2) in the MB gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S1381 that the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is -2 or more, or after the process of step S1382, the sub CPU 3071 sets the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter to the current value. The payout number of medals in the unit game is added (step S1383). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 adds a value obtained by adding the number of medals paid out in step S 25 of FIG. 121 to the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 as a new BB continuous reception. The value is stored in the sub RAM 3073 as the value of the middle acquisition sheet number counter. Since the information indicating the number of medals paid out in step S25 in FIG. 121 is included in the prize activation command data received in step S412 in FIG. 145, the sub CPU 3071 receives the prize activation command data, thereby the sub CPU 3071 It is possible to recognize the number of payouts.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than 0 (step S1384).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is 0 or more, the sub CPU 3071 causes the liquid crystal display device DD20 to display the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter as the BB continuous acquisition number (step S1385). ). When the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is 1000 or more, “999” is displayed flickering as the BB continuous acquisition number in the liquid crystal display device DD20.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the BB continuous acquisition during acquisition counter is smaller than 0, the sub CPU 3071 displays not the value of the BB continuous acquisition during counter, but "0" as the acquisition during the BB continuous acquisition. It is displayed on the device DD20 (step S1386).

  After executing the processing of step S1385 or step S1386, sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  The MB in-display process performed in step S1343 in FIG. 157 has been described above with reference to FIG. The explanation is returned to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S1343 in FIG. 157, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1342 that the current sub gaming state is not the MB in the BB continuous guest room, the sub CPU 3071 determines that the current sub gaming state is the challenge zone (double BB challenge zone, triple BB challenge zone, or 4 It is determined whether or not it is the BB challenge zone) after the run (step S1344). Information indicating a sub gaming state is stored in a sub gaming state flag storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 3073, and the sub CPU 3071 refers to the sub gaming state flag storage area to obtain the current sub gaming state. Can be recognized.

  If it is determined that the current sub gaming state is the challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 executes a display processing during the challenge zone (step S1345). If it is determined in step S1344 that the current sub gaming state is not the challenge zone, or after the processing of step S1345 is executed, sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  Here, the display processing during the challenge zone will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the display processing during challenge zone, first, the sub CPU 3071 subtracts 1 from the value of the challenge zone game number counter (step S1400). The value of the challenge zone game number counter is the number of remaining unit games to be played from the challenge zone (two consecutive BB challenge zones, three consecutive BB challenge zones, or four consecutive BB challenge zones) to the normal zone. And stored in the sub RAM 3073.

  Although not shown, in the bonus end command reception process (see step S 417 in FIG. 145), the sub CPU 3071 shifts in the sub gaming state after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) ends in the double BB challenge zone. In one case (see transition conditions (1) and (7) in FIGS. 152A and 152B), “50” is set in the challenge zone game number counter. Further, when the sub CPU 3071 determines that the sub gaming state to be shifted after the end of the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is the triple BB challenge zone (transition conditions (2) and (8) in FIGS. 152A and 152B). (See), set "50" in the challenge zone game number counter. Further, when the sub CPU 3071 shifts the sub gaming state after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is the BB challenge zone after 4 trains (transition conditions (3) and (9 in FIGS. 152A and 152B). )), "100" is set in the challenge zone game number counter.

  In the process of step S1400, the sub CPU 3071 stores the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the challenge zone game number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 in the sub RAM 3073 as a new challenge zone game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the value of the challenge zone game number counter is 0 or not (step S1401). If it is determined that the value of the challenge zone game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 3071 shifts the sub gaming state to the normal zone (step S1402).

  Then, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a state between flags (step S1403). Since the data stored in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) of the main RAM 3033 is included in the winning operation command data received in step S412 in FIG. 145, the winning operation command data is received. The sub CPU 3071 can recognize the current gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the value of the challenge zone game number counter is not 0, or if it is determined in step S1403 that the current gaming state is the inter-flag state, the sub CPU 3071 determines the BB consecutive acquisition number counter The number of inserted medals inserted in the unit game is subtracted from the value of (step S1404). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 reduces a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in FIG. 123 from the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 into a new BB continuous acquisition number counter. Is stored in the sub RAM 3073 as the value of. Since the medal insertion command data received in step S402 in FIG. 145 includes information indicating the number of medals inserted in FIG. 123, the sub CPU 3071 recognizes the number of inserted medals by receiving the medal insertion command data. can do.

  Next, the sub-CPU 3071 adds the payout number of medals in the unit game this time to the value of the BB consecutive acquisition number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 3071 adds a value obtained by adding the number of medals paid out in step S 25 of FIG. 121 to the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 as a new BB continuous reception. The value is stored in the sub RAM 3073 as the value of the middle acquisition sheet number counter. Since the information indicating the number of medals paid out in step S25 in FIG. 121 is included in the prize activation command data received in step S412 in FIG. 145, the sub CPU 3071 receives the prize activation command data, thereby the sub CPU 3071 It is possible to recognize the number of payouts.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is smaller than 0 (step S1406).

  If it is determined that the value of the BB consecutive acquisitions number counter is 0 or more, the sub CPU 3071 causes the liquid crystal display device DD20 to display the value of the BB continuous acquisitions number counter as the BB continuous acquisitions number (step S1407). ). When the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter is 1000 or more, “999” is displayed flickering as the BB continuous acquisition number in the liquid crystal display device DD20.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the BB continuous acquisition during acquisition counter is smaller than 0, the sub CPU 3071 displays not the value of the BB continuous acquisition during counter, but "0" as the acquisition during the BB continuous acquisition. It is displayed on the device DD20 (step S1408).

  After executing the processing of step S1407 or step S1408, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1403 that the current gaming state is not the inter-flag state, the sub CPU 3071 clears the BB continuous acquisition number of sheets counter (step S1409), and displays the BB continuous acquisition numbers in the liquid crystal display device DD20. (Step S1410). Thereafter, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  In the present embodiment, a value calculated on the basis of the number of medals obtained by the player during the BB run (the number obtained during the BB run) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20, “BB run” Contains a challenge zone. The challenge zone is not in the bonus state but in the normal gaming state, so during the challenge zone, there is a high possibility that medals will decrease compared to the bonus state, and the value of the BB continuous acquisition number counter becomes negative. Things are also fully assumed. In such a case, when a negative value is displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD20 as the number of BB continuous acquisitions, the player who is playing a game in the gaming machine 1 is discouraged, and other players also get out. There is a risk that they will be avoided as a platform with a low ball rate. In this regard, by executing the display processing in the challenge zone shown in FIG. 160, a negative value is displayed as the number of BB continuous acquisition during acquisition even if the value of the BB continuous acquisition during acquisition counter is negative. In this case, "0" is displayed (see step S1408). This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the number of BB consecutive villas acquired.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note A1>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  In such a pachislot machine, generally, combinations of symbols that can be displayed as a result of stopping the rotation of the reel are defined for each internal winning combination, and the player is allowed to select the combinations of symbols displayed as being stopped. By visual recognition, it is possible to infer the type of the determined internal winning combination.

  In addition, as such a conventional game machine, a game machine configured to perform an effect corresponding to an internal winning combination is known (see, for example, JP-A-2009-101012). According to such a gaming machine, the player having knowledge of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the effect predicts the type of the internal winning combination determined to a certain extent by visually recognizing the effect. Can.

  As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to make the player guess the type of the internal winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed, while the internal winning combination is made based on the type of the effect. You can also predict the type of

  Here, with regard to the determined type of internal winning combination, if there is a conflict between the above estimation based on the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state and the above estimation based on the type of effect, the game is against the intention of the developer. It is feared that it will confuse people.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from being confused.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(A1-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
An effect execution unit capable of executing an effect corresponding to a winning combination determined by the combination determination unit (a sub CPU 3071 executing the processing of FIG. 150 (a));
Performs processing of effect related information determining means (FIG. 146 (a) and process of FIG. 149 capable of determining effect related information (effect for game stopping number for effect) related to effects that can be executed by the effect executing means And a main CPU 3031),
The stop control means is
When the first combination (grape) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, it is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the first display result (combination related to the grape), while the second It is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the display result (combination related to cherries) of
When the second combination (cherry) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, it is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the second display result,
The effect related information determining means is
When the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the first effect corresponding to the first combination ("hurricane", "three horizontal + V", or "shown in Figs. 151A and 151B, or It is possible to select, as the effect related information, first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8", or "9") related to a backlight effect called "fountain" Effect related information selection means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of FIG. 146 (a));
When the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means and the first effect related information is selected by the effect related information selecting means, the second display result is derived by the stop control means The second effect-related information (effect game for presentation) related to the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) corresponding to the second role from the first effect-related information. Producing related information changing means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 149) capable of changing the above-mentioned effect related information to a stop number “2”);
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, when the second combination (cherry) is determined to be the winning combination, the second display result (related to cherry) in the variable display means (reel RL, RC, RR) Combinations can be derived. Further, the effect executing means (sub CPU 3071) can execute the effect corresponding to the determined winning combination, and according to this, when the second combination (cherry) is determined as the winning combination, It is possible to execute an effect (second effect (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A)) corresponding to the second part (cherry). Therefore, when the second display result (combination related to cherries) is derived, the player who visually recognizes the display results infers that the second part (cherry) is determined as the winning combination, and If it is known that the role of 2 (Cherry) and the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) correspond, the second effect (“double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) The estimation can be backed up based on the fact that a backlight effect called “A” is performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, not only the case where the second role (cherry) is determined as the winning combination but also the case where the first combination (grape) is determined as the winning combination Also, a second display result (combination on cherry) can be derived. Also in this case, the player who visually recognizes the display result may infer that the second combination (cherry) is determined to be the winning combination. However, when the first combination (grapes) is determined as the winning combination, the first as a presentation related information (game stop number for presentation) related to the presentation that can be executed by the presentation execution means (sub CPU 3071) The first effect related to the effect corresponding to the role (grapes) (the first effect (“hurricane”, “three horizontal + V” shown in FIGS. 151A and 151B, or backlight effect called “water fountain”)) Information (effect game stop number “7”, “8” or “9”) may be selected. As a result, the first effect ("hurricane" shown in FIGS. 151A and 151B in relation to the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") is displayed. If the backlight effect called "book + V" or "fountain" is executed, the first part (grapes) and the first effect ("hurricane" shown in Figs. 151A and 151B, "three horizontal + V") Or, a player who knows that the backlight effect (called “fountain”) corresponds is likely to predict that the first combination (grapes) has been decided as the winning combination. In this manner, the second combination (cherry) is based on the display result (the second display result (combination of the cherry) being derived) in the variable display means (reel RL, RC, RR). And the type of effect (the first effect ("Hurricane" shown in Figs. 151A and 151B, "three horizontal lines + V", or a backlight effect called "fountain") is executed. There is a concern that the player may be confused if the prediction based on the event (the prediction that the first part (grapes) is determined to be the winning combination) is not consistent.

  In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the first combination (grapes) is determined as the winning combination, and the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8", or , “9”), when the second display result (combination concerning cherry) is derived, the first effect related information (effect game stop number “7”, “8”, or, Information related to presentation related to effects related to (2) (second stop (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) shown from “9”) to the second effect related information (game stop number for effect “2”) It is possible to change the effect related information (effect game stop number) to the number)). As a result, if the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) is executed in relation to the second effect related information (effect game stop number “2”), the second part For the player who knows that (Cherry) and the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) correspond, the second role (Cherry) is the winning combination. It can be expected that it has been decided. As a result, the inference (the second player (cherry) as a winning combination is based on the display result (the second display result (the combination relating to cherry) being derived) in the variable display means (reel RL, RC, RR) Prediction (second cherry) based on the type of effect (the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink” shown in FIG. 151A) is performed) and the second role (cherry) is the winning It is possible to make it consistent with the expectation that the player is determined to play a role, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, as a means for preventing such confusion, when the first combination (grapes) is determined to be the winning combination, the first effect related information (game stop number for effect "7," "8" Or, both “9”) and the second effect related information (game stop number for effect “2”) are provisionally selected, and then the second display result (combination concerning cherry) is derived. In this case, it may be considered that the second effect related information (game stop number for effect "2") is finally determined as the effect related information (game stop number for effect). However, when adopting such means, the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") and the second effect related information (effect game stop number) Since it is necessary to store both “2”) for a certain period of time, there is a concern that the data area will be compressed as compared with the case where only one effect related information (game stopping number for effect) is stored. Be done. In particular, the number of display results (combinations) that can be derived when the first combination (grapes) is determined to be the winning combination is large (for example, the number is three, four, or five or more) In addition to the first display result (combination related to grapes) and the second display result (combination related to cherries), when the first combination (for example, grapes) is determined as the winning combination, In the display result of 3 (a form in which the combination corresponding to the third combination can be derived), it is necessary to store effect related information (effect game stop number for effect) for that amount, so processing It is assumed that the burden will increase. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, only one effect related information (the first effect related information (game stop number for effect "7", "8", or "9")) is displayed. Since it is sufficient to store the data, it is possible to effectively utilize the data area and to reduce the processing load.

(A1-2) The gaming machine according to (A1-1) above,
Lock execution means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 148) capable of executing a lock (game lock for effect) in which an operation by a player is invalidated for a predetermined time,
The lock execution means is
It is possible to execute the lock for a time corresponding to the effect related information determined by the effect related information determining means,
The effect executing means is
While the lock is being performed by the lock execution means, it is possible to execute an effect (backlight effect) according to the effect related information determined by the effect related information determining means.
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, it is possible to execute lock (game lock for presentation) only for a time corresponding to presentation related information (game stop number for presentation), and lock (for presentation) While the game lock is being executed, it is possible to execute an effect (backlight effect) according to the effect related information (effect game stop number). Thus, it is possible to make the time when the lock (effect game lock) is executed correspond to the time when the effect (backlight effect) is executed, and the lock (effect game lock) is being executed. Since the operation by the player is invalidated during the interval, the player can temporarily pause the game and concentrate on the effect (backlight effect).

(A1-1 ′) variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
Effect execution means capable of executing effects (sub-CPU 3071 for executing the processing of FIG. 150 (a));
Performs processing of effect related information determining means (FIG. 146 (a) and process of FIG. 149 capable of determining effect related information (effect for game stopping number for effect) related to effects that can be executed by the effect executing means And a main CPU 3031),
The effect executing means is
When the first display result (combination related to grapes) is derived by the stop control means, the first effect ("hurricane", "three horizontal lines + V" or "water fountain" shown in FIGS. 151A and 151B) When it is possible to execute a backlight effect called “the second display result (combination related to cherries) by the stop control means, the second effect (“ double wink ”shown in FIG. 151A) can be performed. It is possible to carry out backlight
The effect related information determining means is
Effect related information selecting means (capable of selecting, as the effect related information, first effect related information (effect game stop number “7”, “8” or “9”) related to the first effect A main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of FIG. 146 (a);
When the first effect related information is selected by the effect related information selecting means, the second effect is derived from the first effect related information when the second display result is derived by the stop control means. Effect related information changing means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 149) capable of changing the effect related information to related second effect related information (effect game stop number “2”); Prepare,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, when the first display result (combination related to grapes) is derived, the first effect ("hurricane" shown in FIGS. 151A and 151B, "three horizontal" While it is possible to execute a backlight effect called “+ V” or “fountain”, the second effect (shown in FIG. 151A) is obtained when the second display result (combination related to cherries) is derived. It is possible to execute a backlight effect called “double wink”. Therefore, the first display result (combination related to grapes) and the first effect (backlight effect called “hurricane”, “three horizontal + V”, or “water fountain”) correspond to each other. The player can be made aware that the display result (combination relating to cherry) and the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink”) correspond to each other. Here, first effect related information (effect game stop number “7”, “8”) related to the first effect (“backlight effect called“ hurricane ”,“ three horizontal lines + V ”, or“ water fountain ”) Or, when "9" is selected, the second display result (combination related to cherries) may be derived, but in this case, the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7 for effect" If the first effect (“hurricane”, “three horizontal + V”, or “backlight effect called“ fountain ”) is executed in relation to“ 8 ”or“ 9 ”, the above-mentioned Such a correspondence between the display result and the effect is not met, and there is a concern that the player may be confused. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the second effect-related information (the effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") is selected. When the display result (combination related to cherries) is derived, the second effect related information (effect for game from the first effect related information (effect game stop number for effects “7”, “8”, or “9”) Change the effect related information (effect game stop number for effect) to stop number "2" (effect related information (effect game stop number for effect) related to the second effect (backlight effect called "double wink")) It is possible. Thus, if the second effect (backlight effect called “double wink”) is executed in relation to the second effect related information (effect game stop number “2”), the player is conscious It is possible to match the above correspondence relationship, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, as a means for preventing such confusion, first effect related information (game stop number for effect "7," "8" or "9") and second effect related information (game stop for effect The second effect related information (effect game stop number “2” for effect) when both of the numbers “2”) are provisionally selected and the second display result (combination related to cherries) is derived thereafter It is also conceivable that the final decision is made as effect related information (game stop number for effect). However, when adopting such means, the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") and the second effect related information (effect game stop number) Since it is necessary to store both “2”) for a certain period of time, there is a concern that the data area will be compressed as compared with the case where only one effect related information (game stopping number for effect) is stored. Be done. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, one of the effect related information (effect game stop number for effect) (first effect related information (effect game stop number for effect “7”, “8”, or Since it is sufficient to store only "9"), it is possible to effectively utilize the data area and to reduce the processing load.

  In the sixth embodiment, a unit game in which first effect related information (effect game stop number "7," "8" or "9") is selected, and first effect related information (effect game stop number) A unit game in which the effect related information (effect game stop number for effect) is changed from “7”, “8” or “9” to the second effect related information (effect game stop number “2”) , Described as being the same unit game. However, in the present invention, when the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") is selected in one unit game, the one or more unit games In the unit game, from the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") to the second effect related information (effect game stop number "2") effect related information (The effect game stop number) may be changed. For example, after a lottery for locking in one unit game (for example, the process shown in FIG. 146 (a)) is performed, the next unit game of the one unit game (or the predetermined number of times from the one unit game) In the unit game), overwriting of the effect game stop number (for example, the process shown in FIG. 149) may be performed. Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the first combination (grapes) is determined as the winning combination, the first effect related information (game stop number for effect “7”, “8” or “9”) It has been described that it can be selected. However, in the present invention, the trigger for selecting the first effect related information (game stop number for effect “7”, “8” or “9”) is not limited to the winning of the first part (grapes). For example, when the result of the lottery performed separately from the internal lottery is a predetermined result, it is assumed that the first effect related information (game stop number for effect "7", "8" or "9") is selected. The first effect related information (game stop number for effect "7", "8" or "9") may be selected if the result of the internal lottery is a loss, or any may be selected. It is also possible to select the first effect related information (game stop number for effect "7", "8" or "9") when the predetermined combination is won continuously over a plurality of unit games. When the bonus combination is won, the first effect related information (effect game stop number "7", "8" or "9") may be selected.

<Supplementary Note A2>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to output so-called ART and to output different BGMs during ART and non-ART is known (see, for example, JP-A-2010-51492). ). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to stimulate the game and enhance the player's feeling through the specific BGM flowing in the ART (playing state advantageous to the player).

  The inventor of the present invention creates a new entertainment feature by devising the generation condition of a specific effect in the process of intensively examining the effects such as BGM performed during the specific gaming state as described above. I came to the idea that I could do something.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment characteristics with respect to the generation of a rendition.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(A2-1) A plurality of variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
In the case where a predetermined display result ("C_Red7" or "C_bird7" shown in FIG. 100A) is derived by the stop control means after the special part (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the part determination means Special game state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the special game state (BB game state) advantageous to the player;
Special game state effect execution means capable of performing predetermined effects (outputs of the songs A to C shown in FIG. 153A) in the special game state;
The stop control means is
In the specific gaming state (between BB flags) until the predetermined display result is derived after the special combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the stop operation for the plurality of variable display means is specific When it is performed in the order (“right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL” or “middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL”), the predetermined display result is It is possible to perform stop control so as to derive different specific display results (“C_rip C_01” or “C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A),
The special gaming state effect executing means is
When the specific display result is derived by the stop control means in the specific gaming state, in the special gaming state, a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (musical musics P to S shown in FIG. 153 (a) It is possible to do output),
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, after the special combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, a predetermined display result (“C_red 7” or “C_bird 7” shown in FIG. 100A) is derived. When the game is played, the gaming state (special gaming state (BB gaming state)) advantageous to the player is activated, and in the special gaming state (BB gaming state), a predetermined effect (music A shown in FIG. 153A). ~ C output) can be performed. Here, after the special combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, the gaming state (specific gaming state (the “C_red 7” or “C_bird 7” shown in FIG. 100A) is derived until it is derived When a specific display result (“C_rip C_01” or “C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A) is derived in the state between BB flags), a predetermined effect (BB gaming state) is performed in a special game state (BB gaming state). Specific effects (outputs of the music pieces P to S shown in FIG. 153 (a)) may be performed instead of the outputs of the music pieces A to C shown in FIG. 153 (a). The specific display result (“C_rip C_01” or “C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A) is the order in which the stop operations are specific in the specific gaming state (between BB flags) (“right reel RR → middle reel RC → left It can be derived in the order of “reel RL” or in the order of “middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL”. Therefore, in the specific gaming state (the state between BB flags), the player is ordered in a specific order ("right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL" or "middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL" Is performed during the special gaming state (BB gaming state) by performing a stop operation in the order of “) and deriving a specific display result (“ C_rip C_01 ”or“ C_rip C_02 ”shown in FIG. 100A) The effect can be switched from a predetermined effect (outputs of songs A to C shown in FIG. 153 (a)) to a specific effect (outputs of songs P to S shown in FIG. 153 (a)). As described above, by setting the situation where the effect content can be changed by the stop operation of the player, the player can be made to feel as if the game content is being changed with his own hand. it can. As a result, it is possible to invite the player to the world of games and to enthusiasm for the game.

(A2-1 ') The gaming machine of (A2-1) above,
The bet unit (BET button and main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S12 in FIG. 121) capable of betting a game value (medal) for one unit game.
The stop control means is
When the number of gaming values betted from the betting means is a first predetermined number (1), the second predetermined number (3) in which the number of gaming values betted from the betting means is different from the first predetermined number Stop control can be performed such that the particular display result can be derived with a higher probability than if
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, when the bet number of game value (medal) is the first predetermined number (1), the bet number of game value (medal) is the second predetermined number (3) The specific display result (“C_rip C_01” or “C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A) can be derived with a higher probability than in the case of). As a result, compared with the case where the bet number of the game value (medal) is the second predetermined number (3), the case where the bet number of the game value (the medal) is the first predetermined number (1) is An effect to be performed during the special gaming state (BB gaming state) is easily switched to a specific effect (output of music pieces P to S shown in FIG. 153A). Therefore, the player bets that the player desires that a specific effect (the output of the music pieces P to S shown in FIG. 153 (a)) be made to bet the first predetermined number of game values (one medal). It can prompt you.

  If a specific display result (“C_rip C_01” or “C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A) is derived, instead of switching the effect to be performed during the special gaming state (BB gaming state), some kind of display result A benefit may be given to the player. Also, in the sixth embodiment, in order to derive a specific display result (“C_Rip C_01” or “C_Rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A), it has been described that it is necessary to perform one-card hanging game. The number of inserted game values (medal) required to derive a specific display result (“C_rip C_01” or “C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A) is not particularly limited. For example, the configuration may be such that "F_common lip" can be determined as an internal winning combination not only in single-seat games but also in three-card games. In addition, while "F_ common lip" can be determined as an internal winning combination in both single sheet and three sheet games, single sheet game is more "F_ common lip" than three sheet games. The winning probability may be configured to be high. Conversely, the three-piece game may be configured such that the winning probability of the "F_common lip" is higher than that of the one-piece game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “F_7BB” is determined as an internal winning combination, “F_bird BB” is not determined as an internal winning combination, and “F_bird BB” is determined as an internal winning combination. Has described that "F_7BB" is not determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 102). That is, while “F — 7BB” and “F — bird BB” can be won alone, it has been described that “F — 7BB” and “F — bird BB” are not determined as internal winning combinations. However, in the present invention, both “F — 7BB” and “F — bird BB” may be determined as internal winning combinations (a plurality of bonus combinations may be configured to be double winning combinations). Thereby, when "F_7BB" and "F_Bird BB" are won twice in the RT0 gaming state, a combination of symbols corresponding to 7BB ("Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7") and Bird BB Both symbol combinations ("bird"-"bird"-"red 7") corresponding to are transferred to a state between flags which can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. Then, in the state between the flags, for example, when the player challenges the removal of the replay and succeeds in pushing the "red 7" aiming at the symbol position "3" as the stop operation for the left reel RL, It is possible to perform reel control in which “red 7” tends to stop in the left reel RL.

(A2-2) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
The first effect (output of music pieces P and Q shown in FIG. 153 (a)) and the second effect (output of music pieces R and S shown in FIG. 153 (a)) in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) And an effect execution unit capable of performing any of a plurality of effects including the
The stop control means is
When the specific combination (“F_common lip”) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, the first predetermined stop operation (“right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel”) to the variable display means The first predetermined display result (FIG. 100A) when an operation of “RL” and a stop operation of pressing “red 7” of the symbol position “3” are performed as the stop operation for the left reel RL While it is possible to perform stop control so as to derive “C_Rip C_01” shown in FIG. 6, a second predetermined stop operation (“middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL”) can be performed on the variable display means And the second predetermined display result (shown in FIG. 100A) is performed when the stop operation for pressing the "feather" of the symbol position "9" is performed as the stop operation for the left reel RL. "C_ Lip C_0 ") It is possible to perform the stop control so as to derive,
The effect executing means is
When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, and when the first predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, the first effect in the specific gaming state When the second predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, it is possible to perform the second effect in the specific gaming state,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the first predetermined stop operation (“right reel RR → middle reel RC → left”) when the specific combination (“F_common lip”) is determined as the winning combination. When the order of “reel RL” and the stop operation of pressing “red 7” of the symbol position “3” are performed as the stop operation for the left reel RL, the first predetermined display result (FIG. While the stop control may be performed to derive "C_rep C_01" shown in 100A, the order of the second predetermined stop operation ("middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL" and left reel RL) When the stop operation for pressing the "feather" of the symbol position "9" is performed as the stop operation for the second character, the second predetermined display result ("C_rip C_02" shown in FIG. 100A) is derived. Stop control can be performed asAnd, when the first predetermined display result ("C_rip C_01" shown in FIG. 100A) is derived, the music shown in the first effect (FIG. 153 (a) in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) In the specific gaming state (BB gaming state), when the second predetermined display result ("C_rip C_02" shown in FIG. 100A) is derived while it is possible to perform P and Q output). It is possible to perform the second effect (output of the music pieces R and S shown in FIG. 153 (a)). Therefore, in the case where the specific combination ("F_common rep") is determined to be the winning combination, the player performs the first predetermined stop operation ("right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL" in order, and As the stop operation for the left reel RL, the stop operation for pressing “red 7” of the symbol position “3” is performed to derive the first predetermined display result (“C_rip C_01” shown in FIG. 100A) Thus, the effect performed in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) can be made the first effect (output of music pieces P and Q shown in FIG. 153 (a)) while the second predetermined stop operation ( A second predetermined operation is performed by performing the following sequence: “middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL” and “stopping” the “feather” of the symbol position “9” as a stop operation on the left reel RL. Display result (Fig. 100A By directing "C_Rip C_02" to be shown, the effect performed in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) may be set as the second effect (the output of music R and S shown in FIG. 153 (a)). it can. In other words, the player performs the first predetermined stop operation ("right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL" in the order of "red 7" of the symbol position "3" as the stop operation for the left reel RL). And the second predetermined stop operation ("middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL" in this order) and "feathers" of the symbol position "9" as a stop operation for the left reel RL The first effect (output of the music pieces P and Q shown in FIG. 153 (a)) and the second effect (FIG. 153 (a) depending on which stop operation is performed among the stop operations such as pressing the bit). Any of the effects of the music R and S shown in can be selected as effects to be performed in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state). As described above, by setting the situation where the effect content can be determined by the stop operation of the player, the player can be made to feel as if the game content is being changed with his own hand. it can. As a result, it is possible to invite the player to the world of games and to enthusiasm for the game.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the first predetermined display result (“C_Rip C_01 shown in FIG. 100A is displayed only when the bet number of game value (medal) is the predetermined number (1). And the second predetermined display result (“C_rip C_02” shown in FIG. 100A) can be derived. Therefore, the stop operation (first predetermined stop operation) for deriving the first predetermined display result (“C_rip C_01” shown in FIG. 100A) or the second predetermined display result (“C_ shown in FIG. 100A”) In the first effect (FIG. 153 (a)) as an effect to be performed in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) through performing a stop operation (second predetermined stop operation) for deriving the lip C_02 ") For a player who wishes to select one of the effects of the music P and Q shown) and the second effect (the output of the music R and S shown in FIG. 153 (a)), It can be urged to bet a game value (one medal).

  In the sixth embodiment, any of the first effect (outputs of the songs P and Q shown in FIG. 153 (a)) and the second effect (outputs of the songs R and S shown in FIG. 153 (a)) Stop operation for selecting an effect, that is, the order of the first predetermined stop operation ("right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL", and "stop" for the symbol position "3" as the stop operation for the left reel RL Stop operation to press red 7 "), and the second predetermined stop operation (" middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL "in this order, and the symbol position" "as stop operation for the left reel RL It has been described that the stop operation such as pressing the "feather" of 9 "is a stop operation requiring the player's skill (the technique of pushing the bit). However, the first predetermined stop operation and the second predetermined stop operation in the present invention may be stop operations that do not require the player's skill. For example, the first predetermined stop operation is a stop operation in a first pressing order (for example, the order of “right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL”), and the second predetermined stop operation is a second stop operation. The stop operation may be performed in the order of pressing (for example, in the order of “middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL”). In this case, when the stop operation is performed in the first push order, the first predetermined display result (“C_rip C_01” shown in FIG. 100A) is always derived, and the stop operation is performed in the second push order. If done, it is possible to configure so that the second predetermined display result ("C_rip C_02" shown in FIG. 100A) is always derived.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, two types of effects to be selected (a first effect (outputs of music pieces P and Q shown in FIG. 153 (a)) and a second effect (music shown in FIG. 153 (a) Stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation ("right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL" order) and the symbol for the left reel RL) A stop operation for pushing “red 7” at position “3” and a second predetermined stop operation (“middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL” in this order) and for the left reel RL A combination of stopping and displaying a symbol (“C_Rip C_01” shown in FIG. 100A) and a combination of “stop” (“C_Rip C_01” shown in FIG. 100A) 2 predetermined display result (FIG. 10 Shown in A "C_ descriptor C_02")) it was also described as a two, respectively. In the present invention, the number of types of effects to be selected, and the number of types of stop operations and display results corresponding thereto are not particularly limited, and may be three or more.

  In the above, the outputs of the music pieces P and Q (reproduction of the special condition (I) sound for BB) shown in FIG. 153 (a) correspond to the “first effect”, and the music R shown in FIG. 153 (a) And the output of S (reproduction of the special condition (II) sound for BB) have been described as corresponding to the “second effect”. Here, the reproduction of the sound for the first time BB, the sound for the second BB, the sound for the third BB, or the sound for the fourth BB (for the normal BB) corresponds to the “first effect”, and the special condition It can also be considered that the reproduction of (I) BB sound or special condition (II) BB sound (special BB sound) corresponds to the “second effect”. That is, the player can select which of the normal BB sound and the special BB sound to be played depending on whether the two "Plum" symbols are aligned or three. . From this point of view, the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when the stop display of the specific symbol (plam) can be displayed (the timing such that the distance to the “plum” is within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols) Is equivalent to the “first predetermined stop operation”, and the stop operation for the left reel RL can not be stopped and displayed for a specific symbol (plum) (the distance to the “plum” is within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces It can be said that the operation performed at such a timing) corresponds to the “second predetermined stop operation”.

  In the sixth embodiment, the BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the challenge zone (any one of the two consecutive BB challenge zones, three consecutive BB challenge zones, and four or more consecutive BB challenge zones shown in FIG. 152). The special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (II)) is satisfied in the inter-BB flag state that occurs, and the BB gaming state is generated by the BB winning after that, the sound for the continuous block BB ( Special condition BB sound (special condition (I) BB sound or special condition (II) BB sound) is given priority over dual BB sound, triple BB sound or quadruple or later BB sound It explained as that. Thereby, for example, when a special condition (special condition (I) or special condition (II)) is satisfied in a state between BB flags generated by BB being determined as an internal winning combination in the double BB challenge zone, After that, in the BB gaming state generated by the BB winning, the sound for special condition BB ("Song P and Song Q") or "Song R", not the sound for dual BB ("Song D and Song E") And the music S ") is output. After that, when the BB gaming state ends, it shifts to the triple BB challenge zone, and when BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the triple BB challenge zone, the triple BB is achieved by winning the BB. In the triple BB, a triple BB sound ("music F and music G") is output. Then, as a result, a situation occurs in which the sound for dual BB (“the music D and the music E”) is not output but is skipped. In the present invention, in this way, when a special condition occurs, the sound (in the above example, the sound for dual BB (“music D and music E”)) to be output is skipped. It is also possible to output the sound in the next BB gaming state without skipping.

  That is, as described above, in the BB series, in place of the sound for dual BB ("music D and music E"), the sound for special condition BB ("music P and music Q" or "music R and music" When "S" is output, the sound for dual BB ("Song D and Music E") is output in the next BB gaming state, and the sound for triple BB in the next BB gaming state ("Song It is also possible to output F and music G ′ ′) and output sounds for BB (“music H and music I” or “music J and music K”) in four or more stations in the BB gaming state generated next. In other words, as BB is connected, the sound output during BB gaming state is "Sound for first time BB" ("Song A and Song C" or "Song B and Song C") → "2 stations "Sound for BB" ("Music D and Music E") → "Sound for Triple BB" ("Music F and Music G") → "Sound for BB from 4 stations" ("Music H and Music I" or "Music In a form that sequentially changes to J and music K "), when a special condition is satisfied in the middle of the series, a sound for special condition BB (" music P and music Q "or" music R and music S It is possible to make ")" into interruption, and it is possible to constitute so that the sound for consecutive villa BB may be postponed one by one.

  Further, when the special condition is established, the effect game lock (see FIG. 148) may be generated, and backlight effect or other effects may be performed together with the effect game lock. For example, an image showing that a special condition has been established (a character image such as “Replay is successful! The sound in BB changes to a special sound”), or any of special condition (I) and special condition (II) An image showing whether the special conditions of (Successful pressing of red 7! Sound in BB changes to music P and music Q) or "Successful pressing of feathers!" Sound in BB is music R and music A character image such as “change to S” may be displayed.

  Such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing an effect game stop number overwrite process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of a BB winning command reception process performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of a special condition satisfaction command reception process carried out in the sub control circuit.

<Effective game stop number overwriting process>
The effect game stop number overwrite process performed in the main control circuit 3060 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect game stop number overwrite process is a process performed in step S1022 of FIG. 148 (effect game lock process).

  The processes of step S1041 to step S1045 are as described with reference to FIG. 148, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S1041 that the current gaming state is the inter-flag state, the main CPU 3031 selects a symbol combination or "feather"-"plum"-"plum" related to "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" It is determined whether or not the symbol combination relating to is stopped and displayed along the effective line (step S1046). That is, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the combination relating to “C_rip C_01” or the combination relating to “C_rip C_02” (see FIG. 100A) has won.

  If it is determined that the symbol combination relating to "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" or the symbol combination relating to "feather"-"plum"-"plum" is stopped and displayed along the active line, the main CPU 3031 The data indicating the effect game stop number stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033 is overwritten on the data indicating the specific effect game stop number (for example, “10”) (step S1047).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates special condition satisfaction command data, and stores the generated special condition satisfaction command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S1048). The special condition satisfaction command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the special condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in step S1046 that the symbol combination relating to "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" and the symbol combination relating to "feather"-"plum"-"plum" are not stopped and displayed along the effective line either Alternatively, after executing the processing of step S1048, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  By executing the game stop number overwriting process for effect shown in FIG. 161, "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") or "feather"-"plum" in the state between BB flags -When "Plum" ("C_Rip C_02") wins (when the special condition is established), the effect game lock corresponding to the effect game stop number overwritten in step S1047 will be performed . Also, by executing the processing for receiving a game lock command for effect shown in FIG. 150A, a backlight effect corresponding to the game stop number for effect is performed.

  Here, in step S1047, when "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") wins, and "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_lip C_02") A different effect game stop number may be overwritten when the player wins a prize. For example, when "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") wins, the game stop number ("10") corresponding to the longest lock time is overwritten, and " When the wing "-" "plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_02") wins, the effect game stop number ("1") corresponding to a shorter lock time may be overwritten. As a result, "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") wins, and "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_lip C_02") wins. In addition, the generation time of the effect game lock differs, and the type of backlight effect performed during that time also differs.

  In addition, "Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_ Lip C_01") wins, and "Fly"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_ Lip C_02") wins. Then, while performing the same backlight effect, another effect having different contents may be performed. For example, "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") wins, and "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_02") wins. It is also possible to display different images (for example, "an image showing which special condition of the special condition (I) and the special condition (II) is satisfied"). In this case, any combination of "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") and "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_lip C_02") The special condition satisfaction command data may include information indicating whether the player has won a prize (which special condition of the special condition (I) and the special condition (II) is satisfied). Thus, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize which of the special condition (I) and the special condition (II) is satisfied, and the effect corresponding to the satisfied special condition can be performed. It becomes possible.

  Here, the modification shown in FIG. 161 does not assume the contents of FIG. 147A and FIG. 147B, and when performing the processing of step S1047, the data indicating any game stop number for effect is the game stop for effect of the main RAM 3033 It is assumed that it has already been stored in the number storage area. That is, the process of step S1047 is executed on the condition that “F_common rep” is determined as the internal winning combination in the inter-flag state (see FIG. 101A), assuming the contents of FIG. 147A and FIG. 147B. For example, if the internal winning combination is "F_common rep" ("one out of place") in the inter-flag state, "0" is determined as the effect game stop number (in FIGS. 147A and 147B, As a lottery value corresponding to “one out of alignment”, 0 is set for all of the effect game stop numbers “1” to “10”. Then, in the lock time lottery process shown in FIG. 146 (a), data indicating the effect game stop number is not stored in the effect game stop number storage area of the main RAM 3033.

  Thus, when "red 7"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_01") or "feather"-"plum"-"plum" ("C_rip C_02") wins, the game for effect In a mode in which the stop number is overwritten, it is desirable that the effect game stop number is not stored in the main RAM 3033 when the effect game stop number overwriting process is started. This is because, as described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, “Red 7”-“Plum”-“Plum” (“C_ Lip C_01”) or “Fly”-“Plum”-“Plum” (“C_ Lip The stopping operation for winning C_02 ") is a very limited typing method, and these combinations are designed to be hard to stop being displayed, but in preparation for such cases where such combinations are stopped and displayed This is because if the game stop number for effect is stored in the game, the data area of the main RAM 3033 is uselessly used. In this respect, if the arrangement is made to overwrite the effect game stop number when the combination is actually stopped and displayed, such waste can be eliminated, and the processing load can be reduced. When such a configuration is adopted, in the effect game lock process shown in FIG. 148, the process of step S1022 may be performed after the process of step S1022.

  In the above, the game lock performed after the rotation of all the reels RL, RC, RR has been described, but before the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR stops (for example, the first stop operation is performed Before the game is played, the game lock may be made. When the game lock is performed, all reels RL, RC, and RR are locked (full turn drum lock), and after the start lever DD6 is operated, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the player operates the game. The operation (for example, the operation of the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is invalidated. It should be noted that a predetermined reel action (for example, slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) may be performed while invalidating the operation by the player.

  In such a mode, for example, when a specific combination ("F_common lip") is determined as an internal winning combination, the game lock is generated and a predetermined effect is generated while the game lock is performed. It is good to do. For example, perform a predetermined stop operation ("Red 7"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_ Lip C_01") or "Fly"-"Plum"-"Plum" ("C_ Lip C_02")) The image showing that it is possible to change the effect (sound in BB) which is performed during a specific gaming state by letting it be), or the first predetermined stop operation ("red 7"-"plum"-"plum" (" C_Rip C_01 ") or the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation for winning" feather "-" Plum "-" Plum "(" C_rip C_02 ")) It is also possible to display an image indicating that it is possible to select an effect (sound during BB) to be performed during a specific gaming state.

  As described above, in the present invention, by performing the predetermined stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation and the second predetermined stop operation), the effect of the effect performed during the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) Although the content can be changed (selected), the specific gaming state is not limited to the bonus state, and any gaming state can be adopted as appropriate. For example, in a specific gaming state, an AT gaming state in which information advantageous to the player (for example, information regarding the order of stop button stop operations necessary for winning a predetermined combination) is notified, the probability of winning a replay role Is a relatively high state (high RT gaming state), an AT gaming state and an ART gaming state which is a high RT gaming state, etc., for a transition to an advantageous gaming state (favorable gaming state) advantageous to the player or a transition to the advantageous gaming state A chance zone (CZ) in which the degree of expectation is high (or the transition to the advantageous gaming state is determined) or a gaming state which is disadvantageous for the player can be adopted as appropriate.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, a predetermined stop operation (a first predetermined stop operation and a second predetermined stop operation for changing (selecting) the contents of an effect to be performed during a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) Is described as being capable of being performed in the inter-flag state, but the timing at which the stop operation can be performed is not limited to the inter-flag state, and any timing can be adopted as appropriate. For example, when a specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, a predetermined lottery to be performed when a specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, transition to AT lottery or CZ) In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination (when a winning game is won), the above-mentioned predetermined stoppage is made in the unit game (a unit game winning the above-mentioned predetermined lottery) You may comprise so that operation (a 1st predetermined stop operation and a 2nd predetermined stop operation) can be performed. In such a mode, as described above, the game lock is started before the rotation of each reel starts, on condition that the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination (the winning of the above-mentioned lottery). It is desirable to notify that it is possible to change (select) the content of the effect to be performed during a specific gaming state while the game lock is being performed.

  Further, as a result of performing the predetermined stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation and the second predetermined stop operation), the timing at which the effect of the changed (selected) content is generated is not particularly limited, either. From the unit game for which the stop operation was performed (from immediately after the predetermined stop operation has been performed) or from the next unit game of the unit game, to generate an effect of the changed (selected) content It is also good. For example, by performing the predetermined stop operation, it is determined that the effect game lock described above is generated, and it is changed (immediately after the effect game lock ends) from the time when the effect game lock is finished (changed) An effect of the selected content may be generated.

<Process when BB winning command is received>
The processing at the time of BB winning command reception performed in the sub control circuit 3070 will be described with reference to FIG. The process for receiving a BB winning command is a process performed upon receiving a BB winning command data (not shown). The BB winning command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 when the BB is determined as the internal winning combination (when it is determined “No” in step S75 of FIG. 124).

  In the BB winning command reception process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the internal winning of the BB is in the first unit game (first game) after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is ended. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1200).

  If it is determined that the BB internal winning is in the first unit game (first game) after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is over, the sub CPU 3071 turns on the 1G-continuous BB flag. (Step S1201). The 1G continuous BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the 1G continuous BB sound ("Music L and Music M" or "Music N and Music O" shown in FIG. 153A) is satisfied. After executing the processing of step S1201, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the internal winning of the BB is not in the first unit game (first game) after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) ends, the sub CPU 3071 determines the inside of the BB. It is determined whether or not the winning is in a unit game in the BB challenge zone after 4 stations (step S1202).

  If it is determined that the internal winning combination of the BB is for a unit game in the BB challenge zone after 4 stations, the sub CPU 3071 sets the BB flag for 4 stations or later (step S1203). The 4-or-more BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the 4-for-four or later BB sound ("Song H and Song I" or "Song J and Song K" shown in FIG. 153A) is satisfied. After executing the processing of step S1203, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the internal winning combination of BB is not in a unit game in the BB challenge zone after 4 stations, the sub CPU 3071 is in a unit game in the triple BB challenge zone of the internal winning of the BB. It is determined whether or not (step S1204).

  If it is determined that the BB internal winning is in a unit game in the triple BB challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 sets the triple BB flag on (step S1205). The triple BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the triple BB sound ("song F and music G" shown in FIG. 153A) is satisfied. After executing the processing of step S1205, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning of the BB is not in the unit game in the triple BB challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the internal winning of the BB is in the unit game in the dual BB challenge zone It is determined whether or not it is (step S1206).

  If it is determined that the internal winning combination of the BB is in a unit game in the 2-series BB challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 sets the 2-series BB flag on (step S1207). The dual BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the dual BB sound ("music D and music E" shown in FIG. 153A) is satisfied. If it is determined in step S1206 that the internal winning of the BB is not in a unit game in the double BB challenge zone, or after the processing of step S1207 is performed, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

<Process on receiving special condition satisfaction command>
The special condition satisfaction command reception process performed in the sub control circuit 3070 will be described with reference to FIG. The special condition satisfaction command reception process is a process performed triggered by reception of special condition satisfaction command data (see step S1048 in FIG. 161).

  In the special condition satisfaction command reception process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the 1G continuous BB flag (see step S1201 in FIG. 162) is set on (step S1220).

  If it is determined that the 1G continuous BB flag is set to on, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine. As a result, when the BB gaming state is activated (in the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command shown in step S 415 of FIG. 145), the 1G continuous BB flag is referred to, thereby the 1G continuous BB sound (FIG. “Music L and music M” or “music N and music O” shown in) are output.

  If it is determined in step S1220 that the 1G continuous BB flag is not set on, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the quadruple or later BB flag (see step S1203 in FIG. 162) is set on (step S1221).

  If it is determined that the BB flag for four or more stations is set to on, the sub CPU 3071 sets the BB flag for four or more stations or later (step S1222). Then, the sub CPU 3071 sets the special condition BB flag on (step S1229), and ends this subroutine.

  The special condition BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the sound for special condition BB ("Song P and Song Q" or "Song R and Song S" shown in FIG. 153A) is satisfied. As a result, when the BB gaming state is activated (in the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command shown in step S 415 of FIG. 145), the special condition BB flag is referred to to sound for special condition BB (FIG. “Music P and music Q” or “music R and music S” shown in) are output.

  If it is determined in step S1221 that the four or more consecutive BB flag is not set on, sub CPU 3071 determines whether the three consecutive BB flag (see step S1205 in FIG. 162) is set on (step S1223).

  If it is determined that the triple BB flag is set to on, the sub CPU 3071 sets the triple BB flag to off (step S1224). Then, the sub CPU 3071 sets the triple BB suspension flag on (step S 1225), sets the special condition BB flag on (step S 1229), and ends the present subroutine. Thereby, when the BB gaming state is activated, a sound for special condition BB ("Song P and Song Q" or "Song R and Song S" shown in FIG. 153A) is output.

  In addition, when the BB gaming state ends, the four challenge stations shift to the BB challenge zone, and when the BB wins internally in the BB challenge zone after the fourth decision, BBs occur after the fourth decision. Here, if the triple BB suspension flag is set to ON, in the four or subsequent BBs, it is not the sound for BB from four or later ("Song H and Song I" or "Song J and Song K"). , The sound for triple BB ("song F and music G") is reproduced. The triple BB suspension flag is set when the playback condition of the special condition BB sound is met when the playback condition of the triple BB sound is satisfied, and the triple BB sound ("Song F and Song G" is set. ") Is a flag indicating that playback is pending. In addition, when the BB gaming state ends, if the triple BB suspension flag is set to ON, the state may be shifted to the triple BB challenge zone. As a result, when BB internally wins in the triple BB challenge zone, triple BB occurs, and the triple BB sound held in the triple BB ("Song F and Song G") ) May be played back.

  If it is determined in step S1223 that the triple BB flag is not set on, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the dual BB flag (see step S1207 in FIG. 162) is set on (step S1226). ).

  If it is determined that the double BB flag is not set on, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the dual BB flag is set to on, the sub CPU 3071 sets the dual BB flag to off (step S1227). Then, the sub CPU 3071 sets the dual BB suspension flag on (step S1228), sets the special condition BB flag on (step S1229), and ends the present subroutine. Thereby, when the BB gaming state is activated, a sound for special condition BB ("Song P and Song Q" or "Song R and Song S" shown in FIG. 153A) is output.

  In addition, when the BB gaming state ends, it shifts to the triple BB challenge zone, and when the BB is internally won in the triple BB challenge zone, triple BB occurs. Here, if the 2-station BB suspension flag is set to ON, the 3-station BB does not have a 3-station BB sound ("song F and song G") but a 2-station BB sound ("song D" And the music E ") is reproduced. The dual BB suspension flag is set when the playback condition of the special condition BB sound is satisfied when the dual BB sound playback condition is satisfied, and the dual BB sound (“music D and music E ") Is a flag indicating that playback is pending. In addition, when the BB gaming state ends, if the dual BB suspension flag is set to ON, it may be shifted to the dual BB challenge zone. As a result, when BB internally wins in the 2-series BB challenge zone, 2-series BB occurs, and the 2-series BB sound for 2-series BB that has been suspended ("music D and music E" ) May be played back.

<Supplementary Note A3>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, the number of game media obtained by a player currently playing a game during BB, the number of game media obtained by a player playing a game in the past during BB, There is known a gaming machine configured to compare with each other (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-8647).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, the number of gaming media (game value) remaining in the hand of the player at the time when the BB is completed can not be accurately indicated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately indicating the number of gaming values remaining in the hand of a player.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(A3-1) Bet means (BET button and main CPU 3031 that executes the process of step S12 in FIG. 121) capable of betting a game value (medal) for one unit game.
Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
An awarding unit for awarding a number of gaming values determined based on the number of gaming values betted from the betting unit and the display result derived by the stop control unit (the main CPU 3031 executing the processing of step S25 in FIG. 121) )When,
Gaming value display means (liquid crystal display device DD20, and sub CPU 3071 for executing the processing of FIG. 158) capable of displaying the number (the number of BB consecutive acquisitions) related to gaming value in a predetermined gaming state (BB gaming state); Equipped with
The predetermined game state is a game state in which the bet unit can bet a predetermined number of game values (one medal) per unit game,
The gaming value display means
The number displayed is updated each time a unit game is performed in the predetermined gaming state, based on the number of gaming values awarded by the awarding means and the number of gaming values betted from the betting means. Is possible,
In the predetermined gaming state, when the number of gaming values awarded by the awarding means is equal to or less than the number of gaming values betted from the betting means, it is possible to display 0,
In the predetermined gaming state, when the gaming value is awarded by the awarding unit in a state where 0 is displayed by the gaming value display unit, the predetermined number is reduced from the number of gaming values awarded by the awarding unit. It is possible to display the number obtained
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, it is possible to display the number (the number of BB consecutive prizes acquired) regarding the gaming value (medal) in the predetermined gaming state (BB gaming state), and the granted gaming value ( Based on the number of medals) and the number of betted gaming values (medals), the number displayed (the number of BB consecutive villas acquired) each time a unit game is performed in a predetermined gaming state (BB gaming state) Is to be updated. In addition, in a predetermined gaming state (BB gaming state), when the number of provided gaming values (medals) is equal to or less than the number of betted gaming values (medals), "0" is displayed. ing. Here, it is assumed that a unit game is played in a state where “0” is displayed, and a gaming value (medal) is awarded (the number of awarded gaming values (medals) is “N”). In this case, assuming that the displayed number is updated from “0” to “N”, the displayed number (“N”) and the number of gaming values (medals) remaining in the player's hand are: It may not match. That is, while the player consumes a predetermined number (“1”) of gaming value (medal) to perform the unit game, the number of gaming value (medal) held by the player at that time is predetermined. It has decreased by the number ("1"). In this state, when "N" is given as the gaming value (medal), the number of gaming values (medals) held by the player in the unit game is increased by "N-1". On the other hand, assuming that the number of displays after update is “N” as described above, the number of displays does not match the increase in the gaming value (medal) and the number of gaming values (medal) held by the player. Will not reflect strictly. In this respect, in the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, when the gaming value (medal) is awarded while “0” is displayed, a predetermined number (“ It is configured to be able to display the number obtained by subtracting 1 ′ ′). As a result, it is possible to make the number of display of the game value (medal) equal to the increase number, and it is possible to accurately indicate the number of game value (medal) actually remaining at the player's hand.

Seventh Embodiment
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to sixth embodiments applies also in the seventh embodiment.

<Transition flow of gaming state>
FIG. 164 (a) is a view showing transition of transition of the gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 164 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 164 (a) is managed by the main control circuit 3060. As in the sixth embodiment, the gaming state (main) is classified into any of a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, a BB gaming state and an MB gaming state are provided as bonus states. "F_BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the BB gaming state, and "F_MB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the MB gaming state (see FIG. 167).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT0 gaming state is provided as the bonus non-winning state, and the inter-BB flag state and the inter-MB flag state are provided as the inter-flag state. In the following, the bonus non-winning state and the state between flags may be collectively referred to as a general gaming state.

  Specifically, referring to FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b), when “F_BB” is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state (when the internal winning combination is made), the main control circuit 3060 The gaming state is shifted from the RT0 gaming state to the state between BB flags (see transition condition (1)). In addition, when “F_MB” is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state (when internal winning is won), the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the state between the MB flags (transition condition ( See 2).

  “F_BB” (BB) and “F_MB” (MB) are so-called carryover roles (see FIG. 119 (a)). When BB is won internally, the condition in which BB is internally won is carried over until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB ("C_BB" shown in FIG. 166) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until BB wins). . The state between BB flags is a state in which the state in which BB is internally won is carried over. In addition, when the MB wins internally, the MB wins internally until the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB ("C_MB" shown in FIG. 166) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until the MB wins). Be carried over. The state between the MB flags is a state in which the internal winning state of the MB is carried over.

  When a combination of symbols relating to "C_BB" (see FIG. 166) is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the state between BB flags (if BB wins), the main control circuit 3060 starts the BB game from the state between BB flags Transition the gaming state to the state (see transition condition (3)). Also, in the state between MB flags, when the combination of symbols related to "C_MB" (see FIG. 166) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when MB wins), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the state between MB flags Transition the gaming state to the MB gaming state (see transition condition (4)).

  When medals exceeding the prescribed number (345) are paid out in the BB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the BB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (5)). Further, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (105) are paid out in the MB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (6)).

<Symbol arrangement table>
FIG. 165 (a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table. FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, for each of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR, the symbol arrangement table is the position of each symbol in the rotational direction and the symbol code (symbols arranged at each position It defines the correspondence with (data specifying the type of) (see FIG. 99).

  As shown in FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, “7”, “BAR”, “Replay”, “Bell 1”, “Bell 2”, “Watermelon 1”, “Watermelon 2”, “Cherry”, “Blank” Ten types of symbols such as 1 "and" Blank 2 "are used.

  By referring to the symbol arrangement table and the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”), the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) The type of symbol displayed on can be specified. The details are as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Symbol combination table>
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, the symbol combination table includes symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line ((6) The correspondence relation with the number of paid-out sheets is defined (see FIGS. 100A and 100B).

  In the present embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state and the state between flags) is set as one or three, and the number of medals that can be inserted in the BB gaming state is set as two. The number of medals that can be inserted in the MB gaming state is set as two.

  In addition, as the prize judgment line, “middle-middle-middle: center line”, “upper-upper-upper: top line”, “lower-lower-lower: bottom line”, “upper-middle-lower: cross down” The line "" and "lower-middle-upper: cross-up line" is set. When one or three medals are inserted in the normal gaming state, two medals are inserted in the BB gaming state, and two medals are inserted in the MB gaming state. In these cases, these five winning determination lines are activated.

  The basic configuration of the symbol combination table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

<Combination Table by Flag>
FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a flag-based combination table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, the flag combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (see FIGS. 101A to 101C). ). As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the type of display combination capable of winning) is uniquely determined.

  In this embodiment, “F_BB”, “F_MB”, “F_Replay”, “F_bell_1”, “F_bell_2”, “F_watermelon”, “F_cherry”, “F_certain cherry” as internal winning combinations. , “F_determiner_1”, “F_determiner_2”, “F_common bell”, “F_JAC bell”, and “F_CB role” are provided.

  The basic configuration of the flag-based combination table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Note that FIG. 167 also shows the number of medals (the number of payouts) to be paid out when each combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line (see FIG. 166). Further, in the drawing, "FRU" indicates a combination in which medals are paid out at the time of winning, and "REP" indicates a combination for activating replay (replay) at the time of winning. As described above, “BB” and “MB” respectively indicate combinations for activating the BB gaming state and the MB gaming state at the time of winning.

<Internal lottery table>
As an internal lottery table according to the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 168 (a)) referred to in a unit game performed by inserting one medal during the RT0 gaming state, and the RT0 gaming state The internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 168 (b)) referred to in the unit game performed by the insertion of three medals in the middle, and the line by the insertion of one medal in the state between the BB flags An internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 169 (a)) referred to in the unit game to be played and an internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 169) referred to in the unit game performed by inserting three medals during the BB flag state. (See (b)) and the internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 6) in a unit game performed by inserting one medal during the inter-MB flag state. 70 (a)), the internal lottery table (see FIG. 170 (b)) referred to in the unit game performed by inserting three medals during the MB flag state, and the BB gaming state. An internal lottery table (see FIG. 171 (a)) and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 171 (b)) referred to in the MB gaming state are provided.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a view showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (one game). FIG. 168 (b) shows an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (three-piece hanging game). FIG. 169 (a) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state between BB flags (one game). FIG. 169 (b) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state between BB flags (3 game). FIG. 170 (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between MB flags (one-on-one game). FIG. 170 (b) is a view showing an internal lottery table for a state between MB flags (3 game). FIG. 171 (a) shows an internal lottery table for BB gaming state. FIG. 171 (b) shows an internal lottery table for MB gaming state.

  The basic configuration of the internal lottery table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Transition flow of sub gaming state>
FIG. 172 (a) is a diagram showing transition transition of the sub gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 172 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the sub gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the sub gaming state as shown in FIG. 172 (a) is managed by the sub control circuit 3070. As the sub game state, a first continuous challenge zone, a second continuous challenge zone, and a normal zone are provided.

  Specifically, referring to FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), when the BB gaming state ends, the sub control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state to the first consecutive challenge zone (transition Condition (1)). In addition, after the MB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone, when the MB gaming state (MB in the first consecutive challenge zone) resulting from the MB winning is completed, the sub control circuit 3070 transfers the sub gaming state to the first consecutive challenge zone (see transition condition (2)).

  When a unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (32 times) after the BB gaming state or the MB gaming state (MB in the first consecutive challenge zone is completed) (the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (32 times in the first consecutive challenge zone) When it is performed, the sub control circuit 3070 shifts the sub gaming state from the first consecutive challenge zone to the second continuous challenge zone (see transition condition (3)). In addition, after the BB gaming state or the MB gaming state (MB in the first consecutive challenge zone is finished) and the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times) (the predetermined number of unit games in the second consecutive challenge zone (68 Once), the secondary control circuit 3070 causes the secondary gaming state to shift from the second consecutive challenge zone to the normal zone (see transition condition (4)).

<Sound during BB>
FIG. 173 (a) shows a sound during BB. FIG. 173 (b) is a diagram showing the priorities set for the sound during BB.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), a sound for freeze BB, a sound for 1G continuous BB, a sound for first continuous (odd continuous) BB, a first continuous (even even continuous) as the sound during BB. ) Sounds for BB, 2nd Residence (more than 5 stations) BB Sounds, 2nd Residence (4 stations) Sounds for BB, 2nd Residence (3 stations) Sounds for BB, 2nd Residence (2 stations) Sounds for BB, Hamari BB and BB are provided.

  The freeze BB sound is BGM (music a) that is output as a reproduction condition that a freeze occurs in a unit game in which BB is determined to be an internal winning combination. The freeze is a type of the above-mentioned game lock (game lock performed before the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR starts), and is provided as an effect for notifying that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination. It is done. Freezing will be described in detail later using FIG.

  The 1G series BB sound is output as a playback condition that BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first unit game (first game) after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is ended. (Music b).

  The first series (odd series) BB sound is BGM (music c) that is output as a playback condition that the first series number is an odd value (except 1). The sound for the first series (even series) BB is BGM (music d) that is output as a reproduction condition that the first series count is an even value (except 0). After BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge period, the first consecutive number of times the BB gaming state (BB in the first continuous challenge zone) generated by the BB winning is continuous. Is a value that is cumulatively counted when The first consecutive number of times will be described in detail later using FIG.

  The sound for the second consecutive villa (five or more stations) BB is BGM (music e and music f) outputted with the number of times of the second consecutive villa being five or more as a reproduction condition. The sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB is BGM (music g and music h) output with the number of times of the second consecutive villa being four as a reproduction condition. The sound for the second consecutive villa (three consecutive) BB is BGM (music i and music j) output with the number of times of the second consecutive villa being three as a reproduction condition. The sound for the second consecutive villa (two consecutive) BB is BGM (music k and music l) which is output with the number of times of the second consecutive villa being two as a reproduction condition. After BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the second consecutive resort challenge zone, the second consecutive resort number of times the BB gaming state (BB in the second consecutive resort challenge zone) generated by the BB winning is continuous. Is a value that is cumulatively counted when The second continuous number of times will be described in detail later using FIG.

  Hamari BB sound is output as a playback condition that BB and MB are not determined as internal winning combinations over 800 unit games after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is over. BGM (music m and music n).

  The normal BB sound is the above-mentioned sound during BB (Freeze BB sound, 1G continuous BB sound, 1st continuous (odd sequence) BB sound, 1st continuous (even sequence) BB sound, 1st Sound for 2 series (more than 5 series) BB, sound for 2nd series (4 series) BB, sound for 2nd series (3 series) BB, sound for 2nd series (2 series) BB, They are BGM (music o and music p) which are output when the reproduction condition of the Hamari BB sound is not satisfied.

  Sound for 2nd series (more than 5 series) BB, sound for 2nd series (4 series) BB, sound for 2nd series (3 series) BB, sound for 2nd series (2 series) BB, hamari The sound for BB and the sound for BB are respectively different in the music output when the number of payouts is less than 240 and the music output when the number of payouts is 240 or more. In addition, the sound during BB other than the sound for BB 1 (an odd train) and the sound for BB 1 (an even train) is BGM without lyrics, but for the first train (odd train) BB The sound and the sound for the first run (even run) BB are BGM with lyrics.

  In this embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 153), there are cases where both the reproduction condition corresponding to one BB sound and the reproduction condition corresponding to another BB sound are satisfied. FIG. 173 (b) shows which BB's sound is prioritized when the reproduction conditions corresponding to the plurality of BB's sound compete in this way.

  As shown in Fig. 173 (b), the sound for Hamari BB has priority over the sound for normal BB, and the sound for BB 2 for BB 2 (sound for BB 2 (double)), rather than the sound for Hamari BB The sound for the second consecutive villa (three trains) BB, the sound for the second consecutive villa (four trains) BB, and the sound for the second consecutive villa (five or more stations BB) are given priority, and the sound for the second consecutive villa BB The sound for the first consecutive villa BB (the sound for the first consecutive villa (odd series) BB and the sound for the first consecutive villa (even series) BB) is given priority, and the 1G continuous BB is higher than the sound for the first contiguous house BB Sound is prioritized and freeze BB sound is prioritized.

<Process when BB winning command is received>
FIG. 174 is a flowchart of a process performed by the sub control circuit when receiving a BB winning command.

  The processing at the time of receiving the BB winning command shown in FIG. 174 is processing performed by the sub control circuit 3070 triggered by receiving the BB winning command data (not shown). The BB winning command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 when the BB is determined as the internal winning combination (when it is determined “No” in step S75 of FIG. 124).

  In the BB winning command reception process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether a freeze lottery has been won (step S2001). The freeze lottery is a lottery for determining whether a freeze (game lock) should be generated before the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR starts. When the freeze occurs, the operation (for example, the operation of the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) by the player is invalidated until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start lever DD6 is operated. The freeze is a lock effect that can be generated only when the BB is determined to be an internal winning combination, and when a freeze occurs, the player is definitely notified that the BB has been internally won.

  Although not illustrated, in the present embodiment, when BB is determined as an internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 of the main control circuit 3060 determines winning or non-winning by performing freeze lottery based on a random number value. Specifically, when BB is independently determined as an internal winning combination (“F_BB” shown in “No. 1” in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b) is determined as an internal winning combination). (In the case of), 100% probability is decided to win. Further, when the main CPU 3031 determines that BB is an internal winning combination by overlapping with other roles (see “No. 5” to “No. 7” in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b)). If F_BB + F_ finalized cherries "," F_BB + F_ finalized role 1 ", or" F_BB + F_ finalized role 2 "is determined as the internal winning combination), the probability is determined to be 25% with a probability of 25%. When the freeze lottery is won, the main CPU 3031 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined lock time in the freeze lock timer, and invalidates the operation by the player until the value set in the freeze lock timer is consumed. Control to Since the BB winning command data includes information indicating the result of the freeze lottery, by receiving the BB winning command data, the sub CPU 3071 can recognize whether or not the freeze lottery has been won.

  If it is determined that the freeze lottery has been won, the sub CPU 3071 sets the freeze BB flag on (step S2002). The freeze BB flag is a flag indicating that the playback condition of the freeze BB sound ("music a" shown in FIG. 173A) is satisfied. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, a freeze BB sound is output. After executing the processing of step S2002, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2001 that the freeze lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 3071 is the first unit game (first game) after the internal winning of the BB has ended the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state). It is determined whether or not it is in (step S2003).

  If it is determined that the BB internal winning is in the first unit game (first game) after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) is over, the sub CPU 3071 turns on the 1G-continuous BB flag. (Step S2004). The 1 G continuous BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the 1 G continuous BB sound ("music b" shown in FIG. 173 (a)) is satisfied. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for 1G continuous BB is output. After executing the processing of step S2004, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the internal winning of the BB is not in the first unit game (first game) after the bonus state (BB gaming state or MB gaming state) ends, the sub CPU 3071 determines the inside of the BB. It is determined whether or not the winning is a unit game in the first consecutive challenge zone (step S2005).

  If it is determined that the internal winning combination of BB is a unit game in the first consecutive challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 adds 1 to the value of the first consecutive number counter (step S2006). The value of the first consecutive residence counter indicates the number of times of the first consecutive residence, and the type of sound for the first consecutive residence BB (for the first consecutive villa (odd connection) BB sound or the first connection (even connection) BB Is a value referred to when determining the sound), and is stored in the sub RAM 3073. In the process of step S2006, the sub CPU 3071 causes the sub RAM 3073 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the first consecutive change counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 as the value of a new first consecutive change counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 sets the first consecutive BB flag to ON (step S2007). The first series BB flag is a flag indicating that the reproduction condition of the first series BB sound (“music c” or “music d” shown in FIG. 173A) is satisfied. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the first consecutive villa BB is output.

  Here, although not shown, the sub CPU 3071 has a first BB described in the sixth embodiment (a BB gaming state generated by the BB winning after the BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal zone). When it is finished, set "1" to the number of times of first consecutive change. Therefore, if BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone, which shifts after the end of the first BB, the value of the first consecutive number counter (the first consecutive number of times) is “2”. Become. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the first consecutive (even-numbered) BB is output. Then, when BB is determined to be an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone, which is shifted after the BB gaming state in which the first continuous (even numbered) BB sound is output is ended, the first continuous The value of the number counter (the number of first consecutive units) is “3”. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the first consecutive villa (odd series) BB is output.

  In this manner, BB in the first consecutive challenge zone (BB gaming state generated by the BB winning after BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first continuous challenge zone) is continuous. In this case, the sound for the first series (even series) BB and the sound for the first series (odd series) BB are alternately determined as the sound during BB. Although the number of times of the first run is basically corresponding to the number of times of continuous BB in the first run challenge zone, when the reproduction condition of the sound for freeze BB is satisfied, and the sound for 1G run BB When the reproduction condition of (1) is satisfied, the number of times of the first consecutive change is not updated (see step S2001 and step S2003). Therefore, the first consecutive number of times does not necessarily coincide with the consecutive number of times BB in the first consecutive period challenge zone.

  After executing the processing of step S2007, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2005 that the internal winning of the BB is not in the unit game in the first consecutive challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 is in the unit game in which the internal winning of the BB is in the second consecutive challenge zone It is determined whether or not (step S2008).

  If it is determined that the internal winning combination of BB is a unit game in the second consecutive challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 adds 1 to the value of the second successive number counter (step S2009). The value of the second consecutive residence counter indicates the number of times of the second consecutive residence, and the type of sound for the second consecutive residence BB (Sound for the second consecutive residence (two consecutive) BB, for the second consecutive one (three)) for BB It is a value to be referred to when determining the sound, the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB, or the sound for the second consecutive villa (five or more stations) BB, and is stored in the sub RAM 3073. In the process of step S2009, the sub CPU 3071 causes the sub RAM 3073 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the second consecutive change counter stored in the sub RAM 3073 as the value of a new second consecutive change counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 sets the second consecutive BB flag on (step S2010). The second series BB flag is used for the second series BB sound ("Song e and Song f", "Song g and Song h", "Song i and Song j", or It is a flag indicating that the reproduction conditions of the music k and the music l ") are satisfied. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive villa BB is output.

  Here, although not illustrated, the sub CPU 3071 performs the second series when the first BB (the BB gaming state generated by the BB winning after the BB is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal zone) is ended. Set “1” to the number of times counter. Therefore, if BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the second consecutive challenge zone, which is transitioned (via the first continuous challenge zone) after the first BB is completed, the value of the second consecutive chance counter ( The second consecutive number of times) will be "2". As a result, when the BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive (double) BB is output. Then, after the BB gaming state in which the sound for the second consecutive villa (two stations) BB is output is ended, BB is internally inserted in the second consecutive challenge zone where the transition is made (via the first consecutive challenge zone). When it is determined to be the winning combination, the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) becomes “3”. As a result, when the BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive (three) BB is output.

  Similarly, in the second consecutive villa challenge zone, which transitions after the BB gaming state in which the second consecutive villa (three consecutive) BB sound is output is completed (via the first consecutive challenge zone), BB When the internal winning combination is determined, the value of the second consecutive play counter (the second continuous play number) becomes “4”. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive four (four) BB is output. Then, after the BB gaming state in which the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB is output is finished, BB is internally inserted in the second consecutive challenge zone (via the first consecutive challenge zone). When it is determined to be the winning combination, the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) becomes “5”. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive villa (five or more stations) BB is output.

  In this way, BB in the second consecutive challenge zone (BB gaming state generated by the BB winning after BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the second continuous challenge zone) is continuous. In this case, the sound for the second consecutive villa BB corresponding to the number of consecutive times of the BB in the second consecutive challenge zone is determined as the sound during BB. In addition, although the number of times of the second consecutive residence basically corresponds to the number of continuations of BB in the second consecutive residence challenge zone, when the reproduction condition of the sound for Freeze BB is satisfied, the number of the second consecutive residence is updated Not (see step S2001). Therefore, the number of times of the second consecutive villa does not necessarily coincide with the number of consecutive times of BB in the second consecutive challenge zone.

  In addition, the number of times of the second series is not updated even when the condition for reproducing the 1G series BB sound is satisfied, and also when the condition for reproducing the first series BB sound is satisfied (see steps S2003 and S2005). . For example, if BB is determined to be an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone, which transitions after the BB gaming state in which the second consecutive (three) BB sound is output is completed, then BB is won Then, a sound for the first consecutive villa BB is output. At this point of time, the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) is “3”. Then, BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the second consecutive challenge zone, which is shifted (via the first continuous challenge zone) after the BB gaming state in which the first sequential sound for BB is output is finished. Then, the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) becomes “4”. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive four (four) BB is output.

  Here, temporarily, if BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone, which is shifted after the BB gaming state in which the second consecutive (three) BB sound is output is ended, Assuming that the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) is to be updated, the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) is “4” at this time. Then, if BB is determined to be an internal winning combination in the second consecutive challenge zone, which shifts (via the first continuous challenge zone) after the completion of the first continuous challenge zone BB, the second The value of the consecutive residence number counter (the second consecutive residence number) is “5”. As a result, when BB wins thereafter, the sound for the second consecutive villa (five or more stations) BB is output. Then, as a result, there is a situation where the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB is skipped without being output. In this respect, in the present embodiment, as described above, when BB in the first consecutive challenge zone is interposed while BB in the second consecutive challenge zone is continuous, the value of the second consecutive number counter. Since (the number of times of the second series) is not updated, the sound for the second series BB can not be skipped, and the sound for each second series BB can be reproduced sequentially.

  If it is determined in step S2008 that the internal winning of the BB is not in the unit game in the second consecutive challenge zone, or after the processing of step S2010 is executed, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

<Challenge zone game number counter update processing>
FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the challenge zone game number counter updating process performed in the sub control circuit.

  In the challenge zone game number counter update process shown in FIG. 175, the sub control circuit 3070 starts at step S413 in FIG. 145 (effect content determination process), triggered by the reception of winning operation command data (see step S26 in FIG. 121). It is a process to be performed.

  In the challenge zone game number counter updating process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the current sub gaming state is the first consecutive challenge zone (step S2021). Information indicating a sub gaming state is stored in a sub gaming state flag storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 3073, and the sub CPU 3071 refers to the sub gaming state flag storage area to obtain the current sub gaming state. Can be recognized.

  If it is determined that the current sub gaming state is the first continuous challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 adds 1 to the value of the challenge zone game number counter (step S2022). The value of the challenge zone game number counter indicates the number of unit games played since the BB gaming state or the MB gaming state (MB in the first consecutive challenge zone) has ended, and is stored in the sub RAM 3073. Although not shown, in the bonus end command reception process (see step S 417 in FIG. 145), the sub CPU 3071 determines the number of challenge zone games if the ending bonus state is the MB in the BB gaming state or the first consecutive challenge zone. Set "0" in the counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the value of the challenge zone game number counter is 32 (step S2023). If it is determined that the value of the challenge zone game number counter is not 32, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the challenge zone game number counter is 32, the sub CPU 3071 shifts the sub gaming state to the second consecutive challenge zone (step S2024). Then, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a state between flags (step S2025). Since the data stored in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) of the main RAM 3033 is included in the winning operation command data received in step S412 in FIG. 145, the winning operation command data is received. The sub CPU 3071 can recognize the current gaming state.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the inter-flag state, the sub CPU 3071 clears the first consecutive number-of-times counter (step S2026). That is, the sub CPU 3071 sets “0” to the first consecutive-times counter. As a result, when both BB and MB do not win internally in the first consecutive challenge zone, the value of the first consecutive number counter (the first successive number) is reset. Therefore, when the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) is updated in step S2009 of FIG. 174, the value of the first consecutive residence counter (the first consecutive accommodation number) becomes 0. ing.

  If it is determined in step S2025 that the current gaming state is the inter-flag state, or after the process of step S2026 is executed, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2021 that the current sub gaming state is not the first consecutive challenge area, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the current sub gaming state is the second continuous challenge zone (step S2027). .

  If it is determined that the current sub gaming state is not the second consecutive challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current sub gaming state is the second consecutive challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 adds 1 to the value of the challenge zone game number counter (step S2028).

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the value of the challenge zone game number counter is 100 or not (step S2029). If it is determined that the value of the challenge zone game number counter is not 100, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the challenge zone game number counter is 100, the sub CPU 3071 shifts the sub gaming state to the normal zone (step S2030). Then, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a state between flags (step S2031).

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the inter-flag state, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the MB has transitioned to the inter-flag state by internally winning in the second consecutive challenge zone (step S2032). ). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 has the second main gaming state at the time when the main gaming state is between MB flags and the main gaming state is shifted from the RT0 gaming state to the between MB flags state. Determine if it was a zone. The main RAM 3033 stores information indicating a sub gaming state in a winning game (a unit game in which the RT0 gaming state has been shifted to the inter-flag state by the BB or MB being determined as the internal winning combination), and the sub The CPU 3071 can make the above determination by referring to the information.

  The flag has not transitioned to the inter-flag state by the internal winning of the MB in the second consecutive challenge zone (that is, the internal flag of the BB or MB in the first continuous challenge zone results in the inter-flag state If it is determined that the flag has been shifted or the flag has been shifted to the inter-flag state by being internally won in the second consecutive challenge zone, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag has been shifted to the inter-flag state by the internal winning of the MB in the second consecutive challenge zone, or after executing the processing of step S2031, the sub CPU 3071 performs the second consecutive frequency counter. Is cleared (step S2033). That is, the sub CPU 3071 sets “0” to the second consecutive-station number counter. As a result, if both BB and MB do not win internally in the first consecutive challenge zone, and if BB does not internally win in the second continuous challenge zone, the value of the second consecutive dwell time counter ( The second consecutive number of times) will be reset.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the MB is internally won in the first consecutive challenge zone, the value of the second consecutive wait counter (the number of the second consecutive stay) is not reset, while the second consecutive challenge is not performed. Even if the MB is internally won in the zone, the value of the second consecutive number counter (the second consecutive number) is reset. However, even if the MB is internally won in the first consecutive challenge zone, it is possible to reset the value of the second consecutive wait counter (the number of second consecutive stay), or the MB in the second consecutive challenge zone When the internal winning is achieved, it is possible not to reset the value of the second consecutive number counter (the second consecutive number).

  In addition, even after the MB in the second consecutive challenge zone (the MB gaming state generated by the MB winning after the MB is determined as the internal winning combination in the second continuous challenge zone), It is also possible to generate a 1-long challenge zone. In such a mode, it is desirable not to reset the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number) even when the MB is internally won in the second consecutive challenge zone.

  After executing the processing of step S2033, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

<BB winning process lock process>
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing a BB winning time lock process performed in the main control circuit.

  The BB prize lock process shown in FIG. 176 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 after the process of step S296 of FIG. 137 (bonus operation check process) is performed.

  In the BB winning lock process, the main CPU 3031 first determines that the BB gaming state to be started this time is BB in the first continuous challenge zone (BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first continuous challenge zone, and then the BB It is determined whether or not it is a BB gaming state generated by winning a prize (step S2101). Similarly to the sub control circuit 3070, the main control circuit 3060 also manages the state corresponding to the first continuous challenge zone shown in FIG. 172, and the main CPU 3031 can recognize the type of BB gaming state. .

  If it is determined that the BB gaming state to be started this time is not BB in the first consecutive challenge zone, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the BB gaming state to be started this time is BB in the first consecutive challenge zone, the main CPU 3031 sets the BB winning flag at ON (step S2102). The BB prize lock flag is a flag indicating that the BB prize lock is being executed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the BB winning lock timer (step S2103). The BB prize-winning lock timer is updated by the effect timer update process (step S323) shown in FIG. In the process of step S323 of FIG. 138, when the BB winning a prize lock timer after updating is 0, the main CPU 3031 sets the BB winning a prize lock flag to OFF. Thus, the BB prize lock is ended (see step S2105).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates BB winning time lock command data, and stores the generated BB winning time lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S2104). The BB winning time lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the BB prize lock has occurred.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the BB prize winning lock flag is set to ON (step S2105).

  If it is determined that the BB prize winning lock flag is set to on, the main CPU 3031 returns the process to step S2105. On the other hand, when it is determined that the BB prize winning lock flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  As a result, the BB prize lock is performed, and all the reels RL, RC, RR are locked (full turn torso lock) as in the case of the effect game lock (see step S1027 in FIG. 148), and a predetermined time elapses Until the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the BET button or the start lever DD6) is invalidated.

  Further, in response to the reception of the BB prize lock command data (see step S2104), the sub control circuit 3070 sets effect data corresponding to various effects (effects at BB prize) performed at the BB prize. As a result, while BB prize lock is being performed, it is possible to perform a large effect using video, sound, light, etc., and the BB gaming state (a state advantageous to the player) occurs. Can be notified to the player, and the player's mood can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the BB in the first consecutive challenge zone (the BB gaming state generated by the BB winning after the BB is determined as the internal winning combination in the first continuous challenge zone) starts Such a BB prize lock and BB prize effect are not performed (see step S2101). If BB in the first consecutive challenge zone is continuous, the player's mood is on, and if it is decided to perform the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect, there is a possibility that water will be drawn instead. is there. In this embodiment, in such a case, the game in the BB gaming state may be started while maintaining the tension of the player high without interruption of the game by the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect. Can.

  In particular, when BB in the first consecutive challenge zone starts, it is desirable not to perform BB winning lock for the following reasons.

  In the BB gaming state, any one of BB's sound shown in FIG. 173 (a) is outputted, but the BB's sound is outputted without waiting for the unit game in the BB gaming state to be started. Ru. That is, since the sound data corresponding to the sound during BB is set in the sub control circuit 3070 in response to the reception of the BB start command data (see step S 296 in FIG. 137), the sound during BB is a prize for BB. It is reproduced from immediately after (immediately after the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed along the effective line). Then, as described above, the sound for the first series BB ("song c" or "song d" shown in FIG. 173 (a)) is BGM with lyrics. Therefore, in the case where the first series sound for BB is reproduced as the sound during BB, the lyrics flow immediately after the BB is won.

  Assuming the above, it is assumed that a BB winning lock has occurred. Since the BB start command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 before the BB winning time locking process shown in FIG. 176 is performed, the BB starting time locking process is already performed. The output of the sound for BB 1 BB has been started, and the above-mentioned lyrics will flow while the BB winning lock is occurring. Meanwhile, during that time, since the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the BET button and the start lever DD6) is invalidated, the player can not start the unit game in the BB gaming state. From the point of view of the player, it is a situation where he feels a great sense of discomfort because he can not play a game despite the flow of the lyrics. In addition, if only a very short fanfare sound is output, it is detected that the BB winning lock has ended (that the game can be started) at the end of the sound output. However, since the sound for the first consecutive block BB (lyrics in BGM) flows continuously during the BB gaming state, the player does not know the timing at which the BB winning lock ends, and the player plays the game from any time It is also a difficult situation to determine what can be done.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the BB lock is not performed when the BB in the first consecutive challenge zone starts, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above situation. Can.

<Tempai sound lottery processing>
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing tempy sound lottery processing performed in the sub control circuit.

  In the tempering sound lottery process shown in FIG. 177, the sub control circuit 3070 starts the process in step S409 of FIG. 145 (effect content determination process) triggered by the reception of the reel stop command data (see steps S156 and S163 of FIG. 129). It is a process to be performed.

  In the tempering sound lottery process, first, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the stop operation performed this time is the second stop operation (step S2201). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the number of operated stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R is two. Since the reel stop command data received in step S408 in FIG. 145 includes the data stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 119 (c)) of the main RAM 3033, the reel stop command data is received. The sub CPU 3071 can recognize the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R which has been operated (pressed).

  If it is determined that the stop operation performed this time is not the second stop operation, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop operation performed this time is the second stop operation, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the second stop operation has been performed at the timing at which the “7” symbol can be tempered (step S2202). ). That is, in the symbol combination corresponding to BB (combination according to "C_BB" shown in FIG. 166), the symbol on the left reel RL, the symbol on the middle reel RC, and the symbol on the right reel RR are all "7" symbols By the way, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not two of the three “7” symbols can be stopped and displayed along the effective line. Incidentally, at the time when the processing of step S2202 is executed, the rotation of the reel targeted for the second stop operation is not yet stopped, but the stop start command data received in step S408 of FIG. Since the information indicating the position and the number of sliding symbols (or the planned stop position) is included, the sub CPU 3071 can specify the type of the symbol to be stopped by receiving the reel stop command data.

  Specifically, in the process of step S2202, when the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the left reel RL and the middle reel RC, the sub CPU 3071 is the "7" symbol in the left reel RL and the right reel RR. If the symbol “7” is displayed stopped along the activated line, and if the symbol “7” is displayed stopped along the activated line on the middle reel RC and the right reel RR, “Yes” is determined. In these cases, there is a possibility that BB will be won depending on the timing of the stop operation for the remaining one reel for which the stop operation has not been performed yet.

  If it is determined in step S2202 that the second stop operation is not performed at the timing at which the “7” symbol can be tempered, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second stop operation has been performed at the timing when the “7” symbol can be tempered, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the state between BB flags (step S2203). Since the reel stop command data received in step S408 in FIG. 145 includes the data stored in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119 (a)) of the main RAM 3033, the reel stop command data is received. The sub CPU 3071 can recognize the current gaming state. The inter-BB flag state is a concept including a winning game (a unit game in which the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the inter-BB flag state by determining BB as the internal winning combination).

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the state between BB flags, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the state between BB flags, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the special balance sound has already been output (step S2204). In this process, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether the special temper sound selected flag (see step S2209) is set to on.

  If it is determined that the special temper sound has already been output, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special temper sound has not been output yet, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not it has been definitely notified that the BB has been determined as the internal winning combination (step S2205). The case where the LED is lit in a specific pattern can be mentioned as a case where it is definitely notified that the BB has been determined as the internal winning combination. The specific pattern is a lighting pattern that appears only when BB is determined as an internal winning combination. In addition, not only when BB is determined as an internal winning combination but also when MB is determined as an internal winning combination, a pattern (predetermined pattern) that can appear is provided as a lighting pattern of the LED. There is. In the case where the LED is lit in the predetermined pattern, it is not included in the case where it is definitely notified that the BB has been determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, a dot display is provided inside the transparent panel UD11 (see FIG. 3), and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in the dot display. A front panel (not shown) is disposed between the dot display and the transparent panel UD11. The front panel is configured to be able to transmit light from the LED of the dot display in a part or all of the front panel, and a design simulating a pair (one each on the left and right) hibiscus pattern is provided on the panel front side . The hibiscus pattern is given a predetermined color and illuminated from the dot display, so that the player can visually recognize the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern through the transparent panel UD11.

  The lighting pattern (specific pattern) of the LED is the same as the lighting pattern of the hibiscus pattern, and as the specific pattern, for example, only a part corresponding to a leaf is illuminated, not a part corresponding to a flower in hibiscus Patterns in which the entire hibiscus blinks at predetermined time intervals, patterns in which only one of the left and right hibiscus (for example, the right) hibiscus is illuminated.

  In the present embodiment, upon receiving the start command data (see step S17 in FIG. 121), the sub control circuit 200 determines one effect pattern from among a plurality of effect patterns based on the internal winning combination. Be done. The effect pattern includes the lighting pattern of the LED, and the LED is lighted in the lighting pattern according to the determined effect pattern. Although not shown, the sub ROM 3072 stores an effect pattern determination table in which an effect pattern and a lottery value are defined in association with each internal winning combination, and the sub CPU 3071 refers to the effect pattern determination table. By doing this, one rendering pattern can be determined. The effect pattern determination table has the same configuration as the lock time lottery table (see FIGS. 147A and 147B) described in the sixth embodiment, and different effect pattern determination tables are referred to depending on the game situation. It has become. For example, the effect pattern determination table referred to in the RT0 gaming state, the effect pattern determination table referred to in the BB winning game, the effect pattern determination table referred to in the MB winning game, and the BB flag excluding the BB winning game are referred An effect pattern determination table, an effect pattern determination table to be referred to in a state between MB flags excluding the MB winning game, and the like are provided.

  If it is determined in step S2205 that the determination that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination is definitively notified, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination has not been definitively notified, the sub CPU 3071 executes tempare sound lottery (step S2206). In this processing, the sub CPU 3071 performs lottery based on random number values to select one of the normal temper sound, the special temper sound, and the lost.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 determines whether or not the special tempo sound is selected in step S2206 (step S2207).

  If it is determined that the special tempo sound is not selected, the sub CPU 3071 ends this subroutine. It should be noted that when loss is selected, no particular sound is output from the speakers DD25L, DD25R as a sound corresponding to the “7” pattern being tempered, and when a normal temper sound is selected, “7” The tempo sound is normally output from the speakers DD25L and DD25R as a sound corresponding to the tempering of the symbol. In the case of the normal tempy sound, when the BB is not determined as the internal winning combination (for example, two “7” symbols constituting the combination according to the “C_MB” in which the MB is determined as the internal winning combination and shown in FIG. This is a sound that can be output even when tempering along the pay line, or when two “7” symbols are tempering along the pay line in the RT0 gaming state, etc.

  If it is determined in step S2007 that the special tempy sound has been selected, the sub CPU 3071 sets effect data corresponding to the special tempy sound (step S2208). The effect data corresponding to the special temper sound is stored in the sub ROM 3072. As a result of execution of the process of step S2208, a special temper sound (sound different from the normal temper sound) is output from the speakers DD25L and DD25R as a sound corresponding to the “7” symbol having been temper. The special temper sound is a sound that can be output only when BB is determined to be an internal winning combination. Therefore, by listening to the special temper sound, the player can recognize that the BB has been decided as the internal winning combination. Although the timing at which the tempering sound is output is substantially simultaneous with the timing at which the rotation of the reel which is the target of the second stopping operation is stopped, the timing at which the tempering sound is output is the target of the second stopping operation. It may be slightly before (or after) the timing at which the rotation of the reel that has become lost stops.

  Next, the sub CPU 3071 sets the special temper sound selected flag to on (step S2209). The special tempy sound selected flag is a flag indicating that the special tempy sound has been output. The special tempy sound may occur only once between the time BB is determined as the internal winning combination and the time BB is won (see step S2204). When BB wins, the special tempo sound selected flag is set to off.

  After executing the processing of step S2209, the sub CPU 3071 ends the present subroutine.

<Display of special bell>
FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a stop display mode of symbols in the case where the bell wins in the normal gaming state. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a symbol stop display mode when the special bell wins in the MB gaming state.

  FIG. 178 shows an example of the symbol stop display mode when “F_bell_2” is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state or state between flags). FIG. 179 shows an example of the symbol stop display mode when the “F_CB role” is determined as the internal winning combination in the MB gaming state.

  When “F_Bell_2” is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the stop operation on the left reel RL is the symbol (“Bell 2”) of the symbol position “11”. Is performed at the timing displayed in the middle stage area, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the left reel RL stops without further rotation (slip), and the “bell 2” is displayed in the middle stage area. "Is displayed stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), when the stop operation for the middle reel RC is performed at the timing when the symbol (“bell 2”) at the symbol position “18” is displayed in the middle region, FIG. 178 As shown in (d), the middle reel RC stops without further rotation (does not slip), and “Bell 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle region. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (e), when the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed at the timing when the symbol (“bell 2”) at the symbol position “9” is displayed in the middle region, FIG. 178 As shown in (f), the right reel RR stops without further rotation (does not slip), and “Bell 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle region. As a result, "BELL 2"-"BELL 2"-"BELL 2" are aligned along the center line, and "C_BELL_08" (see FIG. 166) is won.

  When “F_CB role” is determined as an internal winning combination in the MB gaming state, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), the stop operation for the left reel RL is the symbol (“bell 2”) of the symbol position “11”. If it is performed at the timing displayed in the middle stage area, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), the left reel RL slips by one symbol and stops, and “Bell 2” is stopped and displayed in the lower stage area, and the upper stage "Cherry" is displayed stopped in the area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (c), when the stop operation for the middle reel RC is performed at the timing when the symbol (“bell 2”) at the symbol position “18” is displayed in the middle region, FIG. As shown in (d), the middle reel RC slips by 3 symbols and stops, and "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (e), when the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed at the timing when the symbol (“bell 2”) at the symbol position “9” is displayed in the middle region, FIG. As shown in (f), the right reel RR slips by 3 symbols and stops, and "watermelon 2" is stopped and displayed in the upper stage area. Thereby, "Bell 2"-"7"-"Watermelon 2" aligns along the cross-up line, and "Cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" aligns along the top line, "C_special bell" And “C_Cherry” (see FIG. 166) is a prize.

  As described above, in the case where "F_bell_2" is determined as the internal winning combination in the ordinary gaming state and in the case where the "F_CB combination" is determined as the internal winning combination in the MB gaming state, each reel RL, RC, Even if stop control of RR is different and stop operations for the reels RL, RC, RR are performed in the same order and timing, different symbols are stopped and displayed on each reel RL, RC, RR.

  As shown in FIG. 167, when "F_bell_2" is determined as the internal winning combination, "C_bell 01" to "C_bell 08" and "C_special bell" stop along the effective line. It is acceptable to be displayed. However, if "F_Bell_2" is determined as an internal winning combination in the ordinary gaming state, there is a possibility that the stop display may actually be made along the activated line, "C_Bell_01" to "C_Bell_08" The "C_special bell" is not displayed along the valid line regardless of the order and timing of the stop operations on the reels RL, RC, RR.

  The stop display mode of the symbols described with reference to FIG. 178 is an example thereof. Although “C_special bell” is permitted to be stopped and displayed along the effective line even when “F_common bell” is determined to be the internal winning combination (see FIG. 167), in this case, Also, regardless of the order and timing of the stop operation for each reel RL, RC, RR, "C_special bell" is not displayed stopped along the effective line.

  The "C_special bell" may be stopped and displayed along the activated line only when the gaming state is the MB gaming state. In the MB gaming state, "F_CB role" is always determined as the internal winning combination (see FIG. 171 (b)), and when "F_CB role" is determined as the internal winning combination, all medals are paid out at the time of winning It is permitted that the combination (small part) of is displayed stopped along the effective line (see FIG. 167).

  In the MB gaming state, the priority when pulling in the "C_special bell" is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Thus, the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when the "bell 2" can be stopped and displayed (the timing when the distance to "bell 2" is within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols), and the middle reel RC. Stop operation for “7” (when the distance to “7” is within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols) is performed, and the stop operation for the right reel RR is “watermelon 2 "C_special bell" is displayed stopped along the effective line when it is performed at the timing when it can be displayed stopped (when the distance to "watermelon 2" is within the maximum number of sliding pieces). It has become so. In the ordinary gaming state, the maximum number of sliding symbols in each reel RL, RC, RR is “4”, but in the MB gaming state, the maximum number of sliding symbols in the middle reel RC and the right reel RR is “4”. In contrast to 4 ", the maximum number of sliding symbols in the left reel RL is" 2 ".

  The stop display mode of the symbol described with reference to FIG. 179 is an example thereof. In the example of FIG. 179, “C_special bell” is awarded and “C_cherry” is prized. In the present embodiment, in the MB gaming state, when “C_special bell” is stopped and displayed along one active line, “C_cherry” always wins along the other active line.

  Here, in the RT0 gaming state, the probability that the bonus combination (BB or MB) is determined as the internal winning combination is higher in the 3-player game than in the 1-player game (see FIG. 168), and the player Usually, it is considered to play a three-card game. And, in the three-sheet-playing game, the payout number of medals when the "C_ special bell" wins more than the payout number of medals (7 pieces) when the "C_ bell _ 01" to "C_ bell _ 08" are won. There are more (12 sheets) (see FIG. 166). However, as described above, since "C_special bell" never wins in the ordinary gaming state, eventually, when "F_bell_2" is determined as the internal winning combination in the ordinary gaming state, "C_bell Seven medals will be paid out on condition that any of _01 "to" C_bell _08 "has won.

  On the other hand, what can be performed in the MB gaming state is only a two-piece game. In the two-card game, the payout number of medals is 12 when "C_special bell" is a prize, and the payout number of medals is 15 when "C_cherry" is a prize (see FIG. 166). . As mentioned above, when "C_ special bell" is awarded, "C_ cherries" are also simultaneously awarded, and the payout number of medals (12 pieces) and "C_ cherries" when "C_ special bell" is awarded The total with the payout number of medals (15 sheets) when winning is 27 is 27. However, since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is set to 15 in the MB gaming state, eventually 15 medals will be paid out when the "C_special bell" is won in the MB gaming state. Become.

  In the above example, the payout number (12) of medals corresponding to "C_special bell" is less than the upper limit number (15) of medals that can be paid out in the MB gaming state. However, the payout number of medals corresponding to “C_special bell” may be the same as the upper limit number, or may be larger than the upper limit number. In addition, the payout number of medals corresponding to “C_special bell” may be smaller than the payout number of medals corresponding to “C_cherry”, and may be larger than the payout number of medals corresponding to “C_cherry”. It may be the same as the payout number of medals corresponding to “C_cherry”.

  Hereinabove, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note B1>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to output so-called ART and to output different BGMs during ART and non-ART is known (see, for example, JP-A-2010-51492). ). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to stimulate the game and enhance the player's feeling through the specific BGM flowing in the ART (playing state advantageous to the player).

  The inventor of the present invention creates a new entertainment feature by devising the generation condition of a specific effect in the process of intensively examining the effects such as BGM performed during the specific gaming state as described above. I came to the idea that I could do something.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment characteristics with respect to the generation of a rendition.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B1-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the specification advantageous to the player when the predetermined display result (“C_BB” shown in FIG. 166) is derived by the stop control means Specific gaming state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the gaming state (BB gaming state);
Specific game state end means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the process of FIG. 136) for ending the specific game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
Special game state effect effect execution means (a sub CPU 3071 which outputs any of the music a to p shown in FIG. 173 (a)) capable of performing effects in the specific game state;
The said special game state effect execution means,
During the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) of the period from the end of the specified gaming state by the specified gaming state end means to the activation of the specified game state by the specified gaming state operating means First specific gaming state effect execution means capable of performing staging in the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state is activated in response to the determination that the specific combination has been determined as a winning combination;
A second period different from the first period of the period from the end of the specified gaming state by the specified gaming state end means to the activation of the specified game state by the specified gaming state operating means When the specific gaming state is activated in response to the fact that the specific combination is determined as the winning combination during the 2 consecutive challenge zone), the second specific gaming state can be rendered in the specific gaming state Providing an execution means,
The second specific gaming state effect execution means,
When the specific gaming state that operates with the specific combination being determined as the winning combination generated multiple times during the second period, effects different from each other in the multiple specific gaming states (FIG. 173 (a And the output of “music e and music f”, “music g and music h”, “music i and music j”, or “music k and music l”) can be performed,
The first specific gaming state effect execution means,
It is possible to perform an effect (output of “music c” or “music d” shown in FIG. 173 (a)) different from the effect that can be performed by the second specific gaming state effect executing means,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first one of the periods from the end of one specified gaming state (BB gaming state) to the activation of the next specific gaming state (BB gaming state) When the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated triggered by the fact that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the period (the first consecutive resort challenge zone), and the second period (the second consecutive resort) In the case where the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated in response to the fact that the specific winning combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the challenge zone), a unique effect is provided. Specifically, when a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that operates with a specific winning combination being determined as a winning combination during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) occurs a plurality of times Are different from each other in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) in a plurality of times (“music e and music f”, “music g and music h”, “music i and music j” shown in FIG. 173 (a) Or “output of“ music k and music l ”)). As a result, the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is triggered by the fact that the specific winning combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the second period (the second consecutive challenge zone) is repeated, In the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) of each time through changing the effect contents during the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and providing the player with a new effect in each specific gaming state (BB gaming state), A player can play a game with fresh feeling. Also, in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is triggered by the fact that the specific part (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone), the second period (the BB gaming state) The “music” shown in FIG. 173 (a) may be performed in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is triggered by the determination that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination in the second consecutive challenge zone). It is possible to perform an effect different from output of e and music f, "music g and music h", "music i and music j", or "music k and music l"). The second period (second consecutive challenge zone) per the case where the specific role (BB) is determined to be the winning combination during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) through the difference in the contents of such effects. It is possible to differentiate it from the case where the specific combination (BB) is decided as the winning combination, and during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone), the specific combination (BB) is the current combination. It can increase the player's interest in being determined.

  In the seventh embodiment, the sound for the second consecutive villa (two stations) BB, the sound for the second consecutive villa (three stations) BB, the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB, and the second consecutive villa (5 Although the sounds for BB are described as all different BGMs, in the present invention, the same BGM may be included in the sounds for BB. More specifically, in the present invention, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is activated when the specific part (BB) is determined to be a winning combination during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) If two or more specific gaming states (BB gaming states) having different effect contents are included in these multiple specific gaming states (BB gaming states) when the) occurs a plurality of times, those two times The contents of the effects performed in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) other than the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) are not particularly limited. That is, the effect performed in at least one specific gaming state (BB gaming state) of the plurality of specific gaming states (BB gaming state) is different from the effect performed in the other specific gaming state (BB gaming state) The same effect may be performed in a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) other than the one specific gaming state (BB gaming state). For example, when the BB gaming state occurs four times, the effect A is performed in the first BB gaming state, and the effect B is performed in the second to fourth BB gaming states (the second to fourth BB The same effect may be performed in the gaming state). In addition, effect A is performed in the first and second BB gaming states (the same effect is performed in the first and second BB gaming states), and effect B is in the third and fourth BB gaming states It may be performed (the same effect is performed in the third and fourth BB gaming states). In addition, effect A is performed in the first to third BB gaming states (the same effect is provided in the first to third BB gaming states), and effect B is performed in the fourth BB gaming state It may be In addition, effect A is performed in the first and third BB gaming states (the same effect is performed in the first and third BB gaming states), and effect B is in the second and fourth BB gaming states. It may be performed (the same effect is performed in the second and fourth BB gaming states).

(B1-2) The gaming machine according to (B1-1) above,
The said special game state effect execution means,
When the specific gaming state occurs N times (N is an integer of 3 or more), triggered by the fact that the specific combination is determined to be a winning combination during the second period of all the N specific gaming states. In the first specific gaming state to the Nth specific gaming state among the N specific gaming states, the first effect to the Nth effect (second consecutive villa (two) Sounds for BB, 2nd Series (3 stations) BB, 2nd Station (4 stations) BB, and 2nd Series (5 stations or more) BB Sounds can be output. And
When the specific gaming state occurs N times, the first specific gaming state to the K th (K is an integer from 1 to (N-2)) of the N specific gaming states The game is triggered by the fact that the specific part has been decided as the winning combination during the second period, and the (K + 1) -th specified gaming state is achieved by the specific part being played during the first period. If it is triggered by the decision that the first specific game state ~ K in the first specific game state from the first effect ~ K effect (second series (two consecutive) sound for BB, And, while performing the output of the sound for the second consecutive villa (three consecutive) BB), an effect (the first consecutive villa BB) different from the first effect to the N-th effect in the (K + 1) -th specified gaming state Output of the sound for the (K + 2) -th specific game state It is possible to perform operation (K + 1) of the effect (the second communication Zhuang (quadruplicate) output of the BB for the sound),
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, for example, when the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) occurs four times, all the four specific gaming states (BB gaming state) are in the second period The first specific gaming state of the four specific gaming states (BB gaming states) is activated when the specific combination (BB) is activated as a winning combination in the second consecutive challenge zone). (BB gaming state) to the fourth specific gaming state (BB gaming state), the first to fourth effects (second series (two series) BB sound, second series (three series) respectively ) It is possible to perform the sound for BB, the sound for BB (2 trains (4 trains), and the sound for BBs 2 (more than 5 trains)) (the first specific gaming state ( BB gaming state) ~ the fourth specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and the first Stage 4 ~ Stage 4 (Sound for 2nd Series (2 stations) BB, Sound for 2nd stations (3 stations) BB, Sound for 2nd stations (4 stations) BB, and 2nd stations ( 5 stations or more) BB sound output) and corresponding)). In addition, when the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) occurs four times, the first specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and the second specific one of the four specific gaming states (BB gaming state) The gaming state (BB gaming state) is triggered by the fact that the specific part (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone), and the third specific gaming state (BB) The gaming state is the first specified gaming state (BB gaming state) when the special role (BB) is activated as a winning combination during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone). And in the second specific gaming state (BB gaming state) the first effect (output of the sound for the second consecutive villa (two stations) BB) and the second effect (sound for the second consecutive villa (three stations) BB) Of the third specific game state while Performs different effects (output for the first consecutive BB sound) from the first effect to the fourth effect in the BB gaming state), and performs the third effect (BB gaming state) in the fourth specific gaming state (BB gaming state) It is possible to perform the output of the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB). Here, temporarily, in the latter case, (the first specific gaming state (BB gaming state) to the fourth specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and the first effect to the fourth effect (second series) Sounds for Chuang (2 stations) BB, Sounds for 2nd station (3 stations) BB, Sounds for 2nd station (4 stations) BB, and outputs of 2nd station (5 stations or more) BB sounds) If it is assumed that the fourth effect (output of sound for the second consecutive block (five or more stations) BB) is performed in the fourth specified gaming state (BB gaming state) based on the above correspondence relationship with In such a situation, the third effect (output of the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB) is not performed, and the situation is such that it is skipped. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the third effect (output of sound for the second consecutive four-line BB) is performed in the fourth specific gaming state (BB gaming state). Because it is possible, the opportunity for the third effect (output of the sound for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB) is secured, and the first to fourth effects (second consecutive villa (2 Run) Output the sound for BB, the sound for 2nd run (3 runs) BB, the sound for 2nd run (4 runs) BB, and the sound for 2nd run (more than 5 runs) BB) be able to.

(B1-1 ′) lottery means (a main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for performing a predetermined lottery concerning a game;
Specific gaming state operating means capable of operating a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (BB winning) (The main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of FIG. 137),
Specific game state end means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the process of FIG. 136) for ending the specific game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
Special game state effect effect execution means (a sub CPU 3071 which outputs any of the music a to p shown in FIG. 173 (a)) capable of performing effects in the specific game state;
The said special game state effect execution means,
During the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) of the period from the end of the specified gaming state by the specified gaming state end means to the activation of the specified game state by the specified gaming state operating means First specific gaming state effect execution means capable of performing staging in the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state is activated triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery becoming the predetermined result;
A second period different from the first period of the period from the end of the specified gaming state by the specified gaming state end means to the activation of the specified game state by the specified gaming state operating means When the specified gaming state is activated in response to the result of the predetermined lottery being the predetermined result in the 2 consecutive challenge zone), the second specification capable of producing effects in the specified gaming state Providing an execution executing means during the game state,
The second specific gaming state effect execution means,
When the specified gaming state which is triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery becoming the predetermined result during the second period is generated a plurality of times, effects different from each other in the plurality of specified gaming states ( It is possible to output “music e and music f”, “music g and music h”, “music i and music j” or “music k and music l” shown in FIG. 173 (a)) Yes,
The first specific gaming state effect execution means,
It is possible to perform an effect (output of “music c” or “music d” shown in FIG. 173 (a)) different from the effect that can be performed by the second specific gaming state effect executing means,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first one of the periods from the end of one specified gaming state (BB gaming state) to the activation of the next specific gaming state (BB gaming state) When a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated triggered by the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming a predetermined result (BB winning) during a period (first consecutive challenge zone), When a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated triggered by the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming a predetermined result (BB winning) during period 2 (second consecutive challenge zone) And, it is configured to perform unique effects. Specifically, a specific gaming state (BB game) which is triggered by the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming a predetermined result (BB winning) during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) When a plurality of occurrences of state) occur, effects different from each other in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) of the plurality of times (“music e and music f”, “music g and music h” shown in FIG. 173 (a)) , “Music i and music j”, or “music k and music l”)). Thus, the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated when the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) reaches the predetermined result (BB winning) during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone). As the game is repeated, the effect contents in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) are changed, and a new effect is provided to the player in each specific gaming state (BB gaming state). In the state (BB gaming state), the player can play the game with fresh feeling. In addition, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is triggered by the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming a predetermined result (BB winning) during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) In the second period (second consecutive challenge zone), the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) is triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming the predetermined result (BB winning). Output of “Song e and Song f”, “Song g and Song h”, “Song i and Song j”, or “Song k and Song l” shown in FIG. It is possible to perform an effect different from). In the case where the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becomes the predetermined result (BB winning) during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) through the difference in the contents of such effects, the second period It is possible to differentiate from the case where the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) results in the predetermined result (BB winning) during (the second consecutive challenge zone), and the first period (the first period (first It is possible to raise the player's interest in the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming the predetermined result (BB winning) during the consecutive challenge zone).

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the first period is the first consecutive challenge zone and the second period is the second consecutive challenge zone has been described, but the first period and the second period in the present invention are described. The period is not limited to this example. For example, the order of the first period and the second period is arbitrary, and a second period may be provided after the first period, and a first period may be provided after the second period. It may be In the seventh embodiment, it is described that the second consecutive challenge zone is started immediately after the end of the first continuous challenge zone. The first period and the second period in the present invention may be generated continuously in this manner, and after one period ends, the other period starts after a predetermined period. You may do it. Also, the first period may be a period that occurs when a predetermined condition is met. As such a predetermined condition, for example, the condition of winning a predetermined lottery may be adopted, or the special condition described in the sixth embodiment may be adopted. Further, the specific gaming state in the present invention is not limited to the BB gaming state, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the advantageous gaming state described in the sixth embodiment.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of unit games (32 times) played in the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) and the number of unit games played in the second period (second continuous challenge zone) It has been described that the number of times (68) is fixed uniformly, and the number of times is always constant. However, in the present invention, the number of unit games played in the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) and the number of unit games played in the second period (second continuous challenge zone) are respectively It may be changed according to the situation of For example, according to the type of BB gaming state ended, the length and / or the length of the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) occurring thereafter, while being configured to be provided with multiple types of BB gaming states The length of the second period (the second consecutive challenge zone) may be made different. For example, the number of unit games played in the first period (the first period after the end of the first BB) that shifts after the end of the first BB gaming state transitions to the first after the second BB gaming state has ended. The number of unit games played in the first period after the end of the second BB may be greater than the number of unit games played in the second period. In this case, the number of unit games played in the second period (the second period after the end of the first BB) after the end of the first period after the end of the first BB is the transition after the end of the first period after the end of the second BB The number of unit games played in the second period (the second period after the end of the second BB) may be more, less, or the same number of times. The sum of the number of unit games played in the first period after the end of the first BB and the number of unit games played in the second period after the end of the first BB is the number of unit games played in the first period after the second BB end and the first It may be made to be the same as the sum with the number of unit games played in the second period after the end of 2BB.

  Further, either one of the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) and the second period (the second consecutive challenge zone) may not be generated according to the game situation. For example, only the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) may be generated depending on the type of BB gaming state ended, or only the second period (second continuous challenge zone) may occur. It is also possible to let In addition, the length of the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) may be changed according to the game result in the first period (first continuous period challenge zone). For example, if the predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is internally won during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) (or if it wins), the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) The number of unit games played in the second period (the second consecutive challenge zone) is compared with the case where the predetermined part (for example, watermelon) is not won internally (or not won). It may be increased or decreased. In addition, if the predetermined part (for example, watermelon) does not win internally during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) (or if it does not win), the second period (the second consecutive) It is possible not to generate the Sho Challenge Zone). Conversely, if the predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is internally won during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone) (or if it wins), the second period (the second consecutive challenge zone) It is possible not to generate

  In the seventh embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine is described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko game machine. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a so-called ST (Specia 1 Time) gaming state and a short time gaming state, a period from the start to the end of the ST gaming state is adopted as the first period, and the ST gaming state is ended. It is possible to adopt a period from the end of time-saving game state to the end of the second time period. The ST gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (a gaming state in which the probability of winning a special symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability variation gaming state) which is ended by performing a special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times after the big hit gaming state ends. The short time gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-short time gaming state, and can be configured to continue until the special symbol lottery of a specified number of times is performed after the big hit gaming state ends. . If the specific number of times is more than the predetermined number of times, the present invention can be applied to the pachislo game machine in the manner as described above. In addition, when the predetermined number of times is more than the specific number of times, the period from the start to the end of the time saving game state is adopted as the first period, and the ST gaming state is ended after the time saving game state is ended. The period up to can be adopted as the second period. As described above, in the present invention, both the first period and the second period may be included in the period from the start to the end of the ST gaming state (a period advantageous to the player). . For example, the period from the start to the end of the ST gaming state is divided into a period until a specific symbol lottery is performed a specific number of times (a period particularly advantageous for the player) and a period thereafter, The period until the special symbol lottery is performed may be a first period, and the subsequent period may be a second period.

(B1-3) variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the specification advantageous to the player when the predetermined display result (“C_BB” shown in FIG. 166) is derived by the stop control means Specific gaming state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the gaming state (BB gaming state);
Specific game state end means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the process of FIG. 136) for ending the specific game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
Effect execution means capable of producing effects in the specific gaming state (a sub CPU 3071 which outputs any of musics a to p shown in FIG. 173 (a));
Effect determination means (sub-CPU 3071 for executing the processing of FIG. 174) capable of determining an effect (play effect for playing a sound during BB) performed in the specific game state performed by the effect execution means;
The effect determining means is
It is possible to count at least a part of the number of times that the specific part is determined to be a winning combination during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) after the specific gaming state is ended by the specific gaming state ending means. First counting means (sub CPU 3071 which executes the process of step S2006 in FIG. 174);
A second counting unit capable of counting at least a part of the number of times the specific combination is determined to be a winning combination in a second period (second consecutive challenge zone) after the first period (see FIG. 174 A sub CPU 3071 which executes the processing of step S2009),
When the specific gaming state is activated in response to the determination that the specific combination is determined as the winning combination during the first period, an effect according to the counting result by the first counting means (a sound for the first consecutive BB) While it is possible to determine the reproduction effect) as the effect during the specific gaming state, when the specific gaming state is activated triggered by the fact that the specific part is determined as the winning combination during the second period, the above It is possible to determine an effect (reproduction effect of the sound for the second consecutive block BB) according to the counting result by the second counting means as the effect during the specific gaming state,
When the specific combination is determined to be a winning combination during the first period, it is possible to update the count by the first counting means without updating the count by the second counting means. In contrast, when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination during the second period, the count by the second counting means is updated, while the count by the first counting means is reset.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the special winning combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the first period (first continuous challenge zone) after the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is ended. During the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) after the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) at least a part of the number of times is counted, and the special role (BB) is determined as the winning combination. At least a part of the number of times is counted (the count regarding the number of times that the specific role (BB) is determined to be a winning combination during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) is referred to as “first count”, 2) The count regarding the number of times that the special part (BB) is determined to be a winning combination during the second period (the second consecutive challenge zone) is referred to as "the second count". When the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated triggered by the fact that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone), the result of the first count (first While it is possible to determine the effect (the reproduction effect of the sound for the first consecutive character BB) according to the number of consecutive residences) as the effect during the specific gaming state (the reproduction effect of the sound during the BB), the second period (the second period) When the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated in response to the determination that the specific combination (BB) is determined to be the winning combination during the consecutive zone challenge zone), the second count result (the number of times of the second consecutive zone) It is possible to determine the effect (the reproduction effect of the sound for the second consecutive block BB) as the effect during the specific gaming state (the reproduction effect of the sound during BB). As described above, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the count regarding the number of times that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone), and the second period It is possible to separately perform counting regarding the number of times that the specific combination (BB) is determined to be a winning combination during the (second consecutive challenge zone), and the effect corresponding to each counting result is specified gaming state (BB Can be done during the game state). As a result, different effects can be performed according to the number of times that the specific combination (BB) is determined to be the winning combination during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone), and the second period (the second consecutive challenge) Depending on the number of times that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination in the zone), different effects can be performed. As a result, it is possible to make the special game state effect (BB sound reproduction effect) rich in variations, and provide a special game state effect (BB sound reproduction effect) which makes it difficult for the player to get bored. can do. Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, when the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone), the second count (the second) is performed. While it is possible to update the first count (counting by the first consecutive counting counter) without updating the counting by the consecutive counting counter, during the second period (second consecutive challenging zone) If the special combination (BB) is determined to be the winning combination, the second count (count by the second consecutive count counter) is updated, while the first count (count by the first consecutive count counter) is reset. It will be in the That is, while the second count (count by the second consecutive count counter) is likely to be updated as compared to the first count (count by the first consecutive count counter), the first count (first consecutive count) is The counting by the counter) is configured to be easily reset as compared with the second count (counting by the second consecutive number-of-times counter). Thereby, it is possible to relatively increase the value of the effect according to the result of the first count (the number of times of first consecutive residence), and the effect according to the result of the first count (the number of times of first consecutive residence) appears At the same time, the player's feeling can be further enhanced.

(B1-3 ′) lottery means (a main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for performing a predetermined lottery concerning a game;
Specific gaming state operating means capable of operating a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (BB winning) (The main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of FIG. 137),
Specific game state end means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the process of FIG. 136) for ending the specific game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
Effect execution means capable of producing effects in the specific gaming state (a sub CPU 3071 which outputs any of musics a to p shown in FIG. 173 (a));
Effect determination means (sub-CPU 3071 for executing the processing of FIG. 174) capable of determining an effect (play effect for playing a sound during BB) performed in the specific game state performed by the effect execution means;
The effect determining means is
The specified gaming state end means counts at least a part of the number of times the result of the predetermined lottery results in the predetermined result during a first period (first consecutive challenge zone) after the specified gaming state is ended. A first counting unit (sub CPU 3071 that executes the processing of step S2006 in FIG. 174) that can
Second counting means capable of counting at least a part of the number of times the result of the predetermined lottery results in the predetermined result during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) after the first period (The sub CPU 3071 which executes the processing of step S2009 in FIG. 174),
When the specified gaming state is activated triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery becoming the predetermined result during the first period, an effect according to the counting result by the first counting means While it is possible to determine the reproduction effect of the sound for BB) as the effect during the specific gaming state, the specific operation is triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery becoming the predetermined result during the second period. When the gaming state is activated, it is possible to determine an effect (reproduction effect for the sound for the second consecutive block BB) according to the counting result by the second counting means as the effect during the specific gaming state,
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result during the first period, it is possible to update the count by the first counting means without updating the count by the second counting means. On the other hand, when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result during the second period, the count by the second counting means is updated, while the count by the first counting means is Has been reset,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) is predetermined during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) after the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is ended. At least a part of the number of times the result (BB win) is counted, and a predetermined drawing is made during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) after the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) At least a part of the number of times the result of (internal lottery) is a predetermined result (BB winning) is counted (the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) is in the first period (first consecutive challenge zone) The count related to the number of times a predetermined result (BB winning) is expressed as “first count”, and the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) during a second period (second consecutive challenge zone) is a predetermined result ( The number of BB wins The cement is referred to as a "second count"). In the case where the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becoming the predetermined result (BB winning) during the first period (the first consecutive challenge zone), It is possible to determine the effect (reproduction effect of the sound for the first consecutive house BB) according to the result of the first count (the number of times of the first consecutive house) as the effect during the specific gaming state (the reproduction effect of the sound during the BB) On the other hand, the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) was activated when the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) became the predetermined result (BB winning) during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone). In the case, it is possible to determine an effect (reproduction effect for the sound for the second consecutive house BB) according to the result of the second count (the number of times for the second consecutive house) as an effect during the specific gaming state (reproduction effect for the sound during the BB) It is. As described above, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) is the predetermined result (BB winning) during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone). It is possible to separately perform counting regarding the number of times and counting regarding the number of times that the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) results in a predetermined result (BB winning) during the second period (second consecutive challenge zone) Yes, effects according to the respective count results can be performed during the specific gaming state (BB gaming state). As a result, different effects can be performed according to the number of times the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becomes the predetermined result (BB winning) during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone), and Different effects can be performed according to the number of times that the result of a predetermined lottery (internal lottery) results in a predetermined result (BB winning) during two periods (second consecutive challenge zone). As a result, it is possible to make the special game state effect (BB sound reproduction effect) rich in variations, and provide a special game state effect (BB sound reproduction effect) which makes it difficult for the player to get bored. can do. Moreover, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becomes the predetermined result (BB winning) during the first period (first consecutive challenge zone). While it is possible to update the first count (counting by the first consecutive number counter) without updating the second count (counting by the second consecutive number counter), the second period ( If the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) results in the predetermined result (BB winning) during the second consecutive challenge zone), the second count (counting by the second consecutive take counter) is updated , And the first count (counted by the first consecutive counting counter) is reset. That is, while the second count (count by the second consecutive count counter) is likely to be updated as compared to the first count (count by the first consecutive count counter), the first count (first consecutive count) is The counting by the counter) is configured to be easily reset as compared with the second count (counting by the second consecutive number-of-times counter). Thereby, it is possible to relatively increase the value of the effect according to the result of the first count (the number of times of first consecutive residence), and the effect according to the result of the first count (the number of times of first consecutive residence) appears At the same time, the player's feeling can be further enhanced.

  In addition, for example, temporarily, a first consecutive challenge zone (first one) to which transition is made after the BB gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the second consecutive (three consecutive) BB sound (second effect) is output is ended. If BB (specific combination) is determined as an internal winning combination during the period), if it is decided to update the value of the second consecutive residence counter (the second consecutive residence number), at this time, the second consecutive villa The value of the number counter (the second consecutive number of times) is “4”. Then, after the BB in the first consecutive challenge zone is completed (via the first continuous challenge zone (first period)), the BB (specified in the second continuous challenge zone (second period) is shifted (specified) When the role combination is determined to be the internal winning combination, the value of the second consecutive change counter (the second consecutive change number) becomes “5”. As a result, when the BB (specific combination) subsequently wins, the second series (five or more stations) BB sound (fourth effect) is output. Then, as a result, the sound (third effect) for the second consecutive villa (four stations) BB is not output but is skipped. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, when the BB (specific combination) is determined as the winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone (the first period), the first count (the first combination) It is possible to control so as not to update the second count (counting by the second consecutive number counter) while updating the counting by the first consecutive number counter (keeping the value of the second consecutive number counter) It is. Specifically, in this case, the value of the first consecutive-times counter is added (see step S2006 in FIG. 174), while the value of the second consecutive-times counter is not added (step in FIG. 174) (See S2009), and the value before that is maintained without being reset (as described with reference to FIG. 175, the value of the second consecutive number of times counter is equal to BB and Only when the MB does not win both internally, and then the BB moves from the second consecutive challenge zone to the normal zone without getting internally won (see step S2033 in FIG. 175). Therefore, if BB in the first consecutive challenge zone intervenes while BB in the second consecutive challenge zone is continuous, the value of the second consecutive number counter (number of times of the second consecutive restriction) Is not updated, there is no possibility that the effect (reproduction effect for the sound of the second consecutive villa BB) according to the result of the second count (the number of times of the second consecutive villa) will be skipped, and the sound for each second consecutive villa BB The (first to fourth effects) can be reproduced sequentially.

  In the seventh embodiment, BB in the second consecutive challenge zone (BB gaming state generated by the BB winning after BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the second continuous challenge zone) In the case where the number of times of the second run is 5 or more, it has been described that the same sound during BB (sound for the second run (more than 5 runs) BB) is reproduced. Therefore, there is no sound in BB that is skipped in the first place after the sound for BB for the second consecutive (four) BB is reproduced. In view of this point, even if the second series (4 series) BB sound is reproduced (if the number of times of the second series is 4 or more), even if the reproduction condition of the other effect is satisfied The second continuous number of times may be updated. Of course, in the present invention, even in the case where the number of times of the second consecutive movement is five or more, as the number of times of the second continuous movement increases, it is also possible to reproduce different sounds in BB each time. In the seventh embodiment, the BB in the first consecutive challenge zone (the BB gaming state that occurs when the BB is determined to be an internal winning combination in the first continuous challenge zone) is selected. It has been described that the sound for the first series (even series) BB and the sound for the first series (odd series) BB are alternately determined as the sound during BB when being continuous. Of course, in the present invention, even when the reproduction condition of the first consecutive BB sound is satisfied, the number of first consecutive passages increases as in the case where the reproduction condition of the second consecutive BB sound is satisfied. With this, it is possible to play different BB sounds every time.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the number of times of first continuous soaking and the number of times of second continuous soaking are not updated when the reproduction condition of the sound for freeze BB is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to avoid that the sound for the first continuous block BB or the sound for the second continuous channel BB is skipped by the reproduction of the freeze BB sound. In the seventh embodiment, it is described that the freeze may occur only in the winning game (the unit game in which the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the BB flag state by the BB being determined as the internal winning combination). However, even in the state between flags after the winning game, freezing may occur. In this case, since the freeze lottery is not won at the time when the BB winning command data is received, the number of times of the first consecutive units or the number of second consecutive units is updated in step S2006 or step S2009 of FIG. After that, when it is determined that the freeze lottery has been won, the updated first continuous number of times or the second continuous number of times may be restored (subtracted by 1). This makes it possible to avoid skipping the first series BB sound or the second series BB sound, as described above. In the present invention, as described above, it is possible to change the counting method regarding the first consecutive number of times or the second consecutive number of times when the special BB sound reproduction conditions are satisfied. Also, unlike the above, it is also possible to configure so as to update the first consecutive number of times and the second consecutive number of times even when the reproduction condition of the freeze BB sound is satisfied.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, when reproduction conditions corresponding to a plurality of BB sounds compete, it is described that one BB sound is determined based on a preset priority. In the present invention, when both the playback condition corresponding to one BB sound and the playback condition corresponding to another BB sound are satisfied, it is possible to select one BB sound by the operation of the player. It may be configured as follows. For example, one of the BB sound may be selected according to the type of the combination stopped and displayed as a result of the stop operation and the type of the valid line on which the combination is stopped and displayed.

  For example, as described in the sixth embodiment, the first predetermined stop operation (for example, the order of “right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL” and the symbol position “3” as the stop operation for the left reel RL And the second predetermined stop operation (for example, the order of “middle reel RC → right reel RR → left reel RL” and the stop operation on the left reel RL) It is also possible to decide which of the BB sounds to be reproduced depending on which stop operation is performed among the stop operations of pressing the "feather" of the symbol position "9".

  In such a mode, when reproduction conditions for a sound during BB (for example, a sound for Freeze BB) other than the sound for the first Doubler BB (or a sound for the second Doubler BB) are satisfied (for example, a freeze lottery) Even in the case of winning), it is possible to update the number of times of the first consecutive residence (or the number of times of the second consecutive residence) (add 1). Then, when the sound for the first consecutive villa BB (or the sound for the second consecutive villa BB) is selected, while maintaining the number of first consecutive villas after the update (or the number of second consecutive villas), When another BB sound (for example, a sound for freeze BB) is selected, the updated number of first consecutive units (or the number of second consecutive units) may be returned (subtracted by 1) . In addition, regardless of the success or failure of the reproduction conditions of the sound during BB (for example, the sound for Freeze BB) other than the sound for the first consecutive villa BB (or the sound for the second consecutive villa BB), the number of times for the first consecutive villa (or the second Update the number of consecutive villas), and when the sound for the first consecutive villa BB (or the sound for the second consecutive villa BB) is finally selected, the number of first consecutive villas (or the second consecutive villa) The number of times) may be updated (one added).

  In addition, if BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the first consecutive challenge zone (or second continuous challenge zone) and a freeze lottery is won, any of a plurality of effective lines as a result of the stop operation. Depending on whether the predetermined display result ("C_BB" shown in FIG. 166) is derived on the effective line of the first continuous block BB sound (or the second continuous block BB sound) and the freeze BB sound It is also possible to decide which one of the BB sounds to be played back. As an example, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order (for example, a forward push with the stop operation on the left reel RL as the first stop operation), the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped along the center line When a stop operation is performed according to a specific push order (a random push that makes the stop operation on middle reel RC or right reel RR be the first stop operation) displayed, BB is displayed along the cross-down line or cross-up line. The symbol combination corresponding to is assumed to be stopped and displayed. In such a mode, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed along the center line, the sound for freeze BB is reproduced, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB is along the cross-down line or cross-up line When the stop display is performed, the sound for the first consecutive villa BB (or the sound for the second consecutive villa BB) may be reproduced.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that when the BB in the first consecutive challenge zone starts, the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect are not performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which water is drawn to the situation when the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect are generated in a situation where the player's feeling would be on. Then, it is possible to start the game in the BB gaming state while maintaining the tension of the player high without interrupting the game by the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect. From this point of view, it is possible not to perform the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect even when the BB in the second consecutive challenge zone starts. In the second consecutive challenge zone BB, compared with the first continuous challenge zone BB, there is a possibility that the player's tension may be reduced, but the BB gaming state is in a continuous situation. Does not change. In such a situation, there is a high possibility that the player wants to digest the game with good tempo, and it is desirable that the BB winning lock and the BB winning effect not disturb the flow of the game.

  As described above, in the present invention, it is possible to configure so as not to perform the BB winning lock and the BB winning effect at all or part of the start of the bonus state in “BB continuous”. For example, a BB in a consecutive challenge zone (a BB gaming state that occurs when the BB wins after BB is determined as an internal winning combination in a first continuous challenge zone or a second continuous challenge zone) is specified. It is also possible not to perform the BB prize lock and the BB prize effect when the BB in the second consecutive challenge zone starts, on condition that the number of times (for example, three times or more) is continuous. Also, when the bonus combination is won in a unit game in which it is informed that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination by the effect game lock described in the sixth embodiment, the BB combination lock and the BB combination are also performed. It is also possible not to perform the presentation. Note that, in the seventh embodiment, “BB continuous in” indicates a period in which the value of the second continuous number-of-times counter (the second continuous number of times) is 1 or more. Also, at the start of the MB gaming state, basically no MB winning lock and no MB winning effects are performed, but only at the start of the MB in the first consecutive challenge zone, MB winning lock and MB winning effects You may do it.

  In the seventh embodiment, as a reason not to lock at the time of BB winning when BB in the first consecutive challenge zone starts, the situation that it is not possible to play a game even though the lyrics are flowing On the other hand, he pointed out that the player felt a sense of discomfort. In this respect, although the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which the liquid crystal display device is not provided, a mode is also conceivable in which a video effect is not performed as a BB winning effect. In that case, in the absence of visual effects, only the BGM with lyrics is flowing, and it is quite unnatural to be able to play a game during that time, and the player feels particularly uncomfortable. It can be said that it is a situation so. Therefore, in such a mode, it is even more desirable to be configured not to perform locking during BB winning when BB in the first consecutive challenge zone starts.

  In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the sound during BB is reproduced immediately after the BB is won (immediately after the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed along the effective line). As the reproduction timing of the sound during BB, any timing from the internal winning of BB to the time when the first unit game in the BB gaming state is started can be adopted appropriately. For example, the sound during BB may be played back when it is notified that the bonus combination has been won internally. Specifically, in each unit game, a lottery is performed to determine an effect, and in a unit game in the inter-flag state, announcing that the bonus combination has been won internally as a result of the lottery. May be determined. The notification (bonus notification) is made by the display of the WIN lamp (not shown) or the display of the WIN screen (an image including characters such as "Bonus confirmed"), or the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern described above. The player is notified of the fact that the internal winning is won. In this case, since the player clearly recognizes that the bonus combination has been won internally, there is no sense of discomfort even if the sound during BB is played. Then, when the sound during BB is reproduced in response to the bonus notification as described above, it is desirable not to perform the BB winning lock and the BB winning effect. In this case, after the playback of the sound during BB is started, the timing when the BB is won and the BB gaming state is started is different depending on the situation, and the BB winning lock and the BB winning effect should be performed. The reason is that there is a risk of obstructing the flow of the game.

  The bonus notification may notify only that the bonus combination has been internally won, and may not notify until the type of the bonus combination (which one of BB and MB has been internally won). In this case, if different sounds are adopted as the sound in BB and the sound in MB, the player wins the internal by making the sound in BB or the sound in MB flow in response to the bonus notification. It is possible to know the type of bonus combination. For example, the sound with lyrics is played only when BB is internally won, but after the bonus notification is notified that either BB or MB is internally won, the sound with lyrics is used as the sound in BB. By being output, the player can recognize that the internally winning bonus combination is BB. In the MB gaming state, the same sound may be uniformly reproduced, or the sound in different MBs may be reproduced only in the MB in the first consecutive challenge zone, but in any case, As sound during MB, BGM without lyrics is used.

<Supplementary Note B2>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to notify an internal winning of a bonus combination when five games have passed since the bonus combination was determined as an internal winning combination (e.g. JP 2001-120707)). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible for the player to align the bonus symbol by performing the stop operation aiming at the bonus symbol in response to the notification, whereby the bonus state can be operated. it can.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, since the timing at which the internal winning combination of the bonus combination is notified is fixed uniformly, it is difficult to give variety to the game, and there is a problem of lack of interest there were.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game regarding notification of a winning combination.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B2-1) A plurality of symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for stopping and displaying a symbol whose variable display is being performed on the symbol display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
It is advantageous for the player when the specific symbol combination ("C_BB" shown in FIG. 166) is stopped and displayed by the stop control means after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means. Specific gaming state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the specific gaming state (BB gaming state);
Notification means (sub CPU 3071 for executing the processing of FIG. 177) for notifying that the specific combination has been determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means;
And sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming.
In the specific symbol combination, all symbols in each of the symbol display means are specific symbols ("7" symbol),
The notification means is
The specific combination is output by the sound output unit by causing the sound output unit to output a specific sound that can be output only when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination unit. First notifying means (sub CPU 3071 which executes the processing of step S2208 in FIG. 177) capable of notifying that it has been decided as the winning combination;
And a second notification unit capable of notifying that the specific combination has been determined as the winning combination by the combination determination unit in a mode different from the first notification unit (the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern).
The first notification means is
After the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display means other than one of the plurality of symbol display means, the one symbol While the specific sound can be output by the sound output means when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed by all the symbol display means other than the display means,
After the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display means other than one of the plurality of symbol display means, the one symbol Even when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on all symbol display devices other than the display device, it is already notified by the second notification device that the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination device. In the case where the sound output means does not output the specific sound, the sound output means may
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, a specific symbol combination ("C_BB" shown in FIG. 166) (each symbol display means (reel RL, RC) , RR), when the symbol combination for which all symbols in the symbol pattern (“7” symbol) are stopped is displayed, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player is activated. Then, it is possible to notify that the specific combination (BB) has been determined as the winning combination by at least two notification modes. One informing mode (the first informing mode (output of special tempy sound)) outputs a specific sound (special tempy sound) that can be output only when the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination. , To notify that the specific combination (BB) has been decided as the winning combination. Specifically, in the first notification mode (output of a special tempering sound), one of the plurality of symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR) after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination. When the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display means (reel) other than the symbol display means (reel), the specific symbols ("7" are displayed on all the symbol display means (reels) other than the one symbol display means (reel). When the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to output a specific sound (special temper sound). On the other hand, in the symbol display means (reel) other than one symbol display means (reel) of the plurality of symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR) after the specific combination (BB) is decided as the winning combination. Even when the specific symbol ("7" symbol) is stopped and displayed on all symbol display means (reels) other than the one symbol display means (reel) when the symbol is stopped and displayed, When (BB) is determined to be the winning combination already notified by a notification mode (second notification mode (light pattern of hibiscus pattern) different from the first notification mode (output of special temper sound) Is configured such that it is possible not to output a specific sound (special temper sound).

  If it is already notified that the specific combination (BB) has been determined as the winning combination by the second notification mode (the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern), then the specific combination (BB) is the player at that time. Since it is considered that he recognizes that he has been decided as the winning combination, the special winning combination (BB) is decided as the winning combination even if the notification is subsequently given by the first notification mode (output of the special temper sound). From the viewpoint of the player who already knows what has been done, the notification by the first notification mode (output of special temper sound) has no significant meaning. Therefore, assuming that the notification by the first notification mode (the output of the special tempering sound) is performed after the notification by the second notification mode (the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern) is performed, the first notification mode (special tempering sound) The significance of the presence of notification by the On the other hand, in the case where the notification by the first notification mode (output of the special temper sound) is performed in a situation where the notification by the second notification mode (the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern) is not performed, the player It is possible to know for the first time that the specific combination (BB) has been determined as the winning combination by performing the notification in the first notification mode (output of the special temper sound). The notification by the output of the tempo sound is very pleasing to the player. According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, after the notification by the second notification mode (light pattern of the hibiscus pattern) is performed, the notification by the first notification mode (output of the special balance sound) is performed. The first information mode (output of the special tempering sound) is not avoided, and the first notification mode (output of the special tempering sound) is not performed easily. It is possible to relatively emphasize the existence significance of the notification by the notification mode (the output of the special temper sound), and it is possible to enhance the value thereof.

  From the viewpoint of not notifying the player twice, the notification by the second notification mode (the illumination pattern of the hibiscus pattern) indicates to the player that the specific combination (BB) has been determined as the winning combination. On the other hand, it is preferable that the notification be made definitively (the notification be made in such a manner that the player can clearly recognize). For example, when the hibiscus pattern is illuminated as notification by the second notification mode, the LED lights up for a time (for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds or more) that can be recognized by ordinary people (for example It is good to keep on flashing). On the other hand, even when the hibiscus pattern is illuminated for a moment (for example, a time of less than 1 second, 0.5 seconds, or 0.3 seconds), it is not treated as notification by the second notification mode. It is good (that is, in this case, notification may be performed by the first notification mode (output of special temper sound)).

  In addition, when notification by the second notification mode (light pattern of hibiscus pattern) is performed, there is a possibility that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, but the combination other than the specific combination (BB) Even in the case where (for example, MB) may be determined as the winning combination, notification may be performed by the first notification mode (output of special temper sound). Also in this case, it is not determined that the specific combination (BB) has been determined as the winning combination at the time of notification by the second notification mode (light pattern of the hibiscus pattern). It can be said that there is a significance in performing notification by the notification mode (output of special temper sound).

  Further, the notification by the second notification mode is not limited to the example performed by illuminating the hibiscus pattern, and other WIN lamps (not shown) may be turned on or characters such as a WIN screen (“bonus confirmed”, etc. By displaying the image (including the image), it may be notified that the specific combination (BB) has been determined as the winning combination. The timing at which the second notification mode is used is not particularly limited, and may be immediately after the player operates the start lever DD6 (before operating the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R). Or after rotation of all the reels RL, RC, RR has stopped.

  The player can also recognize that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination by the backlight effect (see FIGS. 151A and 151B) described in the sixth embodiment. It is necessary for the player to know in advance "the correspondence between the type of backlight effect and the internal winning combination that may be won when the backlight effect is generated". Therefore, not all players including the beginners of the game can recognize that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination through the backlight effect, and the backlight effect is internally generated by the bonus combination. It does not notify the player of the fact that the winning combination is determined. Therefore, after the bonus winning is suggested by the backlight effect, the notification may be performed by the first notification mode (output of the special balance sound).

  In the lock time lottery table shown in FIGS. 147A and 147B, 0 is set for all of the effect game stop numbers “1” to “10” as a lottery value corresponding to “one out of alignment”. There is. That is, no backlight effect is performed in the single-seat game. As described above, when the player notices that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, the player is considered to switch from the three-card game to the one-card game in order to reduce the number of medals consumed. In such a situation, the player already recognizes that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, and if the backlight effect (effect relating to the notification of winning of the bonus combination) is to be made, the game is played People are concerned that they may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, according to the lock time random determination table shown in FIGS. 147A and 147B, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  In addition, even after the bonus winning is suggested by various effects (bonus winning suggestion indication) specific to the case where the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination for the same reason as above, the first notification mode ( It is possible to constitute so that information by the output of a special temper sound may be performed. As such bonus winning suggestion effect, the effect using the sound output when the start lever DD6 is operated, stop operation of the three on-reel lamps provided on the top of each reel RL, RC, RR The effect to be turned off accompanying with it, the image effect etc. which suggest the kind of internal winning combination can be mentioned. Also, when a weight (see step S18 in FIG. 121) occurs, a wait sound is output when the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, but when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination Even in a mode in which no wait sound is output, notification may be performed in the first notification mode (output of a special balance sound) after the wait sound is not output.

  Further, after the so-called reach eye is displayed, notification may be performed by the first notification mode (output of special temper sound). The reach eye is a symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed only when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination. That is, the reach eye can be stopped and displayed when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped along the active line (when the bonus combination is missed). It is a combination.

  Here, when the notification by the second notification mode is performed after the reach eye is displayed, it is preferable not to perform the notification by the first notification mode (the output of the special balance sound). That is, a player who is confident in recognizing that the reach eye is displayed does not notice that the reach eye is displayed, and when the notification according to the second notification mode is performed, the reach eye is You may lose your confidence and be discouraged about not being able to notice that it was displayed. On that basis, if the notification by the first notification mode (output of the special temper sound) is performed, the player who is disappointed is rather sarcastic, and makes himself feel sorry for missing the reach eyes, Depending on the situation, it may be assumed that the player may feel ashamed. In such a case, it is possible to give maximum consideration to the player's feelings by not performing the notification by the first notification mode (output of the special temper sound), and the player can play the game feeling good. You can get it. For the same reason, after the bonus winning suggestion is suggested by the bonus winning suggestion effect, the notification by the first notification mode (output of the special balance sound) is performed even when the notification by the second notification mode is performed. It is desirable not to.

  In addition, when BB is determined to be an internal winning combination, the sound output while the reels are slipping when the reels RL, RC, RR slip by a predetermined number of symbols (BB determined slip) Even when the sound is generated, it is possible not to perform the notification in the first notification mode (output of the special temper sound). Such a BB confirmed slip sound (sound different from the special temper sound) is, for example, that the reel targeted for the first stop operation is slipped by the maximum number of slide symbols (4 symbols) and “7” stops in the middle step If it is displayed, the output may be made while the reel is slipping. In addition, when the reel which is the target of the second stop operation is slipped by 1 to 4 symbols and the “7” symbol is displayed on the balance screen, the output may be performed while the reel is slipping. In this case, both the condition for performing tempering sound lottery (see step S2206 in FIG. 177) and the condition for outputting the BB determined sliding sound can be satisfied, but both are given priority. May be In the case where priority is given to the BB-defined slippery sound, the tempai sound lottery is not performed, and the special tempai sound is not output. In addition, the BB determined slippery sound may be output on condition that the stop operation on a specific reel (for example, the left reel RL) is performed as the first stop operation. In this case, a specific reel (for example, the left reel RL) may be displayed even if the reel 7 targeted for the second stop operation is slipped by 1 to 4 symbols and the “7” symbol is displayed on the screen. Since the condition for outputting the BB-determined slip noise is not satisfied if the stop operation for is not performed as the first stop operation, it is also possible to execute tempare sound extraction.

<Supplementary Note B3>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, in the bonus gaming state, only the combination (no increase / decrease combination) in which the same number of medals as the number of medals necessary for starting the game are paid out is won, and predetermined conditions are established during the bonus gaming state. If, after the bonus gaming state is over, while it is shifted to a high RT gaming state with a relatively high winning probability of the role (Replay) that triggers the operation of the re-play, the small winning combination winning internal winning is advantageous It is known to perform an assist time (AT) for notifying a stop operation for winning a prize over a predetermined period (see, for example, JP 2012-170529A).

  With such a configuration, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2012-170529 increases the net increase in the number of medals over a predetermined period of gaming state (non-bonus gaming state) other than the bonus gaming state, and thus the non-bonus game The gameplay in the state is diversified. Thereby, the interest of the player is drawn to the non-bonus gaming state, and the interest of the non-bonus gaming state is improved.

  Here, when a game machine manufacturer develops a game machine, it is necessary to satisfy the requirements defined in the Act on Enforcement of Business Regulations and Business Regulations, etc. If a gaming machine with an excessively high payout rate is installed in a game arcade, as a result of a player's shooting aspirations being scolded, good manners and a clean manners environment (the first law of the Enforcement Act) will not be maintained. Therefore, in order to conform to the wind management law, the gaming machine maker needs to design the balls so that the ball out rate converges within a predetermined range.

  In the gaming machine described in JP 2012-170529 A, the payout rate is excessively increased by setting the net increase number of medals in the bonus game state to 0 instead of increasing the net increase number of medals in the non bonus game state. It controls the rising rate and manages the payout rate appropriately. As a result, while improving the interest of the non-bonus gaming state, it is intended to prevent the cheating of the player from being overly scolded and to realize that the good manners and the clean manners environment are maintained. .

  However, such a gaming machine can not meet the desires of the player who wants to obtain a large number of medals in the bonus gaming state. In order to provide a game machine attractive to the player, it is important to balance how playability and payout rate of both the non-bonus gaming state and the bonus gaming state be achieved.

  However, in order to conform to the Enkei Act, it is necessary to satisfy various requirements, and if it violates the regulations, it can not pass the test (type test) based on Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Enlightenment Law, A gaming machine maker can not sell a well-developed gaming machine. As a game machine maker, while it is necessary to design the balls to conform to the Enkei Act under such regulations, develop a game machine with improved interest in both non-bonus gaming state and bonus gaming state There is a circumstance that it is very difficult to make them compatible.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is easy to design a ball.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B3-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
Giving means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S25 in FIG. 121) capable of giving a game value (medal) of the number according to the display result derived by the stop control means;
In the gaming state control means (FIG. 119 (b)) which can be controlled to any of the plurality of gaming states including the first gaming state (RT0 gaming state) and the second gaming state (MB gaming state) 119. A main RAM 3033 provided with a game status flag storage area and a carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 119 (a), and a main CPU 3031 managing the game status with reference to the game status flag storage area and the carryover combination storage area. , And
As the display result, a specific display result (“C_special bell” shown in FIG. 166) is provided,
The stop control means is
It is possible to perform stop control so that the specific display result can be derived only in the second gaming state among the first gaming state and the second gaming state, while the second When deriving the specific display result in the gaming state, it is possible to perform stop control so as to derive another display result ("C_cherry" shown in FIG. 166) together,
The application means is
A maximum of a predetermined number (15) of gaming values can be provided in the second gaming state,
When the specific display result is derived in the second gaming state, the number of game value grants corresponding to the number is smaller than the predetermined number.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, a specific display result (“C_special bell” shown in FIG. 166) is provided as a display result, and the specific display result (“C_special” shown in FIG. 166) The bell ") can not be derived in the first gaming state (RT0 gaming state), but can be derived in the second gaming state (MB gaming state). Here, the second gaming state (MB gaming state) is a gaming state in which a predetermined number of gaming values (15 medals) can be provided at the maximum, but the second gaming state (MB gaming state) When the specific display result (“C_special bell” shown in FIG. 166) is derived, the number (12) of the game value (medal) corresponding to the display result is smaller than the predetermined number (15). Therefore, by displaying a specific display result ("C_special bell" shown in FIG. 166) in the second gaming state (MB gaming state), a specially designed specific display result ("C_special shown in FIG. 166") The scene where the bell is derived can be secured, but the second gaming state (MB gaming state) is derived from the derivation of the specific display result (“C_special bell” shown in FIG. 166). If the number of game values (medals) that can be awarded at time t1 decreases, player satisfaction may not be obtained. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, when a specific display result ("C_special bell" shown in FIG. 166) is derived in the second gaming state (MB gaming state), Another display result (“C_cherry” shown in FIG. 166) is also derived. Thus, while the upper limit is set to the predetermined number (15), the number corresponding to the specific display result ("C_special bell" shown in FIG. 166) is changed according to the other display results ("C_cherry" shown in FIG. 166). It is possible to add the game value (medal) of the number obtained by adding the number, and the number (12) and the predetermined number (15) according to the specific display result (“C_special bell” shown in FIG. 166) The difference with can be adjusted. It is considered difficult to perform such difference adjustment while conforming to the above-mentioned enlightenment law. The inventor of the present invention, while earnestly studying, leads to the above idea and facilitates the adjustment of the balls. Found a way that can be done.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, a specific display result (“C_special bell”) not derived in the first gaming state (RT0 gaming state) is derived in the second gaming state (MB gaming state) Thus, a scene in which a specific display result (“C_special bell”) is derived is secured. Here, the MB gaming state is a gaming state in which all combinations (small part) for which medals are paid out at the time of winning are permitted to be stopped and displayed along the effective line, so a specific display result (“C_special” "Bell" is basically in a situation where it can be derived at any time. Therefore, in designing a scene for deriving a specific display result ("C_special bell"), a relatively high degree of freedom can be designed with relatively few restrictions to be considered. In the seventh embodiment, even in the MB gaming state, the “F_CB role” is determined as the internal winning combination by referring to the internal lottery table (see FIG. 171 (b)) as in the other gaming states. In the MB gaming state, it is possible to set a flag corresponding to a combination relating to all the small winning combinations in all unit games without setting the internal lottery table.

  In addition, another display result ("C_cherry") derived at the same time when a specific display result ("C_special bell") is derived in the second gaming state (MB gaming state) is the left reel RL The symbol in is the "cherry", the symbol in the middle reel RC is "ANY", and the symbol in the right reel RR is "ANY" (see FIG. 166). "ANY" indicates that any pattern may be used. Therefore, if "cherry" is stopped and displayed in any of the upper stage region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel RL, the symbol combination according to "C_cherry" is stopped and displayed along the effective line. In this respect, “C_cherry” is a combination that is easily displayed as a stop. By adopting such a combination as another display result (“C_Cherry”) derived along with the case where a specific display result (“C_special bell”) is derived, a specific display result (“ The difference between the payout number (12) corresponding to C_special bell “) and the upper limit value (15) of the payout number in the second gaming state (MB gaming state) can be adjusted relatively easily. In particular, the symbols ("Cherry") on the left reel RL of "C_Cherry" and the symbols ("Bell 2") on the left reel RL of "C_Special Bell" are arranged in the vicinity (within the range of 2 symbols) Thus, it is easy to simultaneously display "C_special bell" and "C_cherry", and it is possible to create a situation where it is easy to perform the ball adjustment.

Eighth Embodiment
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to seventh embodiments is applicable also in the eighth embodiment.

<Transition flow of gaming state>
FIG. 180A is a view showing transition of transition of the gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 180B is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 180A is managed by the main control circuit 3060. As in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the gaming state (main) is classified into any of a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, the BB gaming state and the MB gaming state are provided as the bonus state, and the BB gaming state having the same color and the different color BB gaming state is provided as the BB gaming state. "F_red SBB" and "F_blue SBB" are provided as bonus roles corresponding to the same color BB gaming state, and "F_red NBB" and "F_blue blue" are provided as bonus roles corresponding to the different color BB gaming state. "NBB" is provided, and "F_red MB" and "F_blue MB" are provided as bonus roles corresponding to the MB gaming state (see FIGS. 183A and 183B).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT0 gaming state to the RT6 gaming state are provided as the RT gaming state (a gaming state in which the determination probability of the replay combination as the internal winning combination is different from each other). The RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state are bonus non-winning states, and the RT5 gaming state and the RT6 gaming state are states between flags. As the replay role, “F_normal replay”, “F_RT replay”, and “F_final replay” are provided (see FIGS. 183A and 183B). In the present specification, “replay” may be described as “rip”.

  Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 180A and 180B, it is determined that “F_red SBB” or “F_blue SBB” is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) (When the same color BB is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) to the RT6 gaming state (see transition condition (1)). In the present specification, “F_red SBB” and “F_blue SBB” may be collectively referred to as “same color BB”.

  In addition, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state), when "F_red NBB" or "F_blue NBB" is determined as the internal winning combination (when different color BB is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 The game state is shifted from the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) to the RT5 gaming state (see transition condition (2)). In the present specification, “F_red NBB” and “F_blue NBB” may be collectively referred to as “different color BB”.

  Also, in the bonus non winning condition (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state), when "F_red MB" or "F_blue MB" is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 Transition the gaming state from the bonus non winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) to the RT5 gaming state (see transition condition (2)). In the present specification, “F_red MB” and “F_blue MB” may be collectively referred to as “MB”.

  “F_red SBB” and “F_blue SBB” (same color BB), “F_red NBB” and “F_blue NBB” (different color BB), and “F_red MB” and “F_blue MB” (MB) It is a so-called carryover role (see FIG. 119 (a)). When the same color BB is won internally, until the symbol combination ("C_Red SBB" or "C_Blue SBB" shown in FIG. 182A) corresponding to the same color BB is stopped and displayed along the active line (until the same color BB is won) ), The same color BB is carried over the internal winning state. The RT6 gaming state is a state in which a state in which the same color BB is internally won is carried over (a state between same color BB flags).

  Similarly, when a different color BB is internally hit, until the combination of symbols corresponding to the different color BB ("C_red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" shown in FIG. 182A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (different color BB is displayed Until the prize)), a state where a different color BB is won internally is carried over. In addition, when MB is won internally, until the combination of symbols corresponding to MB (“C_red MB” or “C_blue MB” shown in FIG. 182A) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until MB wins) , The internal winning status of MB is carried over. The RT5 gaming state is a state in which a state in which a different color BB or MB is internally won is carried over (a state between different color BB flags or a state between MB flags).

  In the RT6 gaming state, when a combination of symbols relating to "C_Red SBB" or "C_Blue SBB" (see FIG. 182A) is stopped and displayed along the active line (when the same color BB is won), the main control circuit 3060 , RT6 to transition the gaming state from the gaming state to the same color BB gaming state (see transition condition (3)). Also, in the RT5 gaming state, when the combination of symbols related to "C_red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" (see FIG. 182A) is stopped and displayed along the active line (if different color BB is won), the main control circuit The 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT5 gaming state to the different color BB gaming state (see transition condition (4)). In addition, in the RT5 gaming state, when the combination of symbols related to "C_red MB" or "C_blue MB" (see FIG. 182A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the MB wins), the main control circuit 3060 Makes the gaming state transition from the RT5 gaming state to the MB gaming state (see transition condition (5)).

  When medals exceeding the prescribed number (345) are paid out in the same color BB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the same color BB gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (see transition condition (6)). Further, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (351) are paid out in the different color BB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the different color BB gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see transition condition (7)). . Further, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (144) are paid out in the MB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see transition condition (8)).

  In the RT0 gaming state, when the combination of symbols relating to “C_RT rep” (see FIG. 182A) is stopped and displayed along the activated line (when the high RT transition ripple is won), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the RT0 gaming state Transition the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (see transition condition (9)). Similarly, in the RT1 gaming state, when the symbol combination (see FIG. 182A) related to “C_RT ripple” is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the high RT transition ripple is won), the main control circuit 3060 controls the RT1 Transition the gaming state from the gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (see transition condition (10)). Also, in the RT2 gaming state, when the symbol combination (see FIG. 182A) relating to “C_RT ripple” is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the high RT transition ripple is won), the main control circuit 3060 controls the RT2 gaming. Transition the gaming state from the state to the RT3 gaming state (see transition condition (11)).

  When the unit game is played a predetermined number of times (100 times) in the RT3 gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (12)).

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state, “C_Cherry” (“C_A check 01_01” to “C_A check 01_07”, “C_B check 01_01” to “C_B check 01_07”, “C_C check 01_01” to “C_C check 01_07”, “C_A Che 02 "," C_B Che 02 "," C C Cho 02 "," C C Che 03 "," C C Che 03 "," C C Che 03 "," C C Che 04 "," C C Che 04 ", C C C 04 ", When the symbol combination (refer to Figs. 182A and 182B) according to" C_A check 05, "C_B check 05", and "C_C check 05" is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the cherries win) The main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (see transition condition (13)).

  Similarly, in the RT1 gaming state, when a combination of symbols relating to "C_cherry" (see FIGS. 182A and 182B) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when cherry is won), the main control circuit 3060 causes the RT1 to be RT1. Transition the gaming state from the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (see transition condition (14)). Also, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of symbols related to “C_cherry” (see FIGS. 182A and 182B) is stopped and displayed along the activated line (when the cherry is awarded), the main control circuit 3060 controls the RT2 gaming. Transition the gaming state from the state to the RT4 gaming state (see transition condition (15)).

  Here, the RT3 gaming state is a relatively high state (high RT gaming state) in which the probability that the replay role is determined as the internal winning combination (replay winning probability) is high. In this regard, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT4 gaming state, RT5 gaming state, and RT6 gaming state are relative to the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination (replay winning probability) Low (low RT gaming state).

  The RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state) is transitioned by the high RT transitioning lip being won. In order for the high RT transition rep ("C_RT rep") to win, it is necessary that "F_RT replay" or "F_final replay" be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 183A). Here, “F_finalized replay” is excluded from the subject of explanation as described below. The gaming states in which "F_RT Replay" ("No. 12" shown in FIGS. 184 to 188) may be determined as an internal winning combination are the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state. In this respect, although the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state are the low RT gaming state, the gaming state (chance zone where the transition to the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state) can be expected) , That is, CZ).

  In particular, the probability that "F_RT Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination is that the RT2 gaming state is higher than the other gaming states. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state) is easier than the other gaming states, and the degree of expectation for the transition to the high RT gaming state is high. On the other hand, the RT4 gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state because it is a low RT gaming state and a gaming state where transition to the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state) can not be expected either. It can be said. In addition, although RT5 gaming state and RT6 gaming state are low RT gaming states, it is a gaming state which can expect transition to a bonus state.

  According to FIG. 183A, even when “F_finalized replay” is determined as an internal winning combination, the high RT transition rep (“C_RT rep”) can be won, but “F_finalized replay” is always a bonus. Internally overlapping with the role (see FIGS. 184 to 188). In this embodiment, when the bonus combination is won internally, the state shifts to the inter-flag state, and even if the high RT transition lip is won in a state where the bonus combination is internally won, the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state) Do not migrate to Therefore, in this specification, the case where the high RT transition ripple is won by the internal winning of “F_final replay” will be described without consideration. Also, "F_RT Replay" may be internally won by overlapping with the bonus combination, but the same applies to this case. Of course, even when the high RT transition lip is won in a state where the bonus combination is internally won, the transition to the high RT gaming state may be made. However, in the present embodiment, the probability that “F_RT Replay” or “F_final Replay” is internally won in duplicate with the bonus combination is “RT Replay” alone in the RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, and RT2 gaming state. The value is negligibly small compared to the probability of winning internally (without overlapping with the bonus part).

<Symbol arrangement table>
FIG. 181 (a) is a figure which shows a symbol arrangement table. FIG. 181 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, for each of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR, the symbol arrangement table is the position of each symbol in the rotational direction and the symbol code (symbols arranged at each position It defines the correspondence with (data specifying the type of) (see FIG. 99).

  As shown in FIG. 181, in the present embodiment, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “cherry 1”, “cherry 2”, “cherry 3”, “jako”, “bell”, “replay 1”, Ten kinds of symbols such as "Replay 2" and "BAR" are used.

  By referring to the symbol arrangement table and the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”), the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) The type of symbol displayed on can be specified. The details are as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Symbol combination table>
FIG. 182A and FIG. 182B are diagrams showing a symbol combination table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, the symbol combination table includes symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the active line, and the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line ((6) The correspondence relation with the number of paid-out sheets is defined (see FIGS. 100A and 100B).

  In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT6 gaming state) is set as three, and the number of medals that can be inserted in the bonus state (BB gaming state and MB gaming state) is It is set as 2 sheets.

  In addition, as the prize judgment line, “middle-middle-middle: center line”, “upper-upper-upper: top line”, “lower-lower-lower: bottom line”, “upper-middle-lower: cross down” The line "" and "lower-middle-upper: cross-up line" is set. These five winning determination lines are activated in any case where three medals are inserted in the non-bonus state and two medals are inserted in the bonus state.

  The basic configuration of the symbol combination table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

<Combination Table by Flag>
FIG. 183A and FIG. 183B are diagrams showing a flag-based combination table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, the flag combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (see FIGS. 101A to 101C). ). As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the type of display combination capable of winning) is uniquely determined.

  In this embodiment, "F_red SBB", "F_blue SBB", "F_red NBB", "F_blue NBB", "F_red MB", "F_blue MB", "F_normal replay" as internal winning combinations. "," F_RT Replay "," F_ Confirm Replay "," F_ Bell 1 "," F_ Bell 2 "," F_ Hako "," F_ Cherry A "," F_ Cherry B "," F_ Cherry C "," F_ALL " "Cherry", "F_BAR complete", "F_ special role", and "F_CB role" are provided.

  The basic configuration of the flag-based combination table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

<Internal lottery table>
As the internal lottery table according to the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 184A and 184B) referred to in the RT0 gaming state and an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 185A and 185B) referred to in the RT1 gaming state , Internal lottery table (see FIGS. 186A and 186B) referenced in the RT2 gaming state, internal lottery table referenced in the RT3 gaming state (see FIGS. 187A and 187B), and internal lottery referenced in the RT4 gaming state Tables (see FIGS. 188A and 188B), an internal lottery table (see FIG. 189 (a)) referred to in the RT5 gaming state (a state between different red BB flags), and an RT5 gaming state (a state between different blue BB flags) Internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 189 (b)) referred to in The internal lottery table (see FIG. 190 (a)) referred to in the gaming state (the state between red MB flags) and the internal lottery table (see FIG. 190 (b)) referred to in the RT5 gaming state (the state between blue MB flags) And the internal lottery table (see FIG. 191 (a)) referred to in the RT6 gaming state (state between same color red BB flags) and the internal lottery table referred to in the RT6 gaming state (state between same color blue BB flags) 191 (b)), the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 192A and 192B) referred to in the same color BB gaming state, and the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 193A and 193B) referenced in the different color BB gaming state , And an internal lottery table (see FIG. 194) referred to in the MB gaming state.

  In the same color red BB flag state, the state in which "F_red SBB" is internally won is carried over, and in the same color blue BB flag state, the state in which "F_blue SBB" is internally carried is carried over The different color red BB flag state is the state in which the internal winning state of "F_red NBB" is carried over, and the state between the different color blue BB flags is the internal winning of "F_blue NBB" The state is carried over, and the state between red MB flags is the state where the state in which “F_red MB” is internally won is carried over, and the state between blue MB flags is “F_blue MB” is inside The winning condition is being carried over.

  FIGS. 184A and 184B show an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. 185A and 185B show an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. 186A and 186B show an internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. FIGS. 187A and 187B show an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. 188A and 188B show an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. FIG. 189 is a view showing an internal lottery table for the RT5 gaming state (state between different color BB flags). FIG. 190 shows an internal lottery table for the RT5 gaming state (a state between MB flags). FIG. 191 shows an internal lottery table for RT6 gaming state (state between same color BB flags). 192A and 192B are diagrams showing an internal lottery table for the same color BB gaming state. 193A and 193B show an internal lottery table for different color BB gaming state. FIG. 194 shows an internal lottery table for MB gaming state.

  The basic configuration of the internal lottery table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Bonus winning process>
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing bonus winning processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 196 (a) is a diagram showing a reel action lottery table. FIG. 196 (b) is a diagram showing a lock release random determination table at the BB prize.

  The bonus winning process shown in FIG. 195 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 when “No” is determined in step S75 of FIG. 124 (internal lottery process). That is, the bonus winning process is performed on each reel RL, RC, RR in a winning game (a unit game in which the bonus non-winning state is shifted to the inter-flag state by the BB or MB being determined as the internal winning combination). It is a process performed before the rotation starts.

  In the bonus winning process, first, the main CPU 3031 executes reel action lottery (step S3001). In this processing, the main CPU 3031 refers to the reel action lottery table (see FIG. 196A) and performs lottery based on random number values to determine the contents of the reel action.

  In the reel action lottery table shown in FIG. 196 (a), the reel action is selected for each winning combination (“same color BB (ALL cherry not winning)”, “different color BB”, “MB”, and “same color BB + ALL cherry”). The lottery value corresponding to the contents of “normal rotation” and “1 stop lock” is defined. In the figure, “same color BB (ALL cherry not winning)” is one not including “F_ALL cherry” among winning combinations including the same color BB (“F_red SBB” or “F_blue SBB”) (FIG. 184 to FIG. 188 “No. 46” to “No. 59” among “No. 48” and “No. 55” are shown, and “different color BB” indicates a different color BB (“F_red NBB” or “ Shows a winning combination (“No. 30” to “No. 45 shown in FIGS. 184 to 188) including“ F_Blue NBB ”),“ MB ”is MB (“ F_red MB ”or“ F_Blue MB ”) Shows a winning combination (“No. 14” to “No. 29” shown in FIG. 184 to FIG. 188), “same color BB + ALL cherry” indicates the same color BB (“F_red SBB” or “F_blue SBB”) The winning combination that includes both “F_ALL Cherry” and “F_ALL Cherry” (Figure 1 Shown in 4 through 188 indicating "No.48" and "No.55"). Note that "same color BB (ALL cherry not winning)" may be a winning combination corresponding to a case where the same color BB is won alone.

  As the content of the reel action, "normal rotation" and "one stop lock" are provided. The “1 stop lock” is a reel action in which the game lock is generated before the second stop operation is performed after the first stop operation is performed as the stop operation for each reel RL, RC, RR. When 1 stop lock occurs, the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is invalidated until a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the first stop operation is performed. Ru. "Normal rotation" is a reel action in which each reel RL, RC, RR rotates without the occurrence of a game lock.

  In the process of step S3001, the main CPU 3031 refers to the reel action lottery table (see FIG. 196A), and based on the internal winning combination determined in step S14 of FIG. 121 and the random value stored in step S13. One of “normal rotation” and “1 stop lock” is determined as a reel action. When a winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 196A is determined, the main CPU 3031 determines “normal rotation” as the reel action. Also, the reel action lottery table is stored in the main ROM 3032.

  After executing the processing of step S3001, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the reel action determined in step S3001 is the one stop lock (the one stop lock has been won) (step S3002).

  If it is determined that the 1-stop lock has been won, the main CPU 3031 sets the 1-stop lock win flag on (step S3003). The 1-stop lock winning flag is a flag indicating that the 1-stop lock has been won. After executing the processing of step S3003, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 3031 determines that 1 stop lock has not been won, the BB (“F_red SBB”, “F_blue SBB”, “F_red NBB”, or “F_blue NBB”) is an internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is determined that the unit game is a BB winning game (step S3004).

  If it is determined that BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that BB is determined as an internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 executes BB winning lock release lottery (step S3005). In this process, the main CPU 3031 refers to the BB winning combination lock release lottery table (see FIG. 196 (b)) and performs lottery based on random number values to determine winning or not.

  In the BB winning combination lock release lottery table shown in FIG. 196 (b), lottery values corresponding to "winning" and "not winning" are defined for each winning combination ("same color BB" and "different color BB") . In the figure, “same color BB” indicates a winning combination (“No. 46” to “No. 59 shown in FIGS. 184 to 188) including the same color BB (“ F_red SBB ”or“ F_blue SBB ”). , “Different color BB” indicates a winning combination (“No. 30” to “No. 45 shown in FIGS. 184 to 188) including a different color BB (“ F_red NBB ”or“ F_blue NBB ”).

  In the processing of step S3005, the main CPU 3031 refers to the BB winning combination lock release lottery table (refer to FIG. 196 (b)) and determines the internal winning combination determined in step S14 of FIG. 121 and the random value stored in step S13. Based on the result of the BB winning lock release lottery is determined to be "winning" or "not winning". When a winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 196 (b) is determined, the main CPU 3031 determines that the result of the BB unlocking lottery is “not winning”. The BB winning combination unlocking lottery table is stored in the main ROM 3032.

  After executing the processing of step S3005, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the BB winning combination lock release lottery has been won (step S3006). If it is determined that the BB winning combination lock release lottery has not been won, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the BB winning combination lock release lottery has been won, the main CPU 3031 sets the BB winning combination lock release winning flag on (step S3007). The BB winning combination unlocking winning flag is a flag indicating that the BB winning combination unlocking lottery has been won. After executing the processing of step S3007, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

<Sound playback start processing during BB>
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a process of starting playback of sound during BB performed in the main control circuit.

  The sound reproduction start process during BB shown in FIG. 197 is a process performed in the main control circuit 3060 when “Yes” is determined in step S61 in FIG. 123 (medal acceptance / start check process). That is, the BB during-sound sound reproduction start process is a process that is performed when the start lever DD6 is operated.

  In the process of starting playback of sound during BB, the main CPU 3031 first determines whether the BB winning at-time lock release winning flag is set to ON (step S3021). The BB winning combination lock release winning flag is set on when the BB winning combination lock release lottery is won (see step S3007 in FIG. 195), but is set off when the BB wins (not shown) ). Accordingly, when the BB winning combination is won in the BB winning game and the unlocking lottery is won and the BB does not win in the BB winning game, “Yes” is determined in the process of step S3021.

  If it is determined that the BB winning combination unlocking winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the BB winning combination lock release winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 3031 generates a BB sound playback start command data, and transmits the generated BB sound playback start command data to the main RAM 3033 It stores in a data storage area (step S3022). The during BB sound reproduction start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in a command data transmission process (see FIG. 138).

  Here, that the process of step S3022 is executed is that “the BB winning game is won in BB winning lock releasing lottery, the BB is not winning in the BB winning game, and the game is started in the next game of the BB winning game It means that the lever DD6 has been operated. In the present embodiment, “the BB winning game is won in the BB winning unlocking lottery, the BB does not win in the BB winning game, and the start lever DD6 is operated in the game following the BB winning game”. It is defined as a condition for starting playback of sound during BB. By receiving the sound reproduction start command data during BB, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the condition for starting the reproduction of sound during BB is satisfied.

  Then, upon receiving the sound reproduction start command data during BB, the sub-control circuit 3070 sets sound data corresponding to the sound during BB (see FIGS. 153 and 173). As a result, the sound during BB is output from the speakers DD25L and DD25R (from the unit game next to the unit game in which the BB is determined to be the internal winning combination) before the BB is won.

  After executing the processing of step S3022, the main CPU 3031 sets the BB winning at-time lock release winning flag off (step S3023), and sets the BB winning at-time lock release standby flag on (step S3024). The BB winning combination lock release standby flag is a flag used for not performing BB winning combination locking (see steps S3101 and S3105 in FIG. 199). In the present embodiment, when the sound during BB is being reproduced before BB wins, the BB winning lock is not performed.

  After executing the processing of step S3024, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

<1 stop lock process>
FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing one-stop lock processing performed in the main control circuit.

  The 1-stop lock process shown in FIG. 198 is performed in the main control circuit 3060 when the value of the stop button inactivity counter is 2 after the process of step S164 of FIG. 129 (reel stop control process) is executed. It is a process. That is, the 1-stop lock process is a process performed after the first stop operation is performed as the stop operation for each of the reels RL, RC, and RR and before the second stop operation is performed.

  (1) In the stop lock process, the main CPU 3031 first determines whether the reel targeted for the first stop operation is the left reel RL (the stop operation on the left reel RL is performed as the first stop operation). (Step S3041). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the reel on which the stop operation has been performed by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 119 (c)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the reel targeted for the first stop operation is not the left reel RL (the stop operation on the middle reel RC or the right reel RR is performed as the first stop operation), the main CPU 3031 wins 1 stop lock. The flag (see step S3003 in FIG. 195) is set to off (step S3042). In this process, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the 1-stop lock winning flag is set to on, and when it is determined that the 1-stop lock winning flag is set to on, the 1-stop lock wins. Set the flag off. Thereafter, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine. Thus, when the stop operation on the middle reel RC or the right reel RR is performed as the first stop operation, the one-stop lock (see step S3047) is not performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3041 that the reel targeted for the first stop operation is the left reel RL, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the 1-stop lock winning flag is set to ON (step S3043). ). The 1-stop lock winning flag is set on when the 1-stop lock is won by the reel action lottery (see step S3003 in FIG. 195).

  If it is determined that the 1 stop lock winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the 1-stop lock winning flag is set on, the main CPU 3031 sets the 1-stop lock winning flag off (step S3044) and sets the 1-stop lock execution flag on ( Step S3045). The 1 stop lock execution flag is a flag indicating that it is a period during which 1 stop lock is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) in the 1-stop lock timer (step S3046). The 1-stop lock timer is updated by the effect timer update process (step S323) shown in FIG. In the process of step S323 in FIG. 138, when the one-stop lock timer after updating is 0, the main CPU 3031 sets the one-stop lock execution flag to off. Thus, the 1-stop lock is ended (see step S3047).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the 1-stop lock execution flag is set to on (step S3047).

  If it is determined that the 1 stop lock execution flag is set to on, the main CPU 3031 returns the process to step S3047. Thus, the one stop lock is performed, the middle reel RC and the right reel RR are locked, and the stop operation (the operation of the stop button DD7C, DD7R) by the player is invalidated until the predetermined time elapses.

  If it is determined in step S3047 that the 1 stop lock execution flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 determines that the BB (“F_red SBB”, “F_blue SBB”, “F_red NBB”, or “F_blue NBB” is It is determined whether ")" is determined as an internal winning combination (whether or not the unit game this time is a BB winning game) (step S3048).

  If it is determined that BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 generates a sound playback start command data during BB, and generates the sound playback start command data during BB into the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033. It stores it (step S3049). The during BB sound reproduction start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in a command data transmission process (see FIG. 138).

  Here, the execution of the process of step S3049 means that "the 1-stop lock has been won in the BB winning game and the 1-stop lock generated thereby is finished". In the present embodiment, “the one-stop lock being won in the BB winning game and the one-stop lock generated thereby being ended” is defined as the condition for starting the reproduction of the sound during BB. By receiving the sound reproduction start command data during BB, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the condition for starting the reproduction of sound during BB is satisfied.

  Then, upon receiving the sound reproduction start command data during BB, the sub-control circuit 3070 sets sound data corresponding to the sound during BB (see FIGS. 153 and 173). As a result, the sound during BB is output from the speakers DD25L and DD25R (from the BB winning game) before BB wins.

  After executing the processing of step S3049, the main CPU 3031 sets the BB prize-winning lock release standby flag on (step S3050). As described above, the BB prize lock release wait flag is a flag that is used to prevent the BB prize lock (see step S3105 in FIG. 199) (see step S3024 in FIG. 197).

  After executing the processing of step S3050, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the BB in-game sound (see step S3022 in FIG. 197 and step S3049 in FIG. 198) whose reproduction has been started (from the BB winning game or the next game) before BB wins is BB gaming state The output is continued until the end (see step S273 of FIG. 136). Here, it is assumed that a power failure occurs before the BB gaming state is activated (see step S 294 in FIG. 137) after the reproduction of the sound during BB is started in this way. The BB winning combination lock release standby flag is also used to restart the sound during BB when returning from the power failure when the power failure occurs at such a timing.

  Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 3060 includes a power management circuit. The power management circuit manages fluctuations of the DC 12 V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply substrate. Then, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the start voltage value (10 V) from 0 V), the power management circuit outputs a reset signal to the microcomputer 3030 and a power failure occurs. At the same time (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5 V) from 12 V), the power failure detection signal is output to the microcomputer 3030.

  Then, when a power failure detection signal is output from the power management circuit, the main CPU 3031 stores information corresponding to the BB winning at-time lock release waiting flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 3033 as backup data. The BB winning combination lock release standby flag is always set on when the BB sound reproduction start command data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (steps S3022 and S3024 in FIG. 197, and FIG. See step S3049 and step S3050 in 198). On the other hand, when the BB winning combination lock release standby flag is set to ON, the BB sound reproduction start command data is always stored.

  Therefore, the BB winning combination lock release standby flag is information indicating that the BB prize locking is not performed, and is information indicating that the sound during BB has been reproduced before the BB winning combination ( I share these information). As a result, when returning from power failure, the main CPU 3031 can recognize based on the backup data that the sound during BB has been reproduced before the BB is won. Then, the main CPU 3031 can output the sound during BB again from the speakers DD25L and DD25R, although the BB has not been won yet.

<BB winning process lock process>
FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing a BB winning time lock process carried out in the main control circuit.

  The BB prize lock process shown in FIG. 199 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 after the process of step S296 of FIG. 137 (bonus operation check process) is executed.

  In the BB prize lock process, first, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the BB prize lock release standby flag (see step S3024 in FIG. 197 and step S3050 in FIG. 198) is set on (step S3101) .

  If it is determined that the BB winning a prize lock release standby flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 3031 executes the processing of step S3102 to step S3105, but these processing is the processing of step S2102 to step S2105 of FIG. Since the process is the same as in the above, the explanation here is omitted. Thus, when the BB prize lock release standby flag is not set to ON, the BB prize lock is generated and the BB prize effect is performed as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the BB prize unlocking wait flag is set to ON, the main CPU 3031 generates BB prize winning command data during BB sound playing, and the generated BB playing BB prize winning command data The data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S3106). The BB in-playback BB winning command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the BB has won, but the BB winning lock has not occurred.

  Sound playback during BB When receiving BB winning command data as a trigger, the sub control circuit 3070 sets sound data corresponding to a winning sound to be output with a BB winning. As a result, the winning sound (BB winning sound during reproduction of sound during BB) is output from the speakers DD25L and DD25R. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 176, when the BB winning lock command data (see step S3104) is received, the sub control circuit 3070 controls various effects (BB winning effect) to be performed at the BB winning. Corresponding rendering data is set. As a result, while the BB winning lock is being performed, a large effect using video, sound, light and the like is performed. As effects by sound, so-called fanfares are output from the speakers DD25L and DD25R.

  Here, the BB winning sound during the above-mentioned BB sound reproduction is smaller in sound than the fanfare, and the time (the length of the sound) outputted from the speakers DD25L and DD25R is also short. That is, the BB winning sound during playback of BB is not a flashy effect normally performed when BB wins, but is only a small sound generated in an inconspicuous manner with BB winning. In this respect, when the sound during BB is being played before BB wins, the player has a feeling as if it has already shifted to the BB gaming state, and it is considered that the mood is on By the way, if it is decided to perform the effect at the time of the BB prize such as fanfare, it is likely that water will be drawn instead. In this embodiment, in such a case, it is possible to start the game in the BB gaming state without interrupting the player's feelings.

  After executing the processing of step S3106, the main CPU 3031 sets the BB prize-winning lock release standby flag to off (step S3107), and the present subroutine ends.

  In FIG. 199, it is assumed that the game lock is not generated when the BB prize lock release standby flag is set to ON (when the sound is being reproduced during BB before BB is won), Also in this case, a game lock may be generated. However, the game lock generated in this case is the game lock generated when the BB prize lock release standby flag is not set to ON (when the sound during BB is not reproduced at the time BB is won) (steps) It is desirable that the lock time be shorter than the BB winning lock generated in S3105). The above-described BB winning sound during playback of the BB sound may be output while the short game lock is occurring. On the other hand, when the sound during BB is being reproduced before BB wins, such a short game lock may not be generated, and the BB winning sound during reproduction of sound during BB may not be generated. That is, even when the BB is won, the same effect as when the other combination is displayed may be performed, and an effect unique to the BB winning may not be performed.

<Lock production determination process>
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing lock effect determination processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 201 shows a lock effect lottery table.

  The lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 200 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 after the process of step S14 of FIG. 121 (main control process) is performed.

  In the lock effect determination process, first, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the current gaming state is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state (step S3201). The main CPU 3031 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is neither the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, nor the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is any of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the lock non-permission flag is set to on. It judges (step S3202).

  Although not shown, the lock non-permission flag may be set on when the power is turned on. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the elapsed time since the power interruption occurred (the time from the power interruption to the recovery from the power interruption) is a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours) or more If so, the lock disallowed flag is set on. Also, after the power is turned on, when the gaming state shifts from the gaming state when the power is turned on to another gaming state, the lock non-permission flag is set to off.

  Note that the gaming state when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) is basically the same gaming state as the gaming state when the power interruption occurred. However, if the setting is changed (step S33 in FIG. 122), the information stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) of the main RAM 3033 is cleared. The gaming state is basically the RT0 gaming state. Exceptionally, when the gaming state before the setting change is the RT4 gaming state, the gaming state after the setting change also becomes the RT4 gaming state.

  If it is determined that the lock non-permission flag is set to on, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the lock non-permission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 3031 refers to the lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 201) and performs lottery based on the random number value to perform the rotating drum effect number Are determined (step S3203).

  In the lock effect lottery table shown in FIG. 201, for each winning combination (“high RT transition lip”, “cherry”, “bonus”, and “others”), rotating drum effect numbers “0” to “2” The lottery value is defined in association with it. The spinning drum effect number corresponds to the content of the reel action. Specifically, the rotating drum effect number “0” corresponds to “normal rotation”. "Normal rotation" is a reel action in which each reel RL, RC, RR rotates without the occurrence of a game lock. The spinning drum effect number “1” corresponds to “rotation from the left”. The “rotation from the left” is a reel action in which the rotation of the reels starts in the order of “left reel RL → middle reel RC → right reel RR”. The “rotation from the right” is a reel action in which the rotation of the reels starts in the order of “right reel RR → middle reel RC → left reel RL”.

  In the figure, “high RT transition rep” indicates a winning combination including “F_RT replay” that does not include a bonus combination (“No. 12” shown in FIGS. 184 to 186), and “cherry” indicates “high RT transition rep”. Of the winning combinations including F_Cherry A, F_Cherry B, F_Cherry C, or F_ALL Cherry, those without a bonus part (“No. 4” to “No. No. 7 ")," bonus "indicates a winning combination including" bonus "(" No. 14 "to" No. 59 "shown in FIG. 184 to FIG. 186), and" Others "indicates" high RT ". Indicates a winning combination other than "transition lip", "cherry" and "bonus".

  In the processing of step S3203, the main CPU 3031 refers to the lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 201), and based on the internal winning combination determined in step S14 of FIG. 121 and the random value stored in step S13, "0". From the rotating drum effect numbers of “2” to “1”, one rotating drum effect number is determined. The lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 201) is stored in the main ROM 3032.

  After executing the processing of step S3203, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the turning drum effect number determined in step S3203 is "0" (step S3204).

  If it is determined that the rotating drum effect number determined in step S3203 is not “0”, the main CPU 3031 provides data indicating the corresponding rotating drum effect number (“1” or “2”) in the main RAM 3033 It is stored in the trunk effect number storage area (not shown) (step S3205).

  If it is determined in step S3204 that the rotating drum effect number is “0”, or after the processing of step S3205 is executed, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit.

  The reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 202 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 in step S19 of FIG. 121 (main control process).

  In the reel rotation start process, first, the main CPU 3031 indicates data of any one of “1” and “2” in the rotating drum effect number storage area of the main RAM 3033 (see step S3205 in FIG. 200). Is determined (step S3221).

  If it is determined that the data indicating either the turning drum effect number “1” or “2” is not stored in the turning drum effect number storage area of the main RAM 3033, the main CPU 3031 executes the acceleration processing at normal time (step S3222). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. When the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 138) executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec), and each reel RL, RC, RR rotation is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed.

  After executing the processing of step S3222, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3221 that data indicating the rotating drum effect number of either “1” or “2” is stored in the rotating drum effect number storage area of the main RAM 3033, the main CPU 3031 acquires the lock command data And stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S3223). Lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in a command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the locking of the reel has been started, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 executes a reel action corresponding to the spinning drum effect number (step S3224). In this process, the main CPU 3031 operates the reel action corresponding to the rotating drum effect number based on the data indicating the rotating drum effect number stored in the rotating drum effect number storage area of the main RAM 3033.

  Specifically, when the spinning drum effect number is “1”, the main CPU 3031 first requests start of rotation of the left reel RL, requests start of rotation of the middle reel RC after a predetermined time has elapsed, and further predetermined After the lapse of time, it requests to start the rotation of the right reel RR. When the start of rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR is requested, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled as in the normal acceleration processing (see step S3222), and first, the rotation of the left reel RL is started, and predetermined time After the lapse of time, the rotation of the middle reel RC is started, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the rotation of the right reel RR is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed.

  Similarly, when the spinning drum effect number is "2", the main CPU 3031 first requests start of rotation of the right reel RR, requests start of rotation of the middle reel RC after a predetermined time has elapsed, and further predetermined time After the lapse of time, the start of the rotation of the left reel RL is requested. When the start of rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR is requested, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled as in the normal acceleration processing (see step S3222), and first, the rotation of the right reel RR is started. After the lapse of time, the rotation of the middle reel RC is started, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the rotation of the left reel RL is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed.

  After executing the processing of step S3224, the main CPU 3031 clears data indicating the rotating drum effect number stored in the rotating drum effect number storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S3225), and ends this subroutine.

  By executing the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 202, in the gaming state of any of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state, “high RT transition lip” or “cherry” is internal. In the case of winning, on the condition that the lock disapproval flag is not set to ON, the reel action ("rotate from the left") corresponding to the turn drum effect number "1", and the turn drum effect number "2 One of the reel actions corresponding to “reel action (“ turn from right ”) always occurs (see FIG. 201). Specifically, when the “high RT transition ripple” is internally won, the reel action (“rotation from the left”) corresponding to the rotating drum effect number “1” occurs with high probability. In addition, when “CHERRY” is internally won, a reel action (“rotation from the right”) corresponding to the turning drum effect number “2” occurs with high probability.

  While the reel action (see step S3224) corresponding to the spinning drum effect number "1" or "2" is occurring (while the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR reaches a constant speed), The game lock is generated, and the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is invalidated. In this regard, even when normal acceleration processing (see step S3222) is performed, a lock is generated until the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR reaches a constant speed. If a reel action corresponding to “2” or “2” occurs, a time difference between when the first reel starts rotating and when the second and third reels start rotating Therefore, the lock time is longer by the time difference than when the normal acceleration processing is performed. The lock time when the reel action corresponding to the turning drum effect number "1" occurs may be the same as the lock time when the reel action corresponding to the turning drum effect number "2" occurs. It may be different.

  Here, as described with reference to FIGS. 180A and 180B, when the high RT transition lip is won in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, or the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state Move to). In addition, in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, or the RT2 gaming state, when the cherries are won, the gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (the most disadvantageous gaming state).

  Therefore, when a reel action ("rotate from the left") corresponding to the rotating drum effect number "1" is generated, it is suggested that the "high RT transition lip" is internally won, and the player is notified. , Can be expected to transition to the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state). On the other hand, when a reel action ("rotate from the right") corresponding to the turning drum effect number "2" occurs, it is suggested that "Cherry" is internally won, and the RT4 gaming state (the most disadvantageous game) Will cause the player's anxiety about shifting to the state).

  In the lock effect lottery table shown in FIG. 201, there is a possibility that the rotating drum effect number “2” may be determined when “high RT transition lip” is internally won, and when “cherry” is internally won. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the trunk effect number "1" will be determined. However, when "high RT transition lip" is won internally, the turn drum production number "1" is always determined, and when "Cherry" is internally won, the turn drum production number "2" is always determined It may be In addition, when “high RT transition lip” or “cherry” is won internally, the rotating drum effect number “1” or “2” is always determined, but the rotating drum effect number “0” is determined. It may be possible. In addition, when the winning combination of "others" is determined, the rotating drum effect number "0" is always determined, but also in this case, the rotating drum effect number "1" or "2" is determined It may be possible.

  Also, upon receiving the lock command data (see step S3223), the sub control circuit 3070 sets effect data corresponding to the reel action. As a result, when a reel action ("rotate from the left") corresponding to the turning drum effect number "1" is generated, an effect is provided to enhance the sense of expectation for the RT3 gaming state (high RT gaming state), or When a reel action ("rotate from the right") corresponding to the trunk effect number "2" is generated, it is possible to perform an effect such as worries about the RT4 gaming state (the most disadvantageous gaming state). For example, it is possible to change the degree of expectation and the degree of anxiety through the speech contents of the characters (sound effect) and the manner in which the characters fight (image effect).

  The gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix C1>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to output so-called ART and to output different BGMs during ART and non-ART is known (see, for example, JP-A-2010-51492). ). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to stimulate the game and enhance the player's feeling through the specific BGM flowing in the ART (playing state advantageous to the player).

  The inventor of the present invention creates a new entertainment feature by devising the generation condition of a specific effect in the process of intensively examining the effects such as BGM performed during the specific gaming state as described above. I came to the idea that I could do something.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment characteristics with respect to the generation of a rendition.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(C1-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB” shown in FIG. 182A) are determined by the stop control means. Or, when the "C_blue NBB" is derived, the specified gaming state operation means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A lock execution unit (FIG. 199) capable of executing a specific lock (BB prize lock) in which an operation by a player is invalidated for a predetermined time when the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control unit. Main CPU 3031) which executes the processing of step S3105 of
Lock determination means (main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of step S3001 and step S3005 of FIG. 195) capable of determining whether or not to execute the specific lock by the lock execution means;
Sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
BGM output control means capable of outputting a predetermined BGM (sounds in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) by the sound output means in the specific gaming state;
The BGM output control means
As a result of the determination by the lock determination unit, when the specific lock is executed by the lock execution unit, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM after the predetermined display result is derived. When the specific lock is not performed by the lock execution unit, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM before the predetermined display result is derived.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_ shown in FIG. 182A, and“ C_ When "red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" is derived, a specific display state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player is activated, and a predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C") When C_blue SBB "," C_red NBB ", or" C_blue NBB "is derived, a specific lock (BB winning lock) is executed in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time. It is possible. Thus, when a predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") is derived (operation of the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) Stop the game temporarily when the condition is satisfied), and announce to the player that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) (the gaming state advantageous to the player) is activated from now on, to boost the player's feeling Can. Then, after a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived, a predetermined BGM (FIG. 153 (a) and It is possible to output (sound during BB) (BGM for specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) shown in FIG. 173 (a). By flowing such BGM, it is possible to create an atmosphere specific to the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and make the player feel that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to execute a specific lock (BB winning lock), and as a result of the determination, the specific lock If (BB prize lock) is not executed, the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived rather than being derived It is configured to be able to output the predetermined BGM (sound during BB) before. As a result, before the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated, it is possible for the player to enjoy the feeling as if the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating a little earlier. Then, by the time the predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") is derived, the player is in the specific gaming state (BB). It is thought that you enjoy the atmosphere of the gaming state) and are playing in a good mood, but if you decide to perform a specific lock (lock when BB winning) in such a situation, it is possible to draw water instead. is there. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific lock (the lock at BB winning) from being executed, and to interrupt the player's feeling. Instead, it is possible to play a game after the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated.

  In the eighth embodiment (FIG. 199), as described above, the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. Also in the case of outputting a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) before, it has been described that the specific lock (the BB winning lock) is not executed. However, in the present invention, the predetermined BGM (before the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. Even when outputting BB sound, a game lock other than a specific lock (BB prize lock) (for example, a game lock whose lock time is shorter than the BB prize lock (for example, less than one second) If so, it may be generated. In the present invention, as long as the game lock does not interrupt the player's feelings, the above effects are not greatly inhibited and there is no problem even if it is generated.

(C1-2) The gaming machine according to (C1-1) above,
And a predetermined sound output control unit capable of causing the sound output unit to output a predetermined sound different from the predetermined BGM when the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control unit.
The predetermined sound output control means
When the predetermined BGM is output after the predetermined display result is derived, it is possible to output the first predetermined sound (fanfare), while the predetermined display result is derived When the predetermined BGM has been output from before, it is possible to output a second predetermined sound (BB winning sound during playback of sound during BB) different from the first predetermined sound,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. It is possible to output a predetermined sound different from a predetermined BGM (sound during BB). Specifically, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is output after a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. If it is set, it is possible to output the first predetermined sound (fanfare), while the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “ When a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is output before C_blue NBB ′ ′) is derived, a second predetermined sound (BB in sound) different from the first predetermined sound (fanfare) It is possible to output a BB winning sound) during reproduction. Thus, when the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is generated. Since it is possible to make the predetermined sound to be output different depending on whether or not it is output, it is possible to have the player enjoy the game at maximum by performing the effect by the sound according to the situation.

  For example, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is generated before a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. If the second predetermined sound (BB winning sound during BB sound reproduction) is a sound smaller than the first predetermined sound (fanfare) or a predetermined BGM (sound during BB), the predetermined BGM is output. It can be prevented that (the sound during BB) is disturbed by the second predetermined sound (the BB winning sound during reproduction of the sound during BB). Thus, when a predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") is derived, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is heard. It is possible to avoid a situation that becomes difficult, and before and after derivation of a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) The predetermined BGM (sound during BB) can be continuously delivered to the player's ear. The first predetermined sound (fanfare) may be output before starting reproduction of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB), or is output after reproduction of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is started. May be

(C1-1 ′) variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB” shown in FIG. 182A) are determined by the stop control means. Or, when the "C_blue NBB" is derived, the specified gaming state operation means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A lock execution unit (FIG. 199) capable of executing a specific lock (BB prize lock) in which an operation by a player is invalidated for a predetermined time when the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control unit. Main CPU 3031) which executes the processing of step S3105 of
Lock determination means (main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of step S3001 and step S3005 of FIG. 195) capable of determining whether or not to execute the specific lock by the lock execution means;
Sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
BGM output control means capable of outputting a predetermined BGM (sounds in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) by the sound output means in the specific gaming state;
The BGM output control means
As a result of the determination by the lock determination unit, when the specific lock is executed by the lock execution unit, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM after the predetermined display result is derived. When the specific lock is not performed by the lock execution unit, the output of the predetermined BGM is started before the predetermined display result is derived, and the predetermined display result is output by the stop control unit. The output of the predetermined BGM is continued in the specific combination carryover state (the state between BB flags) until being derived, and the predetermined BGM output is output even after the predetermined display result is derived and the specific gaming state is activated. It is possible to do
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_ shown in FIG. 182A, and“ C_ When "red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" is derived, a specific display state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player is activated, and a predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C") When C_blue SBB "," C_red NBB ", or" C_blue NBB "is derived, a specific lock (BB winning lock) is executed in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time. It is possible. Thus, when a predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") is derived (operation of the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) Stop the game temporarily when the condition is satisfied), and announce to the player that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) (the gaming state advantageous to the player) is activated from now on, to boost the player's feeling Can. Then, after a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived, a predetermined BGM (FIG. 153 (a) and It is possible to output (sound during BB) (BGM for specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) shown in FIG. 173 (a). By flowing such BGM, it is possible to create an atmosphere specific to the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and make the player feel that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to execute a specific lock (BB winning lock), and as a result of the determination, the specific lock If (BB prize lock) is not executed, the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived rather than being derived It is configured to be able to output the predetermined BGM (sound during BB) before. The predetermined BGM (sound in BB) whose output is started in this way is a predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") Is continuously output until the game is derived, and is continuously output even after the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated (the predetermined BGM (the sound during BB once the output is started is the specific gaming state) (Playing continues without interruption until the BB gaming state ends)). As a result, before the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated, it is possible for the player to enjoy the feeling as if the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating a little earlier. Then, by the time the predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") is derived, the player is in the specific gaming state (BB). It is thought that you enjoy the atmosphere of the gaming state) and are playing in a good mood, but if you decide to perform a specific lock (lock when BB winning) in such a situation, it is possible to draw water instead. is there. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific lock (the lock at BB winning) from being executed, and to interrupt the player's feeling. Instead, it is possible to play a game after the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated.

(C1-3) A plurality of variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB” shown in FIG. 182A) are determined by the stop control means. Or, when the "C_blue NBB" is derived, the specified gaming state operation means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A stop operation invalid state (one stop lock) can be generated for a predetermined time, in which the stop operation is invalidated when the stop operation is not performed on at least one of the plurality of variable display means. Stop operation disabling means (main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of step S3047 in FIG. 198);
If the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, it is possible to determine whether to cause the stop operation invalid state or not (invalid state determination means (step S3001 in FIG. 195). The main CPU 3031) to execute
Sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
BGM output control means capable of outputting a predetermined BGM (sounds in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) by the sound output means in the specific gaming state;
The BGM output control means
When the stop operation invalidation means is generated by the stop operation invalidation means, the predetermined BGM is output after the stop operation invalidation state is ended and the effective stop operation can be performed. Is possible,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_ shown in FIG. 182A, and“ C_ When "red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" is derived, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player is activated, and in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state), predetermined BGM (sound in BB shown in FIGS. 153A and 173A) (BGM for specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) can be output. By flowing such BGM, it is possible to create an atmosphere specific to the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and make the player feel that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the stop operation is not performed on at least one of the plurality of variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR). It is possible to generate a stop operation invalid state (1 stop lock) in which the stop operation is invalidated. Then, when the stop operation invalid state (1 stop lock) occurs, after the stop operation invalid state (1 stop lock) ends and it becomes possible to perform a valid stop operation, a predetermined BGM ( It is configured to be able to output the sound during BB. That is, when the stop operation invalid state (1 stop lock) occurs, the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red SBB”, A predetermined BGM (sound in BB) will be output before “C_red NBB” or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. Thus, the predetermined display result ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red NBB", or "C_blue NBB") is not derived (in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) Although a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) suddenly flows out despite the fact that the operating condition is not established, it is possible to give a player surprise and pleasure. In addition, since a determination as to whether or not to cause such a stop operation invalid state (one stop lock) is made when the specific combination (BB) is determined to be a winning combination, a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is determined. Is output means that the specific part (BB) has been decided as the winning combination. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the specific combination (BB) has been decided as the winning combination through the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB), which makes the player happy. And, combined with the fact that a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) (BGM for a specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) starts to flow, the player is as if a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) has begun It can give you a feeling like a hill.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where one stop lock occurs is described as an example of the stop operation invalid state. The stop operation invalid state in the present invention is not limited to one stop lock, and a game lock in which the stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined time can be adopted as appropriate. That is, the stop operation invalidation state may occur after the start lever is operated and before the first stop operation is performed, or occurs before the second stop operation is performed after the first stop operation is performed. Alternatively, it may be generated after the second stop operation is performed but before the third stop operation is performed.

  In addition, the timing for outputting a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is a predetermined display result (“C_Red SBB”, “ There is no particular limitation as long as C_blue SBB "," C_red NBB ", or" C_blue NBB "is before being derived. However, from the viewpoint of giving a surprise to the player, as soon as possible after the termination of the stop operation invalidation state (for example, within 1 second, within 0.5 seconds, within 0.3 seconds, or 0. It is desirable to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) within 1 second). For example, it is possible to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) before the next stop operation is performed after the stop operation invalid state ends. When adopting the 1 stop lock as the stop operation invalid state, it is preferable to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) before the second stop operation is performed.

(C1-3 ′) a plurality of variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB” shown in FIG. 182A) are determined by the stop control means. Or, when the "C_blue NBB" is derived, the specified gaming state operation means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A stop operation invalid state (one stop lock) can be generated for a predetermined time, in which the stop operation is invalidated when the stop operation is not performed on at least one of the plurality of variable display means. Stop operation disabling means (main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of step S3047 in FIG. 198);
If the specific combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, it is possible to determine whether to cause the stop operation invalid state or not (invalid state determination means (step S3001 in FIG. 195). The main CPU 3031) to execute
Sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
BGM output control means capable of outputting a predetermined BGM (sounds in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) by the sound output means in the specific gaming state;
The BGM output control means
When the stop operation invalidation means does not generate the stop operation invalidation state as a result of determination by the invalidation state determination means, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM after the predetermined display result is derived. On the other hand, when the stop operation invalidation means is generated by the stop operation invalidation means, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM before the predetermined display result is derived.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_ shown in FIG. 182A, and“ C_ When "red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" is derived, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player is activated, and in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state), predetermined BGM (sound in BB shown in FIGS. 153A and 173A) (BGM for specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) can be output. By flowing such BGM, it is possible to create an atmosphere specific to the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and make the player feel that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the stop operation is not performed on at least one of the plurality of variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR). It is possible to make a decision on whether or not to cause the stop operation invalid state (1 stop lock) in which the stop operation is invalidated, and as a result of the determination, the stop operation invalid state (1 stop lock) occurs. If the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB” shown in FIG. 182A) is derived, the predetermined BGM is generated. It is configured to be able to output (the sound in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)). As a result, before the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is activated, it is possible for the player to enjoy the feeling as if the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating a little earlier. In addition, since a determination as to whether or not to cause such a stop operation invalid state (one stop lock) is made when the specific combination (BB) is determined to be a winning combination, a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is determined. Is output means that the specific part (BB) has been decided as the winning combination. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the specific combination (BB) has been decided as the winning combination through the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB), which makes the player happy. And, combined with the fact that a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) (BGM for a specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) starts to flow, the player is as if a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) has begun It can give you a feeling like a hill.

(C1-4) variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB” shown in FIG. 182A) are determined by the stop control means. Or, when the "C_blue NBB" is derived, the specified gaming state operation means (the main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating the specified gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
BGM output control means capable of outputting a predetermined BGM (sounds in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) by the sound output means in the specific gaming state;
Storage means (main RAM 3033) capable of storing information on games,
The BGM output control means
The predetermined condition regarding the timing for outputting the predetermined BGM (to win one stop lock by the reel action lottery performed in step S3001 in FIG. 195, or the BB unlocking lottery performed in step S3005 in FIG. 195) When winning is not established, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM after the predetermined display result is derived, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined BGM is output. It is possible to output the predetermined BGM before the display result of is derived,
When a power failure occurs when the predetermined BGM is output before the predetermined display result is derived, it relates to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition stored in the storage unit It is possible to output the predetermined BGM also when returning from the power failure based on the information (the BB winning combination lock release standby flag set on in step S3024 in FIG. 197 or step S3050 in FIG. 198) Is
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, predetermined display results (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_ shown in FIG. 182A, and“ C_ When "red NBB" or "C_blue NBB" is derived, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player is activated, and in the specific gaming state (BB gaming state), predetermined BGM (sound in BB shown in FIGS. 153A and 173A) (BGM for specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) can be output. By flowing such BGM, it is possible to create an atmosphere specific to the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and make the player feel that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the predetermined condition (the reel action lottery performed in step S3001 in FIG. 195) causes 1 stop lock in relation to the timing for outputting the predetermined BGM (sound during BB). If winning or winning a BB winning unlocking lottery performed in step S3005 in FIG. 195 is established, predetermined display results ("C_red SBB", "C_blue SBB", "C_red SBB", " It is configured to be able to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) before C_red NBB "or" C_blue NBB "is derived. Therefore, when the predetermined condition (to win the 1 stop lock by reel action lottery or to win the BB winning lock release lottery) is established, the predetermined display result (“C_Red SBB”, “ Although the C_blue SBB "," C_red NBB "or" C_blue NBB "is not derived (the operating condition of the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is not established), the predetermined BGM is Since (BB's sound) starts to flow, it is possible to give the player surprise and pleasure. In addition, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is generated before a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. When a power failure occurs while being output, a predetermined condition (reel action lottery to win one stop lock) stored in the storage means (main RAM 3033), or BB winning lock release lottery Based on the information on the establishment of winning (in the step S3024 in FIG. 197 or the BB winning lock release standby flag set on in step S3050 in FIG. 198), It is possible to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB). Thereby, the predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is generated before the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. It is possible to make the situation reappear at the time of return even when the situation in which the is being output is interrupted due to the interruption of power, and the situation is lost when the interruption of electricity causes the player to disappear. Can prevent you from being discouraged.

(C1-4 ′) Display means capable of performing derivation display of identification information (reel RL, RC, RR, and main CPU 3031 executing the processing of step S22 of FIG. 121 and the processing of step S325 of FIG. 138) When,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121),
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (BB winning), predetermined display by the display means (“C_Red SBB”, “C_Blue SBB” shown in FIG. 182A, Specific gaming state operation means (processing in FIG. 137) for activating a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) advantageous to the player when “C_red NBB” or “C_blue NBB stop display” is performed With the main CPU 3031),
Sound output means (speakers DD25L, DD25R) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
BGM output control means capable of outputting a predetermined BGM (sounds in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) by the sound output means in the specific gaming state;
Storage means (main RAM 3033) capable of storing information on games,
The BGM output control means
The predetermined condition regarding the timing for outputting the predetermined BGM (to win one stop lock by the reel action lottery performed in step S3001 in FIG. 195, or the BB unlocking lottery performed in step S3005 in FIG. 195) When winning is not established, it is possible to output the predetermined BGM after the predetermined derivation display is performed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined BGM is output. It is possible to output the predetermined BGM before the derived display of
If a power failure occurs while the predetermined BGM is being output before the predetermined derivation display is performed, information related to the establishment of the predetermined condition stored in the storage unit It is possible to output the predetermined BGM even when returning from the power failure based on (the BB winning combination lock release standby flag set on in step S3024 in FIG. 197 or step S3050 in FIG. 198) is there,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the result of the predetermined lottery (internal lottery) becomes the predetermined result (BB winning), the predetermined derived display (“C_Red SBB” shown in FIG. 182A) If “C_Blue SBB”, “C_Red NBB”, or “C_Blue NBB” stop display is performed, a specific gaming state (BB gaming state) that is advantageous for the player is activated and specified In the gaming state (BB gaming state), it is possible to output a predetermined BGM (sound in BB shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 173 (a)) (BGM for a specific gaming state (BB gaming state)) What is it? By flowing such BGM, it is possible to create an atmosphere specific to the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) and make the player feel that the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is operating. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the predetermined condition (the reel action lottery performed in step S3001 in FIG. 195) causes 1 stop lock in relation to the timing for outputting the predetermined BGM (sound during BB). If winning or winning a BB winning unlocking lottery performed in step S3005 of FIG. 195 is established, predetermined derived display (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, It is configured to be able to output a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) before C_red NBB "or" C_blue NBB stop display "is performed. Therefore, when the predetermined condition (to win the 1 stop lock by reel action lottery or to win the BB winning lock release lottery) is established, the predetermined derived display (“C_red SBB”, “ Even though C_Blue SBB "," C_Red NBB ", or" C_Blue NBB stop display "is not being performed (the operating conditions for the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) are not established), Since a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) flows out, it is possible to give a player surprise and pleasure. In addition, a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is performed before a predetermined derivation display (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB” stop display) is performed. If a power failure occurs while the) is being output, a predetermined condition (reel action lottery to win one stop lock) stored in the storage means (main RAM 3033), or a BB prize lock When returning from the power failure based on the information on the winning of the cancellation lottery (the BB winning lock release standby flag set on in step S3024 in FIG. 197 or step S3050 in FIG. 198) Can also output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB). Thereby, the predetermined BGM (BB during the display before the predetermined derivation display (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB” stop display) is performed. Even when the situation where the sound is being output is interrupted due to power interruption, it is possible to make the situation reappear when returning, and the situation disappears when power interruption occurs. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

  In the eighth embodiment, a predetermined BGM (BB) is generated before the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. If a power failure occurs while the medium sound is being output, a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) can be output even when the power is restored based on the BB win time lock release standby flag. It was explained as being. The BB winning combination lock release standby flag corresponds to “information regarding that a predetermined condition is satisfied” in the present invention. In the present invention, the “information regarding that a predetermined condition is satisfied” is not limited to the BB in-game lock release standby flag (information stored in the main control circuit), and is information stored in the sub control circuit It is also good. For example, while a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is being reproduced, a predetermined flag is set in the sub RAM, and the flag (the BGM in-progress flag) is set to "information regarding that a predetermined condition is satisfied" It may be adopted as

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, after winning the BB winning lock release lottery, the output of a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is not started immediately, but the start lever DD6 is operated in the next game It has been described that the output of a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is started. In the present invention, after a predetermined condition (for example, winning a predetermined lottery) is satisfied in this way, a specific condition (for example, a predetermined operation is performed) is triggered. It is possible to configure so that the output of a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is started. In the case of adopting such a configuration, when power interruption occurs after the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is started, a flag that is set when a specific condition is satisfied in addition to the predetermined condition ( For example, it is preferable to store, as backup data, the BB winning combination lock release standby flag and the BGM in-progress flag set in step S3024 in FIG. 197. As a result, when power is restored, it is possible to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) based on the backup data. If a power failure occurs before the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied, a flag that is set when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, set to ON in step S3007 in FIG. 195). The BB winning combination lock release winning flag) may be stored as backup data. As a result, when a power failure occurs before the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information indicating that the predetermined condition is satisfied is stored, so the power is restored from the power failure. After that, it is possible to output a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) as long as a specific condition is satisfied. Note that even if a flag (BB win-time lock cancellation winning flag) set when a predetermined condition is satisfied is stored as backup data, it is set when a specific condition is satisfied in addition to the predetermined condition. If a flag (BB in-game lock release standby flag or BGM playback in progress flag) is not stored as backup data, when returning from a power failure, a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) until a specific condition is satisfied. It is better not to output the As a result, only when the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) has already been started when the interruption occurs, the predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is output immediately after returning from the interruption. It is possible.

  In addition, at the time of return from power interruption, you may reproduce from the reproduction part of BGM (sound in BB) at the time of power interruption (from the middle of BGM), or from the beginning of BGM (sound in BB) You may play it. For example, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is generated before a predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. BGM at the time of the occurrence of a power failure if the time from the occurrence of a power failure to recovery is less than a predetermined time (for example, one hour) when a power failure occurs when being output. Play from the continuation of (Sound during BB) and play from the beginning of BGM (Sound during BB) if the time from occurrence of power interruption to recovery is more than a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) You may do it. Alternatively, the predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is generated before the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived. When a power failure occurs while being output, a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is performed on the condition that the time from occurrence of power failure to recovery is less than a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) If the time from the power interruption to the recovery is more than a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), the predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is not reproduced at the time of recovery. Good.

  In the eighth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (winning 1 stop lock by reel action lottery or winning BB winning lock release lottery) is established, the BB winning game or the next game is prescribed. It was explained that the playback of BGM (sound during BB) was started. In the present invention, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timing to start the output of the predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is not particularly limited, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined display result (“C_red Arbitrary timings until SBB ',' C_blue SBB ',' C_red NBB ', or' C_blue NBB 'are derived can be adopted appropriately. For example, when a predetermined condition is established in one unit game, the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is started at the timing when the rotation of all the reels RL, RC, RR is stopped in the unit game. It is also good.

  In the eighth embodiment, it is described that when a BB winning lock release lottery is won, the reproduction of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) is started from the game next to the BB winning game. However, in the present invention, the timing to start the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) when winning BB unlocking lottery is not particularly limited, and after winning BB winning unlock lottery, Arbitrary timing until the predetermined display result (“C_red SBB”, “C_blue SBB”, “C_red NBB”, or “C_blue NBB”) is derived can be adopted as appropriate. For example, the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) may be started from the BB winning game without waiting until the next game of the BB winning game. In this case, the timing for starting the output of a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) may be after the start lever is operated and before the first stop operation is performed, or after the first stop operation is performed. It may be before the second stop operation is performed, or may be before the third stop operation is performed after the second stop operation is performed, or after the third stop operation is performed. May be

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the unlocking lottery at the BB winning is performed on the condition that the 1-stop lock is not won. Therefore, in the case of winning the BB lock release lottery, the one stop lock will not be performed. However, in the present invention, regardless of whether or not the 1-stop lock is won, the BB winning combination unlocking lottery may be performed. That is, the game lock (one stop lock) may be performed even when a predetermined condition (to win the BB release lock release lottery) is established. In this case, for example, the output of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) may be started simultaneously with the start of the game lock (1 stop lock), or between the start and the end of the game lock (game The output of a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) may be started while the lock is occurring.

  In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the lottery (reel action lottery and BB winning unlocking lottery) on predetermined conditions is executed in the winning game, but the lottery is not limited to the winning game, and the subsequent lottery. It may be performed in the state between flags. In addition, the lottery may be performed on condition that BB is internally won in the high RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) (if the BB is internally won in another gaming state, the lottery may not be performed). . In the high RT gaming state, where the player's feeling is considered to be on board, it is possible to increase the player's pleasure by starting reproduction of a predetermined BGM (sound in BB) in such a situation it can. Alternatively, the lottery may be performed on the condition that the same color BB is internally won (if the different color BB is internally winning, the lottery is not performed). After the end of the same color BB gaming state, the transition to the gaming state (RT2 gaming state) with a high degree of expectation for the transition to the high RT gaming state, where the same color BB is internally won predetermined BGM (sound during BB) By playing the game, it is possible to make the player to expect a desirable game development. In particular, when adopting a mode in which the lottery is performed under the condition that the same color BB is internally won in the high RT gaming state, the reproduction of a predetermined BGM (sound during BB) is started in the high RT gaming state This means that the gaming situation desired for the player is continuous, and the feeling of the player can be greatly enhanced.

  In the eighth embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine is described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko game machine. For example, when a predetermined condition is established, the special symbol display device responds to the big hit after the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery performed with the game ball entering the starting opening as a trigger) It is also possible to start reproduction of a predetermined BGM (BGM flowing during the big hit gaming state) until the leading display is performed. The predetermined condition may be one in which the success or failure is determined by the result of the special symbol lottery, or one in which the success or failure may be determined by a lottery separately performed from the special symbol lottery. For example, in a form in which a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, when the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific jackpot, a predetermined BGM (before the derived display corresponding to the jackpot is performed It is also possible to start the reproduction of BGM flowing during the jackpot gaming state. The timing to start the reproduction of a predetermined BGM (the BGM flowing during the big hit gaming state) may be any time before the derivation display corresponding to the big hit is performed, for example, the predetermined time at the same time as the start of the variable display of the special symbol The BGM (BGM flowing during the big hit gaming state) may be started, or the predetermined BGM (BGM flowing during the big hit gaming state) may be reproduced while the variable display of the special symbol is performed. It may be started. In addition, before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball is started when the variable display of the special symbol is held and the result of the big hit judgment corresponding to the holding ball is a big hit Alternatively, the reproduction of a predetermined BGM (a BGM flowing during a big hit game state) may be started. For example, in the case where so-called pre-reading effect is performed for the holding ball, when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol start winning unrelated to the holding ball is performed, a predetermined BGM (big hit game It is also possible to start the reproduction of BGM) flowing in the state. And, as described above, when the interruption occurs while the predetermined BGM (the BGM flowing during the big hit gaming state) is being played back before the derived display corresponding to the big hit is performed, It is possible to configure to output a predetermined BGM (BGM flowing during the big hit gaming state) even when returning from power failure.

<Appendix C2>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such conventional gaming machines, gaming machines provided with a plurality of gaming states different in winning probability of a combination (replay) that is a trigger for operation of replay are known (for example, JP-A-2010-029273). No. 2). According to such a gaming machine, since each gaming state has a different degree of advantage according to the replay winning probability, the variation of the game can be expanded.

  The present inventor makes it difficult to understand which gaming state the current gaming state is in the process of repeatedly examining the gaming machines provided with a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage as described above. , I came to the idea that I could improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making it difficult to identify which gaming state the current gaming state is.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(C2-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
A game state transition means (a game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 119 (b) and a carry over shown in FIG. 119 (a) that shifts the game state from one game state to another game state among a plurality of game states. A main RAM 3033 provided with a combination storage area, and a main CPU 3031) controlling the gaming state by the gaming state flag storage area and the carryover combination storage area;
Lock execution means capable of executing a lock in which an operation by a player is invalidated for a predetermined time (a main CPU 3031 for generating a lock while executing a reel action in step S3224 in FIG. 202);
The gaming state transition means is
In the predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming state), the predetermined predetermined combination (high RT transition lip or cherry) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means as a trigger. It is possible to shift the gaming state from one gaming state to another gaming state (RT3 gaming state or RT4 gaming state) having a different degree of advantage from the predetermined gaming state.
The lock execution means is
While it is possible to execute the lock when the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means in the predetermined gaming state,
If the game state when returning from the power failure after the occurrence of the power failure is the predetermined gaming state, the lock is determined even if the predetermined role is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means. It is possible not to run,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage are provided, and among these plural gaming states, a predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or When a predetermined combination (high RT transition lip or cherry) is determined as a winning combination in the RT2 gaming state), the predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming state) is determined. It is possible to shift the gaming state to another gaming state (RT3 gaming state or RT4 gaming state) having a different degree of advantage from the gaming state of (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming state) . Then, when a predetermined combination (high RT transition lip or cherry) is determined as a winning combination in a predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming state), lock (reel action) It is configured to be able to run. Therefore, it is suggested that the player may shift to a more advantageous gaming state or a disadvantageous gaming state (RT3 gaming state or RT4 gaming state) through the occurrence of the lock (reel action). It is possible, which can increase the player's interest in the lock (reel action). On the other hand, when a lock (reel action) occurs, the current gaming state may be a predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming state), and lock (reel action) It is also in a situation where the player can detect the current gaming state through the occurrence of). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the gaming state when the power failure occurs and then return from the power failure is a predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 In the case of the gaming state), even if a predetermined winning combination (high RT transition lip or cherry) is determined as a winning combination, it is configured such that locking (reel action) can not be performed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the current gaming state due to the occurrence of the lock (reel action), so increasing the opportunity for the player to guess which gaming state the current gaming state is. This can improve the interest of the game.

  In the eighth embodiment, the gaming state when the power is turned on (returning from the power failure) is described as the same gaming state as the gaming state when the power failure occurs, unless the setting is changed. . Here, temporarily, it is assumed that the gaming state when the power interruption occurs is the RT2 gaming state (for example, assume a case where the same color BB gaming state is ended between closing stores and the state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state). Then, when the setting is not changed, the gaming state when the power is turned on at the opening of the store the next day is also called the RT2 gaming state. In this case, if the lock (reel action) is generated as usual when the predetermined role (high RT transition lip or cherry) is decided as the winning combination, the setting is not changed (setting is deferred). There is a possibility that the player may overlook a certain thing. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the gaming state when returning from the power failure after the occurrence of the power disconnection is a predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming In the case of the state), even if the predetermined combination (high RT transition lip or cherries) is determined as the winning combination, it is configured that the lock (reel action) can not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the setting is deferred as described above.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the setting is changed, the gaming state after the setting change is basically the RT0 gaming state, but exceptionally, when the gaming state before the setting change is the RT4 gaming state The gaming state after the setting change is also described as being in the RT4 gaming state. The RT4 gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state, but if it is set to the RT0 gaming state (a gaming state that is more advantageous than the RT4 gaming state) triggered by a setting change, an excessively advantageous situation is created for the player. It is thought that there is a possibility of In view of this point, in the eighth embodiment, when the gaming state before the setting change is the RT4 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state is held even after the setting change. As described above, even when the setting is changed, it is possible to configure to take over the gaming state before the setting change for the RT gaming state designated in advance.

  Here, in a predetermined gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, or RT2 gaming state), when a predetermined winning combination (high RT transition lip or cherry) is determined as a winning combination, locking (reel action) ) Is generated, but in the RT4 gaming state, no lock (reel action) is generated. In the RT4 gaming state, the high RT transition lip does not win internally, and even if the cherries win, there is no need to shift to a further disadvantageous gaming state (falling), and it is necessary to perform falling fall. It is because there is not. As described above, if the gaming state before the setting change is the RT4 gaming state, the gaming state after the setting change is also the RT4 gaming state, and if the gaming state before the setting change is the gaming state other than the RT4 gaming state, the setting change is The gaming state of is the RT0 gaming state. And, in any case, it is possible to prevent the lock (reel action) from being generated at the time of recovery from power failure.

[Ninth embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. The ninth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. The description of the parts in the first to eighth embodiments that apply to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

<Decorative unit 4050>
FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the decoration unit. FIG. 204 is a perspective view showing the decorative unit from which the ship member and the upper lens are removed. FIG. 205 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration unit.

  In the fourth embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 1) is described as being provided with the decoration unit 1050 (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, a decoration unit 4050 shown in FIG. 203 is provided in the upper door mechanism UD.

  As shown in FIGS. 203 to 205, the decoration unit 4050 includes an upper cover 4110, a logo cover 4130, a logo sheet 4131, a background sheet 4132, and a light emitting mechanism 4200. Specifically, logo cover 4130 is disposed at the most front, logo sheet 4131 is disposed on the back side of logo cover 4130, and light emitting mechanism 4200 is disposed on the back side of logo sheet 4131.

  The upper cover 4110 is formed as a member having an outline of a substantially square shape in a front view, and an opening 4111 is formed in a central portion. The opening 4111 has a shape corresponding to the logo cover 4130, the logo sheet 4131, and the background sheet 4132. When the decoration unit 4050 is assembled, the logo cover 4130, the logo sheet 4131, and the background sheet 4132 The outer edges of each substantially coincide with the peripheral edge of the opening 4111. Thereby, in the front view, the opening 4111 is entirely blocked by the logo cover 4130.

  The logo cover 4130 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like), and is decorated with a not-shown three-dimensional shape (for example, a letter shape indicating a logo or the like according to the model) . The logo sheet 4131 is formed of a translucent material (for example, an acrylic resin or the like), and has a pattern not shown (for example, a pattern corresponding to a decoration provided on the logo cover 4130). The background sheet 4132 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like), and has a pattern not shown (for example, a pattern corresponding to the background of the decoration provided on the logo cover 4130). The logo sheet 4131 and the background sheet 4132 can be configured by printing a light shielding ink on a pattern printing sheet.

  In the assembled state of the decoration unit 4050, an upper lens 4150 is provided on the upper side of the upper cover 4110. The upper lens 4150 has a shape in which a plate-like member is slightly curved, and a plurality of protrusions 4151 protruding rearward from the back surface are formed (see FIG. 204). In FIG. 204, the components other than the upper lens 4150 are viewed from the front, but the upper lens 4150 is viewed from the rear.

  A plurality of through holes 4112 penetrating in the front and rear direction are formed in the left and right direction above the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110, and on the upper side of the through holes 4112, the through holes 4113 penetrating in the front and rear direction It is formed to line up in the direction. The upper lens 4150 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper cover 4110 by the plurality of protrusions 4151 being respectively engaged in the through holes 4113 of the upper cover 4110.

  Further, in the state where the decoration unit 4050 is assembled, a marine vessel member 4160 is provided around the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110 (around the logo cover 4130). The ship member 4160 includes a left ship member 4165, a right ship member 4170, a left rope 4175, a middle rope 4180, and a right rope 4185. The left ship member 4165 and the left rope 4175 are disposed on the left side of the logo cover 4130, the right ship member 4170 and the right rope 4185 are disposed on the right side of the logo cover 4130, and the middle rope 4180 is disposed above and above the logo cover 4130. It is disposed on the front side of the lens 4150.

  Further, a corrugated member 4190 is provided below the logo cover 4130. The wavy member 4190 has a wave-like appearance. Speaker openings 4114R and 4114L are formed on the right and left sides of the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110, respectively. On the back side of the speaker openings 4114R and 4114L, speaker punchings 4115R and 4115L are disposed. An upper base 4195 is disposed on the back side of the light emitting mechanism 4200, and speaker openings 4196R and 4196L are formed in the upper base 4195. A speaker (not shown) is disposed on the back side of the speaker punchings 4115R and 4115L and at positions corresponding to the speaker openings 4196R and 4196L.

<Light emitting mechanism 4200>
FIG. 206 is a front view showing a state in which the partition member is removed from the light emitting mechanism. FIG. 207 is a perspective view of the partition member as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the light emitting mechanism 4200 includes an LED substrate 4210 and a partition member 4220. The LED substrate 4210 is provided with a plurality of LEDs (LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s and LEDs 4212). These LEDs are installed to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the surface of the LED substrate 4210. Also, these LEDs are full color LEDs and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue and green.

  The partition member 4220 is formed as a member having a square shape in a front view and having a predetermined length in the front-rear direction. In the partition member 4220, a plurality of openings 4221a to 4221s are formed in a lattice shape on the back surface side, and the openings 4221a to 4221s respectively penetrate the partition member 4220 to the front surface side. Thus, spaces (light passing spaces 4222a to 4222s) having a predetermined spread are formed corresponding to the respective openings 4221a to 4221s. In FIG. 206, the openings 4221a to 4221s are hatched in FIG. 206 for the sake of clarity.

  When the light emitting mechanism 4200 is assembled, the LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s are positioned so as to overlap with the openings 4221 a to 4221 s, respectively. The inner wall surface (portion facing the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s) of the partitioning member 4220 is a reflector that reflects light. Thus, the lights emitted from the LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s pass through the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s, respectively.

  The outer shape of the region where the light passing spaces 4222a to 4222s are formed in the partition member 4220 (the region excluding the region shown by hatching in FIG. 206 from the entire partition member 4220) is the shape of the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110. Similar to each other, in the assembled state of the decoration unit 4050, the outer edge of the area substantially coincides with the periphery of the opening 4111. Accordingly, the light having passed through the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s reaches the background sheet 4132, the logo sheet 4131 and the logo cover 4130 which are arranged to close the opening 4111.

  Further, in the region above the region where the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s are formed, a plurality of through holes 4223 penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the left-right direction in the partition member 4220. When the light emitting mechanism 4200 is assembled, the plurality of LEDs 4212 are positioned to overlap with the through holes 4223, respectively. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 4212 passes through the through hole 4223, respectively.

  When the decorative unit 4050 is assembled, the area where the through holes 4223 are formed in the partition member 4220 (area shown by hatching in FIG. 206) is present above the opening 4111 of the upper cover 4110, The through hole 4223 is positioned so as to overlap with the through hole 4112 (see FIG. 205) of the upper cover 4110. Accordingly, the light having passed through the through hole 4223 of the partition member 4220 enters the back surface 4152 (see FIG. 204) of the upper lens 4150. Thus, the light reaching the upper lens 4150 is transmitted through the upper surface 4153 of the upper lens 4150 and emitted to the outside of the decoration unit 4050.

<Partition member 4220>
FIG. 208 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the partition member shown in FIG. FIG. 209 is a partial enlarged perspective view of one light passage space and its surroundings. FIG. 210 is a rear view of the partition member. FIG. 211 is a cross-sectional view of the partition member. FIG. 212 is a cross-sectional view of the partition member. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of the partition member as viewed from the rear.

  In the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s shown in FIG. 207, the range of the space is defined by the inner wall surface of the partition member 4220. As shown in FIG. 208, the inner wall surface of the partition member 4220 is constituted by the right wall surface 4225a, the left wall surface 4225b, the upper wall surface 4225c, and the lower wall surface 4225d. The light passing spaces 4222a to 4222s are spaces surrounded by the right wall surface 4225a, the left wall surface 4225b, the upper wall surface 4225c, and the lower wall surface 4225d, respectively.

  In FIG. 208, among the inner wall surfaces defining the light passage space 4222h, the right wall surface 4225a, the left wall surface 4225b, and the lower wall surface 4225d are hatched and the upper wall surface 4225c is shaded. In FIG. 209, the periphery of the light passing space 4222h is enlarged and the opening 4221h (see FIG. 206) is shaded to indicate the front edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the front edge of the left wall surface 4225b, and the front edge of the upper wall surface 4225c. The front end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d is indicated by hatching. In FIG. 210, the openings 4221a to 4221s (see FIG. 206) are hatched. The rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225d coincide with the periphery of the openings 4221a to 4221s.

  The right wall surface 4225a, the left wall surface 4225b, the upper wall surface 4225c, and the lower wall surface 4225d are basically formed as substantially flat surfaces, but correspond to the light passing spaces 4222g to 4222l (light passing spaces 4222g to 4222l The upper wall surface 4225 c that defines the upper end of is formed as a surface of a curved shape.

  Specifically, the right wall surface 4225a and the left wall surface 4225b are all flat. The upper ends of the light passing spaces 4222a to 4222f and 4222m to 4222s corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222a to 4222f (light passing spaces located in the upper row) and the light passing spaces 4222m to 4222s (light passing spaces located in the lower row) Light passing spaces 4222a to 4222f corresponding to the upper wall surface 4225c, light passing spaces 4222a to 4222f (light passing spaces located on the upper stage), and light passing spaces 4222g to 4222l (light passing spaces located on the middle stage) , 4222 g to 4222 l) lower wall surface 4225 d is flat. On the other hand, the upper wall surface 4225 c (which defines the upper end of the light passing space 4222 g to 4221) corresponding to the light passing space 4222 g to 4221 2 is curved so as to be upwardly convex.

  FIG. 211 shows a state of being cut along a horizontal plane passing through the right wall surface 4225 a and the left wall surface 4225 b among the inner wall surfaces of the partition member 4220 that defines the light passing spaces 4222 g to 4222 l. FIG. 212 shows a state of being cut along a vertical plane passing through the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d among the inner wall surfaces of the partition member 4220 which defines the light passing spaces 4222 c, 4222 i, 4222 p. In order to make it easy to understand, in FIG. 211, the cross sections of the wall portions constituting the right wall surface 4225a and the left wall surface 4225b among the cut surfaces are hatched. Moreover, in FIG. 212, the cross section of the wall part which comprises the upper wall surface 4225c and the lower wall surface 4225d among the cut surfaces is shown by the oblique line.

  Since the right wall surface 4225a and the left wall surface 4225b are flat, in FIG. 211, the cross section (hatched portion) of the wall portion constituting the right wall surface 4225a and the left wall surface 4225b is linear. Further, since the upper wall surface 4225 c (which defines the upper ends of the light passing spaces 4222 c and 4222 p) corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 c and 4222 p is flat, in FIG. 212, the cross section of the wall portion constituting the upper wall surface 4225 c The hatched portion is straight. Further, the lower wall surface 4225 d (which defines the lower end of the light passage spaces 4222 c, 4222 i) corresponding to the light passage spaces 4222 c, 4222 i is flat, so in FIG. 212, the cross section of the wall portion constituting the lower wall surface 4225 d The hatched portion is straight. On the other hand, since the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passing space 4222 i (defining the upper end of the light passing space 4222 i) is curved, the cross section of the wall portion constituting the upper wall surface 4225 c (hatched line in FIG. The part is curved.

  Further, the front end edge of the right wall surface 4225a is located on the right side in a front view than the rear end edge, and the right wall surface 4225a has an inclination which is biased to the right as it goes from the rear to the front. The front end edge of the left wall surface 4225 b is located on the left side in a front view than the rear end edge, and the left wall surface 4225 b has an inclination which is biased leftward from the rear to the front. Thereby, in FIG. 211, the cross section (hatched portion) of the wall portion constituting the right wall surface 4225a and the left wall surface 4225b has a C shape.

  Similarly, the front end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c is located on the upper side in a front view than the rear end edge, and the upper wall surface 4225 c has an inclination which is biased upward from the rear to the front. The front end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d is located lower than the rear end edge in a front view, and the lower wall surface 4225 d has a slope which is biased downward from the rear to the front.

  The front end edge of the right wall surface 4225a and the front edge of the left wall surface 4225b in relation to the configuration of the inner wall surface (right wall surface 4225a, left wall surface 4225b, upper wall surface 4225c, and lower wall surface 4225d) of the partition member 4220 as described above; The area of the figure surrounded by the front end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c and the front end edge of the lower wall surface 4225d is the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and It is larger than the area of the figure enclosed by the rear end edge of the wall surface 4225 d.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209, the figure surrounded by the front edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the front edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the front edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and the front edge of the lower wall surface 4225d, and the rear edge of the right wall surface 4225a The figure surrounded by the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225d are both substantially rectangular in a front view. A rectangle surrounded by four sides indicated by hatching in FIG. 209 is larger than a hatched rectangle. In the rectangle, the upper side and the lower side are formed in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and the right side and the left side are formed in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  In addition, two light passing spaces (for example, light passing space 4222h and light passing space 4222i) adjacent to the left and right via the partition member 4220, and two light passing spaces (for example, light passing space 4222b and light passing adjacent to one another vertically) When focusing on the space 4222h, the distance between the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the left light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222h) and the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the right light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222i) Is greater than the distance between the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the lower light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222 h) and the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the upper light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222 b) There is.

  Specifically, "the distance between the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the left light passage space and the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the right light passage space" is the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the left light passage space It is represented by the average of the distances (the lengths shown by X (1) to X (15) in FIG. 210) with the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passing space on the right side. Further, “the distance between the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the lower light passage space and the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the upper light passage space” is the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the lower light passage space It is represented by the average of the distance (the length shown by Y (1) to Y (12) in FIG. 210) with the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the upper light passage space. The average length of X (1) to X (15) is larger than the average length of Y (1) to Y (12).

  In FIG. 210, X (1) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222a and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222b. X (2) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222b and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222c. X (3) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222c and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222d. X (4) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222d and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222e. X (5) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222e and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222f. X (6) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222g and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222h. X (7) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222h and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222i. X (8) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222i and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222j. X (9) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222j and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222k. X (10) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222k and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222l. X (11) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222m and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222n. X (12) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222n and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222p. X (13) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222p and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222q. X (14) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222q and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222r. X (15) is the distance between the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passage space 4222r and the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b corresponding to the light passage space 4222s.

  Y (1) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 g and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 a. Y (2) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 m and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 g. Y (3) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 h and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 b. Y (4) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 n and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 h. Y (5) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 i and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 c. Y (6) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 p and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 i. Y (7) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 j and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 d. Y (8) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 q and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 j. Y (9) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 k and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 e. Y (10) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 r and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 k. Y (11) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 l and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 f. Y (12) is the distance between the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passage space 4222 s and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passage space 4222 l.

  Further, the wall portions constituting the right wall surface 4225a, the left wall surface 4225b, the upper wall surface 4225c, and the lower wall surface 4225d have a substantially uniform thickness. Due to this, the two light passing spaces (for example, the light passing space 4222h and the light passing space 4222i) adjacent to the left and right through the partition member 4220 and the two light passing spaces (for example, the light passing) adjacent to the upper and lower sides When focusing on the space 4222b and the light passing space 4222h), the wall portion constituting the right wall surface 4225a corresponding to the light passing space on the left side (for example, the light passing space 4222h) and the light passing space on the right side (for example, the light passing space 4222i) When viewed from the rear, a cavity is formed between the wall portion constituting the left wall surface 4225 b corresponding to)) (see FIG. 213). Similarly, a wall portion constituting the upper wall surface 4225c corresponding to the lower light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222h) and a lower wall surface 4225d corresponding to the upper light passage space (for example the light passage space 4222b) A cavity is formed between the wall and the wall.

  As an example of such a cavity, in FIG. 213, a cavity 4228a formed between the light passage space 4222h and the light passage space 4222i, and a cavity formed between the light passage space 4222b and the light passage space 4222h. 4228b is shown. It can be seen from the figure that the cavity 4228a has a triangular prismatic shape.

  Here, when the light emitting mechanism 4200 is assembled, the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225d are LED substrates It almost abuts on the surface of 4210. Therefore, the lights emitted from the LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s do not travel to the cavity portion, and all enter the inside of the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s.

<Light-emitting production in decoration unit 4050>
In the present embodiment, light emitting effects using LEDs (LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s and LEDs 4212) are performed by the decoration unit 4050 configured as described above.

  As described above, in the partition member 4220, light passing spaces 4222a to 4222s are formed in a matrix as spaces through which light emitted from the LEDs 4211a to 4211s can pass. When focusing on two light passing spaces adjacent to each other on the left and right and two light passing spaces adjacent to the upper and lower sides through the partition member 4220, between the light passing space on the left side and the light passing space on the right side, An extending partition member 4220 is present, and the left light passage space and the right light passage space are separated by the partition member 4220. In addition, a partition member 4220 extending in the left-right direction exists between the lower light passage space and the upper light passage space, and the lower light passage space and the upper light passage space are the partitions. It is separated by members 4220.

  As described above, the partition member 4220 is configured by the portion extending in the vertical direction and the portion extending in the left and right direction, and emitted from the LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s by the partition portions in the vertical direction and the left and right direction. The space through which the light can pass is formed in a lattice. As described above, on the front side of the partition member 4220, the background sheet 4132, the logo sheet 4131, and the logo cover 4130 are disposed. Therefore, when the LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s are turned on, it is possible to produce a shade corresponding to the partition on the logo cover 4130, and as a result, a portion of the logo cover 4130 irradiated by the LEDs 4211 a to 4211 s Can be divided by the shade, and the irradiation points by the LEDs 4211a to 4211s can be dotted (to express a feeling of dots). Thereby, for example, in the freeze effect performed when the freeze described in the seventh embodiment occurs, it is possible to make the personal computer appear to be frozen by using the dot feeling.

  On the other hand, as described above, the logo cover 4130 is decorated with a predetermined three-dimensional shape (e.g., a character shape indicating a logo or the like according to the model), and is normally displayed (the freeze effect described above) It is desirable to make the shade corresponding to the above-mentioned partition part inconspicuous when the effect such as is not performed).

  In this respect, in this embodiment, the area of the figure surrounded by the front end edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the front end edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the front end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and the front edge of the lower wall surface 4225d is the rear of the right wall surface 4225a. The area is larger than the area of the figure surrounded by the end edge, the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225 b, the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225 c, and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225 d (see FIG. 209). That is, the light passage spaces 4222 a to 4222 s are configured such that the range is expanded in the front direction rather than in the rear direction. Thereby, it is possible to increase the incident angle when the light emitted from the LEDs 4211a to 4211s is reflected on the inner wall surface (right wall surface 4225a, left wall surface 4225b, upper wall surface 4225c, and lower wall surface 4225d) of the partition member 4220 The light can be collected in the vicinity of the partition portion of the partition member 4220. As a result, the shadow produced on the logo cover 4130 can be thinned.

  In particular, as described above, since the upper wall surface 4225 c is configured to be curved, it is possible to collect light more efficiently in the vicinity of the partition portion extending in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to make the shade corresponding to the partition part extending in the left and right direction among the shades generated in the logo cover 4130 thinner than the shade corresponding to the partition part extending in the up and down direction. It is possible to make a difference in density. As a result, compared to the case where these shades occur with the same degree of darkness, it is possible to reduce the appearance of dot feeling on the appearance, and create a situation where the shade is difficult for the player to perceive. it can.

<Design of the sea motif>
FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the partition member as viewed from above. FIG. 215 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting mechanism and the background sheet. FIG. 216 is a perspective view of the upper cover as viewed from above. FIG. 217 is a cross-sectional view showing the partition member, the upper cover, the logo cover, the logo sheet, and the background sheet. FIG. 218 is an exploded front view showing the partition member, the upper cover, and the corrugated member. FIG. 219 is a front view extracting and showing the partition member, the upper cover, and the corrugated member in a state where the decoration unit is assembled.

  As shown in FIG. 214, the partition member 4220 has a corrugated structure 4230 near the front end of the lower portion. The wavelike structure portion 4230 is configured by connecting a plurality of mountain-like portions 4230 a to 4230 d which are curved and formed in a mountain-like shape. The wavelike structure 4230 is continuous with the lower wall surface 4225 d (which defines the lower end of the light passing space 4222 m to 4222 s) corresponding to the light passing space 4222 m to 4222 s (the light passing space located at the lower stage). The lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passing space 4222 m to 4222 s has an irregularly curved shape. In addition, in FIG. 214, the upper surface of the wavelike structure 4230 is shown by hatching, and the front end edge of the wavelike structure 4230 is shown in black, in order to make it easy to understand.

  The front end edge of the wavelike structure 4230 is located forward of the front end edge of the inner wall surface (right wall surface 4225a, left wall surface 4225b, upper wall surface 4225c, and lower wall surface 4225d) of the partition member 4220, and the background sheet 4132 is , And the back surface thereof is arranged to abut the front end edge of the wavelike structure 4230. Therefore, a certain gap is generated between the inner wall surface (right wall surface 4225 a, left wall surface 4225 b, upper wall surface 4225 c, and lower wall surface 4225 d) of the partition member 4220 and the back surface of the background sheet 4132. The wall surface and the back surface of the background sheet 4132 will not abut (see FIG. 217).

  As shown in FIG. 215, the lower edge 4132a of the background sheet 4132 has a shape similar to the wavelike structure 4230, and the lower edge 4132a of the background sheet 4132 is the partition member 4220 and the background sheet 4132. It is arranged to overlap the front end edge of the wavelike structure 4230 in a front view. In addition, as shown in FIG. 216, the lower edge 4111a located on the lower side of the peripheral edge of the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110 also has a shape similar to the wavelike structure 4230. In FIG. 216, the lower edge 4111 a of the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110 is shown in black.

  In addition, the logo cover 4130 and the logo sheet 4131 also have a shape whose lower edge resembles the wavelike structure 4230 (see FIG. 205). Thereby, the logo sheet 4131 is arranged such that the lower edge portion thereof is in agreement with the front end of the lower edge portion 4111 a of the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110. Logo cover 4130 is arranged such that substantially the entire rear surface abuts on the surface of logo sheet 4131. On the other hand, background sheet 4132 is arranged such that the lower edge 4132 a and its vicinity coincide with the rear end of lower edge 4111 a of opening 4111 in upper cover 4110. Therefore, the background sheet 4132 and the logo sheet 4131 are disposed apart from each other by the length of the lower edge 4111a of the upper cover 4110 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 217).

  In FIG. 217, while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the partition member 4220, the upper cover 4110, the logo cover 4130, the logo sheet 4131, and the background sheet 4132 in a state where the decorative unit 4050 is assembled, It shows how it was cut by a surface. In order to make it easy to understand, in the drawing, the wavy structure 4230 of the partition member 4220 and the lower edge 4111a of the upper cover 4110 are hatched, the logo cover 4130 and the background sheet 4132 are hatched, and the light passage space 4222i is black. It shows.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 218, the upper edge 4190a of the wavelike member 4190 (see FIG. 203) also has a shape similar to the wavelike structure 4230 of the partition member 4220 and the lower edge 4111a of the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110. ing. In the assembled state of the decoration unit 4050, the wavelike member 4190 is disposed on the front side of the upper cover 4110, and the wavelike structure of the upper edge 4190a of the wavelike member 4190 and the lower edge 4111a of the upper cover 4110 and the partition member 4220 4230 is positioned so as to overlap in a front view (see FIG. 219).

  In addition, a marine vessel member 4160 (see FIG. 204) is provided around the opening 4111 in the upper cover 4110 (around the logo cover 4130). The left side ship member 4165 and the right side ship member 4170 that are components of the ship member 4160 each have an appearance representing an object (wedge and rudder) associated with the ship. As mentioned above, the decoration unit 4050 has a design which is reminiscent of the sea as a whole.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the shade corresponding to the partition part extending in the lateral direction among the shades generated in the logo cover 4130 is thinner than the shade corresponding to the partition part extending in the vertical direction can do. As a result, the shade corresponding to the vertically extending partition portion is relatively easy to be perceived by the player.

  The shade is a partition that separates the light passing spaces 4222a, 4222g, 4222m from the light passing spaces 4222b, 4222h, 4222n, a partition that separates the light passing spaces 4222b, 4222h, 4222n from the light passing spaces 4222c, 4222i, 4222p, Partitions that separate the light passing spaces 4222c, 4222i, 4222p from the light passing spaces 4222d, 4222j, 4222q, partitions that separate the light passing spaces 4222d, 4222j, 4222q from the light passing spaces 4222e, 4222k, 4222r, and light passing It corresponds to the partition part which separates the space 4222e, 4222k, 4222r and the light passage space 4222f, 4222l, 4222s. Therefore, when the player perceives the shadow, the shadow is recognized as five vertical lines corresponding to these partition portions.

  And the wavelike member 4190 which has the shape of a wave is arranged on the lower front side of the logo cover 4130. Thereby, depending on the angle at which the decoration unit 4050 is viewed, the wavelike member 4190 and the above-mentioned five vertical lines can be combined to give a so-called bowl-like appearance, as if it were waving. It can create a three-dimensional effect. In addition, since the partition portion extending in the vertical direction is disposed in a portion corresponding to a peak and a portion corresponding to a valley in the wavy member 4190 (see FIG. 219), the five vertical lines also correspond to the peak and the valley The above-mentioned three-dimensional effect can be emphasized. Further, as shown in FIG. 216, a lens mounting surface 4140 is provided on the upper portion of the upper cover 4110. The lens mounting surface 4140 is a mounting position of the upper lens 4150 (see FIG. 205) and is a portion covered by the upper lens 4150 from above. The lens mounting surface 4140 is formed such that the central portion thereof protrudes forward, and the front end of the lens mounting surface 4140 is located forward of the front end of the lower edge 4111 a at the opening 4111. This makes it possible to express the view of the world as if waves were coming in.

<Ship Material 4160>
FIG. 220 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the area around the left speaker opening in the upper cover as viewed from the front. FIG. 221 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the area around the left speaker opening in the upper cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 222 is an exploded perspective view of the left rope, the left marine vessel member, and the left portion of the middle rope as viewed from the front. FIG. 223 is an exploded perspective view of the left rope, the left marine vessel member, and the left portion of the middle rope as viewed from the rear. FIG. 224 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the area around the right speaker opening in the upper cover as viewed from the front. FIG. 225 is an exploded perspective view of the right portion of the middle rope, the right marine vessel member, and the right rope as viewed from the front. FIG. 226 is an exploded perspective view of the right side portion of the middle rope, the right marine vessel member, and the right rope as viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, a rope engaging portion 4121 is formed in the vicinity of the left speaker opening 4114L on the front side of the upper cover 4110. In FIG. 220, the rope engaging portion 4121 is indicated by oblique lines. The rope engaging portion 4121 has a curved shape and is cut away, and has a structure recessed from the peripheral surface. In addition, a rope engaging portion 4122 is formed in the vicinity of the left speaker opening 4114L of the upper cover 4110. The rope engaging portion 4122 is formed as a rectangular opening in a front view. On the back side of the rope engaging portion 4122, the rope engaging surface 4122a corresponding to one of the four sides defining the periphery of the rectangular opening is positioned forward of the surface corresponding to the other three sides. ing. In FIG. 221, the rope engaging surface 4122a is indicated by oblique lines.

  Further, on the front side of the upper cover 4110, a ring portion 4123 having a ring shape is formed above the left speaker opening 4114L. The ring portion 4123 is composed of two arc-shaped portions (a rope contact portion 4123a and a hook contact portion 4123b). In FIG. 220, the rope contact portion 4123a and the heel contact portion 4123b are indicated by diagonal lines. The rope contact portion 4123a has a substantially flat front surface, whereas the heel contact portion 4123b has a curved surface in which the front surface is slightly recessed. In addition, an inner portion of the ring portion 4123 is an opening, and a protrusion 4124 protruding inward is formed on the periphery of the opening.

  As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, an upper cover engaging portion 4176 is formed on the back side of the left rope 4175. In FIG. 223, the upper cover engaging portion 4176 is hatched. The upper cover engaging portion 4176 has a shape similar to the rope engaging portion 4121 of the upper cover 4110 in a rear view, and has a structure protruding from the periphery. In addition, an upper cover engaging portion 4177 is formed on the back side of the left rope 4175. The upper cover engaging portion 4177 has a claw 4177a protruding rightward (left side in FIG. 223) at the rear end.

  When the ship member 4160 is attached to the upper cover 4110, the upper cover engaging portion 4176 of the left rope 4175 is fitted to the rope engaging portion 4121 of the upper cover 4110. As a result, the claws 4177a of the left rope 4175 abut on the rope engaging surface 4122a of the upper cover 4110, and the forward movement of the claws 4177a of the left rope 4175 is restricted. Thus, the left rope 4175 is locked by the rope engaging portion 4122 of the upper cover 4110.

  In addition, an upper cover abutting surface 4178 a is provided on the back side of the left rope 4175. The upper cover contact surface 4178a is formed as a substantially flat surface. At the front side of the left rope 4175, a hook contact surface 4178b is provided at a position corresponding to the upper cover contact surface 4178a. The wedge contact surface 4178 b is a slightly concave curved surface.

  Further, a screw hole 4179a and a boss 4179b are formed in the left rope 4175. The left rope 4175 is attached to the upper cover 4110 by screwing a screw inserted through the screw hole 4125a of the upper cover 4110 into a hole formed in the boss 4179b of the left rope 4175. In this state, the upper cover contact surface 4178 a of the left rope 4175 contacts the rope contact portion 4123 a of the upper cover 4110. Further, the formation position of the screw hole 4179a in the left rope 4175 corresponds to the formation position of the screw hole 4125b in the upper cover 4110.

  The left marine vessel member 4165 has a ring 4166 at the top. The ring portion 4166 is formed in a ring shape, and has a notch 4166 a cut in a concave shape on the front side. On the back side of the left-side ship member 4165, a protrusion 4167 slightly protruding rearward is formed, and a plurality of bosses 4168 (4168a, 4168b, and 4168c) are formed.

  Further, at the left end of the middle rope 4180, a protrusion accommodating portion 4181a is formed. The protrusion accommodating portion 4181a has a relatively small ring structure, and the inner portion of the protrusion accommodating portion 4181a is a hole similar to a screw hole. In the middle rope 4180, a hook contact portion 4182a, a screw hole 4183a, and a boss 4184 are formed.

  When the ship member 4160 is attached to the upper cover 4110, the back side portion of the ring portion 4166 of the left ship member 4165 abuts on the hook contact portion 4123b of the upper cover 4110 and the hook contact surface 4178b of the left rope 4175 . In addition, the rear end of the protrusion 4167 in the left marine vessel member 4165 is positioned so as to be close to the protrusion 4124 of the upper cover 4110. Then, the protrusion 4167 of the left side ship member 4165 penetrates the hole formed in the protrusion accommodating portion 4181a of the middle rope 4180, and the protrusion accommodating portion 4181a is positioned so as to surround the protrusion 4167. Thus, the protrusion accommodation portion 4181a of the middle rope 4180 is disposed between the upper cover 4110 and the left marine member 4165.

  In the middle rope 4180, the vicinity of the protrusion accommodating portion 4181a is disposed on the back side of the ring portion 4166 of the left side boat member 4165, while the portion corresponding to the hook contact portion 4123b of the upper cover 4110 in the front view is the left side boat member It is disposed on the front side of the ring portion 4166 in 4165. Specifically, the portion in the middle rope 4180 has a shape on the back side corresponding to the notch 4166a of the left-side ship member 4165, and is arranged to fit in the notch 4166a.

  Further, the heel contact portion 4182 a of the middle rope 4180 is disposed on the back side of the pointed portion 4169 of the left-side boat member 4165. Specifically, the shape of the hook contact portion 4182a corresponds to the back side shape of the pointed head 4169, and the left ship member 4165 has the pointed head 4169 fitted to the hook contact portion 4182a of the middle rope 4180. To be arranged. Further, the formation portion of the screw hole 4183a in the middle rope 4180 is disposed in the gap portion 4123c (the gap portion existing between the rope contact portion 4123a and the hook contact portion 4123b) in the upper cover 4110, and the left ship member 4165 Are positioned on the back side of the ring 4166.

  The formation position of the screw hole 4183a in the middle rope 4180 corresponds to the formation position of the boss 4168a in the left-side ship member 4165. The middle rope 4180 is attached to the left ship member 4165 by screwing the screw through the screw hole 4183a of the middle rope 4180 into the hole formed in the boss 4168a of the left ship member 4165.

  Further, the formation position of the boss portion 4168 b in the left-side ship member 4165 corresponds to the formation position of the screw hole 4125 b in the upper cover 4110 and the screw hole 4179 a in the left rope 4175. The upper cover 4110, the left rope 4175, and the left ship are screwed by screwing screws inserted through the screw holes 4125b of the upper cover 4110 and the screw holes 4179a of the left rope 4175 into the holes formed in the boss 4168b of the left ship member 4165. The member 4165 is fixed.

  Further, the formation position of the boss portion 4168 c in the left-side ship member 4165 corresponds to the formation position of the screw hole 4125 c in the upper cover 4110. The upper cover 4110 and the left boat member 4165 are fixed by screwing a screw through which the screw hole 4125 c of the upper cover 4110 is inserted into a hole formed in the boss 4168 c of the left boat member 4165.

  Further, the formation position of the boss portion 4184 in the middle rope 4180 corresponds to the formation position of the screw hole 4125 d in the upper cover 4110. The upper cover 4110 and the middle rope 4180 are fixed by screwing a screw through which the screw hole 4125 d of the upper cover 4110 is inserted into the hole formed in the boss 4184 of the middle rope 4180.

  As shown in FIG. 224, on the front side of the upper cover 4110, a plurality of rudder contact portions 4126 are formed in the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the right speaker opening 4114LR. The rudder contact portion 4126 is a curved surface in which the surface on the front side is slightly recessed. Further, in the vicinity of one rudder contact portion 4126, a protrusion facing portion 4127 is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, the right ship member 4170 includes a plurality of radially extending radial portions 4171. Further, on the back side of one radial portion 4171, a protrusion 4172 slightly projecting rearward is formed. Further, a protrusion accommodating portion 4181 b is formed at the right end portion of the middle rope 4180. The protrusion accommodating portion 4181 b has a relatively small ring structure, like the protrusion accommodating portion 4181 a, and the inner portion of the protrusion accommodating portion 4181 b is a hole similar to the screw hole. A notch 4181 c is formed around the protrusion accommodating portion 4181 b. The notch 4181 c has a structure in which the periphery of the protrusion accommodating portion 4181 b is cut in a rectangular shape. Further, a rudder contact portion 4182 b is formed on the middle rope 4180.

  Further, a protrusion accommodating portion 4186 is formed at the left end portion of the right rope 4185. The protrusion accommodating portion 4186 has a relatively small ring structure like the protrusion accommodating portions 4181a and 4181b of the middle rope 4180, and the inner portion of the protrusion accommodating portion 4186 is a hole similar to the screw hole. . Further, a rudder contact portion 4187 and a screw hole 4188 are formed in the right rope 4185.

  When the ship member 4160 is attached to the upper cover 4110, the rear side portion of the radial portion 4171 of the right ship member 4170 is the rudder contact portion 4126 of the upper cover 4110, the rudder contact portion 4182b of the middle rope 4180, and , And abut on the rudder contact portion 4187 of the right rope 4185. The rudder contact portion 4126 of the upper cover 4110, the rudder contact portion 4182b of the middle rope 4180, and the rudder contact portion 4187 of the right rope 4185 respectively have a shape corresponding to the rear side shape of the radial portion 4171 The right side ship member 4170 is disposed such that each radial portion 4171 is fitted to the upper cover 4110, the middle rope 4180, and the right rope 4185.

  In addition, the middle rope 4180 is arranged such that the rear surface side portion of the protrusion accommodation portion 4181 b abuts on the protrusion facing portion 4127 of the upper cover 4110. In the right rope 4185, the upper left corner of the protrusion accommodating portion 4186 is engaged with the notch 4181c of the middle rope 4180, and the hole formed in the protrusion accommodating portion 4181b of the middle rope 4180 and the protrusion accommodating portion 4186 of the right rope 4185 It communicates with the hole formed in the The protrusion 4172 in the right side ship member 4170 penetrates the hole formed in the protrusion accommodating portion 4186 of the right rope 4185, and the protrusion accommodating portion 4186 of the right rope 4185 and the protrusion accommodating portion 4181b of the middle rope 4180 respectively It is positioned so as to surround the protrusion 4172 of the ship member 4170. In this manner, the protrusion accommodation portion 4186 of the right rope 4185 and the protrusion accommodation portion 4181 b of the middle rope 4180 are disposed between the upper cover 4110 and the right boat member 4170.

  Further, the formation position of the boss portion 4173 a in the right-side ship member 4170 corresponds to the formation position of the screw hole 4125 e in the upper cover 4110. The upper cover 4110 and the right boat member 4170 are fixed by screwing a screw, into which the screw hole 4125e of the upper cover 4110 is inserted, into a hole formed in the boss 4173a of the right boat member 4170.

  In addition, the formation position of the boss 4173 b in the right side ship member 4170 corresponds to the formation position of the screw hole 4188 in the right rope 4185. The right rope 4185 and the right boat member 4170 are fixed by screwing the screw through the screw hole 4188 of the right rope 4185 into the hole formed in the boss 4173 b of the right boat member 4170.

  Since the ship member 4160 is configured as described above, it can be simply and stably attached to the upper cover 4110 while maintaining the positional relationship of the components in the assembly process. Also, the strength can be secured even after the marine vessel member 4160 is attached to the upper cover 4110.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix D>
BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine that includes a light emitting decorative portion and can perform effects by light emission of a light source is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013686).

  Generally, in the gaming machine provided with the light emitting means as described above, it is required to improve the interest of the game by performing various effects. The inventor of the present invention can create new entertainment characteristics by devising the members disposed in the passage route of the light emitted from the light emitting means in the process of earnestly examining such a gaming machine. It came to the idea that

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) A plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 4211a to 4211s) capable of emitting light;
A partition member (partition member 4220) for partitioning a passage route of light emitted from one light emitting unit and a passage route of light emitted from another light emitting unit;
The partition member includes a first partition (a partition extending in the vertical direction) and a second partition (a partition extending in the horizontal direction) formed in different directions, and the first partition and A plurality of light passage spaces (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass are formed by the second partition portion,
One light passage space among the plurality of light passage spaces is described as a first light passage space (for example, a light passage space 4222h), and the first light passage space is separated from the first light passage space via the first partition part. The adjacent light passage space is described as a second light passage space (for example, light passage space 4222i), and the third light passage space is adjacent to the first light passage space via the second partition. When the light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222 b) is described, the width of the second partition that separates the first light passing space from the third light passing space is the first light passing space The second partition part, which is smaller than the width of the first partition part that separates the second light passage space and the second light passage space, and that separates the first light passage space from the third light passage space, The part facing the light passage space of is curved,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, the partitioning members (partitioning members 4220) are first partitioning portions (partitioning portions extending in the vertical direction) and second partitioning portions (left and right) which are formed in directions different from each other. From the light emitting means (LEDs 4211a to 4211s) by the first partition (the partition extending in the vertical direction) and the second partition (the partition extending in the left and right direction). A plurality of light passage spaces (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) through which emitted light can pass are formed. Here, one light passage space among the plurality of light passage spaces (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) is referred to as a first light passage space (for example, light passage space 4222h), and the first light passage space ( For example, a light passing space adjacent to the light passing space 4222h) via the first partition (a partition extending in the vertical direction) is referred to as a second light passing space (for example, a light passing space 4222i), A third light passing space (eg, light passing space) is formed adjacent to the first light passing space (eg, light passing space 4222 h) via the second partition (a partition portion extending in the left-right direction) with respect to the first light passing space. It is written as space 4222 b). The width of the second partition (a partition extending in the left-right direction) separating the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) and the third light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222b) is More than the width of the first partition (a partition extending in the vertical direction) separating the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) and the second light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222i) It is getting smaller. In addition, a second partition (a partition extending in the left-right direction) separating the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) and the third light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222b) A portion facing the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) is curved. The present inventor uses the first partition (the partition extending in the vertical direction) and the second partition (the partition extending in the left and right direction) in this manner to form the first partition (the vertical). Visual effect that makes it easier for the player to perceive the second partition (the partition extending in the left-right direction) more brightly than the other where the second partition (the partition extends) Found that it is possible to create Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, the brightness in the direction in which the first partition (the partition extending in the vertical direction) is formed and the second partition (in the left-right direction) It is possible to make a difference with the brightness in the direction in which the existing partition portion is formed, and such a difference in brightness can be used for various effects.

(D-2) Light emitting means (LEDs 4211a to 4211s) capable of emitting light;
A partition member (partition member 4220) for defining a light passage space (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) through which light emitted from one of the light emitting means can pass.
The partition member includes an inner side surface (inner wall surface) facing the light passage space,
The inner surface is a first surface (right wall surface 4225a) and a second surface (left wall surface 4225b) facing each other, and a third surface (the second surface connecting the first surface and the second surface) An upper wall surface 4225 c) and the first surface and the second surface are formed flat, while the third surface is formed to be curved,
The area of the figure formed by the front edge of the inner side is larger than the area of the figure formed by the rear edge of the inner side,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, the partition member (partition member 4220) is a light passage space (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) through which light emitted from one of the light emitting means (LEDs 4211a to 4211s) can pass. And an inner side surface (inner wall surface) facing the light passage space (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s). The inner side surface (inner wall surface) includes a first surface (right wall surface 4225a) and a second surface (left wall surface 4225b) opposite to each other, and a first surface (right wall surface 4225a) and a second surface (left wall surface) 4225b), and the first surface (right wall surface 4225a) and the second surface (left wall surface 4225b) are formed flat, while the third surface is connected. The upper wall surface 4225 c is formed to be curved. Further, the area of the figure formed by the front end edge of the inner side surface (inner wall surface) is larger than the area of the figure formed by the rear end edge of the inner side surface (inner wall surface). The present inventor uses the partition member (partition member 4220) in this manner to form a third surface rather than a portion where the first surface (right wall surface 4225a) and the second surface (left wall surface 4225b) exist. It has been found that the portion where the (upper wall surface 4225c) exists can create a visual effect that makes it easier for the player to perceive it brighter. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to make a difference in brightness according to the position of the partition member (partition member 4220), and such a difference in brightness Can be used for various effects.

(D-3) A plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 4211a to 4211s) capable of emitting light;
A base member (upper cover 4110) in which an opening (opening 4111) is formed;
An irradiation target member (logo cover 4130) which is disposed so as to close at least a part of the opening in a front view and which is irradiated by the light emitted from the light emitting means;
A partition member (partition member 4220) disposed between the light emitting means and the irradiation target member and defining a plurality of light passing spaces (light passing spaces 4222a to 4222s) through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass. , And
One light passage space among the plurality of light passage spaces is described as a first light passage space (for example, light passage space 4222h), and the partition is provided on a predetermined direction side (right side) of the first light passage space. A light passage space adjacent to the first light passage space via a member is referred to as a second light passage space (for example, a light passage space 4222i), and the predetermined direction side of the first light passage space When the light passing space adjacent to the first light passing space via the partition member on the different direction side (upper side) is referred to as a third light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222 b), the first The partition member for separating the light passage space and the second light passage space is a portion facing the first light passage space (right wall surface 4225a) and a portion facing the second light passage space (left wall surface 4225b) are both formed flat On the other hand, the partition member for separating the first light passage space and the third light passage space is a portion (upper wall surface 4225 c) facing the first light passage space and the third light passage. At least one of the portions facing the space (lower wall surface 4225d) is curved and formed,
A curved structure is continuously formed on an opening edge (lower edge 4111a) defining the periphery of the opening in the base member.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, the partitioning member (partitioning member 4220) disposed between the light emitting means (LEDs 4211a to 4211s) and the irradiation target member (logo cover 4130) is a light emitting means (LED 4211a to 42n) A plurality of light passage spaces (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) through which light emitted from the light source 4211s can pass are defined. Here, one light passage space among the plurality of light passage spaces (light passage spaces 4222a to 4222s) is referred to as a first light passage space (for example, light passage space 4222h), and the first light passage space ( For example, the second light passing space adjacent to the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) via the partitioning member (the partitioning member 4220) on the predetermined direction side (right side) of the light passing space 4222h) A passage member (for example, a light passage space 4222i) is described as a partition member (a partition member 4220 on the side (upper side) different from the predetermined direction side (right side) of the first light passage space (for example, a light passage space 4222h). A light passing space adjacent to the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) via the) is denoted as a third light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222b). The partition member (partition member 4220) for separating the first light passing space (for example, light passing space 4222h) and the second light passing space (for example, light passing space 4222i) is a first light passing space (for example, While the portion facing the light passing space 4222h) (right wall surface 4225a) and the portion facing the second light passing space (for example, light passing space 4222i) (left wall surface 4225b) are both formed flat, A partition member (partition member 4220) for separating the first light passing space (for example, light passing space 4222h) and the third light passing space (for example, light passing space 4222b) is a first light passing space (for example, At least one of a portion (upper wall surface 4225 c) facing the light passage space 4222 h) and a portion (lower wall surface 4225 d) facing the third light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222 b) There are formed curved. The present inventor configures the partitioning member (partitioning member 4220) in this manner to allow the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) and the second light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222i). Of the first light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222h) and the third light passage space (for example, the light passage space 4222b) rather than the portion separating the It has been found that it is possible to create a visual effect that makes it easier to be perceived as bright as seen from the viewpoint. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to make a difference in brightness according to the position of the partition member (partition member 4220), and such a difference in brightness Can be used for various effects.

  For example, the portion separating the first light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222h) and the second light passing space (for example, the light passing space 4222i) may be relatively dark, and this may be used If it does, shadow can be produced in the position corresponding to the partition part among irradiation object members (logo cover 4130). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, an opening (opening 4111) is formed in the base member (upper cover 4110), and the irradiation target member (logo cover 4130) is the opening ( It is arranged to close at least a part of the opening 4111). In addition, a curved structure is continuously formed at the opening edge (lower edge 4111 a) that defines the periphery of the opening (opening 4111) formed in the base member (upper cover 4110). Therefore, the continuous structure of the curved structure formed on the periphery of the opening (opening 4111) and the shade generated on the irradiation target member (logo cover 4130) (inside the opening (opening 4111)) are simultaneously viewed by the player. It will come in. As a result, it is possible to realize a new visual expression by combining such a curved structure and the shade in the player's brain, and a novel rendering effect which has not existed conventionally is exhibited. There are times when you can do it.

  In the ninth embodiment, two light passing spaces (for example, the light passing space 4222h and the light passing space 4222i) adjacent to the left and right through the partition member 4220 and two light passing spaces (for example, the light passing space) vertically adjacent to each other When focusing on 4222 b and the light passing space 4222 h), “the distance between the right wall face 4225 a corresponding to the light passing space on the left side and the left wall face 4225 b corresponding to the light passing space on the right side” The width is represented by the average of the lengths shown by X (1) to X (15) in FIG. 210, and “the upper wall surface 4225c corresponding to the lower light passage space and the lower wall surface corresponding to the upper The “distance to 4225 d” (the width of the partition portion extending in the left-right direction) has been described as being represented by an average of the lengths shown by Y (1) to Y (12) in FIG. That is, "the width of the partition portion extending in the vertical direction" is an average value of all (15) partition portions extending in the vertical direction, and "the width of the partition portion extending in the horizontal direction" is It has been described as the average value of all (12) partition portions extending in the left-right direction. However, in the present invention, “the width of the partition part extending in the vertical direction” may be an average value of some of the partition parts extending in the vertical direction, or “a partition extending in the horizontal direction The “width of the portion” may be an average value of some of the partition portions extending in the left-right direction. For example, light passing spaces (light passing spaces 4222a, 4222g, 4222m) formed in the leftmost row, light passing spaces formed in the rightmost row (light passing spaces 4222f, 4222l, 4222s), light formed in the lower stage The shape of the passage space (light passage space 4222 m to 4222 s) is largely different from the shape of the average light passage space, and therefore, for the partition portions facing these light passage spaces, the average value is calculated. It may be excluded from the subject. For example, as “the width of the partition portion extending in the vertical direction”, an average value of X (2) to X (4) and X (7) to X (9) may be adopted, or X (7) ) To X (9) may be employed. In addition, as “the width of the partition portion extending in the left-right direction”, an average value of Y (3), Y (5), Y (7), and Y (9) may be adopted.

  Further, in the above description, “the width of the partition portion extending in the vertical direction” is the distance between the right wall surface 4225a and the left wall surface 4225b at the rear end edge of the partition portion, and “the partition portion extending in the horizontal direction Is assumed to be the distance between the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d at the rear end edge of the partition portion. However, in the present invention, "the width of the vertically extending partition portion" and the "width of the horizontally extending partition portion" are respectively the widths in the front portion relative to the rear end edge of the partition portion. It may be For example, when the partition portion is cut at the vertical plane at the center in the front-rear direction of the partition portion or a portion corresponding to 1⁄3 to 2⁄3 from the front end, the right wall surface 4225 a and the left wall surface 4225 b in the cut surface And the distance between the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d in the cut surface may be “width of the partition portion extending in the lateral direction”. In the present invention, if the “width of the vertically extending partition portion” obtained in this manner is larger than the “width of the horizontally extending partition portion”, at the rear end edge of the partition portion, The “distance between the right wall surface 4225 a and the left wall surface 4225 b” may be smaller than the “distance between the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d”.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, it has been described that only the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 g to 4222 1 (the light passing space located in the middle) is curved. However, in the present invention, it is possible to curve any inner wall surface. For example, in addition to the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 g to 4222 l (the light passing space located in the middle), the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 f (the light passing space located in the upper row) is also curved It is also possible to let Alternatively, instead of the upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 g to 4222 l (the light passing space located in the middle), the lower wall surface 4225 d corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 f (the light passing space located in the upper stage) is curved. It is also possible to let Further, the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d may all be curved. In addition to the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d, the right wall surface 4225 a and the left wall surface 4225 b may also be curved. Alternatively, instead of the upper wall surface 4225 c and / or the lower wall surface 4225 d, the right wall surface 4225 a and / or the left wall surface 4225 b may be curved. In this case, the “width of the partition portion extending in the left-right direction” may be configured to be larger than the “width of the partition portion extending in the vertical direction”. In addition, whether or not the inner wall surface is curved may be determined according to the size of the light passage space. For example, the area of the figure (see FIG. 209) surrounded by the rear end edge of the right wall surface 4225a, the rear end edge of the left wall surface 4225b, the rear end edge of the upper wall surface 4225c, and the rear end edge of the lower wall surface 4225d is a predetermined value or more In this case, at least one of the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d may be curved, and when the area is less than a predetermined value, both the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d may not be curved. . When the area is equal to or greater than the specific value, both the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d are curved, and when the area is less than the specific value, any of the upper wall surface 4225 c and the lower wall surface 4225 d Only one or the other may be curved. The upper wall surface 4225 c corresponding to the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 f (the light passing space located in the upper stage) and the lower portion corresponding to the light passing spaces (light passing spaces 4222 m to 4222 s) formed in the lower stage regardless of the area The wall surface 4225 d, the left wall surface 4225 b corresponding to the light passing spaces (light passing spaces 4222 a, 4222 g, 4222 m) formed in the leftmost row, and the light passing spaces formed in the rightmost row (light passing spaces 4222 f, 4222 l, The right wall surface 4225 a corresponding to 4222 s) may not be curved.

Tenth Embodiment
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. The tenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. The description of the parts in the first to ninth embodiments that apply to the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Transition flow of gaming state>
FIG. 227 (a) is a diagram showing transition transition of the gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 227 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 227 (a) is managed by the main control circuit 3060. As in the sixth to eighth embodiments, the gaming state (main) is classified into any of a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, a BB gaming state and an MB gaming state are provided as bonus states. "F_red BB" and "F_blue BB" are provided as bonus roles corresponding to the BB gaming state, and "F_red MB" and "F_blue MB" as the bonus roles corresponding to the MB gaming state Are provided (see FIG. 229).

  Further, in the present embodiment, RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state are provided as the RT gaming state (a gaming state in which the probability of determination of a replay combination as an internal winning combination being different from each other). The RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state are bonus non-winning states, and the RT4 gaming state is an inter-flag state. As the replay role, “F_Replay”, “F_RT1 rep”, and “F_RT3 rep” are provided (see FIG. 229). In the present specification, “replay” may be described as “rip”.

  Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) and 227 (b), in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state), "F_red BB" or "F_blue BB" is internally won. When it is determined as a winning combination (BB is won internally), the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state) to the RT4 gaming state (transition condition (1) reference). In the present specification, “F_red BB” and “F_blue BB” may be collectively referred to as “BB”.

  In addition, in the bonus non winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state), when "F_red MB" or "F_blue MB" is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 Transition the gaming state from the bonus non winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state) to the RT4 gaming state (see transition condition (1)). In the present specification, “F_red MB” and “F_blue MB” may be collectively referred to as “MB”.

  “F_red BB” and “F_blue BB” (BB), and “F_red MB” and “F_blue MB” (MB) are so-called carryover roles (see FIG. 119 (a)). When BB is won internally, until the symbol combination (“C_red BB” or “C_blue BB” shown in FIG. 229) corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until BB wins), BB The internal winning state is carried over. In addition, when MB is won internally, until the combination of symbols corresponding to MB (“C_red MB” or “C_blue MB” shown in FIG. 229) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until MB wins) , The internal winning status of MB is carried over. The RT4 gaming state is a state in which a state in which BB or MB is internally won is carried over (a state between BB flags or a state between MB flags).

  In the RT4 gaming state, when a combination of symbols relating to “C_red BB” or “C_blue BB” (see FIG. 229) is stopped and displayed along the active line (if BB wins), the main control circuit 3060 The gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the BB gaming state (see transition condition (2)). In addition, in the RT4 gaming state, when the combination of symbols related to "C_red MB" or "C_blue MB" (see FIG. 229) is stopped and displayed along the activated line (when the MB wins), the main control circuit 3060 Makes the gaming state transition from the RT4 gaming state to the MB gaming state (see transition condition (3)).

  When medals exceeding the prescribed number (336) are paid out in the BB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the BB gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (see transition condition (4)). Further, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (111) are paid out in the MB gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (5)).

  When the unit game is played a predetermined number of times (53 times) in the RT2 gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (6)). Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of symbols relating to "C_special role 01" (see FIG. 229) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the special role 1 is won), the main control circuit 3060 performs RT2 Transition the gaming state from the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see transition condition (7)).

  In the RT0 gaming state, when the combination of symbols relating to “C_RT3 lip” (see FIG. 229) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the RT3 transition lip is won), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the RT0 gaming state to RT3. Transition the gaming state to the gaming state (see transition condition (8)). When a unit game is played a predetermined number of times (30 times) in the RT3 gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see transition condition (9)).

  In addition, in the RT0 gaming state, a combination of symbols relating to "C_RT1 RIP" ("C_RT1 RIP _01" to "C_RT1 rip _04") or a combination of symbols relating to "C_special role 01" (see FIG. 229) is effective. When stopped and displayed along the line (when the RT1 transition lip or special part 1 wins), the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see transition condition (10)). .

  Here, the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state are relatively high states (high RT gaming state) in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination (replay winning probability) is made. On the other hand, the RT1 gaming state is a relatively low state (low RT gaming state) in which the probability that the replay role is determined as the internal winning combination (replay winning probability) is relatively low. In this regard, the RT1 gaming state is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

  Such an RT1 gaming state (unfavorable gaming state) is transitioned on condition that the RT1 transition lip or the special part 1 is won. In order for the RT1 transition lip ("C_RT1 lip") to win, it is necessary that "F_RT1 lip" be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 229). A gaming state in which "F_RT1 Lip" ("No. 40" shown in FIGS. 230 to 233) may be determined as an internal winning combination is the RT0 gaming state. As described above, when the RT1 shift lip is won in the RT0 gaming state, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state (see transition condition (10)).

  On the other hand, in order for Special Role 1 (“C_Special Role 01”) to win, it is necessary that “F_Special Role A” be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 229). “F_special role A” (“No. 47” shown in FIG. 230 to FIG. 233) may be determined as an internal winning combination in any game state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. As described above, when the special combination 1 wins in the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state, it shifts to the RT1 gaming state (see transition conditions (7) and (10)). On the other hand, even if the special combination 1 is won in the RT1 gaming state, since the gaming state is already in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state is maintained in the RT1 gaming state. Further, even if the special combination 1 is won in the RT3 gaming state, the transition to the RT1 gaming state is not performed, and the gaming state is maintained in the RT3 gaming state.

  In the RT3 gaming state, there is no possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state (unfavorable gaming state), and once it shifts to the RT3 gaming state, (a bonus combination is won internally until the unit game is played a predetermined number of times (30 times) And the RT3 gaming state will not end unless the flag state is shifted to. In this respect, it can be said that the RT3 gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Such RT3 gaming state (favorable gaming state) is transitioned on condition that the RT3 transition lip has won. In order for the RT3 transition lip ("C_RT3 lip") to win, it is necessary that "F_RT3 lip" be determined as an internal winning combination (see FIG. 229). The gaming state in which "F_RT3 Lip" ("No. 41" shown in FIGS. 230 to 233) may be determined as an internal winning combination is only the RT0 gaming state. In this respect, the RT0 gaming state is a gaming state (chance zone, that is, CZ) that can be expected to shift to the RT3 gaming state (favorable gaming state).

  Note that "F_RT1 rep", "F_RT3 rep", and "F_special role A" may overlap internally with the bonus role in some cases, but this point is the same as in the eighth embodiment. , Excluded from the subject of the description.

<Symbol arrangement table>
FIG. 228 (a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table. FIG. 228 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, for each of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR, the symbol arrangement table is the position of each symbol in the rotational direction and the symbol code (symbols arranged at each position It defines the correspondence with (data specifying the type of) (see FIG. 99).

  As shown in FIG. 228, in the present embodiment, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “cherry”, “orange 1”, “orange 2”, “watermelon 1”, “ Ten kinds of symbols, "watermelon 2" and "blank" are used.

  By referring to the symbol arrangement table and the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”), the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) The type of symbol displayed on can be specified. The details are as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Combination Table by Flag>
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a flag-based combination table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, the flag combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (see FIGS. 101A to 101C). ). As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the type of display combination capable of winning) is uniquely determined.

  In this embodiment, “F_red BB”, “F_blue BB”, “F_red MB”, “F_blue MB”, “F_Replay”, “F_RT1 Lip”, “F_RT3 Lip”, F_ Watermelon, "F_ Mikan", "F_ Cherry", "F_ Special Role A", "F_ Special Role B", "F_ Red Special", "F_ Blue Special", "F_ Finalized Cherry", "F_ JAC Role" And “F_CB role” is provided.

  FIG. 229 also shows a combination of specific symbols on each reel and the number of medals to be paid out (payout number) when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As for the symbol combination, a symbol on the left reel RL, a symbol on the middle reel RC, and a symbol on the right reel RR are shown in order from the left. Regarding the number of payouts of medals, the number of payouts when a single-seat game is played, the number of payouts when a 2-game game is played, and the number of payouts when a 3-game game is played are respectively shown. ing.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) is set as three, and the number of medals that can be inserted in the bonus state (BB gaming state and MB gaming state) is It is set as 2 sheets.

  In addition, as the prize judgment line, “middle-middle-middle: center line”, “upper-upper-upper: top line”, “lower-lower-lower: bottom line”, “upper-middle-lower: cross down” The line "" and "lower-middle-upper: cross-up line" is set. These five winning determination lines are activated in any case where three medals are inserted in the non-bonus state and two medals are inserted in the bonus state.

  In the figure, as described above, “BB” and “MB” respectively indicate combinations for operating the BB gaming state and the MB gaming state at the time of winning. “REP” indicates a combination for activating replay (replay) at the time of winning, and “FRU” indicates a combination at which a medal is paid out at the time of winning.

  The basic configuration of the flag-based combination table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

<Internal lottery table>
As an internal lottery table according to the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 230) referred to in the RT0 gaming state, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 231) referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and a reference in the RT2 gaming state Internal lottery table (see FIG. 232), internal lottery table referred to in the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 233), and internal lottery table referred to in the RT4 gaming state (state between red BB flags) (FIG. a) See), the internal lottery table (see FIG. 234 (b)) referenced in the RT4 gaming state (blue BB flag state), and the internal lottery table referenced in the RT4 gaming state (red MB flag state) (Refer to FIG. 235 (a)) and the internal lottery game referred to in the RT4 gaming state (a state between blue MB flags) Bull (see FIG. 235 (b)), an internal lottery table (see FIG. 236 (a)) referenced in the BB gaming state, and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 236 (b)) referenced in the MB gaming state , Is provided.

  Note that the state between red and BB flags is the state in which the internal winning state of "F_red BB" is carried over, and the state between blue BB flags is the state in which the internal winning of "F_blue BB" is carried over The state between red MB flags is the state in which the internal winning state of "F_red MB" is carried over, and the state between blue MB flags is the state in which the internal winning of "F_blue MB" is carried over It is in the state of

  FIG. 230 shows an internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state. FIG. 231 shows an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. FIG. 232 shows an internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. FIG. 233 shows an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. FIG. 234 (a) shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state (a state between red and BB flags). FIG. 234 (b) shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state (a state between blue and BB flags). FIG. 235 (a) shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state (a state between red MB flags). FIG. 235 (b) shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state (a state between blue MB flags). FIG. 236A shows an internal lottery table for BB gaming state. FIG. 236 (b) shows an internal lottery table for MB gaming state.

  The basic configuration of the internal lottery table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Transmission of Flag Information from Main Control Circuit 3060 to Sub Control Circuit 3070
FIG. 237 shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the main transmission number.

  In FIG. 237, each internal winning combination ("Hear", "Replay", "RT 1 Lip", "RT 3 Lip", "Watermelon", "Mikan", "Cherry", "Special Role A", "Special Role B") , “Red special”, “blue special”, and “fixed cherry”), any of the main transmission numbers among “0” to “10” is set.

  In the figure, “Replay” indicates “F_Replay” (see FIG. 229), “RT1 REPLY” indicates “F_RT1 REPLY” (see FIG. 229), and “RT3 REPLY” indicates “F_RT3 REPLY” (FIG. 229), “watermelon” indicates “F_watermelon” (see FIG. 229), “Mikan” indicates “F_Mican” (see FIG. 229), and “cherry” indicates “F_cherry” (see FIG. 229). 229), “special role A” indicates “F_special role A” (see FIG. 229), “special role B” indicates “F_special role B” (see FIG. 229), “Red special” indicates “F_red special” (see FIG. 229), “blue special” indicates “F_blue special” (see FIG. 229), and “fixed cherries” indicates “F_fixed cherries” (figure 229).

  As described in the sixth embodiment, when an internal winning combination is determined in the main control circuit 3060, start command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 (see step S17 in FIG. 121). The start command data includes information corresponding to the type of the internal winning combination determined by the main control circuit 3060. The “main transmission number” shown in FIG. 237 is the information (information corresponding to the type of the internal winning combination) included in the start command data.

  Specifically, when the result of the internal lottery is “losing”, the main transmission number “0” is included in the start command data. When “F_Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “1” is included in the start command data. When “F_RT1 rep” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “2” is included in the start command data. When “F_RT3 RIP” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “3” is included in the start command data. When “F_watermelon” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “4” is included in the start command data. When "F_Mican" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number "5" is included in the start command data. When “F_cherry” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “6” is included in the start command data. When “F_special role A” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “7” is included in the start command data. When "F_special role B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number "7" is included in the start command data. If “F_red special” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number “8” is included in the start command data. When "F_blue special" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number "9" is included in the start command data. When "F_defined cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main transmission number "10" is included in the start command data.

  The main transmission numbers “1” to “6” and “8” to “10” correspond to one internal winning combination, respectively. Therefore, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize the one internal winning combination based on the main transmission number included in the start command data. As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can execute an effect corresponding to the one internal winning combination. For example, different effects may be performed when "F_red special" is determined as an internal winning combination and when "F_blue special" is determined as an internal winning combination.

  On the other hand, the main transmission number "7" corresponds to two internal winning combinations "F_special role A" and "F_special role B". That is, as information corresponding to the type of internal winning combination, both in the case where “F_special role A” is determined as the internal winning combination and in the case where “F_special role B” is determined as the internal winning combination, The main transmission number "7" is included in the start command data. Therefore, when the main transmission number included in the start command data is “7”, the sub control circuit 3070 determines which internal winning combination of “F_special role A” and “F_special role B”. It can not be identified. As a result, the same effect can be performed when "F_special role A" is determined as an internal winning combination and when "F_special role B" is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Here, for "F_special role A" and "F_special role B", the "expected value" in one unit game performed during the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) is substantially the same. ing. The “expected value” is obtained by “probability of winning each role” × “the number of payouts”. As an example, referring to FIG. 230, “expected value” in one unit game performed during the RT0 gaming state is calculated for “F_special role A” and “F_special role B”, respectively.

  When "No. 11", "No. 23" or "No. 47" shown in FIG. 230 is determined that "F_special role A" is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state It is. Since the total of the lottery value (1) corresponding to “No. 11” and the lottery value (1) corresponding to “No. 23” and the lottery value (4100) corresponding to “No. 47” is 4102 The winning probability of “F_special role A” is 4102/65536. As shown in FIG. 229, when “F_special role A” is determined as the internal winning combination, “C_special role 01” is permitted to be stopped and displayed along the effective line, and “C_special role 01” is permitted. When 01 "is stopped and displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. Therefore, the “expected value” is (4102 × 65536) × 1 ≒ 0.062592.

  Similarly, in the RT0 gaming state, "No. 12", "No. 24", or "No. 48" shown in FIG. 230 determines that "F_special role B" is determined as an internal winning combination. Is the case. Since the total of the lottery value (1) corresponding to "No. 12" and the lottery value (1) corresponding to "No. 24" and the lottery value (647) corresponding to "No. 48" is 649. The winning probability of “F_special role B” is 649/65536. As shown in FIG. 229, when "F_special role B" is determined as the internal winning combination, "C_Mican 02_01", "C_Mican 02_02", "C_Mican 03_01", "C_Mican 03_02", "C_Mican 03_01", Six medals are permitted when "C_ special role 02" and "C_ special role 03" are allowed to be stopped and displayed along the effective line, and any combination is stopped and displayed along the effective line. Will be paid out. Therefore, the “expected value” is (649/65536) × 6 ≒ 0.059418.

  Thus, the "expected value" (≒ 0.062592) for "F special role A" and the "expected value" (0.05 0.059418) for "F special role B" are both approximately 0.06. Yes, almost equal. In the above, the "expected value" in the RT0 gaming state is calculated, but the "expected value" in the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state can be similarly calculated, and has the same value.

  In this embodiment, when the “expected value” of one internal winning combination and the “expected value” of the other internal winning combination are substantially equal to each other, the one internal winning combination is determined, and the other When the internal winning combination is determined, the same information is transmitted as the main transmission number transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070. Thus, the main transmission number corresponding to "F_special role A" and the main transmission number corresponding to "F_special role B" are both "7".

  On the other hand, the main transmission number corresponding to "F_red special" is "8", and the main transmission number corresponding to "F_blue special" is "9", which are different from each other. Hereinafter, “expected value” for “F_red special” and “F_blue special” is calculated in the same manner as “expected value” for “F_special role A” and “F_special role B”.

  In the RT0 gaming state, it is determined that “F_red special” is an internal winning combination as shown in FIG. 230 “No. 9”, “No. 21”, “No. 30”, “No. 37”, or , "No. 45" is determined. It corresponds to the lottery value (16) corresponding to "No. 9" and the lottery value (9) corresponding to "No. 21" and the lottery value (14) corresponding to "No. 30" and "No. 37" Since the sum of the lottery value (6) and the lottery value (170) corresponding to “No. 45” is 215, the winning probability of “F_red special” is 215/65536. As shown in FIG. 229, when “F_red special” is determined to be the internal winning combination, “C_red special 01” is permitted to be stopped along the effective line, and “C_red special 01” is displayed. When "is stopped and displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. Therefore, the “expected value” is (215/65536) × 1 ≒ 0.003281.

  Similarly, in the RT0 gaming state, "F_Blue special" is determined as an internal winning combination as shown in Fig. 230 for "No. 10", "No. 22", "No. 31", "No. 38. Or “No. 46” is determined. It corresponds to the lottery value (25) corresponding to "No. 10" and the lottery value (25) corresponding to "No. 22" and the lottery value (18) corresponding to "No. 31" and "No. 38" Since the sum of the lottery value (18) and the lottery value (330) corresponding to “No. 46” is 416, the winning probability of “F_blue special” is 416/65536. As shown in FIG. 229, when “F_blue special” is determined as the internal winning combination, “C_blue special 01” is permitted to be displayed stopped along the effective line, “C_blue special 01”. When "is stopped and displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. Therefore, the “expected value” is (416/65536) × 1 ≒ 0.006348.

  In this embodiment, when the “expected value” of one internal winning combination and the “expected value” of the other internal winning combination are both less than a predetermined value (0.05), the one internal winning combination In this case, different information is transmitted as the main transmission number transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 when the other internal winning combination is determined. Thereby, the main transmission number corresponding to "F_red special" and the main transmission number corresponding to "F_blue special" are different from each other.

<2 ways to play>
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing a stop display mode of symbols when the special combination 1 wins. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a stop display mode of symbols when oranges win a prize. FIG. 240 is a diagram showing a stop display mode of symbols when the special combination 2 wins.

  As described using FIG. 228, in the present embodiment, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “cherry”, “orange 1”, “orange 2”, “watermelon 1 10 types of symbols, "watermelon 2" and "blank" are used. Among these symbols, "Red 7", "Blue 7" and "BAR" are larger than the other symbols, and their color and shape are clear, so they are symbols that are easy for the player to aim at. Note that "orange 1" and "orange 2" are very similar in design and hardly distinguishable in appearance. Similarly, “watermelon 1” and “watermelon 2” are very similar in design and almost indistinguishable in appearance.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (a), “red 7” is at symbol position “2” at left reel RL, symbol position “2” at middle reel RC, and symbol position “2” at right reel RR. It is arranged. "Blue 7" is arranged at the symbol position "15" in the left reel RL, the symbol position "12" in the middle reel RC, and the symbol position "9" in the right reel RR. “BAR” is disposed at the symbol position “11” on the left reel RL, the symbol position “16” on the middle reel RC, and the symbol position “18” on the right reel RR.

As a result, the player can make a hit in the following manner (i) and (ii).
(I) A stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area, and a stop operation for the middle reel RC is “red 7 for the symbol position“ 2 ” "" Is displayed in the lower area, and the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed at the timing when "BAR" of the symbol position "18" is displayed in the lower area (ii) stop operation for the left reel RL Is performed at the timing when "BAR" of symbol position "11" is displayed in the middle region, and the stop operation for middle reel RC is performed when "blue 7" of symbol position "12" is displayed in the upper region And perform the stop operation for the right reel RR at the timing when "BAR" of the symbol position "18" is displayed in the lower area

  Here, when “F_watermelon” is determined to be the internal winning combination, the watermelon is used in both of the case of the above (i) and the case of the above (ii). ("C_ Watermelon 01" or "C_ Watermelon 02") may be a prize. In addition, when “F_Mican” is determined to be an internal winning combination, the mikan (both in the case of performing the above (i) and in the case of performing the above (ii), “C_Mican_01” to “C_Mican_03” can be won. In addition, when “F _ cherries” is determined as the internal winning combination, cherries (both in the case of performing (i) above and in the case of performing above (ii) “C_Che 01” to “C_Che 11” can be won. Also, in the case where "F_defined cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination, the cherry is used in both of the case of performing the above (i) and the case of performing the above (ii). ("C_Che 01" to "C_Che 11") may be awarded.

  On the other hand, when “F_special role A” is determined as the internal winning combination, if the above (i) is performed, “C_special role 01” may be won, while the above (ii In the case of), no combination is won. That is, while the symbol on the left reel RL is "watermelon 2" for "C_special role 01", "watermelon 2" is arranged only for symbol position "3" on left reel RL (FIG. 228 (FIG. 228 ( a) see). In the left reel RL, the symbol position (“3”) corresponding to “watermelon 2” is close to the symbol position (“2”) corresponding to “red 7” (within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols) Exists), but is considerably separated from the symbol position ("11") corresponding to "BAR". Therefore, when aiming at the symbol position ("2") corresponding to "red 7" as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (i) above, "watermelon 2" is displayed on the left reel RL. It may be stopped and "C_special role 01" may be won. On the other hand, when aiming at the symbol position (“11”) corresponding to “BAR” as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (ii) above, “watermelon 2” stops at the left reel RL There is no possibility of being displayed, and "C_special role 01" can not be won.

  In addition, when “F_special role B” is determined as the internal winning combination, if the above (ii) is performed, “C_Mican 02_01”, “C_Mican 02_02”, “C_Mican 03_01” While "C_Mikan 03_02", "C_special role 02", or "C_special role 03" may win, when the above (i) is hit, neither combination will win. That is, "C_Mican 02_01", "C_Mican 02_02", "C_Mican 03_01", "C_Mican 03_02", "C_ Special Role 02", and "C_ Special Role 03" are the symbols in the left reel RL Although "orange 2" is also present, "orange 2" is disposed only at the symbol position "13" in the left reel RL (see FIG. 228 (a)). In the left reel RL, the symbol position (“13”) corresponding to “Orange 2” is close to the symbol position (“11”) corresponding to “BAR” (within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols) ) But is considerably separated from the symbol position (“2”) corresponding to “red 7”. Therefore, when aiming at the symbol position ("11") corresponding to "BAR" as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (ii) above, "Orange 2" stops at the left reel RL There is a possibility that "C_Mican 02_01", "C_Mican 02_02", "C_Mican 03_01", "C_Mican 03_02", "C_ Special Role 02" or "C_ Special Role 03" is awarded. obtain. On the other hand, when aiming at the symbol position ("2") corresponding to "red 7" as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (i) above, "orange 2" is displayed on the left reel RL. There is no possibility that it will be stopped and displayed, "C_Mican 02_01", "C_Mican 02_02", "C_Mican 03_01", "C_Mican 03_02", "C_Special Role 02", and "C_ Special Role 03" get a prize I can not do it.

  In addition, when “F_red special” is determined as an internal winning combination, “C_red special 01” may be won when the above (i) is performed, but the above (ii) If you do, you will not win any combination. That is, while “C_red special 01” is the symbol “red 7” in the left reel RL, “red 7” is disposed only in the symbol position “2” in the left reel RL (FIG. 228 (FIG. 228 ( a) see). In the left reel RL, the symbol position (“2”) corresponding to “red 7” is considerably separated from the symbol position (“11”) corresponding to “BAR”. Therefore, when aiming at the symbol position ("2") corresponding to "red 7" as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (i) above, "red 7" is displayed on the left reel RL. It may be stopped and "C_red special 01" may be won. On the other hand, when aiming at the symbol position (“11”) corresponding to “BAR” as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (ii) above, “red 7” stops at the left reel RL There is no possibility of being displayed, and "C_Red Special 01" can not be won.

  In addition, when “F_blue special” is determined as an internal winning combination, “C_blue special 01” may be a prize when the above (ii) is struck, while the above (i) strikes. If you do, you will not win any combination. That is, while "C_blue special 01" has the symbol "blue 7" on the left reel RL, "blue 7" is disposed only on the symbol position "15" on the left reel RL (FIG. 228 (FIG. 228 (FIG. a) see). In the left reel RL, the symbol position (“15”) corresponding to “blue 7” is close to the symbol position (“11”) corresponding to “BAR” (exists within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols) ) But is considerably separated from the symbol position (“2”) corresponding to “red 7”. Therefore, when aiming at the symbol position ("11") corresponding to "BAR" as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (ii) above, "blue 7" stops at the left reel RL It may be displayed, and "C_Blue Special 01" may be won. On the other hand, when aiming at the symbol position ("2") corresponding to "red 7" as the stop operation for the left reel RL as in the case of (i) above, "blue 7" is displayed on the left reel RL. There is no possibility that it will be stopped and "C_Blue Special 01" can not be won.

  In addition, when "F_red BB" is determined as an internal winning combination, "C_red BB" can be won by performing the method of (i). When "F_red MB" is determined to be the internal winning combination, "C_red MB" can be won by performing the method (i). When “F_Blue MB” is determined as the internal winning combination, “C_Blue MB” can be won by performing the method of (ii) above.

  From the above, the difference in the number of medals paid out between the case of hitting the above (i) and the case of hitting the above (ii) is that “F_special role A”, “F_special” It is a case where a combination B "," F_red special ", or" F_blue special "is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, the “expected value” corresponding to “F_special role A” is 0.062592, and the “expected value” corresponding to “F_special role B” is 0.059418. Further, the “expected value” corresponding to “F_red special” is 0.003281, and the “expected value” corresponding to “F_blue special” is 0.006348.

  The medal is paid out when the above (i) is hit, the combination “F_special role A” is determined as “F_special role A” and “F_special role A” (“C_special role 01” ") Is awarded, and" F_red special "is determined as an internal winning combination, and a combination (" C_red special 01 ") corresponding to" F_red special "is won. The sum of “expected value” (0.062592) corresponding to “F_special role A” and “expected value” (0.003281) corresponding to “F_red special” is 0.065873.

  The medal is paid out when the above (ii) is hit, the combination "F_ special character B" is decided as the internal winning combination and "F_ special character B" is selected. , "C_Mican 02_02", "C_Mican 03_01", "C_Mican 03_02", "C_ Special Role 02", or "C_ Special Role 03"), as well as "F_ Blue Special" for internal winning This is a case where a combination ("C_blue special 01") corresponding to "F_blue special" is decided as a winning combination and a prize is won. The sum of the "expected value" (0.059418) corresponding to "F_special role B" and the "expected value" (0.006348) corresponding to "F_blue special" is 0.065766.

  From the above, the sum (0.065873) of the "expected value" (0.062592) corresponding to "F_special role A" and the "expected value" (0.003281) corresponding to "F_red special" is " The value is larger than the sum (0.065766) of the “expected value” (0.059418) corresponding to the F special role B ”and the“ expected value ”(0.006348) corresponding to the“ F_blue special ”. Therefore, focusing on the number of medals that can be acquired per unit game, a method of striking in which the method of striking in (i) gives a profit to the player than the striking in (ii) above. It can be said that

  In view of this point, the player can hit the above (i). Such striking manner will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 shows an example of the symbol stop display mode when “F_special role A” is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state).

  When “F_special role A” is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state), as shown in FIG. 238 (a), the stop operation for the left reel RL is the symbol position “ When the symbol “2” (“Red 7”) is displayed at the bottom area, the left reel RL does not rotate any more (as shown in FIG. 238 (b). ) Stop and "Watermelon 2" is displayed stopped in the middle area. After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (c), when the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed at the timing when the symbol (“BAR”) at the symbol position “18” is displayed in the lower area, As shown in d), the right reel RR slips by 4 symbols and stops, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (e), when the stop operation for the middle reel RC is performed at the timing when the symbol (“red 7”) at the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area, FIG. As shown in (f), the middle reel RC slips by one symbol and stops, and "Cherry" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. As a result, "watermelon 2"-"cherry"-"red 7" are aligned along the center line, and "C_ special role 01" (see FIG. 229) is won.

  Thus, when the above (i) is hit, "C_special role 01" may be won. Here, as described with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) and 227 (b), in the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state, when “C_special role 01” is won, the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (See transition conditions (7) and (10)). The RT1 gaming state has a lower probability of winning a replay combination (see FIGS. 230 to 232) as compared to the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state, and is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state. Therefore, it is not desirable for the player that the “C_special role 01” wins in the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state (transition to the RT1 gaming state).

  In view of this point, in particular, in the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state, the player can hit the above (ii). Such striking manner will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 shows an example of a symbol stop display mode when “F_special role B” is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state). In addition, in the gaming states other than the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state, the player may of course perform the above (ii).

  When “F_special role B” is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state), as shown in FIG. 239 (a), the stop operation for the left reel RL is the symbol position “ When the 11 "symbols (" BAR ") are displayed in the middle area, the left reel RL slips by 3 patterns and stops in the lower area as shown in FIG. 239 (b). "Orange 2" is displayed stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (c), when the stop operation for the right reel RR is performed at the timing when the symbol (“BAR”) at the symbol position “18” is displayed in the lower area, FIG. As shown in d), the right reel RR slips by 4 symbols and stops, and "orange 2" is stopped and displayed in the upper stage area. At this time, as described above, since “watermelon 1” and “watermelon 2” are similar to each other, the player looks as if “C_special role 01” is tempering along the center line. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (e), when the stop operation for the middle reel RC is performed at the timing when the symbol (“blue 7”) at the symbol position “12” is displayed in the upper stage area, FIG. As shown in (f), the middle reel RC slips by two symbols and stops, and "orange 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. As a result, "orange 2"-"orange 1"-"orange 2" are aligned along the cross-up line, and "C_Mican 02 02" (see FIG. 229) is won.

  As described above, when “F_special role B” is determined as the internal winning combination, if the manner of hitting in (ii) is performed, mandarin oranges (“C_Mican 02_01”, “C_Mican 02_02”, “C_Mican”) 03_01 "or" C_Mican 03_02 "may be awarded, whereby the player can obtain six medals. Further, even if "F_special role A" is determined as an internal winning combination, as described above, "C_special role 01" does not win as described above if the above (ii) is performed. The player can avoid transitioning (falling) from the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the examples of FIGS. 238 and 239, the case where the stop operation on the left reel RL is performed as the first stop operation is shown. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 240, a case is shown where irregular pressing (stop operation in the pressing order in which the stop operation on the middle reel RC or the right reel RR is the first stop operation) is performed. FIG. 240 shows an example of the symbol stop display mode when the “F_special role B” is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state).

  When “F_special role B” is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state), as shown in FIG. 240 (a), the stop operation for the right reel RR is symbol position When the 18 "symbols (" BAR ") are displayed in the lower region, the right reel RR slips by 4 symbols and stops in the middle region, as shown in FIG. 240 (b). "Red 7" is displayed stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), when the stop operation for the middle reel RC is performed at the timing when the symbol (“red 7”) at the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area, FIG. As shown in (d), the middle reel RC slips by one symbol and stops, and "Cherry" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 240 (e), when the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when the symbol (“BAR”) at the symbol position “11” is displayed in the middle region, FIG. As shown in f), the left reel RL slips by 2 symbols and stops, and "orange 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle region. As a result, "orange 2"-"cherry"-"red 7" are aligned along the center line, and "C_ special role 02" (see FIG. 229) is won.

  In the example of FIG. 240, when the middle reel RC is stopped, "C_special role 01" is tempering along with "C_special role 02" along the center line. Here, unlike in the example of FIG. 240, even when “F_special role A” instead of “F_special role B” is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation and the second stop operation are as shown in FIG. 240. In the case of (a) and (c), the symbols are stopped and displayed in the manner as shown in FIGS. 240 (b) and (d). Thereafter, when the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when the symbol (“red 7”) at the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area, the left reel RL does not rotate any further ( Stop sliding and stop displaying “Watermelon 2” in the middle area. As a result, "watermelon 2"-"cherry"-"red 7" are aligned along the center line, and "C_ special role 01" (see FIG. 229) is won.

<PUSH button effect>
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing a correspondence between duplicate winning combinations and LED output patterns.

  Although not shown, the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a push button (a button for effect) as a button operable by the player. The PUSH button is made of a translucent member, and an LED is provided inside. By lighting the LED, the PUSH button can be illuminated in various patterns to perform effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as BB ("F_red BB" or "F_blue BB") is determined as an internal winning combination, BB may be independently determined as an internal winning combination, and BB may be other. It may be determined as an internal winning combination overlapping with the role of. After BB is determined as an internal winning combination, if BB is won, if the PUSH button is operated before an operation for starting the next unit game (operation of start lever DD6) is performed, a BB winning game The LED lights in a pattern according to the winning pattern of BB in.

  As a result, the presence or absence of a part (double winning combination) internally winning with BB in the BB winning game and the type of double winning combination are suggested. As in the seventh embodiment, the BB winning game is a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state) to an inter-flag state (RT4 gaming state) by determining BB as an internal winning combination. It is a unit game that has shifted to

  FIG. 241 is a diagram for describing an effect (PUSH button effect) using such a PUSH button. In FIG. 241, each duplicate winning combination (“none”, “replay”, “mikan”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “red special”, “blue special”, “RT1 replay”, “RT3 replay”, “RT3 replay”, An LED output pattern is set for the group role and the "determined cherries".

  In the figure, "none" indicates that BB is independently determined as an internal winning combination ("No. 1" or "No. 13" shown in FIG. 230 to FIG. 233 is determined). When BB is independently determined as an internal winning combination, the LED of the PUSH button lights in white in the PUSH button effect. “Replay” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_Replay” (that “No. 2” or “No. 14” shown in FIGS. 230 to 233 has been determined). If BB is determined to overlap with "F_Replay", the LED of the PUSH button lights blue in the PUSH button effect.

  “Mikan” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_Mican” (that “No. 5” or “No. 17” shown in FIG. 230 to FIG. 233 is determined). When BB is determined to overlap with "F_Mican", the LED of the PUSH button lights yellow in the PUSH button effect. “Watermelon” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_watermelon” (that “No. 8” or “No. 20” shown in FIG. 230 to FIG. 233 is determined). When BB is determined to overlap with "F_watermelon", the LED of the PUSH button lights up green in the PUSH button effect. “Cherry” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_cherry” (that “No. 6” or “No. 18” shown in FIG. 230 to FIG. 233 has been determined). When BB is determined to overlap with "F_cherry", the LED of the PUSH button lights up in red in the PUSH button effect.

  “Red special” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_red special” (“No. 9” or “No. 21” shown in FIGS. 230 to 233 is determined). . When BB is determined to overlap with “F_red special”, the LED of the PUSH button lights up in purple in the PUSH button effect. “Blue special” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_blue special” (“No. 10” or “No. 22” shown in FIGS. 230 to 233 is determined) . When BB is determined to overlap with "F_blue special", the LED of the PUSH button lights up in purple in the PUSH button effect.

  “RT1 Replay” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_RT1 Lip” (“No. 3” or “No. 15” shown in FIGS. 230 to 233 is determined). If BB is determined to overlap with "F_RT1 rep", the LED of the PUSH button lights in light blue in the PUSH button effect. “RT3 Replay” indicates that BB is determined to overlap with “F_RT3 Lip” (“No. 4” or “No. 16” shown in FIG. 230 to FIG. 233 is determined). When BB is determined to overlap with "F_RT3 lip", the LED of the PUSH button lights up in light blue in the PUSH button effect.

  In addition, “group role” is determined that BB overlaps with “F_special role A” or “F_special role B” (“No. 11” and “No. 12 shown in FIGS. 230 to 233. , “No. 23” or “No. 24” is determined. As described using FIG. 237, in the case where “F_special role A” is determined as an internal winning combination and “F_special role B” is determined as an internal winning combination, the types of internal winning combinations are The same information is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 as corresponding information. As a result, in the sub control circuit 3070, the "F_special role A" and the "F_special role B" are not distinguished, and are collectively processed as a "group role". When BB is determined to overlap with "F_special role A" or "F_special role B", the LED of the PUSH button blinks in white in the PUSH button effect.

  Also, "determined cherries" indicates that BB is determined to overlap with "F_determined cherries" (that "No. 7" or "No. 19" shown in FIGS. 230 to 233 is determined) . When BB is determined to overlap with "F_defined cherry", the LED of the PUSH button lights up in red in the PUSH button effect.

  The PUSH button can be operated effectively, for example, while the BB prize lock (see FIGS. 176 and 199) is being performed or after the BB prize lock is completed. Specifically, when the PUSH button is operated after receiving the BB start command data (see step S 296 in FIG. 137) and the like, the sub control circuit 3070 controls the lighting of the LED provided on the PUSH button. . The PUSH button is connected to the sub control circuit 3070, and the sub CPU 3071 can detect that the PUSH button has been operated by receiving a detection signal that is issued in response to the PUSH button being operated. it can. Information on the duplicate winning combination is stored in the sub RAM 3073 based on the main transmission number (see FIG. 237) included in the start command data transmitted to the BB winning game. In the PUSH button effect, the sub CPU 3071 is configured to light the LED in a pattern as shown in FIG. 241 by referring to the information on the winning combination stored in the sub RAM 3073.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional game machine, a game machine configured to transmit information indicating the determined internal winning combination to the sub control circuit from the main control circuit is known (for example, JP-A-2009-261547). No. 2). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the type of the determined internal winning combination, and it is possible to notify the player of the type of the internal winning combination through the effect. Thereby, for example, the player can obtain a special benefit such as winning a specific combination by following the navigation generated in the so-called AT.

  In the conventional gaming machine as described above, in recent years, a so-called goto act of trying to obtain an illegal profit by operating a control board has become a problem.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a goto action.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) A gaming machine comprising: first control means (main control circuit 3060) for performing control relating to execution of a game; and second control means (sub control circuit 3070) for performing control relating to rendering,
Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
Providing means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S25 in FIG. 121) capable of giving a game value of the number according to the display result derived by the stop control means;
The combination determining means is
While it is possible to determine the first combination ("F_special combination A") as the winning combination with the first probability, the second combination ("F_special combination B") is the first probability It is possible to determine a winning combination with a different second probability, and not both of the first combination and the second combination being determined as a winning combination,
The stop control means is
When the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation to the left reel RL for the variable display means, “red” of the symbol position “2” In the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing at which 7 ”is displayed in the lower area, stop control can be performed so as to derive the first predetermined display result (special role 1). On the other hand, when the second combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation to the left reel RL, symbol position "11" to the variable display means It is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the second predetermined display result (Mikan), when the stop operation is performed such that the “BAR” of “” is displayed in the middle area. Yes,
In the case where the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the first predetermined display result is displayed when the second predetermined stop operation is performed on the variable display means. While it is possible to perform stop control so as not to derive it, when the second combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the first predetermined stop operation is performed on the variable display means. When it is performed, it is possible to perform stop control so as not to derive the second predetermined display result,
The application means is
When the first predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, it is possible to grant a first predetermined number of game values (one medal), while the stop control means 2 When a predetermined display result is derived, it is possible to give a second predetermined number of game values (six medals) different from the first predetermined number,
A value obtained by multiplying the first predetermined number by the first probability and a value obtained by multiplying the second predetermined number by the second probability are substantially the same.
The first control means is
Transmission means capable of transmitting information according to the winning combination determined by the combination determination means to the second control means (the main CPU 3031 executing the process of step S17 of FIG. 121 and the process of step S324 of FIG. Equipped with
The transmission means is
If the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, and if the second combination is determined as the combination by the combination determining means, the same information as the second control unit It is possible to send to
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, when the first combination (“F_special combination A”) is determined as the winning combination, the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, The first predetermined display result (special role 1) is performed when the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed such that "red 7" of the symbol position "2" is displayed in the lower area. ) Can be derived, but if the second combination (“F_special combination B”) is determined as the winning combination, the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, symbol position “11” When the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed at the timing when “BAR” is displayed in the middle area, the second predetermined display result (Mikan) can be derived. Then, when the first predetermined display result (special part 1) is derived, the first predetermined number of game values (one medal) is given, and the second predetermined display result (Mican) is derived. In the case of having been played, a second predetermined number of game values (six medals) are awarded. Therefore, if it is known which combination of the first combination ("F_special combination A") and the second combination ("F_special combination B") has been decided as the winning combination, the player can , An appropriate stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation such that the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area)) A predetermined number (first predetermined operation) is performed by performing a predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL at a timing when “BAR” at symbol position “11” is displayed in the middle region) ” It is possible to obtain a number or a second predetermined number of gaming values (one or six medals).

  Here, the information corresponding to the determined winning combination is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) (rendering control means). Second control so that different effects are performed when information according to the combination ("F_ special combination A") is received and when information according to the second combination ("F_ special combination B") is received It is assumed that the means (sub control circuit 3070) is modified. Then, the player determines which combination of the first combination ("F_special combination A") and the second combination ("F_special combination B") has been determined as the winning combination through the effect. It becomes possible to always recognize the appropriate stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area) Or the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation such as performing the stop operation for the left reel RL at the timing when the "BAR" of the symbol position "11" is displayed in the middle region)) A situation occurs in which a predetermined number (first predetermined number or second predetermined number) of gaming values (one or six medals) can be enjoyed without omission. Such a situation gives an unfair advantage to the player and causes the gaming shop to suffer an unexpected loss.

  In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the first combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination and the second combination ("F_special combination B") is The information transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is configured to be the same information when the winning combination is determined. Therefore, when the first combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination, the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) and the second combination ("F_special combination B") are combination winning combinations. It can not be distinguished from the case determined as. Due to that, when the information according to the above-mentioned "first combination (" F_ special combination A ") is received and the information according to the second combination (" F_ special combination B ") The second control means (sub control circuit 3070) can not be illegally remodeled in such a manner that different effects are performed in the case where it is received. Thus, such a goto action can be avoided, and damage to the game arcade can be prevented in advance.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the first predetermined number (the number of game values (the number of medals provided corresponding to the first predetermined display result (special role 1) = 1) and the first probability The value obtained by multiplying (the winning probability of the first combination (“F_special combination A”)), and the second predetermined number (the second predetermined display result (Mikan), the provision of the gaming value (medal) The value obtained by multiplying the number = 6) and the second probability (the winning probability of the second combination ("F_ special combination B")) is substantially the same. Therefore, in a situation where it is not known which of the first combination ("F_special combination A") and the second combination ("F_special combination B") has been determined as the winning combination, probabilistic In order to derive the first predetermined display result (special combination 1), the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, “red 7” of the symbol position Aim to derive the expected value of the number of game values (medals) that will be obtained by performing the stopping operation) performed at the timing displayed on the screen and the second predetermined display result (Mikan) Would be obtained by performing a second predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL at such a timing that “BAR” of the symbol position “11” is displayed in the middle region) The expected value for the number of game values (medal) is almost the same To become. Although the first predetermined number (1) and the second predetermined number (6) are different numbers, in such a situation, the player aims to acquire more gaming value (medal) although the probability is low. It is possible to perform a stop operation (shooting tactically), and the stop operation in which the probability of acquiring a game value (medal) is relatively high although the number of obtained game values (medals) is small. It can also be done (even if it is done little by little, it will be squeezed consistently to earn tips and gaming value (medal)). In this manner, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to select the mode of the stop operation (display result to be aimed) for each unit game, and it is possible to enhance the diversity of the game.

(E-2) A gaming machine comprising: first control means (main control circuit 3060) for performing control relating to the execution of a game; and second control means (sub control circuit 3070) for performing control relating to rendering,
Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
Providing means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S25 in FIG. 121) capable of giving a game value of the number according to the display result derived by the stop control means;
The combination determining means is
It is possible to determine the first combination (“F_special combination A”) as the winning combination with the first probability, and the second combination (“F_special combination B”) as the winning combination with the second probability. It is possible to determine the third combination ("F_red special") as the winning combination with the third probability, and the fourth combination ("F_blue special") to the fourth It is possible to determine the winning combination with the probability of
The stop control means is
When the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation to the left reel RL for the variable display means, “red” of the symbol position “2” In the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing at which 7 ”is displayed in the lower area, stop control can be performed so as to derive the first predetermined display result (special role 1). On the other hand, when the second combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation to the left reel RL, symbol position "11" to the variable display means It is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the second predetermined display result (Mikan), when the stop operation is performed such that the “BAR” of “” is displayed in the middle area. Yes,
When the third combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, a third predetermined stop operation (a stop operation for the left reel RL in the symbol position “2” “red” for the variable display means When the stop operation is performed at the timing when 7 ′ ′ is displayed in the lower area, stop control can be performed so as to derive the third predetermined display result (red special). On the other hand, when the fourth combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the fourth predetermined stop operation (the stop operation to the left reel RL at the symbol position "11" to the variable display means When the stop operation is performed at the timing when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, stop control can be performed to derive the fourth predetermined display result (blue special). Yes,
The application means is
When the first predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, it is possible to give a first predetermined number of game values (one medal), and the second stop control means When a predetermined display result is derived, a second predetermined number (six medals) of game value can be provided, and the third predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means. In the case, it is possible to grant a third predetermined number of game values (one medal), and when the fourth predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, the fourth predetermined number It is possible to give the game value (one medal) of
A value obtained by multiplying the first predetermined number by the first probability and a value obtained by multiplying the second predetermined number by the second probability are both equal to or greater than a predetermined value (0.05). A value obtained by multiplying the third predetermined number by the third probability and a value obtained by multiplying the fourth predetermined number by the fourth probability are both less than the predetermined value. Yes,
The first control means is
Transmission means capable of transmitting information according to the winning combination determined by the combination determination means to the second control means (the main CPU 3031 executing the process of step S17 of FIG. 121 and the process of step S324 of FIG. Equipped with
The transmission means is
If the first combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, and if the second combination is determined as the combination by the combination determining means, the same information as the second control unit It is possible to transmit to the other hand, when the third combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means and when the fourth combination is determined by the combination determination means as the combination. It is possible to transmit different information to the second control means.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, when the first combination (“F_special combination A”) is determined as the winning combination, the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, The first predetermined display result (special role 1) is performed when the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed such that "red 7" of the symbol position "2" is displayed in the lower area. ) Can be derived, but if the second combination (“F_special combination B”) is determined as the winning combination, the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, symbol position “11” When the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed at the timing when “BAR” is displayed in the middle area, the second predetermined display result (Mikan) can be derived. Then, when the first predetermined display result (special part 1) is derived, the first predetermined number of game values (one medal) is given, and the second predetermined display result (Mican) is derived. In the case of having been played, a second predetermined number of game values (six medals) are awarded. Therefore, if it is known which combination of the first combination ("F_special combination A") and the second combination ("F_special combination B") has been decided as the winning combination, the player can , An appropriate stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation such that the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area)) A predetermined number (first predetermined operation) is performed by performing a predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL at a timing when “BAR” at symbol position “11” is displayed in the middle region) ” It is possible to obtain a number or a second predetermined number of gaming values (one or six medals).

  Here, the information corresponding to the determined winning combination is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) (rendering control means). Second control so that different effects are performed when information according to the combination ("F_ special combination A") is received and when information according to the second combination ("F_ special combination B") is received It is assumed that the means (sub control circuit 3070) is modified. Then, the player determines which combination of the first combination ("F_special combination A") and the second combination ("F_special combination B") has been determined as the winning combination through the effect. It becomes possible to always recognize the appropriate stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area) Or the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation such as performing the stop operation for the left reel RL at the timing when the "BAR" of the symbol position "11" is displayed in the middle region)) A situation occurs in which a predetermined number (first predetermined number or second predetermined number) of gaming values (one or six medals) can be enjoyed without omission. Such a situation gives an unfair advantage to the player and causes the gaming shop to suffer an unexpected loss.

  In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the first combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination and the second combination ("F_special combination B") is The information transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is configured to be the same information when the winning combination is determined. Therefore, when the first combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination, the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) and the second combination ("F_special combination B") are combination winning combinations. It can not be distinguished from the case determined as. Due to that, when the information according to the above-mentioned "first combination (" F_ special combination A ") is received and the information according to the second combination (" F_ special combination B ") The second control means (sub control circuit 3070) can not be illegally remodeled in such a manner that different effects are performed in the case where it is received. Thus, such a goto action can be avoided, and damage to the game arcade can be prevented in advance.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, when the third combination (“F_red special”) is determined as the winning combination, the third predetermined stop operation (the stop operation for the left reel RL If the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed at the timing when “red 7” of symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area, the third predetermined display result (red special) ) Can be derived, but if the fourth combination (“F_blue special”) is decided as the winning combination, the fourth predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, “symbol position of“ 11 ”“ of When the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed at the timing when the BAR is displayed in the middle area, the fourth predetermined display result (blue special) can be derived. Then, when the third predetermined display result (red special) is derived, the third predetermined number of game values (one medal) is given, and the fourth predetermined display result (blue special) is derived. In the case of having been played, a fourth predetermined number of game values (one medal) are awarded. Also, when the third part ("F_red special") is determined as the winning combination and when the fourth part ("F_blue special") is determined as the winning combination, the first control means (main Information transmitted from the control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is configured to be mutually different information.

  Therefore, different effects are performed when the information according to the third combination ("F_red special") is received and when the information according to the fourth combination ("F_blue special") is received. If it is possible to configure (in this case, it does not mean that such an effect is performed by a goto act, but it means that the configuration pertaining to the effect will be installed as the original function of the gaming machine), and configured in this way In the game, the player is notified through the effect which combination of the third combination (“F_red special”) and the fourth combination (“F_blue special”) has been decided as the winning combination. Can. Thereby, the player performs the third predetermined stop operation (the stop operation such that the stop operation to the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area) 4Any of the predetermined stop operations (stop operations such as the stop operation for the left reel RL performed at the timing when the "BAR" of the symbol position "11" is displayed in the middle area) is appropriate It becomes possible to recognize whether there is any, and by performing an appropriate stop operation, it is possible to receive a predetermined number (third predetermined number or fourth predetermined number) of gaming values (one medal). In this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if the game value (medal) is frequently acquired by increasing the chance that the player can acquire the game value (medal). Yes, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

  In addition, the first control means (main) is determined in the case where the third combination (“F_red special”) is determined as the winning combination and the fourth combination (“F_blue special”) is determined as the winning combination. Due to the fact that the information transmitted from the control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is configured to be mutually different information, the "third part (" F_red special ") Different effects are performed when the information according to is received and when the information according to the fourth combination (“F_blue special”) is received ”, the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) ) Can also be tampered with. However, the winning of the third predetermined number (the number of game value (medal) grants corresponding to the third predetermined display result (red special) = 1) and the third probability (third part (F_red special)) The value obtained by multiplying the probability), the fourth predetermined number (the number of game value (medal) grants corresponding to the fourth predetermined display result (blue special) = 1), and the fourth probability (fourth role) The value obtained by multiplying (“F_blue special”) winning probability) is less than a predetermined value (0.05). Therefore, even if such unauthorized modification is performed, the case where the information corresponding to the above-mentioned "first combination (" F_ special combination A ") is received and the second combination (" F_ special combination B " Damage caused to the game arcade compared to the case where the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is illegally remodeled in such a manner that different effects are performed when information according to “) is received”. The degree of will be minor. On the other hand, if you try to do something like this, even if you do tampering, there is little benefit to be gained, so it is possible that you will not think that you will work wrongly at the risk of being discovered. Seems to be expensive. Rather, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, as described above, the third combination ("F_red special") is determined as the winning combination and the fourth combination ("F_blue special") Configuration in which the information transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is different from each other when As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to acquire the game value (medal) and to provide a game with high player satisfaction. Therefore, when the third part ("F_red special") is determined as the winning combination and when the fourth part ("F_blue special") is determined as the winning combination, the first control is thus performed. If the information transmitted from the means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is different, it is better to use the first combination ("F_ special combination A "" Is considered to be more significant than adopting the same signal transmission mode as when the second combination ("F_special combination B") is determined to be the winning combination) and the second combination ("F_special combination B") is determined to be the winning combination)). Be

(E-3) A gaming machine comprising: first control means (main control circuit 3060) for controlling the execution of a game; and second control means (sub control circuit 3070) for controlling the effect,
Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
Giving means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S25 in FIG. 121) capable of giving a game value of the number according to the display result derived by the stop control means;
When the specific display result (“C_red BB” or “C_blue BB” shown in FIG. 229) is derived by the stop control means after the specific part (BB) is determined as the winning combination by the part determination means Specific game state operation means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of FIG. 137) for operating the specific game state (BB game state) advantageous to the player.
The combination determining means is any one of a plurality of predetermined combinations (combinations shown in FIG. 241) including a first predetermined combination (“F_special combination A”) and a second predetermined combination (“F_special combination B”). It is possible to decide the specific combination as the winning combination together with the predetermined combination,
The stop control means is
When the first predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, “red” of the symbol position “2”, is performed on the variable display means In the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing at which 7 ”is displayed in the lower area, stop control can be performed so as to derive the first predetermined display result (special role 1). On the other hand, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the second predetermined stop operation on the variable display means (stop operation on the left reel RL, symbol position "11" It is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the second predetermined display result (Mikan), when the stop operation is performed such that the “BAR” of “” is displayed in the middle area. Yes,
The first control means is
Transmission means capable of transmitting information according to the winning combination determined by the combination determination means to the second control means (the main CPU 3031 executing the process of step S17 of FIG. 121 and the process of step S324 of FIG. Equipped with
The second control means is
When the specific display result is derived by the stop control means after the specific combination is determined as a winning combination with any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations by the combination determination means, the specification It has effect execution means (sub CPU 3071 that performs PUSH button effect) capable of performing effects according to a predetermined combination determined as a winning combination with a combination,
The transmission means is
When the first predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, and when the second predetermined combination is determined as a combination by the combination determination means, the same information as the second control unit It is possible to send to
The effect executing means is
When the specific display result is derived by the stop control means, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination with the first predetermined combination by the combination determination means, and the second predetermined by the combination determination means The same effect can be performed when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination with the combination.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, when the first predetermined combination (“F_special combination A”) is determined as the winning combination, the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, The first predetermined display result (special role 1) is performed when the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed such that "red 7" of the symbol position "2" is displayed in the lower area. ) Can be derived, but when the second predetermined combination (“F_special combination B”) is determined as the winning combination, the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL at symbol position “11” When the stop operation (appropriate stop operation) is performed at the timing when “BAR” is displayed in the middle area, the second predetermined display result (Mikan) can be derived. And the game value (medal) of the number according to the derived | led-out display result may be provided. Therefore, if it is known which combination of the first predetermined combination ("F_special combination A") and the second predetermined combination ("F_special combination B") has been decided as the winning combination, the player can , An appropriate stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation such that the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area)) The game value (medal) is set by performing a predetermined stop operation (a stop operation to perform a stop operation for the left reel RL at a timing when “BAR” at symbol position “11” is displayed in the middle area)). Can be earned.

  Here, the information corresponding to the determined winning combination is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) (rendering control means), the first predetermined Second control so that different effects are performed when information according to the combination ("F_ special combination A") is received and when information according to the second predetermined combination ("F_ special combination B") is received It is assumed that the means (sub control circuit 3070) is modified. Then, the player determines which combination of the first predetermined combination ("F_special combination A") and the second predetermined combination ("F_special combination B") has been determined as the winning combination through the effect. It becomes possible to always recognize the appropriate stop operation (the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area) Or the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation such as performing the stop operation for the left reel RL at the timing when the "BAR" of the symbol position "11" is displayed in the middle region)) In such a situation, the game value (medal) can be enjoyed without omission. Such a situation gives an unfair advantage to the player and causes the gaming shop to suffer an unexpected loss.

  In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the first predetermined combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination and the second predetermined combination ("F_special combination B") is The information transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) is configured to be the same information when the winning combination is determined. Therefore, when the first predetermined combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination, the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) and the second predetermined combination ("F_special combination B") are combination winning combinations. It can not be distinguished from the case determined as. Due to that, when the information corresponding to the "first predetermined combination (" F_ special combination A ") as described above is received and the information according to the second predetermined combination (" F_ special combination B ") The second control means (sub control circuit 3070) can not be illegally remodeled in such a manner that different effects are performed in the case where it is received. Thus, such a goto action can be avoided, and damage to the game arcade can be prevented in advance.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination, a specific display result (“C_red BB” or “C_blue BB” shown in FIG. 229) Is derived, the special gaming state (BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player is activated. Also, the specific combination (BB) is one of a plurality of predetermined combinations (combinations shown in FIG. 241) including a first predetermined combination (“F_special combination A”) and a second predetermined combination (“F_special combination B”). It is configured such that it can be determined as a winning combination with any predetermined combination (the specific combination (BB) and the predetermined combination can be double winning combination). Then, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination with any of the predetermined combinations of the plurality of predetermined combinations (combinations shown in FIG. 241), a specific display result (“C_red BB” or “C_blue When "BB" is derived (when the operating condition of the specific gaming state (BB gaming state) is satisfied), it is determined as a winning combination with the specific combination (BB) (overlapping with the specific combination (BB) It is possible to perform an effect according to a predetermined role that has won. Thereby, for example, when a specific display result (“C_red BB” or “C_blue BB”) is derived, when an effect corresponding to one predetermined combination is performed, the specific display result ((C) In the unit game played several times before the unit game from which "C_Red BB" or "C_Blue BB" was derived, if the display result corresponding to the predetermined combination has been derived, the player The player can recognize that the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination in the unit game performed several times before. Generally, when the specific combination (BB) is determined to be the winning combination, the specific gaming state (BB gaming condition) can be activated, and the specific combination (BB) is determined to be the winning combination. What is often a concern for the player. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to recognize the timing at which the specific combination (BB) has been decided as the winning combination ex post.

  Further, as described above, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the first predetermined combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination and the second predetermined combination ("F_special combination") It is configured such that the information transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) becomes the same information when B)) is determined as the winning combination. It is done. And when a specific combination (BB) is determined as a winning combination with the first predetermined combination ("F_ special combination A") due to this, and with the second predetermined combination ("F_ special combination B") The effect that can be performed when the specific display result ("C_red BB" or "C_blue BB") is derived is the same as when the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination. When such a specific combination (BB) and the first predetermined combination ("F_ special combination A") are won twice, or the specific combination (BB) and the second predetermined combination ("F_ special combination B") are double winnings. When a common effect is performed in the case where the player has performed a predetermined combination (BB), the predetermined combination obtained by overlapping the specific combination (BB) is a first predetermined combination (“F_special combination A”) and a second predetermined combination (“F special combination A”) It can not be recognized which role of "F_special role B"). On the other hand, for example, in a unit game played several times before the unit game from which the specific display result (“C_red BB” or “C_blue BB”) is derived, a first predetermined display result (special If the combination 1) (display result corresponding to the first predetermined combination ("F_ special combination A") has been derived, the player is required to use the combination combination (BB) in the unit game played several times before. It can be expected that) was not decided as the winning combination. However, in order to derive the first predetermined display result (special role 1), the first predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is in the lower stage area It is necessary to perform stop operation such as performed at the displayed timing, for example, in the unit game performed several times before, the second predetermined stop operation (stop operation for the left reel RL, symbol position " In the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing when "BAR" of 11 "is displayed in the middle area, the first predetermined display result (special role 1) is derived in the unit game. It will not be possible to make such predictions as above. Thus, when the first predetermined combination ("F_special combination A") or the second predetermined combination ("F_special combination B") is determined as the winning combination, the first predetermined stop operation (for the left reel RL) The second predetermined stop operation (the stop operation for the left reel RL is performed at the symbol position “11,” the stop operation is performed at the timing when “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower area). As described above, which stop operation is to be performed from the stop operation performed at the timing when the "BAR" of "" is displayed in the middle area is not only related to the acquisition of the game value (medal) as described above It also relates to whether or not it is possible to predict the timing when the special part (BB) is determined to be the winning part. As a result, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the player's stop operation can be given various meanings, and the player's interest in the stop operation can be enhanced. , You can improve the interest of the game.

  In the tenth embodiment, the first predetermined number (the number of game values (the number of medals provided corresponding to the first predetermined display result (special role 1) = 1) and the first probability ("F_ special") The value (expected value A) obtained by multiplying the winning probability of the winning combination A ′ ′) (the expected value A), and the second predetermined number (the number of game value (medal) grants corresponding to the second predetermined display result (Mican) = 6) And the value (expected value B) obtained by multiplying the second probability (the winning probability of the second combination (“F_special combination B”)) have been described as being substantially the same. Here, in order to say that the expected value A and the expected value B are substantially identical, the expected value A and the expected value B do not have to be completely identical, and the expected value A and the expected value B are considerable. The value should be close. For example, when the difference between the expected value A and the expected value B is less than 0.01 (or less than 0.0075, less than 0.005, less than 0.0025, or less than 0.001), the expected value A And the expected value B may be substantially the same. Also, the difference between expected value A and expected value B is less than 1/10 of the average of these values (or less than 1/15, less than 1/20, less than 1/50, or less than 1/100) In this case, the expected value A and the expected value B may be substantially the same. However, in the present invention, the expected value A and the expected value B may not be substantially the same, and for example, the difference between the expected value A and the expected value B may be configured to be 0.01 or more. .

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the third predetermined number (the number of game values (the number of medals provided corresponding to the third predetermined display result (red special) = 1) and the third probability (the third combination (“F_”) Red special “)) winning probability)) (expected value C) obtained, and fourth predetermined number (fourth predetermined display result (blue special) ) And the value (expected value D) obtained by multiplying the fourth probability (the winning probability of the fourth combination (“F_blue special”)) is both less than the predetermined value (0.05) explained. As the predetermined value, any value can be adopted, but from the viewpoint of reducing the degree of damage caused to the game arcade when a goto action is performed, a somewhat lower value should be adopted. Is desirable. For example, a value (for example, less than 0.1, less than 0.075, less than 0.05, and the like) that does not significantly affect the balance (game result) of the gaming machine when one gaming machine is operated for one day Less than 0.025, less than 0.01, or less than 0.005) can be suitably adopted. However, in the present invention, either one of the expected value C and the expected value D may be greater than or equal to a predetermined value, and both the expected value C and the expected value D may be greater than or equal to a predetermined value.

  In the tenth embodiment, the first predetermined stop operation and the third predetermined stop operation are the timing at which “red 7” of the symbol position “2” is displayed in the lower stage area for the stop operation on the left reel RL. It is described that the stop operation is performed as in That is, it has been described that the first predetermined stop operation and the third predetermined stop operation are the same stop operation. In the present invention, the first predetermined stop operation and the third predetermined stop operation may be the same stop operation or different stop operations. In the tenth embodiment, the second predetermined stop operation and the fourth predetermined stop operation are the stop operation for the left reel RL, at the timing when the "BAR" of the symbol position "11" is displayed in the middle area It has been described that it is a stop operation that is performed. That is, it has been described that the second predetermined stop operation and the fourth predetermined stop operation are the same stop operation. In the present invention, the second predetermined stop operation and the fourth predetermined stop operation may be the same stop operation or different stop operations. In the present invention, the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number may be the same number or different numbers. Similarly, the third predetermined number and the fourth predetermined number may be the same number or different numbers.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, after the specific combination (BB) is determined as the winning combination with any of the predetermined combinations of the plurality of predetermined combinations (combinations shown in FIG. 241), the specific display result (“C_red When BB "or" C_Blue BB "is derived, it has been described that the effect (PUSH button effect) is performed according to the predetermined combination determined as the winning combination with the specific combination (BB). In the present invention, such an effect is performed not only when BB wins, but of course when MB wins (effect is performed in a pattern according to the winning mode of MB in the MB winning game). It is also good.

  In the present invention, when one winning combination is determined in one unit game, an effect corresponding to the one winning combination may be performed. In such a mode, the first combination ("F_special combination A") is determined as the winning combination and the second combination ("F_special combination B") is determined as the combination. The first combination ("F_special combination A") due to the same information being transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 3060) to the second control means (sub control circuit 3070) The same effect will be performed when the player is determined to be the winning combination and the second combination ("F_special combination B") is determined to be the winning combination. On the other hand, even when the third part ("F_red special") is determined as the winning combination and the fourth part ("F_blue special") is determined as the winning combination, the same effect may be obtained. You may do different effects. In this respect, in the tenth embodiment, the “expected value” (expected value A) corresponding to “F_special role A” and the “expected value” (expected value B) corresponding to “F_special role B” are substantially the same. And it has been described that “expected value” (expected value C) corresponding to “F_red special” and “expected value” (expected value D) corresponding to “F_blue special” are both less than predetermined values. As described above, the expected value A and the expected value B may not be substantially the same, and the expected value C and the expected value D may be equal to or more than predetermined values. Therefore, regardless of the expected value corresponding to these two roles, the same effect is performed in the case where one of the roles is determined as the winning combination and the case where the other is determined as the winning combination. It is also possible to give different effects. In addition, the content of the effect is not particularly limited, and as in the PUSH button effect, the LED provided on the button (operation unit) may be lighted in a mode according to the winning combination, or in the sixth embodiment The backlight effect as described may be performed, or an effect using an image or a sound may be performed. If such an effect is performed before the stop operation and if it is possible to uniquely identify the winning combination based on the effect contents, the effect corresponds to so-called navigation, and the winning combination is made for the player. It will be informed.

Eleventh Embodiment
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. The eleventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to tenth embodiments is applicable also in the eleventh embodiment.

<Decorative unit 5050>
FIG. 242 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration unit.

  In the first embodiment, the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) is described as being provided in the lower door mechanism DD. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the main display window DD4 is provided in the upper door mechanism UD. A decoration unit 5050 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD. In the present invention, of course, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD may be integrally configured as one door.

  As shown in FIG. 242, the decoration unit 5050 includes a windshield sheet 5060, a liquid crystal glass 5070, and a decoration unit main body 5100. Specifically, front glass sheet 5060 is disposed at the front, liquid crystal glass 5070 is disposed on the back side of front glass sheet 5060, and decoration unit main body 5100 is disposed on the back side of liquid crystal glass 5070.

  The decoration unit main body 5100 includes a reel glass holder 5110, a light emitting mechanism 5150, and a light emitting mechanism 5200. The reel glass holder 5110 constitutes a skeleton of the decoration unit main body 5100, and an opening 5120 corresponding to the main display window DD4 is formed.

  The front glass sheet 5060, the liquid crystal glass 5070, and the reel glass holder 5110 have rectangular shapes whose external shapes are similar to each other, and are arranged such that outer edges overlap in a front view. In the front glass sheet 5060, an opening 5061 corresponding to the opening 5120 of the reel glass holder 5110 is formed. In addition, the liquid crystal glass 5070 is configured to include a decorative sheet (not shown).

  The front glass sheet 5060 and the liquid crystal glass 5070 are formed of a translucent material, and the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting mechanism 5150 and the light emitting mechanism 5200.

<Light emitting mechanism 5200>
FIG. 243 is a front view of the light emitting mechanism. FIG. 244 is a front view showing the light emitting mechanism with the partition member removed. FIG. 245 is a front view of the partition member. FIG. 246 is a rear view of the partition member. FIG. 247 is a cross-sectional view of a lattice portion. FIG. 248 is a partial enlarged perspective view of a light emitting mechanism. FIG. 249 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the partition member. FIG. 250 is a cross-sectional view of the light emission mechanism shown in FIG. 243 taken along arrow AA.

  As shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, the light emitting mechanism 5200 includes an LED substrate 5210 and a partition member 5220. The LED board 5210 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 5211 (LEDs 5211 a to 5211 c). These LEDs are installed to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the surface of the LED substrate 5210. Also, these LEDs are full color LEDs and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue and green.

  The partition member 5220 has a rectangular outer shape in a front view, and is formed as a member having a predetermined length in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 245, the partition member 5220 includes a lattice portion 5240, a first projecting portion 5260, a second projecting portion 5280, and a third projecting portion 5290. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 245, the first protrusion 5260 is shown by hatching, and the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290 are shown by hatching.

  As shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the lattice portion 5240 has a structure in which a plurality of openings 5241 are formed in a lattice shape on the back side. The lattice portion 5240 has a predetermined thickness, and the opening 5241 of the lattice portion 5240 is similar to the openings 4221a to 4221s of the partition member 4220 (see FIG. 206) described in the ninth embodiment. It penetrates in the thickness direction. Thus, the lattice portion 5240 is configured by a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending in the left and right direction, and a light passing space 5232 similar to the light passing spaces 4222 a to 4222 s (see FIG. 207) of the partition member 4220. Is formed. FIG. 247 shows the lattice portion 5240 cut along a plane (vertical plane) perpendicular to the thickness direction, and the openings 5241 are hatched.

  In a state in which the light emitting mechanism 5200 is assembled, the LEDs 5211 (LEDs 5211 a to 5211 c) are positioned near the centers of the respective openings 5241 in a front view. The inner wall surface (portion facing the light passing space 5232) of the lattice portion 5240 is a reflector that reflects light. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 5211 passes through the light passage space 5232.

  The lattice portion 5240 has an inner wall surface 5241 (a right wall surface 5241 a, a left wall surface 5241 b, an upper wall surface 5241 c, and a lower wall surface 5241 d) similarly to the partition member 4220 described in the ninth embodiment. Further, the lattice portion 5240 has a rear portion 5242 continuous with the inner wall surface 5241. The rear portion 5242 has a shape in which two bottoms in a rectangular parallelepiped are open, the front end of the rear portion 5242 matches the rear end of the inner wall surface 5241, and the rear end of the rear portion 5242 is the entire partition member 5220. It is the back end. In FIG. 248, the rear part 5242 corresponding to one light passing space 5232 is indicated by oblique lines.

  As shown in FIG. 249, the first protrusion 5260 is formed continuously with the inner wall surface 5241 of the lattice portion 5240, and is provided so as to protrude from the lattice portion 5240 to the front side. Specifically, the front end surface 5261 (the portion shown by hatching in FIG. 245) of the first protrusion 5260 is positioned in front of the front end edge of the inner wall surface 5241 in the lattice portion 5240. Thereby, a part of the lattice portion 5240 is covered from the front by the first projecting portion 5260.

  Further, the second protrusion 5280 is formed continuously with the inner wall surface 5241 of the lattice portion 5240, and is provided so as to project from the lattice portion 5240 to the front side. Specifically, the front end surface 5281 (the hatched portion in FIG. 245) of the second projecting portion 5280 is positioned in front of the front end edge of the inner wall surface 5241 in the lattice portion 5240. Thereby, a part of the lattice portion 5240 is covered from the front by the second projecting portion 5280.

  Similarly, the third projecting portion 5290 is formed continuously with the inner wall surface 5241 of the lattice portion 5240, and is provided so as to project from the lattice portion 5240 to the front side. Specifically, the front end surface 5291 (the hatched portion in FIG. 245) of the third protrusion 5290 is positioned forward of the front end edge of the inner wall surface 5241 in the lattice portion 5240. Thereby, a part of the lattice portion 5240 is covered from the front by the third projecting portion 5290.

  As described above, the front end surface 5261 of the first protrusion 5260, the front end surface 5281 of the second protrusion 5280, and the front end surface 5291 of the third protrusion 5290 are each more forward than the front edge of the inner wall surface 5241 of the grid 5240. However, the front end surface 5261 of the first protrusion 5260 is located forward of the front end surface 5281 of the second protrusion 5280 and the front end surface 5291 of the third protrusion 5290. That is, the protrusion length of the first protrusion 5260 from the grid 5240 is longer than the protrusion length of the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290 from the grid 5240.

  In FIG. 250, D (0) is the distance from the rear end of the partition member 5220 to the front end edge of the inner wall surface 5241 in the lattice portion 5240. D (1) is the distance from the rear end of the partition member 5220 to the front end surface 5261 of the first protrusion 5260. D (2) is the distance from the rear end of the partition member 5220 to the front end surface 5281 of the second protrusion 5280. D (3) is the distance from the rear end of the partition member 5220 to the front end face 5291 of the third protrusion 5290. D (1), D (2), and D (3) are each longer than D (0). Also, D (1) is longer than D (2) and D (3). Also, D (2) and D (3) are approximately equal.

  The front end surface 5261 of the first protrusion 5260 is a substantially flat vertical surface, and the partition member 5220 is arranged such that the entire front end surface 5261 substantially contacts the back surface of the liquid crystal glass 5070. Further, the front end surface 5281 of the second protrusion 5280 and the front end surface 5291 of the third protrusion 5290 are also substantially flat vertical surfaces. Therefore, the front end face 5281 of the second protrusion 5280 and the front end face 5291 of the third protrusion 5290 are respectively the difference between D (1) and D (2), and D (1) and D (3). The liquid crystal glass 5070 is separated from the back surface by a distance corresponding to the difference of

  As shown in FIG. 250, in the state where the light emitting mechanism 5200 is assembled, the rear end of the partition member 5220 substantially abuts on the surface of the LED substrate 5210. Accordingly, all the light emitted from the LED 5211 enters the inside of the light passage space 5232.

  Further, in FIG. 249, a side wall 5282 formed to face the inner wall surface 5241 of the lattice portion 5240 in the second projecting portion 5280 is indicated by hatching. The side wall 5282 has a width (r in the figure) in the vicinity of the center of the light passage space 5232 (the part away from the inner wall surface 5241, ie, the part where the LED 5211 is disposed in front view) It is shorter than the width (R in the drawing) at the connection portion (portion near the inner wall surface 5241). As a result, a space (S in the figure) shown by hatching in FIG. 248 is generated, and the light emitted from the LED 5211 c is easily advanced to the front.

  In FIG. 248, for the sake of clarity, the contact (P in the figure) between the side wall 5282 of the second protrusion 5280 and the left wall surface 5241 b corresponding to one light passage space 5232 and the side wall 5262 of the second protrusion 5280 And a contact point (Q in the figure) with the lower wall surface 5241 d corresponding to the light passage space 5232 are connected by an imaginary line. Although not shown in detail, similar spaces S are also formed on the side wall of the first protrusion 5260 and the side wall of the third protrusion 5290 (near the boundary with the grid 5240) (see FIG. 249).

<Light-emitting production using the light-emitting mechanism 5200>
FIG. 251 is a schematic view of the partition member.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting effect using the LEDs 5211 (LEDs 5211 a to 5211 c) is performed by the light emitting mechanism 5200 configured as described above. In FIG. 251, the state which looked at the partition member 5220 from the front is shown typically. For convenience of description, the outer shape of the partition member 5220 is a rectangle, and a virtual circle is assumed inside the rectangle.

  The first protrusion 5260 (see FIG. 245) is configured of a peripheral shielding portion 5261, a first inner shielding portion 5262, a second inner shielding portion 5263, and a third inner shielding portion 5264. In FIG. 251 (a), the surrounding shielding part 5261 is shown by hatching, and the first inner shielding part 5262, the second inner shielding part 5263 and the third inner shielding part 5264 are shown by oblique lines.

  The peripheral shielding portion 5261 is a portion existing outside the circle, and corresponds to a portion obtained by removing the circle from the rectangle. When the points existing inside the circle are denoted by A, and two points on the circumference of the circle are denoted by B and C, the first inner shielding portion 5262 is a minor arc of the line segment AB and the line segment AC (shorter Arc) corresponding to the figure enclosed by BC. When the point existing inside the circle is denoted by D, and two points on the strong arc (long arc) BC of the circumference of the circle are denoted by E and F, the second inner shielding portion 5263 is a line segment It corresponds to the figure enclosed by the DE, the line segment DF and the sub-arc EF. When the point existing inside the circle is denoted by G, and two points on the arc arc BC and the arc arc EF among the circumference of the circle are denoted by H and I, the third inner shielding portion 5264 is a line segment GH , And corresponds to the figure enclosed by the line segment GI and the minor arc HI.

  Of the inside of the circle, a point located on the outside of the first inner shielding portion 5262, the second inner shielding portion 5263, and the third inner shielding portion 5264 is J, and on the major arc BC of the circumference of the circle, When the point on the positive arc EF and the positive arc HI is denoted as K, the second projecting portion 5280 corresponds to the line segment JK. Of the inside of the circle, a point located outside the first inner shielding portion 5262, the second inner shielding portion 5263, and the third inner shielding portion 5264 is L, and the circumference of the circle is on the convex arc BC, The third projecting portion 5290 corresponds to the line segment LM when a point on the positive arc EF and a positive arc HI is denoted as M.

As mentioned above, in the state which attached LED board 5210 to partition member 5220, LED board 5210 is divided into the following fields.
(I) A region surrounded by line segment KJ, line segment JL, line segment LM, inferior arc MC, segment CA, line segment AB, and inferior arc BK (area indicated by oblique lines in FIG. 251 (b))
(Ii) A region surrounded by line segment JK, minor arc KE, segment ED, line segment DF, minor arc FH, segment HG, segment GI, minor arc IM, segment ML, and segment LJ (see FIG. Area shown by hatching in 251 (b))
(Iii) Areas other than the above (i) and (ii) (areas corresponding to the peripheral shielding portion 5261, the first inner shielding portion 5262, the second inner shielding portion 5263, and the third inner shielding portion 5264)

  In FIG. 243 and FIG. 244, the LED provided in the area of (i) is shown as the LED 5211 a, the LED provided in the area of (ii) is shown as the LED 5211 b, and provided in the area of (iii) LED is shown as LED 5211c.

Here, the surrounding shielding portion 5261, the first inner shielding portion 5262, the second inner shielding portion 5263, or the third inner shielding portion 5264 (first projecting portion 5260) is provided in the traveling path of the light emitted from the LED 5211c. It is arranged. The light passage space 5232 through which the light emitted from the LED 5211 c can pass is divided into the following light passage spaces 5232.
(Iii-1) A light passing space 5232 whose front side is covered by the first protrusion 5260 without a gap
(Iii-2) A part of the front side is covered by the first protrusion 5260, but the light passing space 5232 (a part of the area of (i) or the area of (ii) of In a boundary portion, that is, at a position overlapping with line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment DF, line segment GH, line segment GI, under arc BE, under arc FH, and under arc IC in FIG. Existing light passage space 5232)

  The first protrusion 5260 is a reflector that reflects light and does not have translucency. Accordingly, the light that has entered the light passing space 5232 of (iii-1) above can not reach the liquid crystal glass 5070. On the other hand, the light that has entered the light passing space 5232 of (iii-2) can pass through the opened part and reach the liquid crystal glass 5070. Thereby, it is possible to project the shape corresponding to the line segment AB, the line segment AC, the line segment DE, the line segment DF, the line segment GH, the line segment GI, the minor arc BE, the minor arc FH, and the minor arc IC as it is it can.

  And when all LED5211a and LED5211b are lighted corresponding to such a shape, the appearance like a fish can be exhibited (refer FIG. 251 (b)). That is, the mouth of the fish can be expressed by the first inner shielding portion 5262, and the tail of the fish can be expressed by the second inner shielding portion 5263 and the third inner shielding portion 5264.

  In addition, when the LED 5211 a is turned off while the LED 5211 b is turned on, it is possible to express a state in which the fish has a wide opening. Furthermore, when the LED 5211a is blinked while lighting the LED 5211b, it is possible to express how a fish is opening and closing its mouth, and it is a novel appearance that fish eats food. Can do it better.

  A plurality of patterns may be provided as the blinking pattern of the LED 5211a. For example, a normal blinking pattern that blinks at a periodic interval of a predetermined time (the lighting of the predetermined time and the turning off of the predetermined time are repeated) blinks at a periodic interval of a time shorter than the predetermined time (flashing faster than the normal blinking ) May be provided, and the blinking pattern may be switched according to the game state. Thus, for example, if the normal blinking pattern is adopted in the normal gaming state and the high-speed blinking pattern is adopted in the gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, special gaming state such as BB gaming state), the LED 5211a is displayed during the special gaming state. It is also possible to show the movement of the fish's mouth fast by flashing the at high speed.

  In addition, since the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290 do not have translucency similarly to the first protrusion 5260, respectively, the presence of the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290 The shadow will be projected. However, as described above, since the second projection 5280 and the third projection 5290 are not in contact with the liquid crystal glass 5070, respectively, the shade is not too noticeable, and the fish's mouth movement is more realistic. It is possible to realize an effect representation in an aspect.

  In the above, the game machine 1 which concerns on 11th Embodiment was demonstrated as one embodiment of this invention.

<Appendix F>
BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine that includes a light emitting decorative portion and can perform effects by light emission of a light source is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013686).

  Generally, in the gaming machine provided with the light emitting means as described above, it is required to improve the interest of the game by performing various effects. The inventor of the present invention can create new entertainment characteristics by devising the members disposed in the passage route of the light emitted from the light emitting means in the process of earnestly examining such a gaming machine. It came to the idea that

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(F-1) A plurality of light emitting means (LED 5211) capable of emitting light;
An irradiation object member (liquid crystal glass 5070) irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting means;
An interposed member (partition member 5220) disposed between the light emitting means and the irradiation target member;
The interposing member includes a lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) formed in a lattice shape, and a projection (second projection 5280 and a second projection portion projecting from the lattice portion toward the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means). And 3 protrusions 5290),
The lattice portion includes a first direction portion (portion extending in the vertical direction) formed in the first direction, and a second direction portion (portion extending in the left and right direction) formed in the second direction. , And
The protrusion extends in a direction different from the first direction and the second direction,
The interposition member is disposed such that the projection and the irradiation target member do not abut on each other.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the intervening member (partitioning member 5220) includes the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) and the projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290). . The lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) is formed in a lattice shape, and a first direction portion (portion extending in the vertical direction) and a second direction (horizontal direction) formed in the first direction (vertical direction) And a second direction portion (a portion extending in the left-right direction). The projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290) are formed to project from the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) toward the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED 5211), and It extends in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the direction (vertical direction) and the second direction (horizontal direction). Further, the interposing member (partition member 5220) is disposed such that the projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290) and the irradiation target member (liquid crystal glass 5070) do not abut on each other. The present inventor sharpens the shape of the projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290) in the irradiation target member (liquid crystal glass 5070) by configuring the intervening member (partition member 5220) in this manner. It has been found that it is possible to express and that the shadows that occur on the member to be irradiated (the liquid crystal glass 5070) can be made inconspicuous by the projections (the second projection 5280 and the third projection 5290). Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, it is possible to create unique visual effects by the protrusions (the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290), Appearance expression can be used for various effects.

(F-2) a plurality of light emitting means (LED 5211) capable of emitting light;
A partition member (partition member 5220) for partitioning an area through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass.
The partition member has a grid portion (grid portion 5240) formed in a grid shape, and a specific shape (line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment DF, line segment GH, line segment shown in FIG. 251) And a shielding portion (first projecting portion 5260) having a GI, a sub-arc BE, a sub-arc FH, and a shape corresponding to the sub-arc IC) and blocking the passage of light emitted from the light emitting means;
The shielding part is a peripheral shielding part (peripheral shielding part 5261) located around a predetermined shape (circular shape) and an inner shielding part (first inner shielding part 5262, the second inner side located inside the predetermined shape) A shielding portion 5263 and a third inner shielding portion 5264), and the peripheral shielding portion and the inner shielding portion constitute the specific shape;
The inner shielding portion is formed to cover a part of the grid portion formed inside the predetermined shape.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the partitioning member (partitioning member 5220) includes the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) and the shielding portion (first projecting portion 5260). The lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) is formed in a lattice shape. The shielding portion (first projecting portion 5260) is a portion that blocks the passage of light emitted from the light emitting means (LED 5211), and has a specific shape (line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment shown in FIG. A surrounding shielding portion (peripheral shielding portion 5261) and an inner shielding portion (first inner shielding) while having a shape corresponding to DF, line segment GH, line segment GI, minor arc BE, minor arc FH, and minor arc IC A portion 5262, a second inner shielding portion 5263, and a third inner shielding portion 5264). The peripheral shielding portion (peripheral shielding portion 5261) is a portion positioned around a predetermined shape (circular shape), while the inner shielding portion (first inner shielding portion 5262, second inner shielding portion 5263, and The third inner shielding portion 5264) is a portion located inside the predetermined shape (circular shape), and is a peripheral shielding portion (peripheral shielding portion 5261) and an inner shielding portion (first inner shielding portion 5262, second inner side). The specific shape (line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment DF, line segment GH, line segment GI, inferior arc shown in FIG. 251) by the shielding portion 5263 and the third inner shielding portion 5264) A shape corresponding to BE, a lesser arc FH, and a lesser arc IC is configured. The inner shielding portion (the first inner shielding portion 5262, the second inner shielding portion 5263, and the third inner shielding portion 5264) is a lattice portion (grating) formed inside the predetermined shape (circular shape). It is formed so that a part of part 5240) may be covered. The inventor of the present invention, by thus configuring the partitioning member (partitioning member 5220), is in the vicinity of the inner shielding portion (first inner shielding portion 5262, second inner shielding portion 5263, and third inner shielding portion 5264). It has been found that the contour of the inner shielding portion can be sharply expressed while maintaining the brightness. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the surrounding shielding part (peripheral shielding part 5261) and the inner shielding part (the first inner shielding part 5262, the second inner shielding part 5263, and the third). It is possible to create a unique visual effect by means of the inner shielding portion 5264), and the appearance representation thereby can be used for various effects.

  In this regard, the present inventor has determined that a specific shape (line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment DF, line segment GH, line segment GI, under arc BE, under arc FH, and so on shown in FIG. An outer edge of a shape corresponding to the sub-arc IC, that is, a shape resembling a fish, is defined as a first direction portion (vertically extending portion) and a second direction portion (horizontal direction) in the grid portion (grid portion 5240) It is also considered to form along the extended portion). However, in that case, due to the lattice shape of the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240), the contour of a specific shape (shape that resembles a fish) will be zigzag, which makes it look realistic I could not. In addition, it was also considered to eliminate the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) in the vicinity of the outer edge, but in that case, the brightness in the vicinity of the outer edge is reduced, and a specific shape I was faced with the problem of not being able to make it clear. By adopting the configuration as in the eleventh embodiment, the present inventor has succeeded in showing a specific shape (a shape resembling a fish) in a realistic manner. Similarly, it has been found that the shapes of the protrusions (the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290) (a shape corresponding to a state in which the fish has an open mouth) can be exquisitely expressed.

  In the eleventh embodiment, as a specific shape, a line segment AB, a line segment AC, a line segment DE, a line segment DF, a line segment GH, a line segment GI, a minor arc BE, a minor arc FH, and a minor shape illustrated in FIG. The example which employ | adopts the shape corresponding to arc IC was demonstrated. As a specific shape in the present invention, any shape composed of straight lines and curves can be adopted. Alternatively, only a straight line may constitute a specific shape, or only a curve may constitute a specific shape. When the specific shape is configured by only straight lines, any polygon can be adopted as the specific shape. In the eleventh embodiment, an example in which a circular shape is adopted as the predetermined shape has been described. As the predetermined shape in the present invention, in addition to the circular shape, any figure shape such as an elliptical shape, a rectangular shape, a rhombus shape, etc. can be adopted.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the first direction portion and the second direction portion in the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) have been described as extending in the vertical direction and in the lateral direction, respectively. The first direction and the second direction in the present invention are not limited to the vertical direction and the left-right direction, and arbitrary two directions different from each other can be appropriately adopted. When a direction forming a predetermined angle with the first direction is a second direction while the first direction is a predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction), the predetermined angle is not particularly limited, and is 75 ° It may be an angle of about 90 °, an angle of about 60 ° to 75 °, an angle of about 45 ° to 60 °, or an angle of about 30 ° to 45 °. It may be an angle of 30 ° or less. The lattice portion in the present invention is constituted by such parallel lines formed in the first direction and parallel lines formed in the second direction.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the second protrusion 5280 extends from a point located on the upper left portion of the circumference shown in FIG. 251 to near the center of the circle, and a point located on the lower left portion of the circumference shown in FIG. It has been described that the third projecting portion 5290 extends from the point to the vicinity of the center of the circle. In the present invention, the extending direction of the protrusions (the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290) may be different from both the first direction and the second direction in this way, or It may be made to coincide with one direction. In addition, straight lines (line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment DF, and the like that constitute the inner side shielding portion (the first inner side shielding portion 5262, the second inner side shielding portion 5263, and the third inner side shielding portion 5264). The extending direction of the line segment GH and the line segment GI) may be different from both the first direction and the second direction, or may coincide with one of the directions. The angle between the extension direction of the protrusions (the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290) and the first direction (or the second direction) is not particularly limited, and an angle of about 75 ° to 90 °. It may be an angle of about 60 ° to 75 °, an angle of about 45 ° to 60 °, or an angle of about 30 ° to 45 °. And may be at an angle of 30 ° or less. Similarly, straight lines (line segment AB, line segment AC, line segment DE, line segment DF) constituting the inner side shielding portion (first inner side shielding portion 5262, second inner side shielding portion 5263, and third inner side shielding portion 5264) The angle between the extending direction of the line segment GH and the line segment GI and the first direction (or the second direction) is not particularly limited, and may be an angle of about 75 ° to 90 °. It may be an angle of about 60 ° to 75 °, an angle of about 45 ° to 60 °, or an angle of about 30 ° to 45 °, or 30 ° The following angles may be used.

  Moreover, in the eleventh embodiment, the front glass sheet 5060 is described as being disposed on the front side of the irradiation target member (liquid crystal glass 5070). In the present invention, as described above, another light transmitting member may be disposed on the front side of the irradiation target member (liquid crystal glass 5070), or on the front side of the irradiation target member (liquid crystal glass 5070). It is possible not to arrange other members. On the other hand, another member having translucency may be disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal glass 5070, but in this case, the other member corresponds to the member to be irradiated in the present invention. The irradiation target member (liquid crystal glass 5070) and other members (front glass sheet 5060) have specific shapes (segment AB, segment AC, and segment DE shown in FIG. 251) in the partition member (partition member 5220). , A shape corresponding to a fish at a position overlapping in a front view with the line segment DF, the line segment GH, the line segment GI, the minor arc BE, the minor arc FH, and the minor arc IC) The pattern or decoration corresponding to) may be given.

(F-3) a plurality of light emitting means (LED 5211) capable of emitting light;
Light emission control means (sub control circuit 3070) for causing the light emission means to emit light;
A partition member (partition member 5220) for partitioning an area through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass.
The partition member protrudes from the lattice portion toward a traveling direction side of light emitted from the light emitting means and a lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) formed in a lattice shape and extends in a specific direction (oblique direction) Projecting portions (a second projecting portion 5280 and a third projecting portion 5290);
The plurality of light emitting means are arranged on a side (right side) of a plurality of first light emitting means (LED 5211a) arranged on the predetermined direction side (left side) of the protrusion and the predetermined direction side of the protrusion And a plurality of second light emitting means (LED 5211 b);
The light emission control means can make the light emission mode of the first light emission means different from the light emission mode of the second light emission means.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the partitioning member (partitioning member 5220) includes the lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) and the projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290). . The lattice portion (lattice portion 5240) is formed in a lattice shape. The projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290) are formed to project from the lattice portion (grating portion 5240) toward the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED 5211), and It extends in the (oblique direction). As the light emitting means (LED 5211), the first light emitting means (LED 5211 a) disposed on the predetermined direction side (left side) of the projecting portion (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290), and the projecting portion (second projecting portion) The second light emitting means (LED 5211 b) disposed on the opposite side (right side) of the 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290 from the predetermined direction side is provided, and the light emitting aspect and the second light emitting means of the first light emitting means (LED 5211 a) It is possible to make the light emission mode of the light emitting means (LED 5211 b) different. The inventor of the present invention configures the partitioning member (partitioning member 5220) in this manner, and the light emitting means (LED 5211) disposed in each of the regions partitioned by the projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290). It is possible to make the shapes of the projecting portions (the second projecting portion 5280 and the third projecting portion 5290) sharp by making the light emission modes different from each other and to make the appearance of the partition member (the partition member 5220) It was found that it can be expressed dynamically. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the protrusions (the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290) and the protrusions (the second protrusion 5280 and the third protrusion 5290) By the light emission mode of the light emission means (LED 5211) associated with the above, a novel effect can be realized.

[12th embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. The description of the parts in the first to eleventh embodiments that apply to the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

<Transition flow of gaming state>
FIG. 252A is a view showing transition of transition of the gaming state according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 252B is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 252A is managed by the main control circuit 3060. As in the tenth embodiment, the gaming state (main) is classified into any of a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, the MB gaming state is provided as the bonus state, and the MB1 gaming state, the MB2 gaming state, and the MB3 gaming state are provided as the MB gaming state. As a bonus role corresponding to the MB1 gaming state, "F_MB1" is provided, and as a bonus role corresponding to the MB2 gaming state, "F_MB2" is provided, and as a bonus role corresponding to the MB3 gaming state , “F_MB3” is provided (see FIG. 254A).

  Further, in the present embodiment, an RT0 gaming state and an RT1 gaming state are provided as an RT gaming state (a gaming state in which the probability of determination of a replay combination as an internal winning combination being different from each other). The RT gaming state in the bonus non-winning state is assumed to be taken over in the inter-flag state and the bonus state (MB1 gaming state and MB2 gaming state).

  As the replay role, "F_ normal rep", "F_ chance rip", "F_ finalized rep A", "F_ finalized rep B", "F_ peripheral lip A", "F_ peripheral lip B", "F_ purple 7 rep" A "," F_purple 7 lip B "," F_purple 7 lip C ", and" F_purple 7 lip D "are provided (see FIGS. 254A and 254B). In the present specification, “replay” may be described as “rip”.

  Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 252A and 252B, when “F_MB1” is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) (when MB1 is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 The game state is shifted from the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) to the state between the flags in RT0 (see transition condition (1)). Also, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), when "F_MB2" is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB2 is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 starts the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) to RT0. The gaming state is shifted to the middle flag state (see transition condition (1)). Also, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), when "F_MB3" is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB3 is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 starts the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) to RT0. The gaming state is shifted to the middle flag state (see transition condition (1)).

  In addition, in the bonus non winning condition (RT1 gaming state), when “F_MB1” is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB1 is internally winning), the main control circuit 3060 starts the bonus non winning condition (RT1 gaming state) to RT1. The gaming state is shifted to the middle flag state (see transition condition (2)). Also, in the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state), when "F_MB2" is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB2 is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 starts the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state) to RT1. The gaming state is shifted to the middle flag state (see transition condition (2)). Also, in the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state), when "F_MB3" is determined as an internal winning combination (when MB3 is internally won), the main control circuit 3060 starts the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state) to RT1. The gaming state is shifted to the middle flag state (see transition condition (2)).

  “F_MB1” (MB1), “F_MB2” (MB2), and “F_MB3” (MB3) are so-called carryover roles (see FIG. 119 (a)). When MB1 wins inside, MB1 wins inside status until the combination of symbols corresponding to MB1 (“C_MB1” shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until MB1 wins) . When MB2 wins inside, MB2 wins inside status until the combination of symbols corresponding to MB2 ("C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until MB2 wins) . When MB3 wins inside, MB3 wins inside status until the combination of symbols corresponding to MB3 ("C_MB3" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line (until MB3 wins) . The inter-flag state is a state where the internal winning state of MB1, MB2 or MB3 is carried over.

  If a combination of symbols relating to "C_MB1" (see FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the inter-RT0 flag state (when the MB1 wins), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the inter-RT0 state Transition the gaming state to the MB1 gaming state (RT0 gaming state and MB1 gaming state) during RT0 (see transition condition (3)). Specific combinations of symbols related to "C_MB1" will be described later.

  When the combination of symbols related to "C_MB2" (see FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the state between RT0 middle flags (when MB2 wins), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the state between RT0 middle flags Transition the gaming state to the MB2 gaming state (RT0 gaming state and MB2 gaming state) during RT0 (see transition condition (4)). A specific combination of symbols relating to "C_MB2" will be described later.

  When medals exceeding the prescribed number (179) are paid out in the MB1 gaming state during RT0, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB1 gaming state during RT0 to the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) (transition Condition (5)). In addition, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (44) are paid out in the MB2 gaming state during RT0, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB2 gaming state during RT0 to the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state). (See Transition condition (6)).

  If a combination of symbols relating to "C_MB1" (see FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the state between RT1 middle flags (when MB1 wins), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the state between RT1 middle flags During the RT1 transition the gaming state to the MB1 gaming state (RT1 gaming state and MB1 gaming state) (see transition condition (7)).

  When a combination of symbols relating to "C_MB2" (see FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed along the effective line in the state between RT1 middle flags (when MB2 wins), the main control circuit 3060 starts from the state between RT1 middle flags During the RT1, shift the gaming state to the MB2 gaming state (RT1 gaming state and MB2 gaming state) (see transition condition (8)).

  When medals exceeding the prescribed number (179) are paid out in the MB1 gaming state during RT1, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB1 gaming state during RT1 to the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state) (transition Condition (9)). In addition, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (44) are paid out in the MB2 gaming state during RT1, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB2 gaming state during RT1 to the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state). (See Transition condition (10)).

  When the symbol combination (see FIG. 254A) related to "C_MB3" is stopped and displayed along the effective line (when the MB3 wins) in the inter-flag state (RT0 middle flag state or RT1 middle flag state), the main symbol is displayed. The control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the MB3 gaming state (see transition condition (11)).

  When medals exceeding the prescribed number (239) are paid out in the MB3 gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 shifts the gaming state from the MB3 gaming state to the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state) (transition condition (12) reference).

  If the gaming state is the bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state) when the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (700 times) after the end of the MB3 gaming state, the main control circuit 3060 is the bonus non-winning state (RT1). The gaming state is shifted from the gaming state) to the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) (see transition condition (13)).

  In addition, when the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (700 times) after the end of the MB3 gaming state, and the gaming state is the state during the flag during RT1, the main control circuit 3060 is during the flag between RT1 during the state during RT0 The gaming state is shifted to the state between the flags (see transition condition (14)).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the RT1 MB1 gaming state when the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (700 times) after the MB3 gaming state is over, the main control circuit 3060 is in the RT1 MB1 gaming state to during the RT0 Transition the gaming state to the MB1 gaming state (see transition condition (15)). In addition, when the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (700 times) after the end of the MB3 gaming state, and the gaming state is the MB2 gaming state during RT1, the main control circuit 3060 is during the RT1 during MB2 gaming state during RT1. Transition the gaming state to the MB2 gaming state (see transition condition (15)).

  Here, the RT0 gaming state is a relatively low state (a low RT gaming state) in which the probability that the replay role is determined as the internal winning combination (replay winning probability) is relatively low. On the other hand, the RT1 gaming state is a relatively high state (high RT gaming state) in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination (replay winning probability) is high. In this regard, the RT1 gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Such RT1 gaming state transitions after the MB3 gaming state is over. The RT1 gaming state continues in the flag state, and also in the MB1 gaming state and the MB2 gaming state. Therefore, the player is expected to obtain many medals in the MB3 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state (in particular, the RT1 middle MB1 gaming state and the RT1 middle MB2 gaming state) to shift after the MB3 gaming state is over. While playing a game.

<Symbol arrangement table>
FIG. 253 (a) is a figure which shows a symbol arrangement table. FIG. 253 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, for each of the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR, the symbol arrangement table is the position of each symbol in the rotational direction and the symbol code (symbols arranged at each position It defines the correspondence with (data specifying the type of) (see FIG. 99).

  As shown in FIG. 253, in the present embodiment, “GOD”, “Red 7”, “Purple 7”, “Wee Miri”, “Sita Miri”, “Bra”, “Bell 1”, “Bell 2”, “Rip” Ten types of symbols such as 1 "and" Rip 2 "are used.

  By referring to the symbol arrangement table and the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”), the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) The type of symbol displayed on can be specified. The details are as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Combination Table by Flag>
FIGS. 254A to 254C are diagrams showing combinations by flag.

  As described in the sixth embodiment, the flag combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (see FIGS. 101A to 101C). ). As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the type of display combination capable of winning) is uniquely determined.

  In this embodiment, as internal winning combinations, “F_MB1”, “F_MB2”, “F_MB3”, “F_normal rep”, “F_chance rep”, “F_finalized rep A”, “F_finalized rep B”, “F_finalized rep”. Rip Lip A, F F Rip B, F Purple 7 Lip A, F Purple 7 Lip B, F Purple 7 Lip C, F Purple 7 Lip D, F Normal Bell, "F_chance bell", "F_strong bell", "F_ weak chance role", "F_ firm bell A", and "F_ firm bell B" are provided.

  254A to 254C show the specific symbol combination (combination) in each reel and the number of medals (the number of payouts) to be paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As for the symbol combination, a symbol on the left reel RL, a symbol on the middle reel RC, and a symbol on the right reel RR are shown in order from the left. Regarding the number of payouts of medals, the number of payouts when a single-seat game is played, the number of payouts when a 2-game game is played, and the number of payouts when a 3-game game is played are respectively shown. ing.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the number of medals that can be inserted is set as three. In addition, as the winning determination line, only "middle level-middle level-middle level: center line" is set. In any of the gaming states, the center line is activated when three medals are inserted.

  In the figure, as described above, "MB" indicates a combination for operating the MB gaming state at the time of winning. “REP” indicates a combination for activating replay (replay) at the time of winning, and “FRU” indicates a combination at which a medal is paid out at the time of winning.

  The basic configuration of the flag-based combination table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

<Internal lottery table>
As an internal lottery table according to the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 255) referred to in the bonus non-winning condition (RT0 gaming condition) and an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus non-winning condition (RT1 gaming condition) (Refer to FIG. 256), an internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 257) referenced in the inter-RT0 flag state, an internal lottery table (refer to FIG. 258) referenced in the inter-RT1 flag state, and an MB1 gaming state during RT0 The internal lottery table (see FIG. 259) referred to in the MB2 gaming state during RT0 and RT0, and the internal lottery table (see FIG. 260) referenced in the MB1 gaming state during RT1 and the MB2 gaming state during RT1 are provided. .

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus not won state (RT0 gaming state). FIG. 256 shows an internal lottery table for bonus non-winning state (RT1 gaming state). FIG. 257 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between flags during RT0. FIG. 258 is a diagram of an internal lottery table for a state between flags during RT1. FIG. 259 is a view showing an internal lottery table for the MB1 gaming state during RT0 and the MB2 gaming state during RT0. FIG. 260 shows an internal lottery table for the MB1 gaming state during RT1 and the MB2 gaming state during RT1.

  The basic configuration of the internal lottery table is as described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Operation of MB1 gaming state and MB2 gaming state>
As described with reference to FIG. 253, in the present embodiment, “GOD”, “red 7”, “purple 7”, “Wemiri”, “Sitamiri”, “bra”, “bell 1”, “bell 2” 10 types of symbols, "Rip 1" and "Rip 2" are used. Among these symbols, "red 7" is a symbol in which red is attached to the number "7", and "purple 7" is a symbol in which purple is attached to the number "7". "Red 7" and "Purple 7" have a large "7" character and a prominent design, and the player has an appearance that can be recognized as a bonus symbol at first glance. Below, "red 7" and "purple 7" will be referred to as bonus symbols.

  "Bra", "Bell 1", "Bell 2", "Rip 1", and "Rip 2" are also symbols with various colors on the number "7", but "Red 7" and "Red 7" Compared to Purple 7 ", the font of" 7 "is smaller and looks simpler. In addition, "Wemiri" and "Sitamiri" are designed with symmetrical design in the upper and lower sides, and they can be recognized as one pattern by seeing both of the patterns integrally. In the symbol arrangement table, "Sitammilli" is always arranged below "Wemily" (see FIG. 253A). "GOD" is a symbol on which the characters "GOD" are displayed.

  Here, as described with reference to FIGS. 252A and 252B, transition to the MB1 gaming state is made by transitioning the symbol combination (“C_MB1”) corresponding to MB1 along the effective line (transition) Condition (3) and (7)). As shown in FIG. 254A, as “C_MB1”, “C_MB1A”, “C_MB1B_01”, “C_MB1B_02”, “C_MB1B_03”, “C_MB1C_01”, “C_MB1C_02”, “C_MB1C_02”, “C_MB1C_03”, “C_MB1C_03”, “C_MB1C_04”, “C_MB1C_03”, C_MB1E_01 "," C_MB1E_02 "," C_MB1F_01 "," C_MB1F_02 "," C_MB1F_03 "," C_MB1G_01 "," C_MB1G_02 "," C_MB1G_03 ", and" C_MB1G_04 "are provided.

  Among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the MB1, “C_MB1A” is “red 7” for the symbol on the left reel RL, the symbol on the middle reel RC, and the symbol on the right reel RR. In "C_MB1D", the symbol on the left reel RL and the symbol on the right reel RR are "purple 7", and the symbol on the middle reel RC is "red 7". That is, in "C_MB1A" and "C_MB1D", the symbols on the left reel RL, the symbols on the middle reel RC, and the symbols on the right reel RR are all bonus symbols.

  On the other hand, among the combinations of symbols corresponding to MB1, combinations other than "C_MB1A" and "C_MB1D" are at least one of the symbols on the left reel RL, the symbols on the middle reel RC, and the symbols on the right reel RR. The symbol of is a symbol different from the bonus symbol (“GOD”, “Bell 1”, “Bell 2”, “Rip 1” or “Rip 2”). Hereinafter, the combination relating to “C_MB1A” and “C_MB1D” may be referred to as “seventh set”. In addition, combinations other than "C_MB1A" and "C_MB1D" may be called "barack eyes" (in the sense that the bonus symbols are not aligned, that is, they are separated).

  Similarly, transition to the MB2 gaming state is made by stopping display of a combination of symbols ("C_MB2") corresponding to MB2 along the activated line (see transition conditions (4) and (8)). As shown in FIG. 254A, as “C_MB2”, “C_MB2A”, “C_MB2B_01”, “C_MB2B_02”, “C_MB2B_03”, “C_MB2C_01”, “C_MB2C_02”, “C_MB2C_02”, “C_MB2C_03”, “C_MB2C_03”, “C_MB2C_03”, C_MB2D_02 "," C_MB2D_03 "," C_MB2D_04 "," C_MB2D_05 "," C_MB2D_06 "," C_MB2E "," C_MB2F_01 "," C_MB2F_02 "," C_MB2F_03 ", and" C_MB2_04 "are provided.

  Among the combinations of symbols corresponding to MB2, “C_MB2A” is the symbol on the left reel RL and the symbol on the middle reel RC being “red 7”, and the symbol on the right reel RR is “purple 7”. That is, in "C_MB2A", the symbols on the left reel RL, the symbols on the middle reel RC, and the symbols on the right reel RR are all bonus symbols. That is, the combination concerning "C_MB2A" is the seventh set.

  On the other hand, among combinations of symbols corresponding to MB2, in combinations other than "C_MB2A", at least one of the symbols on the left reel RL, the symbol on the middle reel RC and the symbol on the right reel RR is a bonus The symbol is different from the symbol ("GOD", "Bell 1", "Bell 2", "Rip 1" or "Rip 2"). That is, these combinations are loose eyes.

  In the present embodiment, when MB1 or MB2 wins, different processing is performed depending on whether the combination stopped and displayed along the active line is the seventh set or the loose set. Hereinafter, this point will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when MB1 alone (without overlapping with other roles) is internally won (only winning), MB1 always wins, and MB2 alone (with other roles overlapping). In the case of internal winning (not winning), MB2 always wins. Therefore, when the MB1 wins independently, even if the 7th match is not displayed stopped (even if the 7th match is dropped), the loose eyes are always displayed stopped. Also, when the MB2 is won alone, even if the 7th match is not displayed stopped (even if the 7th match is dropped), the loose eyes are always displayed stopped. On the other hand, when the MB1 plays the internal winning combination (double winning) together with the replay role or the small role, the combination corresponding to the replay role or the small role is preferentially displayed on the respective reels RL, RC, RR. Control is performed. Similarly, when the MB 2 plays the internal winning combination (double winning) together with the replay role or the small role, control of each reel RL, RC, RR so that the combination corresponding to the replay role or the small role is preferentially stopped and displayed. Is done.

<Lock process at MB prize>
FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing a lock process at the time of MB winning in the main control circuit.

  The MB winning time lock process shown in FIG. 261 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 after the process of step S303 of FIG. 137 (bonus operation check process) is executed. In the present embodiment, since the BB gaming state is not provided, the processes of steps S290 to S296 in FIG. 137 are of course not performed.

  In the MB winning time lock process, first, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the MB gaming state to be started this time is the MB3 gaming state (step S4001). Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the processing of step S300 of FIG. 137, the main CPU 3031 selects “C_MB1”, “C_MB2”, and “C_MB3” (FIG. 254A) as the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the effective line. Identify which combination of references), and update the bit corresponding to the corresponding MB gaming status in the gaming status flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)) according to the identified type of MB Do. The main CPU 3031 can recognize the type of the MB gaming state to be started this time by referring to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 119 (b)).

  If it is determined that the MB gaming state to be started this time is the MB3 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 sets the MB winning flag at ON (step S4002). The MB win time lock flag is a flag indicating that the MB win time lock is being executed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the MB winning time lock timer (step S4003). The MB winning case lock timer is updated by the effect timer update process (step S323) shown in FIG. In the process of step S323 in FIG. 138, when the updated MB prize winning lock timer is 0, the main CPU 3031 sets the MB prize winning lock flag to OFF. As a result, the lock at MB winning is finished (see step S4005).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates MB winning time lock command data, and stores the generated MB winning time lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S4004). The MB winning time lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the lock at the MB prize winning time has occurred.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the MB prize winning lock flag is set to ON (step S4005).

  If it is determined that the MB prize winning lock flag is set to ON, the main CPU 3031 returns the process to step S4005.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the MB in-game prize lock flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 3031 outputs an MB3 operation signal to the outside through the external terminal board (step S4006). The MB3 operation signal is a signal indicating that the MB3 gaming state has been activated. Although not shown, an external terminal board is connected to the main control circuit 3060, and the main CPU 3031 can transmit various information to an external device through the external terminal board. Examples of the external device include a hall computer and a calling device (data display). For example, the hall computer can recognize that the MB3 gaming state has been activated in the gaming machine 1 which is the transmission source of the MB3 activation signal, by receiving the MB3 activation signal via the external terminal board.

  As information to be output to the hall computer via the external terminal board, in addition to information related to the operation of the MB gaming state (see step S4006 in FIG. 261 and step S4025 and step S4029 in FIG. 262), medals are inserted. Information on the number of sheets (IN number) and the number of payouts (OUT number) can be mentioned. After executing the processing of step S62 in FIG. 123 (medal acceptance / start check processing), the main CPU 3031 performs information processing indicating the number of medals inserted (three in the present embodiment) in the unit game and the external terminal board. Send to the hall computer through. Further, after executing the processing of step S25 in FIG. 121 (main control processing), the main CPU 3031 transmits information indicating the number of medals paid out in the unit game to the hall computer via the external terminal board.

  Thus, the hall computer manages the balance of medals in each gaming machine 1 (the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of payouts from the number of medals inserted). Specifically, the hall computer counts the number of difference sheets in one day in each gaming machine 1, and the number of difference sheets in a period from the activation of one MB gaming state to the end of the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming The difference in the period from the activation of the condition to the end of the MB1 gaming condition, the difference in the period from the activation of the MB2 gaming condition to the end of the MB2 gaming condition, and the MB3 gaming condition The difference in the number of times in the period from the end of the MB3 gaming state to the end is counted.

  Further, when the RT1 gaming state is ended (when any of transition conditions (13) to (15) shown in FIG. 252A and FIG. 252B is satisfied), the main CPU 3031 transmits an RT1 end signal via the external terminal board. Send to the hall computer. Thereby, the hall computer can recognize a period (bonus period) from the activation of the MB3 gaming state to the termination of the RT1 gaming state which shifts after the MB3 gaming state. The hall computer counts the total number of difference in the bonus period, and the difference in the MB1 gaming state (MB1 gaming state in RT1) generated in the bonus period, and the MB2 gaming state generated in the bonus period. The number of differences in (RT2 MB2 gaming state) is also counted. In addition, when the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) occurs a plurality of times within the bonus period, the total number of differences in these plural MB gaming states is also counted.

  After executing the processing of step S4006, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the MB gaming state to be started this time is not the MB3 gaming state (ie, it is the MB1 gaming state or the MB2 gaming state), the main CPU 3031 selects 7 symbol combinations stop-displayed along the activated line. It is determined whether it is a match ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination related to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) (step S4007).

  If it is determined that the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the valid line is the seventh match, the main CPU 3031 sets the MB winning flag at on (step S4008). The MB win time lock flag is a flag indicating that the MB win time lock is being executed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the MB winning time lock timer (step S4009). The MB winning case lock timer is updated by the effect timer update process (step S323) shown in FIG. In the process of step S323 in FIG. 138, when the updated MB prize winning lock timer is 0, the main CPU 3031 sets the MB prize winning lock flag to OFF. As a result, the lock at MB winning is finished (see step S4011).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 generates MB winning time lock command data, and stores the generated MB winning time lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S4010). The MB winning time lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the lock at the MB prize winning time has occurred.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 determines whether or not the MB prize winning lock flag is set to ON (step S4011).

  If it is determined that the MB winning flag lock flag is set to ON, the main CPU 3031 returns the process to step S4011.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB winning flag lock flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 sets the seventh match flag on (step S4012). The 7th match flag indicates that the MB1 gaming state or the MB2 gaming state is activated by the stop display of the 7th match ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination according to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A). It is a flag to indicate.

  After executing the processing of step S4012, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S4007 that the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the effective line is not the 7th match (ie, it is a loose match), the main CPU 3031 sets the loose match flag on (step S4013) . The barrage eye flag is an MB1 gaming state or a state in which the barrage eyes (combinations other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", and "C_MB2A" of "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) are stopped and displayed. This flag indicates that the MB2 gaming state has been activated.

  After executing the processing of step S4013, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, when the process of step S4005 or step S4011 is executed, the MB prize lock is performed, and all the reels RL are similar to the BB prize lock (see step S2105 of FIG. 176 and step S3105 of FIG. 199). , RC, and RR are locked (full drum lock), and the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the BET button or the start lever DD6) is invalidated until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In addition, the sub control circuit 3070 sets effect data corresponding to various effects (effects at the time of MB winning) performed at the time of MB winning, upon reception of the MB winning time lock command data (see step S4004 or step S4010). Be done. As a result, it is possible to perform a large effect (for example, so-called fanfare output as a sound effect) using video, sound, light, etc. while the MB prize lock is being performed. In addition to notifying the player that a state (a state advantageous to the player) has occurred, the player's mood can be enhanced. This point is also similar to the case where the BB winning lock is performed.

  Although three types of MB gaming states (MB1 gaming state to MB3 gaming state) are provided as the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state generated this time in the MB start command data (see step S303 in FIG. 137) Since the information indicating the type of is included, by receiving the MB start command data, the secondary control circuit 3070 can recognize the type of the MB gaming state. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect at the time of MB winning according to the type.

  Further, in the MB gaming state, a sound in MB (BGM flowing in the MB gaming state) is output as in the BB in the BB gaming state (see FIGS. 153A and 173A). The sound data corresponding to the sound during MB is set in the sub control circuit 3070 in response to the reception of the MB prize winning lock command data (see step S4004 or step S4010). Thereby, in the MB3 gaming state, the sound during MB is started to be output without waiting for the unit game in the MB gaming state to be started. In addition, even in the MB1 gaming state and the MB2 gaming state, which are activated when the seventh set wins, the sound in the MB starts being output without waiting for the unit game in the MB gaming state to be started. .

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit.

  The reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 262 is a process performed by the main control circuit 3060 in step S19 of FIG. 121 (main control process).

  In the reel rotation start process, first, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the loose-eye flag (see step S4013 in FIG. 261) is set on (step S4021).

  If it is determined that the loose-eye flag has been set to ON, the main CPU 3031 executes a seven-match reel action (step S4022). The seven-arranged reel action is a reel action for displaying the seven-arranged item ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination related to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) on each reel RL, RC, RR.

  The process of step S4022 is a process that is executed when the MB1 gaming state or the MB2 gaming state is activated triggered by the winning of the loose eye, but as described above, the bonus symbol ("red 7 "and" purple 7 ") are included. Therefore, even if the loose eye wins as a symbol combination corresponding to MB1 or MB2, the player recognizes that the loose eye is a symbol combination (MB operating symbol combination) that triggers the activation of the MB gaming state. It is difficult to do. In addition, when the loose eye wins, it is decided that the MB winning time lock and the MB winning time effect are not performed (see FIG. 261). Therefore, when the MB1 gaming state or the MB2 gaming state is activated triggered by the winning of the loose eye, it is not noticed that the MB operating symbol combination is displayed (the operating condition of the MB gaming state is established) , It is assumed that the player is about to play the next game. The seven-match reel action is a reel effect that clearly indicates that the MB gaming state has been activated by showing such a player the seven match eyes.

  Specifically, in the process of step S4022, when the MB gaming state activated this time is the MB1 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 rotates the reels RL, RC, and RR and then stops the rotation by “C_MB1A” or “C_MB1A” Stop displaying C_MB1D. Which combination of “C_MB1A” and “C_MB1D” is to be stopped may be determined by lottery, or “C_MB1A” may always be stopped and displayed. Further, when the MB gaming state activated this time is the MB2 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 causes the reels RL, RC, and RR to rotate and then stop to display “C_MB2A” as a stop.

  In addition, while the seven-set reel action is occurring, the game lock is generated, and the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop button DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is invalidated. In this respect, even when the seven-reel action is not performed (see step S4028 and step S4036), the lock occurs while the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR reaches a constant speed, but the seven-arrangement occurs. When the reel action occurs, the lock time is longer by the time required to stop and display the 7th match than when the 7th match reel action is not performed.

  After executing the processing of step S4022, the main CPU 3031 generates MB next-game next game lock command data, and stores the generated MB after-pak next game lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 3033 (step S4023) . The post-MB winning next game lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 3060 to the sub control circuit 3070 in a command data transmission process (see FIG. 138). As a result, the sub control circuit 3070 can recognize that the locking of the reel has been started, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Specifically, in response to the reception of the next game lock command data after the MB prize, in the sub control circuit 3070, effect data corresponding to various effects (the next game effect after the MB prize) to be performed after the end of the seven-set reel action. Is set. Thereby, it is possible to perform the same effect (for example, output of a fanfare, etc.) as the effect at the MB prize (step S4004 and step S4010 in FIG. 261), and similarly to the case where the effect at the MB prize is performed, The player's mood can be enhanced. Further, after the MB winning, the next game effect is performed, and the output of the sound during MB is also started at this timing.

  After executing the processing of step S4023, the main CPU 3031 executes an acceleration processing after reel effect (step S4024). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. When the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 138) executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec), and each reel RL, RC, RR rotation is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 3031 outputs the MB1 operation signal or the MB2 operation signal to the outside through the external terminal board (step S4025). The MB1 activation signal is a signal indicating that the MB1 gaming state has been activated, and the MB2 activation signal is a signal indicating that the MB2 gaming state has been activated. In this process, when the MB gaming state activated this time is the MB1 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 transmits an MB1 activation signal to an external device (such as a hall computer or a calling device) via the external terminal board. The hall computer can recognize that the MB1 gaming state has been activated in the gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the MB1 activation signal by receiving the MB1 activation signal via the external terminal board. Further, when the MB gaming state activated this time is the MB2 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 transmits an MB2 activation signal to an external device (such as a hall computer or a calling device) via the external terminal board. The hall computer can recognize that the MB2 gaming state is activated in the gaming machine 1 which is the transmission source of the MB2 activation signal, by receiving the MB2 activation signal via the external terminal board.

  After executing the processing of step S4025, the main CPU 3031 sets the loose-eye flag to off (step S4026), and the present subroutine ends.

  If it is determined in step S4021 that the loose-eye flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the seventh match flag (see step S4012 in FIG. 261) is set on (step S4027). .

  If it is determined that the seventh match flag is set to on, the main CPU 3031 executes the normal acceleration process (step S4028). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. When the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 138) executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec), and each reel RL, RC, RR rotation is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed. The normal time acceleration process is the same process as the post-reel effect acceleration process (see step S4024).

  Next, the main CPU 3031 outputs the MB1 operation signal or the MB2 operation signal to the outside through the external terminal board (step S4029). The MB1 activation signal is a signal indicating that the MB1 gaming state has been activated, and the MB2 activation signal is a signal indicating that the MB2 gaming state has been activated. In this process, when the MB gaming state activated this time is the MB1 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 transmits an MB1 activation signal to an external device (such as a hall computer or a calling device) via the external terminal board. The hall computer can recognize that the MB1 gaming state has been activated in the gaming machine 1 that is the transmission source of the MB1 activation signal by receiving the MB1 activation signal via the external terminal board. Further, when the MB gaming state activated this time is the MB2 gaming state, the main CPU 3031 transmits an MB2 activation signal to an external device (such as a hall computer or a calling device) via the external terminal board. The hall computer can recognize that the MB2 gaming state is activated in the gaming machine 1 which is the transmission source of the MB2 activation signal, by receiving the MB2 activation signal via the external terminal board.

  After executing the processing of step S4029, the main CPU 3031 sets the seventh match flag off (step S4030), and the present subroutine ends.

  If it is determined in step S4027 that the seventh-arrangement flag is not set on, the main CPU 3031 determines whether the purple 7-rep display flag is set on (step S4031). Although not shown, the purple 7 lip display flag is the purple 7 lip (“C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02” shown in FIG. , “C_BL Purple 7 Lip” or “C_TL Purple 7 Lip” is set to ON when stopped and displayed along the effective line.

  It is permitted that the purple 7 lip is stopped and displayed along the effective line is the purple 7 lip ("F_purple 7 lip A", "F_purple 7 lip B", "F_purple 7 lip C", or , “F_purple 7 lip D”) is determined as the internal winning combination (see FIG. 254B). In the case where purple 7 lip is internally won, only purple 7 lip among purple 7 lip and MB3 ("F_MB3") is internally won ("No. 21" to "No. 23 in Figs. 255 and 256). ": When purple 7 lip and MB 1 are won successfully, and when both purple 7 lip and MB 3 are internally won (" No. 45 "to" No. 48 "in FIGS. 255 and 256): purple 7 The case where the lip and the MB3 are won successfully is provided.

  In this embodiment, the purple 7 lip can be stopped and displayed along the effective line both in the case where the purple 7 lip and the MB 1 overlap and in the case where the purple 7 lip and the MB 3 overlap. ing.

  Specifically, when the purple 7 lip is stopped and displayed along the effective line, the upper stage area, the middle stage area, and the lower stage area of the left reel RL, the upper stage area, the middle stage area, and the lower stage area of the middle reel RC. , And at least one of nine symbols stopped and displayed in the nine areas of the upper stage area, the middle stage area, and the lower stage area of the right reel RR is "purple 7". That is, when "C_CL purple 7 rip 01" is stopped and displayed along the effective line, and when "C_CL purple 7 rip _ 02" is stopped and displayed along the effective line, at least 1 on the center line. One “purple 7” is displayed stopped (see FIG. 254B).

  Also, in the left reel RL, “purple 7” is arranged one below “red 7”, and in the middle reel RC and the right reel RR, “purple 7” is arranged one on “red 7” Focusing on the point (see FIG. 253A), it can be understood that the following stop mode is obtained. That is, when "C_XU purple 7 rip 01" is stopped and displayed along the effective line, and when "C_XU purple 7 rip _ 02" is stopped and displayed along the effective line, at least on the cross-up line One “purple 7” is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 254B). When “C_BL purple 7 lip” is stopped and displayed along the effective line, at least one “purple 7” is stopped and displayed on the bottom line (see FIG. 254B). When “C_TL purple 7 lip” is stopped and displayed along the effective line, at least one “purple 7” is stopped and displayed on the top line (see FIG. 254B).

  Here, on the front side of the front glass sheet 5060 included in the decoration unit 5050 (see FIG. 242) described in the eleventh embodiment, a three-dimensional figure in which the character “purple 7” is engraved at a position facing the light emitting mechanism 5150 It is decorated in shape. Then, when the purple 7 lip is determined as the internal winning combination (both in the case where the purple 7 lip and the MB 1 overlap and in the case where the purple 7 lip and the MB 3 overlap), the light emission mechanism 5150 is provided Control is performed to blink the LED several times. Thereby, the player is motivated to aim for "purple 7" in the stop operation for each reel RL, RC, RR. As a result, when the purple 7 lip ("F_purple 7 lip A", "F_purple 7 lip B", "F_purple 7 lip C", or "F_purple 7 lip D") is determined as the internal winning combination The purple 7 lip ("C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01", "C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02", "C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01", "C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02", "C_BL purple 7 lip" shown in FIG. Or, "C_TL purple 7 lip") is easily displayed as a stop.

  If it is determined in step S4031 that the purple 7 lip display flag is set to ON, the main CPU 3031 determines whether MB3 has been determined as an internal winning combination with purple 7 lip (step S4032). The main CPU 3031 can recognize whether or not the MB 3 has been determined as an internal winning combination by referring to the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 119A) of the main RAM 3033.

  If it is determined that the MB 3 is not determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 executes a heart reel action (step S4033). The heart reel action is a reel effect in which each reel RL, RC, RR is moved in a manner like a heartbeat. In the processing of step S4033, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, and then immediately stops the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, thereby producing an aspect such as a heartbeat. Can be expressed. Requests to start and stop rotation of such reels RL, RC, RR are made a predetermined number of times (repeated only once or repeated several times).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB3 is determined to be the internal winning combination, the main CPU 3031 executes the same cardiac reel action as in step S4033, and then executes the GOD uniform reel action (step S4034). The GOD alignment reel action is a reel action that displays "C_MB3" ("GOD"-"GOD"-"GOD") shown in FIG. 254A. Specifically, in the process of step S4034, after the main CPU 3031 makes a request for starting and stopping rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR a predetermined number of times, the main CPU 3031 rotates the reels RL, RC, and RR reversely for a fixed time. By stopping it, "GOD"-"GOD"-"GOD" is stopped and displayed along the center line.

  In addition, while the heart reel action and the GOD match reel action are occurring, the game lock is generated as in the case where the seven match reel action is occurring, and the operation by the player (for example, the stop button DD7L, DD7C , DD7R operation) is invalidated.

  After executing the processing of step S4033 or step S4034, the main CPU 3031 executes acceleration processing after reel effect (step S4035). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. When the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 138) executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec), and each reel RL, RC, RR rotation is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed.

  After executing the processing of step S4035, the main CPU 3031 sets the purple 7 rep display flag to off (not shown), and ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S4031 that the purple 7 rep display flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 3031 executes normal acceleration processing (step S4036). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. When the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 138) executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec), and each reel RL, RC, RR rotation is started. Then, each reel RL, RC, RR is controlled to accelerate until its rotation reaches a constant speed and thereafter to maintain a constant speed.

  After executing the processing of step S4036, the main CPU 3031 ends the present subroutine.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix G1>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to transmit information on the number of medals inserted (number of INs) and the number of payouts (number of OUTs) to a hall computer is known (e.g. -212286)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to manage information on the balls in each gaming machine in the hall computer.

  However, in the conventional configuration, there has been a case where it is not possible to appropriately manage information on gaming value such as medals.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately managing information on gaming value.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has the following features.

(G1-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (MB1 or MB2) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, a predetermined display result (a combination relating to "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived by the stop control means. Specific gaming state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating a specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) which is advantageous for the player,
When the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, the external output means capable of outputting information regarding the operation of the specific gaming state to the outside (performing the process of step S4025 and step S4029 in FIG. 262 Main CPU 3031),
Lock execution means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S4022 in FIG. 262) capable of executing a specific lock in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time after the predetermined start trigger occurs; Equipped with
As the predetermined display result, a first predetermined display result ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", and a combination according to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) and a second predetermined display result ("C_MB1" shown in FIG. 254A) And “C_MB1A”, “C_MB1D”, and combinations other than “C_MB2A” among “C_MB2”, and
The stop control means is
When the specific combination is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, stop control is performed so as to always derive one of the first predetermined display result and the second predetermined display result. Is possible and
The lock execution means is
Of the case where the first predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means and the case where the second predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, the second predetermined It is possible to execute the particular lock only if the display result is derived,
The external output means is
In both cases where the first predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means and in the case where the second predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, after the predetermined start trigger has occurred It is possible to output information regarding the operation of the specific gaming state to the outside,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined display result (combination relating to “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, a specific gaming state (MB1) advantageous for the player Where the gaming state or the MB2 gaming state is activated, in this case, information (MB1 operating signal or MB2 operating signal) relating to the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is output to the outside. This makes it possible to manage the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) with the external device (hall computer). When a predetermined display result (combination relating to “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, after a predetermined start trigger (operation of start lever DD6) occurs (predetermined display result (In the next unit game of the unit game from which the combination “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A is derived), a specific lock in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time (seven reels action) Can be performed. As a result, while the specific lock (seven-reel reel action) is being performed, it is possible to perform an effect on the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state). Then, when such an effect is performed, in order to have the player fully enjoy the effect, until the effect is performed (until a predetermined start timing (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs), It may be desirable to wait for the output of information about the operation of a particular gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside. If it is assumed that the information is to be output before the predetermined start timing (the operation of the start lever DD6) occurs, extra information is given to the player before the effect is performed due to that. It is because it is assumed that the value of the said presentation will be relatively reduced as a result. For example, it is assumed that there is a player who is unaware that the MB operating symbol combination is displayed (that the operating condition of the MB gaming state is established). When such a player receives the MB1 operation signal or the MB2 operation signal from the hall computer as a trigger, the display contents on the data display change or the lamp is turned on, whereby the MB1 gaming state or the MB2 gaming state If it comes to know that the player has operated, it is difficult for the player to feel entertaining, and there is a concern that interest in a specific lock (seven-reel action) will also diminish.

  Here, according to the gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, the first predetermined display result (FIG. 254A) is displayed as a predetermined display result (a combination relating to “C_MB1” or “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A). Among the “C_MB1” and “C_MB1D” and “C_MB1A” and “C_MB2A” and “C_MB1D” and “C_MB1D” among the “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” shown in FIG. A combination (other than “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A) is that a specific lock (seven-reel reel action) can be executed although a combination other than “” is provided. C_MB1A "," C_MB1D ", and combinations other than" C_MB2A "are derived. If only the first predetermined display result ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" and "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, the specific lock (seven-reel action) is Not run. Then, when the first predetermined display result ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" and "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) It seems that it may be possible to output information (MB1 actuation signal or MB2 actuation signal) relating to the operation to the outside immediately (before the predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs). However, when the first predetermined display result ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" and "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, a predetermined start trigger (operation of start lever DD6) occurs. While outputting the information, the second predetermined display result (combinations other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" and "C_MB2A" among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) are derived. If the information is output after a predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs, the output timing of the information may differ according to the derived display result. And a specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming letter) recognized by the external device (hall computer) ) Deviation in operation timing is that occurs in. As a result, there is a concern that it will not be possible to strictly control the increase or decrease of the gaming value (medal) during the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state).

  For example, when the first predetermined display result ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" and "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, a predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs. If the information is configured to be output prior to the game, the number of gaming values (medals) inserted in the first unit game in the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is an external device (hall computer Managed by). On the other hand, when the second predetermined display result (combination other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" and "C_MB2A" of "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, the predetermined Assuming that the information is output after occurrence of the start trigger (operation of the start lever DD6), the gaming value inserted in the first unit game in the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) The number of medals will not be managed by the external device (hole computer). Therefore, despite the same specified gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state), the first predetermined display result (combination relating to "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", and "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) Is derived, and the second predetermined display result (combination other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", and "C_MB2A" among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is derived. Therefore, the balance of game value (medal) will be different. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, the first predetermined display result (“C_MB1A”, “C_MB1D”, and the combination relating to “C_MB2A” shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, and In both cases where the second predetermined display result (combination other than “C_MB1A”, “C_MB1D” and “C_MB2A” of “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A) is derived, The timing of outputting information (MB1 operation signal or MB2 operation signal) regarding the operation of the gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside is unified after the predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a gap as described above, and more appropriate management can be performed regarding increase and decrease of gaming value (medal) during the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state). .

  In the twelfth embodiment, it has been described that the balance of medals in each gaming machine 1 (the difference number obtained by subtracting the paid-out number from the inserted number of medals) is counted by the hole computer. In the present invention, the same counting as that performed in the hall computer may be performed in the gaming machine 1 as well. For example, as the configuration of the main CPU 3031 (or the sub CPU 3071), after executing the processing of step S62 of FIG. 123 (medal acceptance / start check processing), the number of medals inserted in the unit game (three in this embodiment) Is subtracted from the value of the difference sheet counter, and the processing of step S25 in FIG. 121 (main control processing) is executed, and then the number of medals paid out in the unit game is added to the value of the difference sheet counter It is possible. The value of the difference sheet counter may be displayed on the display device in a manner that can be viewed by the player. Also, for example, when the gaming machine 1 counts the number of difference in the period from the activation of one MB gaming state to the end of the MB gaming state, the timing to start the counting is the specific gaming state (MB1 It is preferable to match the timing of outputting information (MB1 operation signal or MB2 operation signal) regarding the operation of the gaming state or the MB2 gaming state to the outside. For example, before the timing for outputting the information (MB1 operation signal or MB2 operation signal) related to the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside is a predetermined start trigger (operation of start lever DD6) If so, the number of game values (medals) inserted in the first unit game in the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) may be included in the target of the counting. On the other hand, the timing to output the information (MB1 operation signal or MB2 operation signal) regarding the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside occurs a predetermined start trigger (operation of start lever DD6) If it is after, the number of gaming values (medals) inserted in the first unit game in the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) may not be included in the count.

(G1-2) Bet means (BET button and main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of step S12 in FIG. 121) capable of betting a game value on one unit game
A plurality of symbol display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of performing variable display and stop display of the symbols;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for stopping and displaying a symbol whose variable display is being performed on the symbol display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
When the first symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination according to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed by the stop control means, and the second symbol combination (by the stop control means) Among “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” shown in FIG. 254A, a specific game that is advantageous for the player in both cases when “C_MB1A”, “C_MB1D”, or a combination other than “C_MB2A” is stopped and displayed. Specific gaming state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) capable of operating the state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state),
When any symbol combination of the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the stop control means, it is possible to output information regarding the operation of the specific gaming state to the outside External output means (main CPU 3031 that executes the processing of step S4025 and step S4029 of FIG. 262),
And an effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (such as 7 sets of reel actions and a next game effect after MB winning) corresponding to the establishment of the operation condition of the specific gaming state.
In the first symbol combination, all symbols in each of the symbol display means are specific symbols (“red 7” or “purple 7”), and in the second symbol combination, the symbols in each of the symbol display means are At least one of the symbols is a symbol different from the specific symbol,
The effect executing means is
In the case where the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the stop control means, and when the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the stop control means, the second symbol is selected by the stop control means Only when the combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute the specific effect after the bet unit bets the gaming value for the unit game next to the unit game for which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Yes,
The external output means is
In both cases where the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the stop control means and when the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the stop control means, the gaming value is bet by the bet means After that, it is possible to output information regarding the operation of the specific gaming state to the outside,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, the first symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination according to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) or the second symbol combination (FIG. 254A) Among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" to be shown, "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination other than "C_MB2A" is stopped and displayed (the operating condition of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is In the case where the special gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) advantageous to the player is activated in the case where it is established, in this case, the information (the MB1 gaming state or the MB2 gaming state) MB1 operation signal or MB2 operation signal is output to the outside. This makes it possible to manage the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) with the external device (hall computer). In addition, when the operating condition of such a specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is satisfied, after the gaming value (medal) is bet (the next unit of the unit game for which the operating condition is satisfied) In the game), a specific effect (such as 7 sets of reel actions and a next game effect after MB winning) may be executed corresponding to the operation condition of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) being satisfied. When such a specific effect (such as 7 sets of reel actions and the next game effect after MB winning) is performed, the player is allowed to enjoy the specified effects (such as the 7 sets of reel actions and MB following game effects) sufficiently. In order to perform the specific game state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) until a specific effect (7 sets of reel actions or MB next game effect etc.) is performed (until gaming value (medal) is bet) It may be desirable to wait to output information about the operation (MB1 or MB2 operation signal) to the outside. If it is assumed that the information is to be output before the game value (medal) is betted, before the specific effect (7-piece reel action, next game effect after MB winning, etc.) is performed due to that. Extra information is given to the player, and as a result, it is assumed that the value of a specific effect (such as 7 sets of reel actions and the next game effect after MB winning) is relatively reduced. .

  Here, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, a first symbol combination ("C_MB1A shown in FIG. 254A as a symbol combination serving as a trigger for activating the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) Other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or "C_MB2A" among the "C_MB1D" or the combination related to "C_MB2A" and the second symbol combination ("C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A). A combination of 2) is provided, but it is possible to execute a specific effect (such as 7 sets of reel actions and the next game effect after MB winning) with the second symbol combination ("C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A). "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination other than "C_MB2A" It is only when the stop display is shown, and when the first symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination according to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed, a specific effect (7-sort reel action) And after the MB prize, the next game effect etc) will not be executed. Then, when the first symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination relating to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed, the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) It seems that it may be possible to output information (MB1 actuation signal or MB2 actuation signal) relating to the operation to the outside immediately (before the gaming value (medal) is betted). However, when the first symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination relating to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed, the information before the game value (medal) is bet is displayed. When the second symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination other than "C_MB2A" among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed. If it is configured to output the information after the gaming value (medal) is bet, the output timing of the information will be different according to the symbol combination stopped and displayed, and the external device (hall computer) A gap occurs in the operation timing of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to be recognized It becomes Mau it. As a result, there is a concern that it will not be possible to strictly control the increase or decrease of the gaming value (medal) during the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state). In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, the first symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination relating to "C_MB2A" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed, In both cases where the second symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or a combination other than "C_MB2A" among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed, The timing of outputting information (MB1 operating signal or MB2 operating signal) regarding the operation of the gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside is unified after the gaming value (medal) is betted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a gap as described above, and more appropriate management can be performed regarding increase and decrease of gaming value (medal) during the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state). .

  In the twelfth embodiment, the timing for outputting the information (MB1 operation signal or MB2 operation signal) regarding the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside is after the specific effect (7 sets of reel actions or MB prizes) It has been described that after the next game effect etc. is performed, that is, after the predetermined start timing (operation of the start lever DD6) has occurred. In the present invention, the timing for outputting information (MB1 operating signal or MB2 operating signal) relating to the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is a predetermined start after the gaming value (medal) is bet It may be until a trigger (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs. Further, the specific effect in the present invention may be an effect controlled by the main control circuit (seven-reel reel action) or an effect controlled by the sub control circuit (following game effect etc after MB winning) It is also good. For example, the specific game is triggered when the second symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination other than "C_MB2A" of "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed. When the state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is activated, the second symbol combination ("C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D" or "C_MB2A" A special effect (MB prize) from the time the game value (medal) is bet to the next unit game of the unit game in which the combination) is stopped and displayed until the predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever DD6) occurs It is decided to perform the subsequent game effect etc., and during or during the execution of the specific effect (following MB effect etc) To, may output the information (MB1 actuation signal or MB2 actuation signal) relating to the operation of a particular gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside. In addition, the second unit of the unit game in which the second symbol combination ("C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or a combination other than "C_MB2A" among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" shown in FIG. 254A) is stopped and displayed. It is also possible to output information (MB1 activation signal or MB2 activation signal) related to the operation of the specific gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) to the outside in the unit game after that, not the game. Note that, as a specific effect controlled by the sub control circuit, in addition to the effect by sound (the output of the above-mentioned fanfare and MB in the sound), the effect by the video (for example, the effect of displaying the image corresponding to the seventh set) Etc. It is possible to adopt any presentation.

  Further, in the twelfth embodiment, a combination relating to “C_MB1A”, “C_MB1D” or “C_MB2A” shown in FIG. 254A is adopted as the first symbol combination, and it is shown in FIG. 254A as the second symbol combination. The example which employ | adopted combinations other than "C_MB1A", "C_MB1D", or "C_MB2A" among "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" was demonstrated. That is, the example which employ | adopted "red 7" and "purple 7" as a specific symbol was demonstrated. The specific symbol in the present invention is not limited to this example, and, for example, in addition to "red 7" and "purple 7", "bra", "bell 1", "bell 2", "lip 1", and , "Rip 2" may be configured to be included in a particular symbol. Where "bra", "bell 1", "bell 2", "lip 1", and "lip 2" also include specific identification information ("7"), such identification is used in the present invention. A symbol including identification information (numbers, characters, figures, symbols, shapes, colors, or a combination of these, etc.) may be adopted as a specific symbol.

<Appendix G2>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to notify an internal winning of a bonus combination when five games have passed since the bonus combination was determined as an internal winning combination (e.g. JP 2001-120707)). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible for the player to align the bonus symbol by performing the stop operation aiming at the bonus symbol in response to the notification, whereby the bonus state can be operated. it can.

  The inventor of the present invention creates a new entertainment feature by devising the aspect of the notification effect relating to the internal winning in the process of intensively examining the notification of the internal winning of the bonus combination as described above. I came to the idea that I could do something.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment characteristics with respect to the aspect of presentation.

  In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has the following features.

(G2-1) Variable display means (reels RL, RC, RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
Combination determining means (main CPU 3031 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 121) for determining a winning combination based on a predetermined start opportunity;
Stop operation means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and stop switches 3007LS, 3007CS, 3007RS) capable of receiving a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for deriving the display result by stopping the variable display on the variable display means based on the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation (processing of step S22 in FIG. 121 and FIG. 138 Main CPU 3031) that executes the processing of step S325 of
After the specific combination (MB3) is determined as the winning combination by the combination determining means, the player can obtain a specific display result (combination related to "C_MB3" shown in FIG. 254A) by the stop control means, for the player. Specific game state operating means (main CPU 3031 for executing the processing of FIG. 137) for operating an advantageous specific game state (MB3 game state),
And an effect executing unit capable of executing an effect using the variable display unit (a main CPU 3031 executing the processing of step S4033 and step S4034 of FIG. 262);
The combination determining means is
A first determination to determine only the predetermined combination as the winning combination among the specific combination and the predetermined combination (purple 7 lip), and a second determination to determine both the specific combination and the predetermined combination as the combination It is possible to do
The stop control means is
When the first determination is performed by the combination determining means, predetermined display results (“C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01” shown in FIG. 254B, It is possible to perform stop control so as to derive “C_XU purple 7 lip 02”, “C_BL purple 7 lip”, or a combination according to “C_TL purple 7 lip”, and the above-mentioned Even when the second determination is made, it is possible to perform stop control so as to derive the predetermined display result,
The effect executing means is
When the first determination is performed by the combination determination unit and the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control unit, the second determination is performed by the combination determination unit, and the predetermined determination is performed by the stop control unit While it is possible to execute the first effect (cardiac reel action) using the variable display means in both the case where the display result is derived and the case where the variable display means is used,
When the first determination is performed by the combination determination unit and the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control unit, the second determination is performed by the combination determination unit, and the predetermined determination is performed by the stop control unit The second determination is made by the combination determining means and the predetermined display result is derived by the stop control means, among the cases where the display results are derived, after the first effect, It is possible to execute a second effect (GOD-matching reel action) corresponding to the determination that the specific combination has been decided as the winning combination.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, among the specific combination (MB3) (a combination serving as an opportunity to operate the specific gaming state (MB3 gaming state) advantageous to the player) and the predetermined combination (purple 7) There are cases where only a predetermined combination (purple 7 lip) is determined as a winning combination, and when both a specific combination (MB3) and a predetermined combination (purple 7 lip) are determined as a combination. And in any case, predetermined display results ("C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01" shown in FIG. 254B, "C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02", "C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01", "C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02", " A combination of C_BL purple 7 lip or “C_TL purple 7 lip” can be derived. Therefore, predetermined display results (“C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_BL purple 7 lip” shown in FIG. Alternatively, when the combination “C_TL purple 7 lip” is derived, it is possible that the specific combination (MB3) has been determined as the winning combination. Here, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, only the predetermined combination (purple seven) among the specific combination (MB3) and the predetermined combination (purple seven) is determined as the winning combination and the predetermined display result (“C_CL Purple 7 Lip _ 01”, “C_CL Purple 7 Lip _ 02”, “C_XU Purple 7 Lip _ 01”, “C_XU Purple 7 Lip _ 02”, “C_BL Purple 7 Lip” shown in FIG. 254 B, or “C_TL Purple 7 Lip”, or “C_TL Purple 7 Both “specific combination (MB3)” and “predetermined combination (purple 7 lip)” are determined as winning combinations and “C_CL purple 7 lip _01” shown in FIG. 254B. , "C_CL Purple 7 Lip _ 02", "C_XU Purple 7 Lip _ 01", "C_XU Purple 7 Lip _ 02", "C_BL Purple 7 Lip", or a combination according to "C_TL Purple 7 Lip" is derived And if, in the case of both, the variable display means (reel RL, RC, RR) are configured such that the first effect using the (heart reel action) can be executed. As a result, when the first effect (heart reel action) is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation that the specific combination (MB3) has been determined as the winning combination. Then, only when the specific combination (MB3) is determined to be the winning combination, the second effect (GOD-matching reel action) can be executed after the first effect (heart reel action). Therefore, the execution of the second effect (GOD-matching reel action) includes the meaning that it is determined that the specific combination (MB3) has been determined as the winning combination. Therefore, when the first effect (heart reel action) is executed, the player is greatly expected that the second effect (GOD uniform reel action) is continuously executed, and the second effect (GOD uniform reel action) is actually performed. If the player is executed, he can touch the fact that the specific gaming state (MB3 gaming state) is activated thereafter, and can enhance the player's mood. On the other hand, when the second effect (GOD uniform reel action) is not executed after the first effect (heart reel action), the player is discouraged, but such ups and downs of the player's feeling It is possible to realize an attractive game full of emotions.

  In the twelfth embodiment, an example in which the purple 7 lip and the MB 1 are won twice, assuming that only the predetermined role (purple 7 lip) is determined as the winning combination among the specific hand (MB 3) and the predetermined hand (purple 7 lip). Explained. In the present invention, among the specified combination (MB3) and the predetermined combination (purple 7 lip), only the predetermined combination (purple 7 lip) is determined as the winning combination, and thus, a bonus other than the specific combination (MB3) A combination may be adopted in which a combination is won with a predetermined combination (purple 7 lip), or a case in which a predetermined combination (purple 7 lip) is separately won (without overlapping with a bonus combination) may be adopted. In addition, as the specific part in the present invention, any part serving as an opportunity to operate the gaming state advantageous to the player can be appropriately adopted, and not MB3 but MB1 or MB2 as the specific part. It is also possible to adopt BB as a specific role. Further, the specific combination is not limited to the bonus combination (BB, MB, etc.), and may be a combination other than the bonus combination (replay combination or small combination). The present invention is also applied to a mode in which, for example, a game state advantageous to a player is activated when a specific lottery (a combination other than a bonus combination) wins a predetermined lottery which is triggered by internal winning. be able to.

  In the twelfth embodiment, when the MB1 is won alone, even if the 7th match is not displayed stopped (even if the 7th match is dropped), the loose eyes are always displayed stopped and the MB2 is hit alone In the case where the 7th match is not displayed in a stopped state (even if the 7th match is dropped), it has been described that the loose eyes are always displayed in a stopped state. However, in the present invention, when MB1 or MB2 is won alone, neither the 7th match nor the loose end is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the stop operation (both the 7th match and the loose end are missed) It may be possible. In addition, conversely, not only when MB1 or MB2 is won alone, but also when MB1 or MB2 is won twice or more with other roles (small roles), MB1 or MB2 may always win.

  Also, in the twelfth embodiment, purple 7 lip (“C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_BL 7 shown in FIG. It has been described that the first effect (heart reel action) necessarily occurs when the purple 7 lip "or" C_TL purple 7 lip "is stopped and displayed along the effective line. However, in the present invention, purple 7 lip (“C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_BL purple” shown in FIG. Even if the 7 reps "or" C_TL purple 7 reps "are stopped and displayed along the active line, the first effect (heart reel action) is not generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may do it. As such a predetermined condition, for example, a condition that "a predetermined symbol stop mode appears" can be adopted other than the one whose success or failure is determined by lottery. As the predetermined symbol stop mode, there can be mentioned a symbol stop mode in which both "Wear" and "Sita mm" (see FIG. 253) are stopped and displayed on one reel.

  As described above, "Uemiri" and "Sitamiri" are designed with symmetrical design in the vertical direction, and they are recognized as one pattern (predetermined pattern) by viewing both patterns integrally. It has become so. In the present invention, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the specific player (MB3) is internally winning by the stop mode of such "Wemili" and "Sitamili". For example, when the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed on at least one reel, the probability that the specific combination (MB3) is internally won is greater than the case where the predetermined pattern is not stopped and displayed on any of the reels. It may be configured to be high. Further, the probability that the specific winning combination (MB3) is internally won may increase as the number of reels on which the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed increases. That is, the probability that the specific combination (MB3) is internally won is higher when the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the two reels than when the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on one reel. It is configured that the probability that the specific combination (MB3) is internally won is higher when the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the three reels than when the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the two reels. May be

  In addition, when the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed on the plurality of reels, the vertical position of the predetermined pattern stopped and displayed on each reel (the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed across the upper area and the middle area) In the case where the aspect and the aspect that the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed across the middle area and the lower area is the same), the specific combination (MB3) is more internal than in the case where the vertical position is different. You may comprise so that the probability of winning may become high. For example, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed across the middle and lower regions on two reels (for example, left reel RL and middle reel RC), and the upper and middle regions on the other one reel (for example, right reel RR) The specific winning combination (MB3) wins internally when the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed across the middle and lower regions on all reels, as compared to when the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed across the region. May be configured to be high. As described above, the positions of the predetermined symbols in the vertical direction in all the reels may coincide with each other only when the specific combination (MB3) is internally won. In the case of adopting such a configuration, it is determined that the specific winning combination (MB3) is internally won if a symbol stop mode appears in which the vertical position of the predetermined pattern matches in all the reels. It will be done. Here, among the purple 7 lips (“F_purple 7 lip A”, “F_purple 7 lip B”, “F_purple 7 lip C”, and “F_purple 7 lip D”), “F_purple 7 lip A” For “F_purple 7 lip B” and “F_purple 7 lip C”, the cases of both winning MB1 and winning MB3 are set, With regard to "purple 7 lip D", only the case of overlapping winning with MB3 is set, and overlapping with MB1 is not won (see FIGS. 255 and 256). In view of this point, even if “F_purple 7 lip D” is internally won, even if it is configured such that a symbol stop mode in which the vertical position of the predetermined pattern coincides with all the reels can appear. Good.

  Also, in the twelfth embodiment, purple 7 lip (“C_CL purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_CL purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 01”, “C_XU purple 7 lip _ 02”, “C_BL 7 shown in FIG. "Purple 7" pattern is stopped and displayed on any line (center line, cross-up line, bottom line, or top line) according to the type of "purple 7 lip" or "C_TL purple 7 lip") It is explained that it is different. In the present invention, a line (or a mere position) on which the "purple 7" symbol is stopped and displayed may indicate the expectation of the internal winning combination of the special player (MB3). For example, when the "purple 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line by a predetermined number (for example, two), the "purple 7" symbol is divided by a predetermined number (for example, 2) on a line different from the predetermined line 1) The specific combination (MB3) may be configured to have a higher probability of being internally won than when it is stopped and displayed.

<Supplementary Note (Others)>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  However, the conventional pachislo can not effectively improve the interest because it does not have the configuration or function as a gaming machine as in the present invention. The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

[Scalability of gaming machine according to the other embodiment]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting the on-hand medal into the medal insertion slot DD5, or the credited medal is the maximum BET button DD8 or 1-BET). When the game is started by the operation to be inserted by operating the button and there is a payout of the medal when the game is over, the hopper mechanism HP is driven to pay the medal from the medal payout outlet DD14, or Although the crediting form has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the game medium necessary for the game is inserted by the player, the game is performed based thereon, and the present invention is applied to all the modes in which a privilege is given (for example, medals are paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the action of a physical player, and the game medium is paid out, but the main control circuit 3060 (main control board MS) itself is a game medium owned by the player. May be electromagnetically managed to enable games without medals. That is, the gaming value in the present invention is not limited to physically existing gaming media, and any tangible or intangible material that can be used to play a game can be appropriately adopted. Such an intangible object may be game medium data (for example, medal data) equivalent to an entity (physically existing game medium) such as a medal. Further, the aspect of giving the gaming value to the player is not limited to the aspect in which the physically existing gaming medium actually moves under the occupation of the player, and even if it is a mere data movement without the movement of the tangible thing Alternatively, the player may be given an entity (such as a card) in which game media data is stored. In addition, the game medium management device which is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 3060 (main control board MS) and manages game media may be used to electromagnetically manage game media held by the player. .

  In this case, the gaming medium management device is a device provided in the gaming machine, having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and bi-directional communication with an external gaming medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is possible to be connected, and the lending operation of gaming media (that is, the operation of providing the necessary gaming media when the player performs the operation of inserting the gaming media) or the prize for winning the role related to the payout of gaming media ( The game media payout operation when the role is established (that is, the operation of acquiring the necessary game media when the player is paid out the game media), or the game media to be used for the game It is sufficient that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. In addition, the gaming media management device displays the number of gaming media held on the front of the gaming machine 1 based not only on the management of the actual number of gaming media but also on the management result of the number of gaming media, for example. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the gaming media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of gaming media that the player can use for gaming by an electromagnetic method.

  Also, in this case, the gaming media management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of gaming media recorded to the external gaming media handling device, and the player In addition to the case of direct operation, the number of recorded game media can not be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between an external game medium handling device It is desirable that the player can not transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media without using the external connection terminal board.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means operable by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board, and the gaming medium handling device is a slot for inserting valuable values such as bills, a recording medium (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for receiving electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, etc., other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, game medium handling device side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all not shown).

  As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means described above. The game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. Thereafter, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and the game media management device transmits the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating any return operation means when ending the game. The medium handling device ejects a recording medium recording the number of game media. The gaming media management device clears the number of gaming media stored by itself when transmitting the number of gaming media. The player brings the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the game platform to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another platform.

  In the above example, all gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling apparatus, but the gaming machine or gaming media handling apparatus transmits only the number of gaming media desired by the player and the gaming media possessed by the player It may be divided and processed. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the gaming medium handling device may insert a member recording medium of the game arcade, and store the member recording medium in the member recording medium so as to be able to play again later.

  Further, in the gaming machine or game medium handling apparatus, it is possible to execute the lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value to the game medium handling apparatus or the game medium management apparatus by operating the predetermined operation means (not shown). It is also good. At that time, the player may be stored by setting information which can be known only to the player such as a one-time password, or by an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or the gaming medium handling apparatus.

  In addition, as described above, this gaming media management device may be capable of playing a game only without medals, or gaming media may be inserted (hanged) by the action of a physical player. It may be possible to play the game in a form in which money is paid out, and a form in which the game can be made without medals, or in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the above-described selector and hopper mechanism HP, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 3060 (main control board MS), It is also possible to adopt a method that enables control to perform control to record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for gaming based on the transmission of the control result by an electromagnetic method. it can.

  In the above, the case of applying the gaming media management device to the gaming machine 1 is described, but the gaming media management device is similarly provided in the slot machine and the enclosed type gaming machine using the gaming balls described above, It is also possible for the player's game media to be managed.

  As described above, by providing the above-described gaming medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors and the hopper mechanism HP inside the gaming machine and the like as compared to the case where the gaming medium is physically provided for gaming. As well as being able to reduce costs and manufacturing costs, it is also possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the game media, and the gaming environment has been improved, noise has been reduced, and the number of machines has been reduced. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the insertion slot and the payout opening of the game media and the game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  Also, the setting value may be one step only. At this time, the setting change process may be performed or may be omitted. In the case of leaving the setting change process, only the same setting can be retouched, so the process is substantially to clear the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode is provided for lottery (such as first hit and / or addition) in an advantageous state (such as ART state), and the number of times that a predetermined combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted By switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause unevenness in the balls.

  In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability and the specified value is a wave of one ball. If the value is defined so as to be switched by the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the setting value is one step, it can be regarded as comparable with a plurality of gaming machines provided. For example, assuming that the working time of one day is 11 hours, 11h = 39600 sec. Therefore, assuming that the minimum time taken for one game is 4.1 seconds in accordance with the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9659 times. In addition, since it is not realistic not to have a break (meal or toilet) at all, I think that the number of games per day is about 8,000 times. Since the predetermined probability is set to 1/32 and the specified value is set to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192 is obtained, so that it is possible to switch the wave of the ball out in about one day.

  Furthermore, it is possible to stabilize the earnings in a two-day cycle by alternately switching between the mode advantageous to the player and the mode disadvantageous to the player every time the number of times that the predetermined combination has been won reaches a prescribed value. It can contribute to the sales of the store. In addition, although the case where setting value was made into 1 step was demonstrated, it is not restricted to 1 step and diversion is possible. More specifically, if employed without changing the number of setting values, it is possible to make the wave of the outgoing ball more complicated without increasing the number of setting values. In addition, if the number of set values is reduced, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and becoming monotonous.

  In addition, if the number of setting values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If it is possible to set the six levels of setting values to one level of setting values, data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing to the desired payout rate at each stage is also 1/6. Furthermore, although only game machines that are suitable for the test are permitted to be used for sales, it is possible to shorten the time required for the test.

  The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. In the embodiment described above, the present invention has been described as applied to a pachislot machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines (for example, pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.).

  As described above, the first to eighth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but they are merely specific examples and do not limit the present invention in particular, and the specific configurations of the respective means, etc. may be appropriately changed in design. It is possible. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention is not.

  Also, in the above detailed description, characteristic parts are mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. Further, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used to properly describe the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, it would be easy for a person skilled in the art to reconsider other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described herein. Therefore, the description of the claims should be considered to include equivalent configurations without departing from the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and the essence of the present application by the Patent Office and general public organizations, and engineers who belong to this technical field who is not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. To make it possible to make a prompt decision. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be assessed by the recitation of the claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the present invention be interpreted with sufficient consideration to the documents and the like already disclosed.

  The above detailed description includes a computer-implemented process. The above description and expressions have been set forth for the purpose of being most efficiently understood by those skilled in the art. As used herein, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process that is not self-consistent. In each process, transmission and reception of electric or magnetic signals, recording, and the like are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are merely used for the convenience of description. There is a need. Moreover, although the process in each process may be described by the expression common to human action, the process demonstrated in this specification is basically performed by various apparatuses. Also, other configurations required to perform each process are obvious from the above description.

1 game machine A display unit B irradiation unit C screen device D fixed screen mechanism G cabinet E1 front screen mechanism F1 reel screen mechanism UD upper door mechanism DD lower door mechanism

Claims (1)

A plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A light emission control unit that causes the light emitting unit to emit light;
A partition member for partitioning an area through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass;
The partition member includes a grid portion formed in a grid shape, and a protrusion which protrudes from the grid portion toward the traveling direction side of light emitted from the light emitting means and extends in a specific direction.
The plurality of light emitting means are a plurality of first light emitting means disposed on the predetermined direction side of the protrusion, and a plurality of second light emitting means disposed on the side opposite to the predetermined direction of the protrusion. Equipped with
The light emission control means can make the light emission mode of the first light emission means different from the light emission mode of the second light emission means.
A game machine characterized by

Images